MAKE THE GRADE Kafedra

V.G.NIKONOVA, L.S.
KUZ’MINS’KA
MAKE THE GRADE
Self-study Assignments for Developing the Skills

in Oral and Written Language Use
Kyiv - 2011
МІНІСТЕРСТВО ОСВІТИ І НАУКИ УКРАЇНИ

КИЇВСЬКИЙ НАЦІОНАЛЬНИЙ ЛІНГВІСТИЧНИЙ УНІВЕРСИТЕТ
В.Г.НІКОНОВА, Л.С.КУЗЬМІНСЬКА
ДОСЯГНИ УСПІХУ
Завдання для самостійної роботи

з розвитку навичок усного та писемного мовлення
2
Київ - 2011
Ніконова В.Г. , Кузьмінська Л.С.
Make the Grade: (self-study assignments

for developing the skills in oral and written language use)
Досягни успіху (завдання для самостійної роботи

з розвитку навичок усного та писемного мовлення)
Рецензенти: Буніятова І.Р. – доктор філол. наук, професор

Тягловська В.М. – канд. філол. наук, доцент
Cліпченко Л.Д. – канд. філол. наук, доцент
3
Друкується за рішенням вченої ради Київського
національного лінгвістичного університету (протокол № 5 від
29 листопада 2010 року).
Contents
ПЕРЕДМОВА
UNIT 1. LANGUAGE LEARNING AND MY FUTURE PROFESSION

1.1. READING…………………………………………………………………………………………7
1.2. USE OF ENGLISH………………………………...………………………………………..……12
1.3. MEDIATION…………………………………………………..………………..……….……….16
1.4. WRITING………………………………………………………………...………………………18
1.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING………………………………………..……………….………..19
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST…………….………………………………………………..………………20
UNIT 2. TELEVISION AND CINEMA

2.1. READING……………..………………….……………..……………….……………..………..25
2.2. USE OF ENGLISH…………………………………………..……………………………..…….30
2.3. MEDIATION……………………………………………………...…………………….………..34
2.4. WRITING……………………………………………………………………………….………..35
2.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING………………………………………...………………..………36
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST…………………………………………………..……………………….....37
UNIT 3. ADVERTISING
3.1. READING……………………………………………………………………………….……….44
3.2. USE OF ENGLISH……………………………………….………………………………….…..48
3.3. MEDIATION…………………………….……………………….………..………………..……52
3.4. WRITING………………………………………………………………...………………………54
3.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING…………………………………………….…………..………..54
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST………………………….…………………………………………………..56
UNIT 4. ART
4.1. READING………………………...………………………………………………………..……..61
4.2. USE OF ENGLISH…………………………………..…………………………………………...67
4.3. MEDIATION………………………………………………………………………..……………70
4.4. WRITING……………………………………………………………………………….………..72
4.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING………………………………………………………………….72
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST…………………………………………………………..………………….73
UNIT 5. PEOPLE AND PERSONALITIES

5.1. READING………………………………………………………………………………..………77
5.2. USE OF ENGLISH………………………………………………………...………………..……83
5.3. MEDIATION………………………..………………………………………………..…………..87
5.4. WRITING………………………………………………………………………..……………….89
5.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING……………………………………………………………….…89
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST…………………………………………………………….………………..90
4
UNIT 6. PEOPLE AND NATURE
6.1. READING……………………………………………………………………….……………….95
6.2. USE OF ENGLISH…………………………………………………………………...………….100
6.3. MEDIATION…………………………………………………………………………….………103
6.4. WRITING……………………………………………………………………………...…….…..105
6.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING…………………………………..………………….………….105
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST………………………….………………………………………………….107
UNIT 7. GRAMMAR REVISION

7.1. MORPHOLOGY
7.1.1. THE NOUN…………………………………………………………………….…………………..112
7.1.2. THE PRONOUN……………………………………………………………………….………...120
7.1.3. THE ADJECTIVE AND THE ADVERB…………………………………………..……………133
7.1.4. THE PREPOSITIONS………………………………………………………………...………….143
7.1.5. MODAL VERBS……………………………….....………………………………………….….146
7.2. INDICATIVE MOOD: TENSE AND VOICE FORMS OF THE VERB

7.2.1. THE INDEFINITE FORM OF THE VERB IN THE ACTIVE VOICE…………………...…….165
7.2.2. THE CONTINUOUS FORM OF THE VERB IN THE ACTIVE VOICE…………...………….172
7.2.3. THE PERFECT FORM OF THE VERB IN THE ACTIVE VOICE…………………………..181
7.2.4. THE PERFECT CONTINUOUS FORM OF THE VERB IN THE ACTIVE VOICE……… 196
7.2.5. TENSES OF THE VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE……………………………….…………207
7.2.6. THE SEQUENCE OF TENSES. REPORTED (INDIRECT) SPEECH……………………...…213
7.2.7. GENERAL REVIEW OF THE TENSE AND VOICE FORMS OF THE VERB………….… 223
7.3. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD: SYNTHETIC AND ANALYTICAL FORMS

7.3.1. THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD IN CONDITIONAL
SUBORDINATE CLAUSES……………………………………….……………………………229
7.3.2. THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD IN OTHER TYPES OF.
SUBORDINATE CLAUSES………………………………………………...…………………..239
7.3.2.1. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF CONCESSION…………………………………………………239
7.3.2.2. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF COMPARISON……………………………………..………….241
7.3.2.3. SUBJECT SUBORDINATE CLAUSES……………………………….………………………243
7.3.2.4. OBJECT SUBORDINATE CLAUSES……………………………………………..………….244
7.3.2.5. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF PURPOSE……………………………………...……………….250
7.3.3. THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD IN SIMPLE SENTENCES……………….………252
7.3.4. REVIEW EXERCISES ON MOOD FORMS OF THE VERB………………...…………………254
7.4. THE NON-FINITE FORMS OF THE VERB (THE VERBALS)

7.4.1. THE INFINITIVE………………………………………………..………………………………..257
7.4.2. THE GERUND……………………………………………………………………………………266
7.4.3. THE PARTICIPLE………………………………………………………………………………..272
7.4.4. REVISION EXERCISES ON THE VERBALS…………………………………………………..282
7.5. SYNTAX
7.5.1. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE……………………………………………………………….………287
7.5.2. THE COMPOUND AND THE COMPLEX SENTENCE………………………………………..293
ANSWER KEY………………………………………..…………………………………………….297
TAPESCRIPS……………………………………………………………………………………………308
ANSWER SHEETS..………………...…………………………………………………………………..329
UNIT 1. LANGUAGE LEARNING AND FUTURE PROFESSION………………...……...…………329

UNIT 2. TELEVISION AND CINEMA……………………………………………….………………..330
5
UNIT 3. ADVERTISING………………………………………………………………………………..332
UNIT 4. ART…………………………………………………………………………….……………....334
UNIT 5. PEOPLE AND PERSONALITIES…………………………………………….…………...….336
UNIT 6. PEOPLE AND NATURE………….…………...……………………………………………...338
REFERENCE MATERIALS…………………………………………………………..
………………..341
ПЕРЕДМОВА
Навчальний посібник містить завдання для самостійної роботи студентів з

розвитку навичок усного та писемного мовлення, які спрямовані на
удосконалення знань лексичного матеріалу з шести тем: Language Learning and
My Future Profession, Television and Cinema, Advertising, Art, People and
Personality, People and Nature. Тематика посібника відповідає програмним
вимогам практичного курсу з першої іноземної мови на ІІІ курсі філологічних
факультетів.
Кожний із шести тематичних розділів пропонує завдання для
самостійного опрацювання, що охоплюють всі види мовленнєвої діяльності
(читання, аудіювання, говоріння, письмо), і має такі підрозділи:
• підрозділ 1 – Reading – складається з текстів для читання; контроль
розуміння прочитаного здійснюється шляхом відповідей на запитання, вставок
певних речень у відповідний абзац або розташування абзаців у певній
послідовності;
• підрозділ 2 – Use of English – спрямований на засвоєння лексичного
матеріалу; перевірка знань вокабуляру з теми та контроль вміння користуватися
певними граматичними моделями відбувається шляхом виконання системи
завдань творчого характеру;
• підрозділ 3 – Mediation – включає текст для перекладу або реферування;
• підрозділ 4 – Writing – пропонує теми для творчої роботи;
• підрозділ 5 – Listening and Speaking – передбачає слухання уривку тексту
та контроль його розуміння за допомогою вставок, вибору правильної відповіді
(multiple choice); підрозділ також містить перелік тем для контролю навичок
мовлення в монологічній та діалогічній формі.
Автентичні тексти та форми контролю дібрано із найсучасніших
оригінальних англомовних курсів з практики англійської мови (Proficiency
Masterclass, Gold, Expert, Practice Tests, Focus on Grammar, Upstream, Use of
English та інші). Кожний підрозділ завершується тестом для самоконтролю.
Розділ 7 – Grammar Revision – передбачає системне повторення
студентами граматичного матеріалу; виконання вправ з практичної граматики
англійської мови дозволить студентам систематизувати свої знання з морфології
та синтаксису англійської мови.
У заключній частині додаються відповіді на завдання підрозділів (Answer
Sheets), друковані тексти з аудіювання (Tapescripts) та листки-відповіді на тести
для самоконтролю (Answer Sheets), що дає можливість студентам, які працюють
самостійно, вдатися до самоконтролю.
6
Якісне виконання завдань, що пропонуються у посібнику, забезпечить
ефективну підготовку студентів до контрольних робіт у межах поточного та
підсумкового семестрового контролю. Навчальний посібник призначений для
студентів ІІІ курсу філологічних факультетів педагогічних і мовних вищих
навчальних закладів ІІІ та ІV рівня акредитації.
UNIT 1 LANGUAGE LEARNING AND MY FUTURE
PROFESSION
1.1. READING
Ex. 1. You are going to read an article about five young people who have
each made a lot of money by setting up a business. For questions 1-15
choose from the people (A-E). The people may be chosen more than once.
When more than one answer is required, they may be given in any order.
There is an example at the beginning (0).
Which young person:
is carrying on a family tradition? 0-C
found one part of the work hard at the beginning? 1-
says that he/she prefers to be his/her own boss? 2-
is careful with money? 3- 4-
got financial help from an organization? 5-
says he/she does the work mostly for the money? 6- 7-
feels that further education would be a waste of time? 8-
ignored advice that he/she was given? 9-
says he/she finds the work itself the main motivation? 10 -
has turned an initial disappointment to his/her advantage? 11 - 12

-
says he/she enjoys the creative side of the business most? 13 -
7
is willing to give up aspects of his/her social life for the business? 14 -
has received a prize in recognition of what he/she has achieved? 15 -
HOW TO GET RICH YOUNG
We asked five young people who have already made their fortunes in
business to tell us the secret of their success.
A Justin Etzin (24)
It all began when Justin, then aged 16, tried to get into a nightclub and was
turned away for being too young. “After that, I kept on at them until they
let me organize an under-20s party,” he recalls. “They were expecting
about 50 teenagers to turn up, but I’d found them 2000!’ Justin continued
organizing parties during his school holidays and had made enough money
by the age of 18 to buy himself a speedboat. Today, at 24, he has other
business interests and a fortune of $2 million. But Justin’s not just in it for
the financial rewards. “What gets me excited is coming up with new
ideas,” he insists, “and at the end of the day, I’d rather be healthy than
wealthy”.
B Lee Allen (20)
Lee set up a sports - coaching business when he was just 18. “Everyone
warned me that it was a tough world and I wasn’t experienced enough to
take the disappointments that lay ahead. But I felt confident in what I was
doing, so I took no notice from them. My idea was to coach children with
special needs and because nobody else was doing that, I got a grant and an
office from Mencap, a charity which helps the mentally disabled. At first,
the administrative side was a real struggle, but I managed it somehow. Last
year, the company I set up won an award for being the most innovative
new business in the country. That means more to me than any money I’ve
made out of it.”
C Charlotte Crossley (18)
Charlotte first started up in business when she was 12 years old, making
and selling things called “friendship bracelets.” She paid friends to make
8
them, using her materials and designs. Since then, she’s expanded into
make-up and hair accessories and was able to buy herself a brand new car
last year. “My father and grandfather were both successful businessmen, so
making money seemed natural to me. I am studying for A levels, but I have
decided not to go to university because I don’t feel it has anything more to
offer me. Work excites me more. I can work all day every day without a
break and never get bored. I lead a hectic life – socializing, schoolwork
and working. But why not? I feel like I can have it all.
D Thomas Jones (16)
Tom started playing with computer when he was five. By the time he was
12, he’d set up his own web page on the Internet and was selling
advertising space. He now runs a profitable business from his bedroom at
home, offering a complete Internet and technical support service. “I have
always been fascinated by computers. I’m proud of what I’ve achieved.
But what really keeps me going is the thought of all the cash I’m making. I
think it’s worth giving up a few nights out in case there aren’t the same
opportunities later. Our projected turnover for next year is $160.000, so the
business is a huge investment”. Apart from buying himself a few treats,
Tom mainly invests his money. “But I still intend to go to university, no
matter how much I make, because in any business you need to keep up
with new developments.”
E Louise Bagshawe (25)
Things haven’t always gone well for Louise. After she’d written her first
book at the age of 23, a publisher took one look at it and advised her to
tear it up and start again. “I was so upset by their reaction,” said Louise,
that I bought a pile of very successful novels and read them from cover to
cover to remind myself of my business aim. This was to write “popular
books” that would earn me a fortune by working for myself, rather than
earning peanuts working foe someone else.” The rewritten novel became
the first of four “blockbusters” which have made Louise a millionaire.
However, she does not splash her money around. “I’m saving up for a
rainy day. Who knows what will happen in the future.”
9
Ex. 2. Read the following magazine article about e-mail and answer
questions
1- 5. Indicate the letter A, B, C or D against the number of each question.
Give only one answer to each question.
WHEN E-MAIL BECOMES E-NOUGH
The first person I came across who’d got the measure of e-mail was an
American friend who was high up in a big corporation. Some years ago,
when this method of communication first seeped into business life from
academia, his company in New York and its satellites across the globe
were among the first to get it. In the world’s great seats of learning, e-mail
had for some years allowed researchers to share vital new jokes. And if
there was cutting-edge wit to be had, there was no way my friend’s
corporation would be without it.
One evening in New York, he was late for a drink we’d arranged. “Sorry,”
he said, “I’ve been away and had to deal with 998 e-mails in my queue,”
Wow,” I said, I’m really surprised you made it before midnight.” ‘It
doesn’t really take that long,” he explained, “if you simply delete them
all.”
True to form, he had developed a strategy before most of us had even

heard of e-mail. If any information he was sent was sufficiently vital, his
lack of response would ensure the sender rang him up. If the sender wasn’t
important enough to have his private number, the communication couldn’t
be sufficiently important. My friend is now even more senior in the same
company, so the strategy must work, although these days, I don’t tend to
send him many mails.
Almost every week now, there seems to be another report suggesting that
we are all being driven crazy by the torment of e-mail. But if this is the
case, it’s only because we haven’t developed the same discrimination in
dealing with e-mail as we do with post. Have you ever mistaken an
important letter for a piece of unsolicited advertising and throw it out? Of
course you haven’t. This is because of the obliging stupidity of 99 per cent
of advertisers, who just can’t help making their mail shots look like the
junk mail that they are. Junk e-mail looks equally unnecessary to read.
Why anyone would feel the slightest compulsion to open the sort of thing
entitled SPECIALOFFER@junk.com I cannot begin to understand. Even
10
viruses, those sneaky messages that contain a bug which can corrupt your
whole computer system, come helpfully labelled with packaging that
shrieks’ danger, do not open.
Handling e-mail is an art. Firstly, you junk anything with an exclamation

mark or string of capital letters, or from any address you don’t recognize
or feel confident about. Secondly, while I can’t quite support my American
friend’s radical policy, e-mails don’t all have to be answered. Because e-
mailing is so easy, there’s a tendency for correspondence to carry on for
ever, but it is permissible to end a strand of discussion by simply not
discussing it any longer – or to accept a point of information by a
colleague without acknowledging it.
Thirdly, a reply e-mail doesn’t have to be the same length as the original.
We all have e-mail buddies who send long, chatty e-mails, which are nice
to receive, but who then expect an equally long reply. Tough. The charm of
e-mail can lie in the simple, suspended sentence, with total disregard to the
formalities of the letter sent by post. You are perfectly within the bounds of
politeness in responding to a marathon e-mail with a terse one-liner, like:
“How distressing. I’m sure it will clear up.”
1. According to the writer, why did the company he mentions decide to

adopt the e-mail system?
A So that employees contact academics more easily

B To avoid missing out on any amusing novelty
C Because it had been tried and tested in universities
D To cope with a vast amount of correspondence they received
2. The ‘strategy’ referred to in line 12 is a way of
A Ensuring that important matters are dealt with

B Prioritizing which messages to respond to
C Limiting e-mail correspondence to urgent matters
D Encouraging a more efficient use of e-mail
3. According to the write, what is causing the ‘torment of e-mail’ (line 19)
described in the reports?
11
A The persistence of advertisers
B Problems caused by computer viruses
C The attitude of those receiving e-mails
D Lessons learnt from dealing with junk mail
4. In the sixth paragraph, which of the following pieces of advice is given?
A Forget about e-mails which do not intend to acknowledge.

B Use e-mail as a way of avoiding unnecessary conversations.
C Be prepared to break off overlong e-mail communications.
D Read your e-mails if you are not going to answer them.
5. According to the writer, what advantage does e-mail correspondence

have over the traditional letter.
A It is more convenient to send.

B It causes fewer misunderstandings.
C It can be written in a less conversational style.
D It does not have the same time-consuming conventions.
1.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1. Match the following words with appropriate definitions.
1. lingua franca a. hard boring work

2. interpreter’s calling b. a social mistake; an embarrassing remark
3. expertise c. a difference; failure to agree
4. simultaneous translation d. good judgment; the quality of being discreet
5. talk shop e. expert knowledge or skills in a specific field
6. bilingual f. of a statement seeming to be reasonable
7. drudgery g. a common language used in different
countries
8. bias h. nervous feelings felt by people in public
9. stage freight i. to discuss work when you are not at work
10. discrepancy j. the subjects included in the course of study
11. manual dexterity k. occupation, profession
12. plausible l. a difficult task that tests sb’s ability
13. gaffe m. an opinion that strongly favours one side
12
14. challenge. n. happening at the same time as sth.
15. curriculum o. the ability to do sth. skillfully and cleverly
16. discretion p. having or using two languages
Ex. 2. Fill in the blanks (1 – 20) with the correct particle or preposition
where necessary.
1. Worst (1) … all, the real open-ended question was beginning to nudge
(2) … my mind. 2. Previously the reason (3) … learning English had not
been well defined. 3. The expansion of English resulted (4) … creating a
new generation of learners who needed to keep (5) … … developments in
their field. 4. Generations of languages have left daughter languages,
which (6) … turn have split (7) … and developed (8) … new tongues. 5.
The tantalizing goal of linguists is to delve (9) … … the distant past to
find the original source of language itself. 6. Those cultural inferences are
backed (10) … archaeological evidence. 7. All (11) … all, he fulfilled his
social commitments (12) … his friends, got everything completely (13) …
… the way. 8. There is nothing that could interfere (14) … the dedication.
9. A good learner practices a lot (15) … his own. 10.The rest will enable
him really to get (16) … … work. 11. A top interpreter doesn’t only feel
(17) … home (18) … a foreign language but he is confident (19) …
dealing (20) … urgent problems.
Ex. 3. For questions 1-8, read the following text and then choose, from the
list
(A – J), the best phrase given below. Each correct phrase may be used
once. Some of the suggested answers do not fit at all.
ONE WORLD, ONE LANGUAGE
Many people feel that the only chance of breaking the foreign language
barrier is (1)… . The history of ideas already provides precedents with
Latin used as a medium of education in Western Europe throughout the
Middle Ages and French used as the language of international diplomacy
from the 17th to the 20th centuries.
13
Today, English is the main contender for the position of world lingua
franca. There are few competitors. Several other languages have an
important local role as a lingua franca but no comparable level of
international use, such as Russian in Eastern Europe, or Spanish in South
and Central America. More people in the world speak Chinese than any
other language, but in the West Chinese is too unfamiliar (2) ………. .
French is still widely used, but far less than it was a century ago.
Many factors contribute (3) ……….. – chiefly political and military might,
economic power, and religious influence. These same factors mean that the
development of a world language is not viewed with enthusiasm by those
who would have (4) ………. . Such a language, it can be argued, would
give its originating culture an unprecedented influence in world affairs and
scientific research. For example, scientists who used it as a mother tongue
would be in a privileged position. Further more, it is thought, a world
language would inevitably erode the status of minority languages and pose
a threat (5) ………… . Many people thus view the current progress of
English towards world-language status with concern and often with
antagonism.
Ironically, the main danger (6) ………. comes from within. As the
language becomes used in all corners of the world so it begins (7)
…………, which are used by local people as symbols of their identity. In
the course of time these new varieties might become mutually
unintelligible. How far this diversification will affect English cannot be
predicted. It is not always easy (8) ………… that results from increased
modern contacts through travel and communication. A hundred years ago,
predictions were being made that British and American English would be
now mutually unintelligible. Linguistic predictions have a habit of being
wrong.
A to the growth of a world language

B to assimilate ideas easily
C to learn it
D to use a natural language as a world lingua franca
E to the identity of nation
F to weigh the trend towards unity
G to be a serious contender
H to develop new spoken varieties
14
I to the gradual spread of a language
Ex. 4. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verbs in
parentheses.
Next week, when I (finish) (1)------- (take) (2) --------- my final

examinations, I (finish, also) (3)……… one of the best experiences I
(have, ever) (4)……… in my lifetime. In the last four months, I (learn) (5)
……. more about foreign cultures than I (anticipate) (6) …….. before
(come) (7)…….. to the United States. (Live) (8) …….. in a foreign
country and (go) (9) ……. to school with people from various parts of the
world (give) (10)……. me the opportunity (encounter) (11)……. and
(interact) (12)……. with people from different cultures. I (like) (13) …….
to share some of my experiences and thoughts with you.
When I first (arrive) (14) …….. I (know) (15) ……. no one and I (need)
(16)…… all of my fingers (communicate) (17)…….. what I was trying to
say in English. All of the international students were in the same situation.
When we (can, find. not) (18)……… the right word, we (use) (19)…….
strange movements and gestures (communicate) (20)…….. our meaning.
(Know) (21)……. some common phrases, such as ‘How are you?’, ‘Fine,
thank you, and you?’ and ‘What country are you from?, (be) (22)…….
enough in the beginning for us (make) (23)…….. friends with each other.
The TV room in the dormitory (become) (24)…… our common meeting
place every evening after dinner. (Hope) (25) ……. (improve) (26)……..
our English, many of us tried to watch television and (understand) (27)
……… what the people (appear) (28)…….. on the screen (say) (29)……,
but for the most part their words were just a strange mumble to us. After a
while, (bear) (30)…… and a little sad, we slowly began to disappear to our
separate rooms. I thought that all of us (experience) (31)……. some
homesickness. However, despite my loneliness, I had a good feeling within
myself because I (do) (32)……. what I wanted to do for many years.
15
1.3. MEDIATON
Ex. 1. Render the following text into English.
АНГЛІЙСЬКІ КАНІКУЛИ НА МАЛЬТІ
Мальта – невеликий острів у Середземному морі, знаходиться

поряд з італійським островом Сицилія. Мальта славиться своїм
м‘яким кліматом, синім морем , ласкавим сонцем. Щорічно сюди
приїжджає біля 1 млн. 200 тис. туристів та студентів. Не диво, що цю
країну вибирають європейці: французи, німці, іспанці, англійці.
Насамперед на Мальту приїжджають вивчати англійську мову.
Всі мальтійці володіють англійською мовою, яка стала для них
рідною за 160 років британської присутності. Це - друга офіційна
мова на острові. Мовні школи Мальти успішно конкурують з
британськими завдяки широкій мережі канікулярних таборів,
навчанню, яке тут дешевше; літом радує ціна чартерного перельоту.
Багато мальтійських шкіл входить в міжнародну систему, з
мовними центрами у всьому світі: в Англії, США та інших
англомовних країнах. Серед них школа EF, Inlingua, Berlitz Academy,
International House. Багато навчальних закладів мають філіали в
Великій Британії і на Мальті, що гарантує високу якість викладання –
це European Centre, Institute of English Language Studies. Виключно
мальтійськими школами є, наприклад, школа-піонер мальтійського
навчального ринку NSTS, European School of English, English
Language Academy, Master Academy та інші.
В методиці викладання на Мальті домінує британська традиція –
комунікативний метод. Акцент здійснюється на розмовну практику,
використання вивчених слів та граматику. На уроках багато
спілкування, діалогів, ситуацій для обговорення, ролевих ігор. Девіз
мальтійських шкіл – “Щоб навчання було в радість” – особливо
важливий для українських студентів. Адже у багатьох з них граматика
та словниковий запас на високому рівні, а розмовна мова –
слабкувата. Мовне середовище допомагає подолати мовний бар‘єр.
Ще одна перевага Мальти – міжнародне студентське оточення.
16
Набуваючи друзів з різних країн, студенти просто вимушені
спілкуватися англійською – єдиним можливим засобом комунікації.
Новинкою мальтійського освітянського ринку є програма
вивчення мови з подальшим стажуванням на підприємствах або в
готелях. Програма розрахована на 4-6 тижнів. Для участі у таких
програмах необхідні гарні знання англійської мови. Чудове
співвідношення “ціна-якість” в Мальтійських школах доповнюється
привабливими культурними програмами, включаючи поїздки до
Валетти, Мeдини, оглядові екскурсії по Мальті. Тепла сонячна погода
з травня до вересня дозволяє займатися активним відпочинком:
дайвінгом, віндсерфінгом...
ВИПРОБУВАННЯ ПО-ЗАМОРСЬКОМУ
Зацікавленість наших громадян в отриманні різних мовних

сертифікатів міцніє з року в рік. Дехто потребує свідоцтва про
успішно складені іспити для еміграції або навчання в закордонних
вузах, іншим - для працевлаштування в філіалах іноземних компаній
або для підвищення самооцінки. Слід зазначити , що система
складання міжнародних іспитів настільки сильно відрізняється від
наших національних, що потребує спеціальної підготовки.
Міжнародні іспити з основних європейських мов чітко пов‘язані
з так званими рівнями мовної компетенції. Ось чому підготовка до
іспиту, як правило, починається з визначення того, як володіють
іноземною мовою ті, хто записалися на курси. Основною
класифікацією мовної компетенції є “Шкала Ради Європи” – CEF
(Common European Framework) – яка встановлює єдині стандарти, що
застосовуються в усіх європейських країнах в процесі викладання
іноземних мов і в процесі оцінки знань студентів.
Відповідно до CEF знання мови визначаються з шести рівнів
(від нижчого A1 до найвищого С2) за допомогою формули can do –
набору компетенцій і навичок, які може продемонструвати людина
впродовж спеціального тестування. Більш детально Шкала Ради
Європи виглядає так:
A1 Breakthrough (рівень виживання),
A2 Waystage (рівень елементарного володіння),
17
B1 Threshold (пороговий рівень),
B2 Vantage або Independent User (рівень незалежного
користувача),
C1 Effective Operational Proficiency або Competent User (рівень
професійного володіння,
C2 Mastery або Good User (рівень досконального володіння).
Крім того, існує і ”Міжнародна шкала рівнів”, яка в

відповідності до ступенів CEF виглядає таким чином: найнижчий
рівень – Beginner, A1 – Elementary, A2 – Pre-Intermediate, B1 –
Intermediate, B2 – Upper-Intermediate, C1 – Advanced, C2 – Proficiency.
Оскільки англійська сьогодні є мовою міжнародного
спілкування, існує багато екзаменів з англійської, і всі вони діляться
на два типи: кембриджські (Cambridge ESOL) та альтернативні.
Найбільш поширеними екзаменами кембриджської серії є FCE (First
Certificate in English), який проводять при наймі іноземців на роботу,
та CFE (Certificate in Advanced English), складання якого вимагається
при вступі іноземців до коледжів та університетів Великої Британії.
Серед альтернативних екзаменів найпопулярнішими є GMAT
(Graduate Management Admission Test), необхідний для отримання
освіти по системі МБА в бізнес-школах США та інших країнах,
TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign Language, - екзаменаційний тест
для вступу до вузів США і Канади) та IELTS (International English
Language Testing System), сертифікат про складання якого вимагається
при вступі до вузів Великої Британії, Австралії та Нової Зеландії, а
також для працевлаштування в цих країнах.
1.4. WRITING
1. Write an opinion essay in 200-250 words on the topic ‘The prospects for
the interpreter’s profession in the future’.
2. Write an opinion essay based on the following statement in about 200-

250 words ‘You never stop learning, no matter what age you are. When I
was young I thought I knew everything – the confidence of youth, I am
afraid – but as I have grown older, I have come to realize that I actually
know far less than I thought I did – and the more I know the more I realize
there is to know. It is a never-ending process – what I believe is called in
some circles the university of life’.
18
3. Write an opinion essay on the topic ‘People learn in different ways.
Some people learn on doing things; other people learn by reading about
things; others learn by listening to people talk about things. Which of
these learning strategies is the best for you?’
1.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING
Ex. 1.You will hear a woman who works as a tour guide talking about her
work. For questions 1-9 complete the sentences. You will hear the
recording twice.
TOUR GUIDES
The countries where Natalie works most often are -------- and ---------- (1).
Natalie explains that prior knowledge of ----------- (2) is not essential for
her job.
In Australia, Natalie worked in a ------------- (3).
Natalie found the --------- (4) the most difficult part of the recruitment
procedure to complete.
Natalie describes herself as generally a ----------- (5) person.
The tours which Natalie leads can last as long as ---------- (6).
Natalie receives $150 per week as well as payment for ------------ (7).
Natalie disagrees with the idea of linking pay to what is written on
---------------- (8).
Natalie explains that the ------------- (9) nature of the work means that
schedules are demanding.
Ex. 2. Choose one of the suggested topics and comment on it or discuss it

with your partner.
1. How do you account for the spread of English in the world? Name a
few reasons for its expansion.
2. How many different reasons for learning English can you think?
Which language will be the most important in future?
19
3. Researchers suggest that the personality of the learner must affect the
way he or she learns. Can you think of any personal qualities that
might help or hinder language learning?
4. Do you agree that one has to be wired to become an interpreter or
translator? Is it possible to efficiently combine translating and
interpreting?
5. Why have you decided on the profession of a translator/interpreter?
What makes the profession of a translator/interpreter prestigious?
6. How do you understand the term ‘professional ethics‘ in terms of
interpreting/translation? What aspects in its reference would you
point out?
7. Do you agree that an interpreter serves as a bridge across not only
language but a cultural divide as well?
SELF-ASSESSMENT TEST
Ex. 1. You will hear five short extracts in which various people are talking
about holidays where they studied as a group. You will hear the recording
twice. While you listen, you must complete both tasks.
TASK ONE For questions 1-5, match the extracts as you hear them with
what was studied on each course, listed A-H.
A a foreign language ------------- 1

B cookery ------------- 2
C creative writing ------------- 3
D drama ------------- 4
E music ------------- 5
F painting
G pottery
H photography
TASK TWO For questions 6-10, match the extracts as you hear them
with the comment each person makes about their course, listed A-H.
A I appreciated the flexibility of the staff. ------------- 6
B I would have liked a change of scene occasionally ------------- 7
20
C I enjoyed observing the other people. ------------- 8
D I would have liked more guidance from the tutor. ------------- 9
E I was pleased to work on my own. -------------- 10
F I was glad to be kept fully occupied.
G I liked the great variety of people I met.
H I would have liked more time to practice.
1. tenure a. the state of being exact and without error

2. daunting b. conversation about unimportant matters
3. background reading c. turning easily from one occupation to another
4. the downside of sth. d. discouraging or frightening
5. versatility e. a negative aspect, a disadvantage
6. (cultural) inferences f. the ability to remember facts easily and long
7. small talk g. quality to speak and write accurately, easily
8. references h. coming one after the other
9. fluency i. the right to remain permanently in one’s job
10. a erudite j. estimation of sth. (knowledge)
11. streaming k. a written statement about a character or ability
12. consecutive l. a thing that is very easy
13. a piece of cake m. putting children in streams according to abilities
14. accuracy n. obtaining basic information in the field
15. assessment o. conclusions reached on the basis of knowledge,
16. retentive (memory) p. having or showing great learning
where necessary.
1. Written translation affords a rare opportunity to make money without

leaving home and (1) …your own pace. 2. ‘People skills’ are an essential
part of this job – getting (2) … … people and being able to communicate.
3. A translator has to be ready to sacrifice his own interests (3) … the
benefit of the work. 4. You have to like the job or it will not come (4) … .
5. An interpreter must be able to speak (5) … public (6) … any trace of
stage fright or even shyness. 6. The interpreter has to get (7) … the right
meaning rather than the exact wording. 7. I’ll tell John that he can have
every confidence (8) … you. 8. And even if this place was (9) … the back
of nowhere, it was still a place (10) … their own. 9. The reason (11) …
21
Jack’s dismissal was his poor attendance record. 10. (12) … the very last
moment Tom backed (13) … and refused to go with us. 11. Now we can
tell (14) … confidence that the results are not put (15) … … chance. 12.
(16) … this stage, he still hovers (17) … his desk browsing (18) … the
newspaper, leafing (19) … the entertainment section. 13. Interpreters are
called (20) … to sit (21) … quick succession in meetings dealing with
fantastic variety of subjects.
Ex. 4. For questions 1-10, read the following text and then choose, from
the list
(A – K), the best phrase given below. Each correct phrase may be used
THE PROFESSIONAL WHO…
Surely nobody (1) …………. gives up a well-paid and prestigious job (2)
……… unless, by necessity, they are forced to? Ambition has always been
considered a desirable quality; salary and professional status are
advantages to be courted. And yet, (3) ……… of executive stress, burnout
and compulsory redundancy, the idea of throwing (4) ……….. holds a
strange appeal.
We interviewed someone who has quit the race rat. Gillian, 37, was a
solicitor in a city law firm until earlier this year. She worked long hours
and weekends and had come to the conclusion that her highly paid, high
status job was just a ‘living death’. She found the isolation of the job
difficult and wished she could have contact with people, rather than
dealing with her clients only (5) ……….. When she left, her clients were
surprised. When she told them she was going to work (6) ………… , they
were, she laughs, ‘flabbergasted’.
She now works a 39-hour week, (7) ………… . Gillian doesn’t regret
resigning from the law firm or having less money. ‘If only I’d done it
sooner,’ she says. ‘I absolutely love the new job! There is a part of me that
I ‘m not using; your brain feels what I call ‘stretched’ when you are
drafting legal documents. But I don’t miss that (8) ……… . I’m too busy
to feel bored.’ Any lack of intellectual stimulation has yet to prove
22
frustrating, and, (9), … …….. , she now reads all those books that she
wishes she had had time to read before. Not that Gillian has closed the
door entirely to resuming her law career. (10) ……….. does not render
professionals unemployable and some do manage to make a comeback.
A by phone and fax

B in the real world
C at all
D for the sake of the company
E in favour of a menial one
F a period out of the fast lane
G in the evenings
H in these alarming days
I in the towel
J at a very modest hourly rate of pay
K behind the counter of a supermarket
Ex. 5. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verbs in
parentheses.
After a few days, classes (begin) (1) …… and we (have) (2)…….. another
meeting place: the classroom. (Know, not) (3) ……. quite what (expect)
(4)…….. the first day of class, I was a bit nervous, but also (excite) (5)
…….. . After (find) (6) ……. the right building and right room, I walked
in and (choose) (7)…….. an empty seat. I (introduce) (8)…….. myself to
the person (sit) (9) …….next to me, and we sat (talk) (10)……. to each
other for a few minutes. Since we (be) (11)……. from different countries,
we (speak) (12)……… in English. At first, I was afraid that the other
student (understand, not) (13)……….. what I (say) (14)…….. , I (surprise,
pleasantly) (15)………when she (respond) (16)……… to my question
easily. Together we (take) (17)……. the first steps toward (build) (18)
…….. a friendship.
As the semester (progress) (19)…….. , I (find) (20)…….. out more and

more about my fellow students. Students from some countries were
reticent and shy in class. They almost never (ask) (21)…….. questions and
(speak) (22)……. very softly. Others of different nationalities (be) (23)
……… just the opposite: they spoke in booming voices and never (ask)
(24)…… questions and sometimes they (interrupt, even) (25)…….. the
23
teacher. I (be, never) (26)……. in a classroom with such a mixture of
cultures before. The time spent (share) (27)…….. our ideas with each
other and (learn) (28)……… about each other’s customs and beliefs (be)
(29)……. valuable and fun. As we progressed in our English, we slowly
learned about each other, too.
Now, several months after my arrival in the United States, I (be) (30)
………. able to understand not only some English but also something
about different cultures. If I (come, not) (31)……… here, I (be, not) (32)
…….. able to attain these insights into other cultures. I wish everyone in
the world (have) (33)………the same experience. Perhaps if all the people
in the world (know) (34)……. more about cultures different from their
own and (have) (35)……… the opportunity (make) (36)…….. friends
with people from different countries, peace (be) (37) ……secure and wars
(be) (38) ……. over.
24
UNIT 2 TELEVISION AND CINEMA
2.1. READING
Ex.1.You are going to read a magazine article about four ordinary people
who have taken part in Reality TV programmes. Look at the questions
below. For each question, you have to choose one of the people A – D.
Which person
1 gave away the money they won on the show?…….
2 received money to make up for the harm done by the programme…….
3 shared the first place in the competition with another person?…….
4 was immediately successful in their career after the programme?…….
5 does not understand the reasons for their success?…….
6 says the programme gave an untrue picture of them? …….
7 found their personal relationships were badly affected by the
programme …….
8 feels their success is not just due to personal qualities? …….
9 had a musical career that turned out to be disappointing? …….
10 feels they are different from the general public? …….
11 finds family life more stressful than giving a public performance?
…….
12 feels the other participants were sorry they left?…….
REALITY TV – THE ROAD TO SUCCESS
A Ron Copsey was one of a group of contestants who agreed to live for
a year on a desert island, with cameras following their attempts to survive
together. He left the island after five months, and later accused the
producers of the show of misrepresenting him, claiming they had edited
the film to make it look as if he was throwing a chair in the face of one of
the women. ‘I’m not an argumentative, aggressive, nasty piece of work. It
was shocking,’ he told a journalist later. ‘The producer led the public to
believe that the other contestants were glad to see the back of me but it
wasn’t true.’ After returning home from the island, Nr. Copsey said he was
unable to continue with his college course as other students wouldn’t talk
25
to him, and he had to take antidepressant pills. The television company has
agreed to pay him $16.000 compensation.
B Craig Phillips was the winner of one of the first Reality TV

programmes to be shown in England, called Big Brother. Craig was
originally a builder, and comes from Liverpool. After the series ended he
admitted: ‘I do not know why I won – you’ll have to ask all those people
that voted for me.’ Crag donated his $70.000 prize money to teenage friend
Jo Harris, to help pay for a heart and lung operation in America. ‘She is a
unique young lady and it is wonderful to be in the position to help her,’ he
said at the time. Crag later had a five-album deal with a record company
but he was dropped after his first single. However, he has continued to
raise money for charities as well as appearing regularly on daytime
television show.
C Denise Leigh won joint first prize in a TV contest called Operatunity,

in which ordinary people had the chance to be transformed into opera
singers. But there is nothing ordinary about Denise. She is a blind woman
of amazing determination who had succeeded against all the odds. She had
always dreamed of a musical career, but this was prevented by the births of
her children. Being a blind mother of three is a challenge. ‘It’s the hardest
job in the world,’ she says. ‘Keeping them safe is definitely more worrying
than anything that can happen to do on stage.’ Now the children are all at
school, she is free to pursue her dream, and after Operatunity she is better
placed than she could ever had hoped for. ‘Now I have sung on stage at the
London Coliseum I am a different person,’ she said the morning after her
triumph. ‘Winning the contest has changed my life.’
D Will Young shot to success when he won the TV competition Pop

Idol of over a thousand contenders, and was offered a contract with a
major record company. He is modest about his success. ‘I don’t think it’s
me myself they are voting for, it’s the TV contestant, and in that context I
feel very flattered by it all,’ he said. His first single, Evergreen, became the
fastest-selling single of all time. It sold over a million copies in its first
week. Will thinks that being a pop idol isn’t only a matter of having a good
voice – there are generally other factors involved. ‘Performers over the
ages have always given off a kind of energy. I think it’s about a whole
image – the look, the clothes, the music – which puts a distance between
you and other people.’
26
Ex. 2. You are going to read an article written by a novelist. For questions
1 – 7 choose the answer (A,B,C or D) which you think fits best according
to the text.
I have noticed that after I published a book people inevitably ask: ‘Is there
going to be a film?’ They ask this question in tones of great excitement,
with a slight widening of the eyes. I am left with the suspicion that most
people think that a film is far more wondrous than a novel; that a novel is,
perhaps, just a hopeful step in the celluloid direction, and that if there is no
film, then the author has partially failed. It is as if ‘the film’ confers a
mysterious super-legitimacy upon the writer’s work.
Objectively speaking, a film’s relationship to a novel is as a charcoal

sketch to an oil painting, and no writer I know would actually agree that
‘the film’ is the ultimate aspiration. Certainly, any literary novelist who
deliberately tried to write something tailor-made to filmmakers would fail
to produce a good book, because the fact is that books are only filmic by
accident.
It is, in any case, a long journey from page to screen, because the first
stage involves ‘selling the option’, where by, in return for the modest sum,
and for a limited time, the producer retains the right to be the first to have
a bash at making the film, should he get round to it. It is theoretically
possible to go to decades having the option renewed, with no film being
made at any time at all. This is money for jam, of course, but the sums are
not big enough to be truly conducive to contentment. My first novel had
the option renewed several times, and then finally it was dropped. This is,
alas, a common fate, and many a novelist remembers those little bursts of
hope with a wry smile.
In the case of my second novel, however, the book eventually made it over
the real hurdle, which is the ‘exercising of the option’. This is the point
where a more substantial fistful of cash changes hands, but regrettably
even this is not enough to meet the expectations of loved ones and
acquaintances, who strangely assume that you are imminently to the
stinking rich for ever. More importantly, here begins the battle that takes
place in author’s psyche thereafter. The hard fact is, that it is no longer
your own book. Although, unusually, I was asked if I would like to do the
27
script myself, no doubt both producer and director were mightily relieved
when I declined.
Novelists, you see, rarely make good scriptwriters, and in any case I
couldn’t have taken the job on without being a hypocrite – I had ever told
off my best friend for wasting her literary energy by turning her novels
into scripts when she should have been writing more novels. She has had
the experience of doing numerous drafts, and then finding that her scripts
still have not used. I wasn’t going to put up with that, because I have the
natural arrogance of most literary writers, which she unaccountably lacks.
As far as I am concerned, once I have written something, then that is the

way it must be; it is perfect and no one is going to make me change it.
Scriptwriters have to be humble creatures who will change things, and
even knowingly make them worse, a thousand times and thousand times
again, promptly, and upon demand. I would rather be boiled in oil.
It is no longer your own book. The director has the right to make any
changes that he fancies, and so your carefully crafted novel about family
life in London can end up being set in Los Angeles, involving a car chase,
a roof-top shoot-out and abduction by aliens. This, from the writer’s point
of view, is the real horror of film.
When my book was eventually filmed, I did get the visit to the set,
however. I cannot count the number of people I met there who a propos
possible changes to the story, repeated to me in a serious tone that, ‘Of
course, film is a completely different medium’. This mantra is solemnly
repeated so that film-makers are self-absolved from any irritation that may
be set up by altering the characters or the story. I think that it is the cliché
that is really either untrue or too vague to be meaningful. There could not
be anything simpler than extracting salient points of the main narrative,
and making a faithful film, which is what our readers and writers would
actually prefer.
My theory is that film-makers are hell-bent on a bit of territorial

marketing, and each time one can only hope that they have sufficient
genius to do it with flair. There are a few films that really are better than
the book.
28
1. What do people do when the writer publishes a new book?
A They make wrong assumptions about his aims.
B They draw wrong conclusions from his comments.
C They make unfair criticisms of his writing.
D They gain a false impression of his attitude.
2. The writer compares writing with the visual arts to support the view
that
A related art forms benefit from indirect comparisons.
B ideas are easily translated from one medium to another.
C an artist has no idea how an idea may develop.
D each art form should be judged on its own merits.
3. Which phrase best reveals how the writer regards the attitude of film
producers in the ‘option’ system?
A ‘have a bash’ (line 23)
B ‘go round to it’ (lines 23 – 24)
C ‘money for jam’ (line 26)
D ‘a common fate’ (line 30)
4. What problem does the author of a literary work usually face once the
film option has been ‘exercised’?
A financial disappointment
B pressure to produce a script
C loss of authorial control
D lack of support from film-makers
5. According to the writer, a good scriptwriter needs, above all, to

A adopt a flexible approach towards the work.
B ignore the arrogance of literary writers.
C resists the unreasonable demands for changes.
D be sensitive to the literary merits of the original work.
6. Which word best describes the attitude of the people on the film set
towards the author?
A intolerant
B defensive
C indifferent
D aggressive
29
7. In the final analysis, the writer accepts that the film version of his
literary work may be
A a lucrative sideline to his writing.
B an opportunity to learn new skills
C a chance to improve on the original.
D a way of attracting new readers.
2.2. USE OF ENGLISH
1. ad lib a. a tryout, recording or other elements prior to

final selection of the film
2. audition b. a process of assembling, cross-cutting and
arranging the desired shots
3. box office turkey c. film fan, enthusiast
4. chick flick d. the most profitable film
5. close-up e. a shot taken with a long, panoramic distance
between the camera and the subject
6. dubbing f. the addition of sound to a visual presentation
7. editing g. publicity or attention
8. film buff h. improvisation, additions to one’s part in a play
9. a grossing movie i. a scene in which miles of country are shown
slowly, from west to east
10. limelight j. (to make a film) in natural setting
11. long shot k. a box office flop/failure
12. on location l. a tight shot of the performer or the subject matter
13. panning m. the number of times a given shot has been made
14. props n. a written text of a play, film, broadcast, etc.
15. script o. a moving object used on theatre stage in a film
16. take p. a melodrama for girls
where necessary.
30
1. The production manager is responsible for drawing (1) … the shooting
schedule. 2. The Greek Tycoon also excels (2) … its music credits. 3.
Lately Hue Grant hasn’t been (3) … much in the film industry. 4. Award
winners are reminded to keep their speeches short and asked not to get too
carried (4) … . 5. When it comes to doling (5) … prizes, Cannes
traditionally spurns what it regards (6) … Hollywood’s brash
commercialism. 6. In 1934, (7) … the height of depression, he increased
his staff to 1.5000 so he could embark (8) … a foolhardy programme of
feature-length cartoons. 7. (9) … the flesh, Roberts is much smaller than
the big screen would lead us to believe. 8. Only Meg Ryan holds a candle
(10) … her in the field of blockbuster romantic comedy. 9. Julia Roberts
has had the time to come (11) … terms (12) … critics’ pressure. 10. By
the mid-90s, her career was written (13)… . 11. Richard has been (14) …
filming (15) … months (16) … end (17) …location.
The attacks (18) … filmmakers reflected a misplaced anger (19) …
violence whose causes lie not (20) … the screen but (21) … the streets.
Ex. 3. For questions 1 – 7, read the following text and then choose, from
the list (A – J), the best phrase given below. Each correct phrase may be
used once. Some of the suggested answers do not fit at all.
INTERACTIVE MOVIES
Every year, nine million people in the USA sign up for educational courses
in film-making techniques, whilst dozens of magazines aim (1) ……… .
A Los Angeles-based Internet start-up is aiming to tap into the national

obsession with films by taking fans into the studios on-line (2) ………. .
Through its website, the company aims to build the community of fans for
these movies, who will gain access (3) ………… . These will give insights
into the working of directors and cinematographers and, crucially, also
offer fans the chance to contribute to the creative process itself.
In this way, it is hoped to make the audience into ‘emotional stakeholders’

in the film. It is a natural extension of the process which keeps viewers
glued (4) ……….. . The company aims to extend this principle, however,
so that the feeling of involvement begins whilst the film is actually being
created. Participating film-makers will present selected parts on their
31
work-in-progress on the website., giving users the opportunity (5)
………… .
The benefit to film-makers will be twofold. As well as receiving this

valuable critical input, they will be able (6) ……….. . Around 150.000
people have already expressed an interest in the scheme. That represents
quite a large group who, given their previous involvement, will be likely
(7) ……….. . And if they like both the film and the experience, they’ll tell
their friends.
A to comment on what they have just seen

B to cut down on marketing expenses
C to just such an network of informal critics
D to meet participating directors on equal terms
E to progress reports from participating studios
F to strike a balance between creativity and interactivity
G to television soap operas week after week
H to want to see the finished product
I to watch the making of certain movies in production
J to update fans on the progress of forthcoming production
Ex. 4. Read the text below. Use the word given in capitals at the end of
some of the lines to form a word that fits in the space in the same line (1 -
14)
FINDING INFORMATION
Almost one of ten children have stopped using (1) …… REFER

books and are relying on electronic sources, chiefly the
Internet, to get their information, according to a full study
of reading habits.
All age groups of the (2)….…were involved in the survey POPULAR
from young children to the elderly.
The report offers the first (3) …... evidence that a new STATISTIC
generation of children growing up in microchip era has
(4) ………….. different attitudes to the MARK
(5) …………..of knowledge from those of their parents. ACQUIRE
After the age of five, a small (6) ….. about 15% make use MINOR
32
of electronic sources.
However, this percentage increases (7) ……… to more than DRAMA
half for 12-16 year olds, where (8) ……. sources of DIGIT
information are used in favour of text-books.
After this age, the (9) …… of people using technology to PERCENT
acquire information falls sharply and books, (10) ……. , POPULAR
in earlier ages are more widely used.
Evidence also reveals a (11)….… difference in the attitude SUBSTANCE
of parents and their (12) ……. to attaining knowledge. SPRING
The 180-page study indicates that the habit of reading
books continues to flourish (13) ……. despite all counter RESIST
(14) …….., as by far the biggest cultural pastime in Britain. ATTRACT
Ex. 5. Rewrite the following sentences, using must, can’t or might (1 –

16).
1. I’m sure Harry is at least sixty.

Model: Harry must be at least sixty. (0)
2. Perhaps he is having a party. (1)

…………………………….
3. I’m sure he hasn’t retired yet. He still leaves the house every morning.
(2) …………………………….
4. I’m sure he isn’t well off. His house is in a terrible mess. (3)
…………………………….
5. Perhaps he spent all his money when he was younger. (4)
…………………………….
6. I’m sure he does a lot of gardening. His garden looks beautiful. (5)
…………………………….
7. I’m sure he’s read a lot of books about gardening. He’s certainly an
expert. (6)
…………………………….
8. I’m sure he’s working in his garden now. I can hear someone digging.
(7)
…………………………….
9. Now I can hear voices. Perhaps he’s talking to Miss Appleby. (8)
…………………………….
10. No, I’m sure it isn’t Miss Appleby. It’s two men’s voices. (9)
…………………………….
33
11. They are shouting. Perhaps they are having an argument. (10)
……………………………..
12. They’re talking about money. Perhaps Harry owes the other man some
money.(11)
………………………………
13. Now I can’t hear anything. I’m sure they’ve gone inside. (12)
………………………………
14. My God! A gun shot! I’m sure Harry has killed him! (13)
………………………………
15. No, there’s Harry outside, so it wasn’t Harry who was shot. (14)
………………………………
16. There’s a siren. I’m sure this is the police arriving. (15)
………………………………
17. Look at all those lights and cameras. Ah! I understand. They were
making a film! (16)
………………………………
2.3. MEDIATION
Ex. 1. Translate into English.
ДИВОВИЖНА СІМКА
В 30-х роках двадцятого століття в Голівуді існувало сім

провідних кіностудій, відомих в усьому світі. Серед них три гіганти:
Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer, Paramount, Warner Brothers. В 1935р. до них
приєдналась четверта кіностудія Twentieth Century-Fox. Трохи пізніше
з’явилися блискучі, престижні, часто серйозно конкуруючі, час від
часу переважаючі всіх інших в якості кіностудії Universal, PKO Radio,
and Columbia. В деякому сенсі існувала і восьма студія – United Artists
– хоч ця компанія була кінопрокатною установою, у розпорядженні
якої були в основному фільми, зняті незалежною кіностудією Самуела
Голдвіна (Samuel Goldwyn).
Цікаво, чи знаєте ви, що С. Голдвін - українець за походженням?
Серед українців він був найуспішнішим у Голівуді. Самуіл Гелбфіш
починав свою трудову діяльність, продаючи оселедці на одній з
вулиць Києва. Після більшовицької революції в Росії він переїхав до
США, змінив своє ім’я на Самуел Голдвін і заснував свою
34
кінокомпанію. В 1924р. він купив ще дві кіностудії і став президентом
наймогутнішої голівудської компанії Metro-Goldwyn- Mayer (MGM).
Ex. 2. Translate into English
УКРАЇНЦІ ТА НАГОРОДИ АКАДЕМІЇ
На перший погляд здається, що Україна тримається осторонь від

глобальної боротьби за Оскара, найпочеснішої нагороди світового
кінематографа, яка щорічно вручається Американською Академією
Кіномистецтва. Як це не парадоксально, але українці займають одне з
перших місць (після США), беручи до уваги кількість номінантів на
різні категорії цієї престижної нагороди.
В 1928р. (рік заснування Академії) 34-річний емігрант з Одеси,
Лев Мілстайн (відомий в Голівуді як Луіс Майлстоун) отримав золоту
статуетку в номінації “найкращий режисер” за комедію Two Arabian
Knights.
В 1961 фільм Балада про солдата, знятий режисером Григорієм
Чухраєм, був номінованим як кращий іноземний фільм. Раніше фільм
отримав дві премії на Канському кінофестивалі.
В 1984р. ще один фільм українського кінорежисера Петра
Тодоровського Війського-польовий роман (The Martial Romance)
номінувався в категорії “кращий іноземний фільм”, але не переміг.
В 90-х роках 20 століття досвідчений український кінооператор
Вілен Калiта, працюючи у складі знімальної групи Микити
Михалкова, отримав Оскара за фільм Tired of the Sun.
Варто згадати, що Стівен Спілберг та Сільвестер Сталоне на
четвертину одесити.
2.4. WRITING
1. You are a member of a cinema society which regularly reviews new

films in its newsletter. Write a review for the newsletter, describing the last
film you have seen and saying whether or not you would recommend it to
the other members of the society. Your review should focus on the main
points of the film and give the readers a clear idea of what it is about.
35
2. Write a review for an international student magazine, contrasting two
films of the same genre which you have seen; one of which you enjoyed
and one of which you found disappointing.
Ex.1. You will hear an interview with Harry Newland, a young film actor.
For questions 1 – 5 choose the answer (A, B, C or D) which fits best
according to what you hear.
1 Harry believes his acting talent to be largely the result of

A an inherent ability.
B his theatrical upbringing
C training from an early age.
D conscious efforts to develop it.
2 Harry looks back on his early parts in television dramas with

A embarrassment
B gratitude
C derision
D pride
3. How does Harry explain the attitude of other actors towards him?
A They took great care not to offend him.
B They appreciated his level of commitment.
C They were keen to keep him in his place.
D They made allowances for his difficulties.
4 When working on big productions, Harry finds its best to

A follow the lead of other actors.
B bring his own ideas to the role.
C keep the finished product in mind.
D focus on his own performance.
5 Looking back, Harry realizes that his parents

A put too much pressure on him on occasion.
B may not always have had his best interests at heart.
C were well aware of the potential pitfalls of his situation.
D tended to be over-protective in their attitude towards him.
36
with your partner.
1. Do you think you are too independent on TV and cinema for

entertainment and information?
2. What do you think of soap operas? Interview two other group mates
about soaps: if they have a favourite soap, ask about the main characters
and situations; if they never watch soaps, ask if they have had of any
and what they think of soaps generally.
3. With modern cinema and technology literature will (not) survive the
next century.
4. What problems of film translation would you point out? How are you
going to tackle them as future interpreters/translators?
5. What do you know about the history of the Oscar Academy Award?
Choose the best film of the year and role-play the ceremony of Oscar
Awarding with your group mates.
6. What is the place of American culture on the Ukrainian cinema
market? How important is the film industry in Ukraine, and what sorts
of films are produced?
7. Using the Internet and mass media prepare short presentation about
the new stars, who are in the limelight today.
SELF – ASSESSMENT TEST
Ex. 1. You will hear an interview with a woman who works as a casting
director in the film industry. For questions 1 – 8, choose the best answer
A, B, C or D.
1 According to Barbara a casting director needs above all

A to learn from experience
B to have a relevant qualification
C to be a good communicator
D to have a natural feel for the job.
2 Barbara says that she looks for actors who

A can play a variety of roles
B complement each other
C accept her way of working
37
D think deeply about a part
3 At which stage of the casting process does Barbara meet the actors?
A before she goes to see them performing live
B once the director has approved them
C before a final short-list is drawn up
D as soon as a final selection is made
4 What led Barbara to become a casting director?

A She realized she had the skills needed.
B She was doing the similar work in the theatre.
C It was recommended by a friend.
D It has always been her ambition.
5 Barbara explains that what motivates her now is a need for

A personal satisfaction.
B financial security
C professional recognition
D a glamorous lifestyle
6 What made Barbara give up her job for a time?

A She’d become tired of travelling
B She wanted to try something new
C She’d been put under too much pressure
D She found she was no longer committed
7 Why did Barbara go back to her work?

A She was missing her colleagues.
B She was made an interesting offer.
C She wasn’t happy working in theatre.
D She realized she’d made a mistake.
8 How does Barbara feel when her work on a film ends?

A sorry not to follow it through
B surprised by the attitude of others
C upset not to be better appreciated
D ready for the next challenge
38
1. blockbuster a. first print of a film before cutting and editing

2. burlesque b. a small part in a film played by a well-known actor
3. cameo role c. excellent; famous; of the highest quality
4. credits d. a series of short extracts from a film or television
programme, shown in advance to advertise it
5. film extra e. excessive praise, respect and favour of viewers
6. ingénue f. a continuation of a previous film
7. public adulation g. a radio or TV programme with a team of
people in it
8. remake h. a non-musical, non-vocal sound – frequently
artificial – that is included for dramatic purposes
9. rushes i. built-up scenery in a studio or outdoors for a film
10. sequel to j. to make a film or recording again or differently
11. set k. the part of a naïve young girl
12. sound effect l. permission given by or bought from a government
to broadcast a TV programme
13. protagonist m. a person employed for a minor part in
a crowd scene
14. top-notch name n. title of acknowledgement for story, sets, direction
15. trailers o. a person who takes the part of an actor in
risky scenes
16. TV franchise p. a very successful book or film
17. stuntman s. an amusing imitation or parody
18. panel discussion t. a major character in a drama
where necessary.
1. He had never yielded (1) … the temptation of opening a paper before its
allotted time. 2. She could resist (2) … temptation well enough if
temptation was not put right (3)… her nose. 3. Parents should prevent their
children (4) … wasting hours (5) … inert viewing. 4. I have seen the film
based (6) …’Crime and Punishment’. 5. The Academy Awards were first
handed (7) … on the 16th of May 1926. 5. Spielberg bought the Oscar (8)
… an auction and gave it (9) … … the Academy as a present. 6. In 1920
Disney was laid (10) … by a Kansas City advertising company (11) … the
comment (12) … his ‘lack of drawing ability’. 7. The story has been made
39
(13) … a film or adapted (14) … the screen. 8. A close-up is a shot taken
(15) … close range and showing something (16) … detail. 9. No sooner
had he done so than they were called (17) … the stage and given their
scripts. 10. Jack was one of the actors who has been turned (18) … for the
part. 11. The Academy opted (19) … sealed envelopes and extreme
secrecy. 12. She lost (20) … … Liza Minelly whose turn in Cabaret
scooped the prize. 13. Berry’s emotional acceptance speech (21) …
winning the best actress prize (22) …Monster’s Ball was one of the most
memorable (23) … recent years.
the list (A – J), the best phrase given below. Each correct phrase may be
used once. Some of the suggested answers do not fit at all.
‘TERMINATOR 2: JUDGMENT DAY’
It is the excellent sequel to the original sci-fi thriller, ultimately the best
movie of its kind. The outstanding story, the astounding visual effects are
just perfect. Every single important character is well-developed. There is
no usual (1) ………. and the (2) ……….. . The movie flows (3) ………..
while at the same time creating ultimate (4) …………. . James Cameron
knows a thing or two about action. The direction, photography, story, and
effects are at the top of their game. The absolutely perfect score (5)
………… of the movie.
James Cameron has crafted an intense, exciting rollercoaster ride, filled

with jaw-dropping special effects, breakneck action, (6) ……….. . Most
notable for being one of the first films to combine computer graphics with
live action. (7) ……….. , I see this movie as (8) ……….. , a human story.
T2 capitalizes on Arnold Schwarzenegger’s increased stardom. (9) ……….

Arnold has the looks (10) ………… . He knows how to act like a machine,
and he also knows how to add a small human touch to the character of the
machine. (11) ………… . The acting in the movie more than (12)
………… . The nice Terminator, the creepy and evil T-1000 – a relentless,
ruthless killing machine, Sarah Connor, John Connor are so memorable
and great.
40
I was blown out of my seat with the extreme, continuously dazzling, (13)
………… special effects, and chase scenes. This movie provides a two-
hour adrenaline rush. I would recommend to anyone who can (14)
…………. and enjoy a sci-fi story.
A simplism of the screenplay

B captures the mood
C eye-candy
D a movie that looks good and grasps our heart
E effortlessly from scene to scene
F intensity and nail-biting excitement
G First and foremost
H in all its marvel and wonder
I Considering its plot and its message
J This elevates action to the next stage
K lives up to expectations
L that work perfectly with his role
M paucity of the dialogue
N stomach intensity
some of the lines to form a word that fits in the space in the same line (1 -
15)
SILENT ACTING
Mime and pantomime was a Greek and Roman (1) …… DRAMA

entertainment representing scenes from life, often in a
(2)……. manner. Currently, the art has evolved into RIDICULE
the (3) ………….. of a character or the PORTRAY
(4) ………… of a story by means of body movement. NARRATE
The Greco-Roman mime was a farce that stressed (5) ……. MIME
action but which included song and spoken dialogue. In
Roman pantomime, unlike the mime actor, the players wore
(6) ………… masks, which identified their characters but NUMBER
deprived them of speech and of the use of (7) …………. FACE
gestures. Hand movements were particularly (8) …………. EXPRESS
41
and important.
Pantomimus, dressed like a tragic actor in a cloak and long
tunic, usually performed solo (9) ………. by an orchestra . COMPANY
In the theatre of China and Japan, mime acquired a role (10)…… KNOW
in the West, becoming a(n) (11) ………… part of the major DISPENCE
dramatic genres. In Chinese drama the conventions of
gesticulation, as well as the (12)…………. of the stage SYMBOL
properties, are immense in scope and (13) ……to those COMPREHEND
(14) …….. with traditional forms. FAMILIAR
The high art of modern mime was (15) …… philosophically NOBLE
by such artists as Marcel Marceau, who defined mime as the
art of expressing feelings by attitudes and not a means of
expressing words through gestures.
Ex. 6. Use a modal or phrasal modal with each verb in parentheses (1 –

26)
1. It looks like rain. We (shut) (1) …………. the windows.

2. Ann, (you, hand) (2)……………. me that dish? Thanks.
3. Spring break starts on the thirteenth. We (go, not) (3) …………..to
classes again until the twenty-second.
4. The baby is only a year old, but she (say, already) (4) ……….. a few
words. In the United States, elementary education is compulsory. All
children (attend) (5)…………. six years of elementary school.
5. There was a long line in front of the theatre. We (wait) (6) ………..
almost an hour to buy our tickets.
6. A: I’d like to go to a warm sunny place next winter. Any
suggestions?
B: You (go) (7) ……….to Hawaii or Mexico. Or how about Indonesia?
7. I don’t feel like going to the library to study this afternoon. I (go) (8)
………..to the shopping mall than to the library.
8. A: Mrs.Wilson got a traffic ticket. She didn’t stop at a stop sign.
B: That’s surprising. Usually she’s a very cautious driver and obeys all
the traffic laws. She (see, not) (9) ………. the sign.
9. Annie, you (clean) (10) ………..this mess before Dad gets home.
He’ll be mad if he sees all this stuff all over the living room floor.
10. A: This is Steve’s laptop, isn’t it?
42
B: It (be, not) (11) ………..his. He doesn’t have a laptop computer, at
least not that I know of. It (belong) (12) ……… to Lucy or Linda. They
sometimes bring their laptops to class.
11. In my country, a girl and boy (go, not) (13) ……….out on a date
unless they are accompanied by a chaperone.
12. A: The phone’s ringing again. Let’s not answer it. Just let it ring.
B: No, we (answer) (14) ……….. it. It (be) (15) ……. important.
13. Jimmy was serious when he said he wanted to be a cowboy when he
grew up. We (laugh, not) (16) ………… at him. We hurt his feelings.
14. A: (I. speak) (17) ……….. to Peggy?
B: She (come, not) (18)……… to the phone right now. (I, take) (19)
……message?
15. A: How are you planning to get to the airport?
B: By taxi.
A: You (take) (20)…….. a shuttle bus instead. It’s cheaper than a taxi.
You (get) (21)……. one in front of the hotel. It picks up passengers there
on a regular schedule.
16. A: Why didn’t you come to the party last night?
B: I (study) (22) ……… .
A: You (come) (23) ……… . We had a good time.
17. It’s not like Tony to be late. He (be) (24) ………. here an hour ago. I
hope nothing bad has happened.
18. A: This is a great open-air market. Look at all this wonderful fresh
fish! What kind of fish is this?
B: I’m not sure. It (be) (25) ……… ocean perch. Let’s ask.
19. The teacher called on Sam in class yesterday, but he kept looking out
of the window and didn’t respond. He (daydream) (26) ………. .
43
UNIT 3 ADVERTISING
3.1. READING
Ex. 1. You are going to read the article ‘Small is Beautiful’. Six
paragraphs have been removed from the text. Choose from the paragraphs
(A –G) the one which fits each gap (1-6). There is one extra paragraph
which does not fit anywhere.
Back in the 1970s, Edward Shumacher wrote a book called Small is

Beautiful. In it he proposed that big businesses had cost advantages over
small ones, but that any advantage was soon lost because they were too big
to manage and gave impersonal service.
1 -------------------------------------
All successful companies supply products and services that the customer
wants – at a fair price. They also sell in pleasant surroundings and offer
unforgettable service. Their stuff are trained, positive, approachable,
enthusiastic and knowledgeable.
2-------------------------------------
When you run your own business, you have decided to sell to and serve
others. Unfortunately, for many British people, selling is a job that is
beneath them and they regard customers as being in the way. But make no
mistake, we are going to have to become much cleverer sales people and
serve customers a great deal better, or we are going to lose business to
competitors who already do so.
3-----------------------------------------
Our rewards in life have always been in direct proportion to the quantity
of the service we have given. The more people we serve and the better we
serve them, the more rewards we will get. Poor service equals poor
rewards, average service average rewards. Good service reaps your
rewards.
4-----------------------------------------
If the car breaks down within a week of his garage fixing it, he sends
someone out to repair it, day or night. He gives me a loan car and I leave
the broken-down vehicle with the mechanic. Does he charge more? Yes, he
does, but he has increased the share of the local market by 400% in the last
two years.
5 ------------------------------------------
44
My doctor has a target to see 97% of her patients on time. When you go
into her surgery, the receptionist comes to you. There is a play area for the
kids, a coffee machine, pay phone, up-to-date magazines, soft, relaxing
music and potted plants that look healthy.
6 ------------------------------------------
To find out how to give unforgettable service in your business, book
yourself on a customer service training course. Some are free and many
cost only a few pounds. Ask your local Training and Enterprise council for
details. If you prefer, send off for a leaflet I have produced on customer
care. It will outline the basics and I hope inspire you to put what you read
in action.
A How about the petrol station that invites you out of the car with a free
cup of coffee and newspaper while its stuff pump the petrol, check the
tyres and oil, wipe the inside and outside of your windscreen? They charge
top price but pump twice as much petrol as any other station in town.
B The bosses keep tight financial control and exhibit the same attitudes
as the stuff – they are positive , approachable, enthusiastic and
knowledgeable, The boss also has the best possible marketing tool because
he listens and finds out how to serve his customers better from first hand
experience.
C To many people, the customer is a pest, to the Americans, the

customer is a king, but to the Japanese, the customer is a god. Perhaps that
is why the Japanese are so successful. After all, the success of every
business can be found in its attitude towards selling and its attitude
towards customers.
D In the 1990s, small businesses still have lots of advantages over

larger ones. For a start, they are slimmer with no head office absorbing
money. But they are also lighter on their feet, responding to customers’
demands.
E Take my mechanic, for example. He cleans my car inside and out and
cleans my engine. He puts my seat back to my leg size. He offers
overnight service where he picks up the car from the drive and delivers it
back ready for work the next day.
45
F Moreover, it is happening. Day in day out, despite on focus on
customer care, there are similar incidents occurring all over the land:
ultimately orders are lost because of them. The big businesses are more
likely to fall foul of this than smaller ones.
G When we get there, she gives the kids a sweet, stands up, comes to
my side of the desk, smiles, shakes my hand and says, convincingly, “It’s
nice to see you, Tom”. If she’s been running late, she apologizes and you
know she’s done her best.
Ex. 2. You are going to read a magazine article about supermarkets in

Britain. Choose the most suitable heading from the list A-H for each part
(1-6) of the article. There is one extra heading. There is an example at the
beginning (0).
A Making the shopping trip even easier

B Keeping the customers moving
C Feeling a little less welcome
D Tempting customers to return
E Taking advantage of changing lifestyles
F Appealing to the senses
G Paying the price if expansion
H Identifying key locations
SUPERMARKET SECRETS
In Britain, supermarkets have a huge influence on everyday life. Sonia

Putnell reveals how they keep people shopping.
0 -----------------H--------------------
The most important place in a supermarket is at the end of each row. Just
moving a particular product to these shelves can easily double its sales, so
manufacturers pay big money to have their products displayed there. In the
same way, luxury goods are placed at eye-level, where people tend to look
first, while cheaper items, which don’t make so much money for the
supermarket, are put nearer the floor.
1 ----------------- ---------------------
Every detail of a supermarket is planned carefully to encourage people to
part with their money. Bright blue lighting is often used to show off the
46
colour and freshness of vegetables, and particularly attractive fruit may be
piled under a spotlight near the entrance. In areas where there are tins and
packets, softer lighting encourages people to spend more time looking.
Drinks, often an unplanned purchase, may have dramatic lighting behind
them to suggest a nightclub atmosphere. Smells play their part too. When
supermarkets bake bread on the premises, they tend to sell more of it.
2 ------------------ -------------------
Each supermarket manager has a diagram which shows every aspect of the
store layout. Not a trick is missed. Essential food such as bread, eggs and
milk are always positioned a long way so that shoppers have to visit other
parts of the shop in order to get to them. These products are often shifted
about , too; the longer shoppers spend in the store finding what they came
in for, the more money they might be tempted to spend on something else.
3 ------------------ ---------------------
Even when they eventually reach the checkout, customers are not safe.
While they wait, they might pick up leaflets about the store’s services, or
look through magazines promoting the store’s product. The checkout
operator may also offer them what’s called a ‘loyalty card’. This allows
regular customers to take advantage of future special offers, but in fact it is
the store which benefits more. By scanning in the card at the check out, the
store can build up information about its customers’ regular purchases and
see who is responding to promotions and offers, which helps it plan how to
appeal to them more effectively in the future.
4 ----------------- -------------------
Even checkouts might not actually exist for much longer, as new
microchips placed on food wrapping will soon make it unnecessary for
shoppers to unload their trolley in order to pay. Within a few years, the
trolley may just have to be pushed through an electronic ‘door’ where a
computer calculates the bill automatically. On arrival at the store, shoppers
may also be able to put their loyalty card into a special trolley, with a
screen which greet them by name and gives information about special
offers of interest to them personally.
5 ---------------- --------------------
British supermarkets also work hard to be in the center of local life by
providing services such as cafes, dry-cleaning and photo-processing. This
has not been without cost to the local economy, however, for 100.000 local
shops have closed down since the rapid spread of large supermarkets
across the country a generation ego. The environment has also suffered;
deliveries round the clock to supermarkets from both within the country
47
and overseas have played their part in increasing pollution and wasting the
world’s resources.
6 ---------------- -----------------
It is not surprising then that feelings against supermarkets are strong in
many places. When a new store is planned, supermarkets often offer
money to local communities, which can be spent on schools and roads.
Despite these inducements, it has recently become much more difficult for
new supermarkets to get permission to build. Are supermarkets beginning
to lose favour? Possibly, but there is no doubt that they will be thinking up
new ideas to make sure people don’t buy their eggs and bread elsewhere.
3.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1. For questions (1-16), match the following word with appropriate
definitions.
1. advertisement a. a place that sells goods made by a particular

company
2. a barrage of b. confidence, trust in a trademark
3. a big gun c. not special, ordinary
4. bonus. d. a thing that has advantages and also
disadvantages
5. brand new e. presentation of information in an unfair way
6. discount offer f. interest, attraction by a good price
7. endorsement g. a phrase used in ads to attract people’s attention
8. flagship brand h. a payment added to what is usual and expected
9. fringe benefits i. a public notice offering or asking for goods,
services
10. mixed blessing j. continuous stream of sth. (questions, criticism)
11. outfit k. completely new
12. reliability l. a very important and powerful man
13. run-of-the-mill m. a benefit given to an employee in addition to
salary
14. price appeal n. giving a support to products by celebrities
15. slanted language o. the most important of a group of products,
services
16. slogan p. an amount of money taken off the usual
cost of sth.
48
where necessary. One mark is given for each correct answer.
1. Nike is counting (1) … a touch of Hollywood and adds sparkle to

marketing. 2. Targeting advertisements (2) … different age groups is not a
new strategy. 3. If the commercials strike a chord (3) … consumers,
Hollywood talent agencies might grab more business as marketers look (4)
… fresh ideas. 4. Creative Artists Agency recently teamed (5) … …
another megamarketer, Nike, to package and market sports events. 5.
Marketing managers are well aware of children’s desperate need to keep
(6) … … the peer group. 6. Marketing is aimed (7) … very impressionable
age group, children, it may be that the time has come (8) … a little more
social responsibility in order not to exploit children (9) … financial gain.
7. Most advertising messages include techniques of persuasion which rely
mainly (10) … basic appeals. 8. Once consumers gain confidence (11) …
the trademark, the owner can use it (12) … a persuader. 9. When the film
was made it turned (13) … that Starbuck cheated Swanson (14) … his
money. 10. It was after reading the story that Gregory began to get (15) …
… his enemy. 11. At first the idea of murder was not actually (16) … his
mind. 12. David put (17) … … eight weeks (18) … it, but from that
moment he started to slide (19) … .
Ex. 3. For questions 1 – 16, read the text carefully and decide which
answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.
ARE BRAND NAMES WORTH IT?
How do famous people get to spend a (1) ………. on brand names? To

find the
(2) ……… to this question, just observe the children in any school
playground.
Hannah is a (3) ……. nine-year-old student at an English primary school.

She’s not quite sure what a brand (4) ……. is, but she’s sure of what she
wants. As part of a new sales (5) ……. , all the students in her class have
been given a free bag with the Nike (6) ……on it. Hannah hasn’t really
(7) …… the connection yet, or asked for Nike trainers, but it’s only a (8)
…….. of time before she does.
49
But is it right that companies should (9) …….. such young children for
their promotional activities?
Brand names seem to have (10) ……. over us because they allow us to
(11) ……… with a particular group of people. A brand name has a certain
(12) ……… It suggests that we’re able to afford this product – and most of
us like to (13) …….. off what we can afford. Some people also believe that
brand names provide a (14) ……… . So a brand has to provide this quality,
(15) ……… people will eventually stop buying it.
So only time will (16) ……. whether it’s really worthwhile paying extra
money for a brand name. Meanwhile, Hannah is delighted with her free
Nike bag.
1 A fortune B treasure C deal D load

2 A reply B response C answer D solution
3 A similar B typical C uniform D regular
4 A certainly B factually C surely D actually
5 A battle B campaign C attack D propaganda
6 A diagram B mark C picture D logo
7 A made B taken C done D put
8 A situation B problem C question D state
9 A target B aim C focus D point
10 A rule B meaning C power D force
11 A identify B indicate C sign D point
12 A invention B impression C portrait D image
13 A present B show C carry D wear
14 A guarantee B bond C security D receipt
15A since B otherwise C but D however
16 A say B speak C tell D state
some of the lines to form a word that fits in the space in the same line. One
mark is given for each correct answer (1 –11).
THE ORIGIN OF THE POTATO CRIP.
The potato crisp was the (1) ………. of George Crum, in INVENT
1853. He worked as a chef at a popular resort in the USA.
50
One day a (2) ………… decided that he didn’t like the CUSTOM
(3) ……… of his fried potatoes, and sent them back to the THICKEN
kitchen. Crum made some more, but the man (4) ……… TURN
these as well, making the same (5) …………. . Crum got COMPLAIN
angry and, hoping to annoy the man, he made a third batch
which was much (6) ………… and could be eaten with a folk. THIN
To his (7) ……… the man loved them – and so potato crisps AMAZE
were invented. Since then, their (8) …………. has increased POPULAR
and strengthen (9) …………...., and they are eaten all over DRAMA
the world.
But George Crum was (10) ………… at the time that AWARE
His invention would cause great (11) ………… in the future CONFUSE
between the Americans (who call them chips) and the British
(who call them crisps).
Ex. 5. Complete the sentences with an appropriate form in parentheses (1

– 26).
1. My children enjoy (allow) (1) ……. to stay up late when there’s

something special on TV.
2. (Observe) (2) …….. the sun (climb) (3) ……. above the horizon at
dawn makes one (realize) (4) ……… the earth is indeed turning.
3. John admitted (surprise) (5) …….. by the unexpected birthday party last
night. We had a lot of fun (plan) (6) ……… it.
4. I don’t understand how you got the wrong results. When I look over
your notes, your chemistry experiment seems (perform) (7) ……..
correctly. But something is wrong somewhere.
5. The witness to the murder asked not (identify) (8) ………. in the
newspaper. She wanted her name kept secret.
6. It is generally considered impolite (pick) (9) ……….. your teeth at the
dinner table.
7. I don’t recall (meet) (10) …….. Mr. Tanaka before. I’m sure I haven’t.
I’d like (introduce) (11) ………. to him. Would you do the honours?
8. Ed’s boss recommended him for the job. Ed was pleased (consider) (12)
………for the job even though he didn’t get it.
9. I wasn’t tired enough (sleep) (13) ……… last night. For a long time, I
just lay in bed (think) (14) ………. about my career and my future.
51
10. It is the ancient task of the best artists among us (force) (15) …….. us
(use) (16) …..….. our ability (feel) (17) …….. and (share) (18) ………
emotions.
11. Jeff applied to the medical school many months ago. Now he’s so
concerned about (accept) (19)…….. into medical school that he’s
having a difficult time (concentrate) (20) ……… on the courses he’s
taking this term.
12. Last week I was sick with the flu. It made me (feel) (21) ……..
awful. I didn’t have enough energy (get) (22) ………. out of bed. I just
lay there (feel) (23) ……… sorry for myself. When my father heard me
(sneeze) (24) …….. , he opened my bedroom door (ask) (25) …….. me
if I needed anything. He was kind and caring, but there wasn’t anything
he could do to make the flu (go) (26) …….. away.
3.3. MEDIATION
XTO BОЛОДІЄ ІНФОРМАЦІЄЮ – ТОЙ ВОЛОДІЄ СВІТОМ

Професор Норбер Вінер, засновник кібернетики
Реклама... Свідомо чи несвідомо, але вона переконливо ввійшла в

наше життя. Ви скажете, не ввійшла, а ввірвалася в наш побут
зухвало і безпардонно. Постійно промиваючи мозок глядача, вона
ухитрилася втілитися в окремий вид мистецтва зі своїми секретами та
винаходами. Реклама здатна вразити, ввести в оману споживача
повсюду: на телебаченні, радіо, в торгових центрах, на вулиці...
Але найкращим та найсучаснішим джерелом інформації для

споживача є Інтернет.
Звичайний японець може за допомогою сотового телефону визначити
своє географічне положення з точністю до двох метрів, розплатитися
в магазинах, зареєструватися на внутрішніх авіарейсах та використати
його як перепустку на роботу. Засновники Інтернету Тім Бернерс-Лі,
Ларрі Робертс, Вінтон Серф та Роберт Кен, напевно, задоволені –
сьогодні новим джерелом інформації та комунікації користується біля
720 млн. людей в усьому світі.
52
Сьогодні Інтернет об‘єднав користувачів різних півкуль планети в
єдину широку сітку – World Wide Web. Навіть школярі “нишпорять” у
цій павутині. Прикро стверджувати, але Україна займає одне з
останніх місць у світі щодо комп‘ютерів. Тільки 7 українців із 100
мають ноутбук. Попри все треба сподіватися. Ми всі, напевно,
радіємо, коли в нашій оселі з‘являється щось сучасне, надійне,
корисне, цифрове електронне.
ГАДЖЕТИ: Е-КНИГА, Е-СЛОВНИК, Е-ЗАПИСНА КНИЖКА
Знайомі торгові марки, кращі бренди, привабливі пропозиції

знижок... Як це вам? Чи дозволяєте ви рекламодавцям маніпулювати
собою, впливати на вашу півсвідомість? А може навпаки? Ви
полюбляете новітні винаходи, хочете йти в ногу з часом, не відставати
від сусіда. А ринок гаджетів? Новинки часто називають незрозумілим
словом гаджет, що в перекладі з англійської означає портативну
технічну новинку з цифровими технологіями, яка приносить насолоду
її власнику.
Книга – один з найважніших винаходів людства. Здавалося, ніщо
не може похитнути її паперові засади. Але сьогодні електронна книга
вперто входить в наше життя, пропонуючи замість листа паперу
електронний екран, здатний перегорнути перед очима читача 10 тисяч
сторінок. Деякі навчальні заклади в США і Канаді в якості
експеримента перейшли на навчання з використанням е-Book.
Сьогодні простий японець може помістити всю свою бібліотеку на
декількох флеш-картах. Будемо сподіватися, що і в Україні е-книга
зачепить за живе споживача.
Сьогодні в Інтернет-бібліотеках зберігається сотні тисяч томів
художньої літератури, наукових робіт, конспектів лекцій, рефератів,
доступних впродовж доби в будь-якому куточку планети. Фахівці
стверджують, що е-книга не викликає погіршання зору та головного
болю при багаторазовому використанні. Крім того, поширення е-книг
дозволить врятувати сотні тисяч гектарів лісу від вирубки.
Переконливо, чи не так?
53
3.4. WRITING
Write a letter of complaint on the suggested situations.
1. You have just returned from a holiday to the Crimea (Britain, USA,
Canada), organized by a tour company. Unfortunately the location of
the holiday was changed at the last minute, and on the new tour you
encountered several problems.
2. The jacket you bought for &60 is badly stained. You think that
someone has already worn it! You would like to keep it but you want
some money back to compensate for the damage and to pay for
cleaning it.
3. A CD you bought recently is badly scratched. You haven’t got a
receipt, but you buy a lot of CDs from the shop.
4. Claire’s boyfriend Tom bought her an expensive ‘Reiko’ watch for
her birthday. Two days later it stopped. She took it back to the
‘Reiko’ shop where the manager told her it was an imitation and must
have been bought somewhere else. Write a letter from Clare to her
sister.
5. You recently went to a special sale of CDs that was advertised in the
local newspaper. You were very disappointed with the sale. Write a
letter to the newspaper, complaining about the things that were
wrong and asking them to withdraw the advertisement from the
newspaper.
Ex.1. You will hear an interview with a woman called Tansy Burton, who
runs a company which makes beauty products. For questions 1–5, choose
the answer (A,B,C or D) which fits best according to what you hear. One
mark is given for each correct answer.
1. To what does Tansy attribute her success as a businessperson?

A It was a family tradition.
B It reflects her early training.
C It grew out of a desire to please people.
D It’s something which came naturally to her.
54
2. What was Tansy’s main role in setting up the production company?
A drawing up a business plan
B attracting sufficient investment
C responding to customer preferences
D establishing administrative system
3. According to Tansy, her fragrances are successful because they

A are elegantly packed.
B appeal to a wide range of people.
C suggest an expensive lifestyle.
D reflect changes in consumer taste.
4. Increasingly, Tansy sees people’s choice of fragrances as a reflection

of the wearer’s
A social standing.
B taste in other products.
C emotional state.
D financial solution.
5. In the future, Tansy expects to see

A a wider use of fragrances in society.
B fewer companies involved in producing fragrances.
C single products fulfilling a range of functions.
D increasing profitability for producers of fragrances.

with your partner.
1. Some people say that advertising encourages us to buy things we really

do not need. Others say that advertisements tell us about new products
that may improve our lives. Which viewpoint do you agree with?
2. Which media (TV, magazines, radio, and poster) is the most successful
advertising medium? Why?
3. Strategies used in the ads to persuade the customers to buy products.
Which techniques of persuasion are the most effective and attractive?
4. You work for a company that plans promotional campaigns for different
products. You’ve been asked to advertise a new hi-fi system. Would
you invite celebrities to endorse it?
55
5. Comment on the terms: slanted language, weasel words, subliminal
advertising. What do you know about this advertising?
Ex..1. You will hear part of an announcement about an airline company.

For questions 1-9, complete the sentences.
PRIVILAIR: AIRCRAFT CHARTER COMPANY
When an aircraft is chartered, the client gets use of the plane, (1)
………… and inflight services.
Before the trip, the company’s (2) ……….. discusses the client’s particular
needs.
Privilair sees (3) ……….. as its main selling point.
As well as celebrities, Privilair’s passengers have included members of
governments and (4) ………. .
Privilair planes have plenty of (5) …………. in both first and business
class seats.
An internationally-known (6) ………… once worked on board a Privilair
flight.
Prililair’s new first-class aircraft holds up to (7) ………. passengers.
The two new aircraft have areas where passengers can use (8) ………… .
Privilair flights have visited all the main (9) ……….. in Europe.
Ex. 2. For questions 1 – 16, match the following words with appropriate
definitions.
1. to boost (sales) a. to inflict similar trouble, harm,

injury, etc
2. brand name b. a very rich, important and influential
man
3. catch phrase c. the name given to a particular
product by the company that produces
it for sale
4. commercial breaks d. a sensitive issue that causes argument
5. to get even with e. a large notice, often with a picture on
it, that is displayed in a public place
56
6. keeping up with the Jones’s f. to supply or make available food,
services, etc
7. to launch products g. to help or encourage sth.
8. a letter of inquiry h. statements that are deliberately not
clear
9. logo i. progressing at the same level as sb.
10. to lure customers j. a well-known phrase first used by an
entertainer, etc.
11. mogul k. to put sth. into action; to start
12. poster l. a printed symbol designed for and
used by a company or a society as its
special sign
13. to purvey sth. m. to change gradually to a lower or
worse condition
14. a real bone of content n. request for help, information about
sb.
15. to slide downhill o. to attract or tempt customers
16. weasel words p. pauses during a TV programme to
announce sth.
where necessary.
A catch phrase comes to be (1) … everyone’ s lips and stays (2) … use (3)
… decades. 2. You must come (4) … … a new advertising campaign for
the autumn. 3. I have tried it (5) … … the children’s clothes and it really
works. 4. I might stop smoking if cigarettes go (6) … … price. 5. When
factory production came (7) … the market, national advertising campaigns
and brand-naming of products became necessary. 6. From the beginning of
the 19th century production had steadily expanded and there had been a
corresponding growth (8) … retail outlets. 7. A good example of the
changes that occurred (9) … manufacture and distribution (10) …the turn
of the century can be formed in the soap trade. 8. It translates perfectly
well into Roman, Arabic, Cyrillic and stands (11) … an instantly
recognizable products in Brussels, Bali or Bangkok. 9. Huge resources are
being poured (12) … single advertising campaigns. 10. A trademark is
useless unless the manufacturer sets and maintains high standards (13) …
quality, but once consumers gain confidence (14) ……it, the owner can
use it (15) … a persuader. 11. (16) … these are humorous and entertaining
57
television and radio commercials, appeal (17) … the sense of smell (18) …
the use of perfumed ink on paper. 12. His lack of practice counted (19) …
him in the tennis tournament.
Ex. 4. For questions 1 – 16, read the text carefully and decide which
answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space. One mark is given for each
correct answer.
HOW TO COMPLAIN IN SHOPS
People love to complain. Moaning to friends can be a (1) ……. of relief

from the (2) …….. and strains of work, study or relationships. But when it
comes to protesting to a retailer about (3) ……. goods and services, many
of us find we don’t have the nerve and choose to (4) …….. in silence.
By the time we do (5) ……. summon up the courage to make our (6) …….
, we have generally already allowed the problem to get to us, and we are
angry. In this (7) ……., we can all too (8) ………. become aggressive,
gearing up for battle and turning what should be a rational discussion into
a conflict.
To complain effectively, you need to be specific about your problem and

communicate it clearly using words which are objective and fair. (9) …….
over the top with emotional language and unreasonable claims will get you
nowhere. Good negotiators tend to be calm and logical. They start by
explaining the situation and stating their requirements clearly, without
threat. Most complaints prompt a defensive (10) ……… from the other
person, but by being reasonable yourself, you (11) ……..more chance of
achieving the positive (12) ….….. you want.
If you feel angry or upset about what has happened, by all means tell the
company, but do so calmly, (13) ……. that you understand the situation
from all points of (14) ……., but explaining what you will do if your
complaint is ignored. Be sure to remember, however, that it is unwise to
(15) ……… threats unless you are in a position to (16) ………them out.
58
1 A source B well C cause D way
2 A pressures B pains C stresses D struggles
3 A faulty B inexpert C improper D scruffy
4 A stick B suppress C stay D suffer
5 A essentially B especially C exceptionally D eventually
6 A turn B point C mark D say
7 A manner B form C state D mode
8 A easily B happily C simply D casually
9 A Being B Going C Getting D Feeling
10 A response B respect C revenge D regard
11 A spendB attract C stand D establish
12 A fallout B outcome C turnout D output
13 A revealing B exhibiting C displaying D demonstrating
14 A mind B opinion C view D reason
15 A make B bear C do D carry
16 A fill B work C do D carry
some of the lines to form a word that fits in the space in the same line. One
mark is given for each correct answer (1 – 11).
A TASTE FOR SUCCESS
Founded in 1892, the Coca-Cola Company is today engaged

(1)………in the manufacture and sale of the famous PRIME
carbonated beverage that is a (2) ..…......institution in the CULTURE
United States and a symbol around the world of American
tastes. The drink was (3)………in 1886 by an Atlanta ORIGIN
pharmacist, John S. Pemberton; his bookkeeper, Frank
Robinson, chose the name for the drink and penned it in the
flowing script that became the Coca-cola trademark.
Pemberton originally touted his drink as a tonic for most
common (4) …… . He sold his syrup to local soda fountains, AIL
and, with advertising, the drink became (5)………. successful. EXPECT
By 1891 another Atlanta pharmacist, Asa Griggs Candler had
secured complete (6) …….. of the business for a total cash OWN
outlay of $2.300 and the exchange of some proprietary rights.
In 1899 the Coca-Cola company signed its first (7) .............with AGREE
an independent bottling company, which was allowed to buy
59
the syrup and produce, bottle, and distribute the drink.
Such licensing deals formed the basis of a unique distribution
system that now (8) ……most of the American soft-drink CHARACTER
industry. The post-World War II years saw (9) ………….. DIVERSE
in the packaging of Coca and also in the development or
(10)…….. of new products. Today, Coca-Cola stands as ACQUIRE
one of the most (11) ……. of US businesses. PROSPER
Ex. 6. Complete the sentences with an appropriate form in parentheses (1

– 26).
1. It may be impossible (persuade) (1) ……..my mother (give) (2) ……….

up her job even though she’s having health problems. We can’t even get
her (cut) (3) …… down on her working hours. She enjoys (work) (4)
…….. so much that she refuses (retire) (5) ……… and (take) (6) …… it
easy. I admire her for (dedicate) (7) ….. to her work, but I also want her
to take care of her health.
2. Traffic has become too heavy for the Steinbergs (commune) (8)
……..easily to their jobs in the city. They’re considering (move) (9)
………to an apartment close to their places of work. They don’t want
(give) (10) …….. up their present home, but they need (live) (11) ……..
in the city (be) (12) …… closer to their work so they can spend more
time (do) (13) …….. the things they really enjoy (do) (14) ……… in
their free time.
3. I can’t seem (get) (15) ……… rid of the cockroaches in my apartment.
Every night I see them (run) (16) ……. all over my kitchen counters. It
drives me crazy. I am considering (have) (17 ) ………..the whole
apartment (spray) (18) ………. by a professional pest control expert.
4. The employees were unhappy when the new management took over.
They weren’t accustomed to (treat) (19) …….. disrespectfully by the
managers of the production departments. By (threaten) (20) ……….
(stop) (21) ……….. (work) (22) ………. , they got the company (listen)
(23) ……… to their grievances. In the end, a strike was averted.
5. According to some estimates, well over half of the world’s population is
functionally illiterate. Imagine (be) (24) …….. a parent with a sick child
and (be) (25) ………… unable to read the directions on a medicine
bottle. We all know that it is important for medical directions
(understand) (26) …….. clearly.
60
UNIT 4 ART
4.1. READING
Ex.1. Answer questions 1-18 by referring to the magazine article in which

modern-day artists talk about their work. Match the statements with the
list of artists A-F. One mark is given for each correct answer.
Which artist says
he trained initially in an unrelated field. 1…
he has been an influential figure within the world of art. 2…
an artist’s life is more demanding than he had expected. 3 …
he does not want his works displayed in the conventional way. 4 …5 …
he wishes to appeal to a wide variety of people. 6…
he feels that different art forms have become much less

distinct from each other. 7…
8…
he combines artistic images which would normally seem

incompatible. 9…
he learned his craft in a very flexible environment. 10 …
that practical experience is more important than formal training. 11 …
he has had problems in forging an identity for himself in

the art world. 12 … 13 …
he takes his inspiration from seeing new places. 14 …
new works of art are not always original as everyone imagines. 15 …
61
that he is very concerned with the message his works convey. 16 … 17 …
18 …
CONVERSATIONS WITH ARTISTS
A Tom Bedwyn
A lot of artists limit themselves to business as usual. I’m not sure I have a
regular style. I’m often told that my work incorporates a lot of decorations
– if so, that’s not conscious, as I always like to start from zero with my
paintings, to create something completely different. But I do have to work
within certain limits, and the most important of those is that we live in the
age of reproduction. All sorts of people know my art from magazines,
catalogues or TV. That’s all right with me because I don’t want them to go
to a gallery. But one of the consequences is that I want to create works that
have nearly as strong an impact in a photograph or a video as in real life.
You see, I want my work to have street credibility, to speak directly to
people, so that it doesn’t need the help of the white boxes – the museums
or galleries – to be appreciated.
B Alan Frances
The greatest influence on my way of thinking as a painter came when I
took part in a famous exhibition called ‘Freeze’ when I was a student at
college. That college was a dream for creative people; it was the only place
in the art world that didn’t stipulate which medium we had to work in. All
the other schools divided you into categories, such as sculpture and
painting. Art practice isn’t confined by these old barriers and techniques
any more. I don’t think “Freeze’ was ground-breaking in terms of the
actual work, but there was a massive energy around it. We weren’t trying
to attract the attention of the galleries – it was more a case of ‘we don’t
need them, we can do it anyway’.
C Marcus O’Connor
I didn’t actually study art at college: I qualified in electronics: I qualified at
an evening class. I never enjoyed school, nor work, which I have always
tried to avoid, without success. In fact, I found my path in art a bit late –
only eight years ago. For me, art is just a joke like any other that can be
learned while you do it. When I was small, I always thought I wouldn’t
want to do any work, and that art should be like that. But now I’m really
working. I don’t have a minute, what with galleries, gallery owners and
62
interviews in different places. I consider the geography of towns as a kind
of library which you use for your own needs; you go where you think you
can feel good for a while. I go around different towns so as to meet new
people, breathe new air and get new ideas.
D Jan Pillin
I’m very flexible – I paint, create logos, design furniture and products and
write comics; but if pushed, I always say that I draw. Illustrators and
cartoonists are the only ones who have accepted me: ‘What are you doing?
You’re not a graphic designer, are you a painter?’ the painters say: “Why
don’t you design furniture? Your furniture is really nice.” And the furniture
designers say: “You should be doing comic books, that’s your business.” I
think my drawings are awful, but I have to say other artists have used my
work to develop their own. Mind you, they haven’t copied any more than I
have. I’ll keep on copying, allowing myself to be influenced by thousands
of authors and images. It’s very positive when you‘re creating things. You
can never start from square one.
E Henric Bader
My work is all about building art into daily life. I would have a much more
comfortable life if I was ‘fine art’ artist; sitting in a studio in the
countryside. But I wanted to be involved in building in the city; I wanted
to contribute to daily life, with all its idiosyncrasies and difficulties. You
see, I had a more practical education than most, learning building
construction at technical high school, and went on to study art and
architecture in Vienna in an environment of artists, stage designers,
painters and sculptors, I was constantly moving between the fine arts and
architecture – today you call it ‘crossover’, and actually the demarcation is
now less rigid. I’ve worked for the advertising industry, for example,
superimposing advertising images onto photographs of buildings. Indeed,
in whatever I do I introduce a foreign element into a given situation, and,
by transformation of scale and meaning, it makes another, very clear
statement. I need to make sure that it’s a statement which is getting
through to people.
F Billy Matuka
I’m always told I favour writing in my art, rather than images. In any
painting there is something which says: ‘Look at me, please’. So I said to
myself: ‘Instead of painting the painting, I’m going to write ‘Look at me,
63
please.’ The painting is only a pretext to say something, so I might as well
say it simply, with words on the painting. Also, I wanted to establish my
own territory, after an initial period of not really knowing where I was
going. Writing went well with desire to tell the truth. It’s been said that art
is a lie, but you have to find the truth somewhere.’
Ex. 2. Read the magazine article about Mara Amats then choose the best
explanation (A, B or C) for these words or phrases (1-10) according to
how they are used in the article. One mark for each correct answer.
A room of my own
MARA AMATS
used to restore frescoes until she decided restoring people was somewhat
more valuable.
By this she meant giving people whose lives were as distinctive as the
icons she worked on the chance to maintain their own ways. Her change of
tack began when she discovered that the beggars hanging around the
church where she was working in Addis Ababa had been embroiderers in
Haile Selassie’s palace and that their only sources of work now were
infrequent church commissions. She looked at their designs, advised how
they could sell them more effectively and in years to come found herself
working among the people in other parts of Africa as well as India and the
Caribbean.
That is why her room in a small flat just off London’s Baker Street is filled
with exotica – of which she herself could claim to be an example. She was
born in Latvia, half-Russian on her mother’s side, and spent her childhood
years in displaced persons’ camps before settling in France, where she was
apprenticed to an icon master who trained her as a restorer. Her artistic
sensitivity is balanced by a strong practical streak and her adventurous
spirit sustains her in her travels to isolated and often dangerous parts of
the world.
Her flat is in what began as a block of artisans’ dwellings, purpose built at

the turn of the century, and mostly occupied then by glove-makers and
other craftsmen: she believes three families lived in the fairly cramped
64
space that is now her base whenever she is in London – ‘the navel of the
world, the crossroads for all these other places’. She has worked on the
development projects in poor countries in the belief that many of the
textiles, pottery and sculpture such countries produce can sell in the West
in their own right and not just on the guilt principle. ‘I start from the other
end, designing products that can sell because they are the best in their price
range.’ Financial help from the West often went down the plughole of
grandiose bureaucratic enterprises. ‘One walks across the field or into
that hut and there is seldom any of that aid visible, though billions are
spent. Now I think we are beginning to have ideas and look at our
methods.’
She went on contract from the Commonwealth Secretariat to the Caribean

where the mechanization of banana-loading meant that the women who
used to hump the bananas to the ships needed new jobs. She experimented
with banana fibre and found it made rather fine paper. Then she went to
Nepal, where people had been making paper since the eleventh century,
using the bark from trees of the daphne family. The trees were never
replanted, contributing to the 40 per cent loss of ground cover in the
Himalayas. ‘I found a water hyacinth that makes splendid paper and now
the people are producing it for several top British firms.’ She has also
helped them market a species of black mushrooms that needs to be
harvested, dried and sold within two months. She brought a sample back
with her and now it is sold in the West End of London.
She herself is an artist and works in paper. On the left hangs a shirt she
made out of water hyancinth paper and pheasant feathers, one of a series of
symbolic representations she has constructed. On the wall to the right of
the shells is a drawing on vellum from a Coptic bible by an Ethiopian
artist, and near it carved figures from West Africa.
Tribal rugs from Persia and Anatolia add their colour and in front of the
table with the skulls a set of saddle-bags originally used by yurt-dwellers
in Kazakhstan find an alternative role on the floor. Mara has just spent
several months in Kazakhstan advising craftspeople how to pick up the
threads of their pre-Revolutionary skills, deliberately crushed in 70
years of ‘socialistic realism’. Their crafts were mummified, she says;
instead of their symbolic patterns and native decorative arts they had to
make busts of Lenin or representations of people driving tractors. ‘Many
65
of these crafts survived only in the more remote areas where old people
kept them going because of dowry customs and so on. The younger ones
see them as living libraries of their past – please read them with us, they
asked, so that we can earn our living through them again.’
1 exotica 6 there is very seldom any of that aid

visible
A beautiful or exciting sounds A we rarely see any concrete use made
B curious or rare art objects of the money donated
C strange customs B we often witness the money
being put to inappropriate use
C we are never given an opportunity to
see how the money has been used
2 sustains her 7 an alternative role
A carries her weight A another character to present
B supports her financially B an optional part to play
C strengthens her morale C a different purpose in life
3 fairly cramped space 8 to pick up the threads
A rather confined area A to learn how to sew properly
B very uncomfortable quarters B to start where they left off
C quite limited scope C to repair damage done to
4 the navel of the world 9 deliberately crushed
A the dregs of civilization A purposely squeezed
B the hub of the universe B prudently conquered
C the scourge of society C wiped out on purpose
5 went down the plughole of 10 mummified
grandiose bureaucrati
enterprises A shrivelled and dried up
B respected and revered
C forgotten and untalked of
A was siphoned off by
important local officials
B drained away on account of
inappropriate business deals
C disappeared in extravagant
official ventures
66
4.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex.1. Match the following words with appropriate definitions (1-15).
1. canvas a. a stick of soft coloured chalk used for drawing

2. cast b. a statue of a person on a horse
3. collage c. a picture to go with the words of a book
4. colour-blind d. the art of carving designs on metal, stone
5. connoisseur e. a form of art in which pieces of paper, cloth, etc.
are stuck to a surface
6. curator f. a person whose portrait is being painted
7. engraving g. a keeper of a museum or other collection
8. equestrian statue h. a strong rough type of cloth for painting on
9. easel i. the art of drawing objects on a flat surface so as
to give the right impression of the height,
width and position in relation to each other
10.illustration j. unable to see difference between certain colours
11. mediocre k. the representation of objects which are not
living
12. pastel l. an object made by pressing soft material into a
mould
13. perspective m. a wooden frame for holding a picture while it is
painted
14. still-life n. a person with good judgment on matters in taste
15. sitter o. not very good, of fairly low quality
where necessary.
1.In the 19th century, easels were moved out-of-doors and colour was
broken (1) … minute areas. 2. Another friend has just changed careers and
taken (2) … painting. 3. His earth-bound scenes teem (3) …life, every one
of the actors is engaged (4) …a special plot of his own. 4. He was entirely
(5) … key (6) … the moral mood of his age. 5. The quality of Hogarth as
an artist is seen (7) … advantage (8) … his sketches. 6. A few painters
resisted attempts (9) ….. art experts to draw them (10) … in the discussion
of the new art trend. 7. For this painting he was awarded (11) … the
golden medal. 8. He had gone a bit too far (12) … … his time. 9. We can
see Turner’s realization of an interplay (13) … dark and light, warm and
67
cold masses. 10. Very often the public didn’t approve (14) … this style of
painting. 11.Consequently all colours act and react (15) … one another. 12.
The Impressionists refrained (16) … mixing colours (17) … their palettes
and applied them (18) … minute touches (19) … the canvas. 13. There was
a picture (20) … her on page three, which made her unique combination of
rare features more picturesque than (21) … flesh .
Ex. 3. Read the text below. Use the word given at the end of the lines to
form a word that fits in the space in the same line (1-10).
A MODERN ITALIAN ARTIST
Amedeo Modigliani (1884 – 1920) was an Italian painter and

Sculptor whose (1)…….. paintings, which were characterized ORIGIN
by asymmetry of composition, (2) .………… of figure, and LONG
simple but monumental use of line, are among the best of the
20th century.
They have also gained (3) ……… for the entirely POPULAR
personal atmosphere with which they are invested: a kind of
mute (4) …. between the artist and sitter that implicates RELATION
the spectator in a truly (5) ……. way. REMARK
After suffering from serious illnesses as a child, he was forced
To give up (6) ……… education, and it was then that CONVENTION
he began to study painting.
After his studies in Italy, Modigliani left for Paris. There he
Was overwhelmed by the painting of Paul Cezanne, which
exerted an (7) ………… influence on the earliest phase of QUESTION
his work.
Furthermore, his (8) …….. study of African sculpture made EXTEND
a profound impression on his painting style.
Modigliani was not a professional portraitist in the strict sense
of the word. His paintings are almost always portraits of relatives,
(9) …… of the Parisian literary scene of his times and the PERSON
contemporary artistic world, along with many portraits of
(10) ……. persons. IDENTIFY
Ex. 4. Read the text below and think of the word which best fits each
space. Use only one word in each space (1- 14).
68
VERMEER
The seventeenth- century Dutch painter Johannes Vermeer is famous (1)

…… his realistic paintings. Many experts have tried to work out how he
was so good (2) …… painting accurate details. In his day, it was usual (3)
……painters to draw the picture first, (4) ….. Vermeer seemed capable (5)
……. painting without doing this. Even the Victorians, who were
responsible (6) ….. Vermeer’s present great reputation, were puzzled (7)
……. why his paintings were so similar (8) ……. photographs.
Philip Steadman of University College, London has no doubt (9) …… the

reason. He claims Vermeer used an early form of camera, called a camera
obscure, (10)…. a means (11) …. creating accurate images. Steadman was
suspicious (12) …… a mysterious black box in one painting, saying that it
is exactly where Vermeer’s camera would have been. But Steadman says
even if he is right (13) …… Vermeer’s method, we shouldn’t lose respect
(14) …… the artist’s talent.
Ex. 5. Fill in that, who, why, which, whose, where, (1-15).
THE WHITE HOUSE
One of the most famous buildings in the world is the White House, (1)
…… is the official home of the US president. The White House is in
Washington DC, (2) …… there are many other important buildings and
monuments. The city, (3) …… was founded in 1790, was deliberately
planned as a national capital. George Washington, (4) …… was the first
US president and (5) ……. name was given to the city, wanted it to be the
place (6) …… the nation’s government would permanently reside.
The White House, (7) …… was originally named Executive Mansion, was
built in pale grey sandstone. The colour of the stone, (8) …… was so
different from the surrounding red brick buildings, was the reason (9) ……
the mansion became known as the White House. The main building, (10)
…… many presidents have lived, is a large complex (11) …… consists of
over 130 rooms.
People find the White House fascinating and that is the reason (12) ……
the parts of the complex (13) …… are open to the public are toured every
69
year by one and a half million people (14) …….. want to see the place (15)
……. their president lives and works.
4.3. MEDIATION
СІКСТИНСЬКА МАДОННА
Славнозвісна ”Сікстинська мадонна” (Дрезденська галерея) –

вершина творчості Рафаеля. Перше враження від картини: постать
статної жінки, яка несе хлопчика, тримаючи його міцними, але
ніжними руками. Уже в тому, як вона тримає сина, і навіть у лініях,
якими окреслено постать і покривало, є щось невимовно сумне,
принадне й разом величне, таке, що кожній людині нагадує матір.
Легкий вітерець надуває покривало, відкидає край синього плаща
мадонни. Дивне небо, в якому клубочаться хмаринки та юрмляться
безвинні душі дітей-янголяток, оточує постать мадонни. З безмежною
розчуленістю й захопленням дивиться в обличчя мадонни чоловік
похилого віку у парадному папському вбранні – святий Сікст.
Схилилася, притуливши руки до серця, опустила очі до долу свята
Варвара. Наближається до глядача, не йде – пливе повітрям мадонна.
Хлопчик дивиться з докором, а мати зі співчуттям та готовністю все
зрозуміти і простити...
“Сікстинська мадонна” силою свого впливу на глядача
перевершує всіх інших мадонн, будь-коли створених. Довгий час
нікому не спадало на думку, чому, перебуваючи в зеніті своєї слави,
переобтяжений замовленнями папи, кардиналів, королів, геніальний
художник написав свій кращий твір на замовлення “чорних монахів”
далекого від Рима провінційного містечка П‘яченці. А річ у тому, що
“Сікстинська мадонна” створювалася не як вівтарний образ для
собору П‘яченці. Мала вона висіти над місцем поховання
благодійника Рафаеля – Юлія ІІ. Ось чому тіара, яку зняв святий
Сікст, покровитель роду Роверо, перед мадонною, увінчана жолудем –
гербовим знаком Юлія, ось чому явилась йому мадонна зі святою
Варварою, яка, за повір‘ям, полегшує муки вмираючих. Нарешті,
завіса і постаті янголяток, що виглядають з-під нижнього краю
полотна, є властивими деталями ренесансних скульптурних
надгробків.
70
З 1754 року найліпша з мадонн Рафаеля оселилася у Дрездені. ЇЇ
купив король Август ІІІ.
ДЖОКОНДА
Знамените, неперевершене творіння Леонардо викликає
надзвичайно сильні емоції і сьогодні. Суперечки щодо цієї картини не
змовкають впродовж століть. Який зміст цієї картини? На ній
зображена молода, вродлива жінка чи навпаки, холодна,
неприваблива, вселяюча неспокій? Хто послужив моделлю для
написання цього твору?
Сміливим новаторством та глибоким філософським змістом
пронизаний і задум картини. Вважається, що цей витвір мистецтва не
є зображенням певної особистості. Джоконда написана з
підкресленою майже програмною простотою в цілковитій
відповідності з ренесансним поглядом. Людина – частина природи,
найпрекрасніше її творіння, її вершина, її вінець.
Як би не тлумачили образ “Джоконди”, безсумнівно, що
Леонардо приваблювали не тільки пропорційність її фігури та
гармонійність рис її обличчя, але і її глибокий проникливий розум,
про що говорить її погляд, багатство інтелекту та витонченість
емоцій. Матеріал для таких емоцій могла дати художнику не одна
Мона Ліза чи Констанца д‘Авалос, але й багато інших талановитих,
освічених, духовно багатих жінок Ренесансу.
В образі Джоконди Леонардо розкриває не тільки єдність
людини і природи, не тільки фізичну та духовну гармонію, але й дає
глибоке розуміння людської душі. За допомогою тільки йому
притаманної світотіні Леонардо передає ледь помітний рух на обличчі
Джоконди, легку посмішку, зосередженість. За легкою посмішкою
відчувається значно складніше духовне життя. Це справляє враження
чогось невисловленого, тобто, як кажуть, її загадковість.
Леонардо вдалося неймовірне. Він зобразив обличчя Мадонни
так, ніби вона сама розглядає глядача. Сама намагається проникнути в
його характер. Леонардо з математичною точністю розрахував
відстань, з якої будуть дивитися на його картину, зробив цю відстань
фокусною, тобто помістив глядача у фокус її погляду. Цілком
імовірно, що образ Джоконди розкривається не у взаємодії з іншими
71
фігурами та предметами – їх немає на картині, а саме у взаємодії з
глядачем.
Мандруючи залами Лувру, глядач раптом відчуває, ніби сама
Джоконда розглядає його із оточення свого поетичного пейзажу
розумним, пронизливим, ласкаво-скептичним поглядом, ледь
посміхаючись, буквально не зводить з нього погляду. І як би не
намагався глядач не помічати цей погляд, повністю йому це не
вдається, бо направлений на нього погляд Джоконди з картини
наполегливо повертає погляд глядача до самого себе. Він, глядач, і є
другою фігурою, ненаписаною Леонардо, але яка входила в задум
художника, з нею взаємодіє образ художника.
4.4. WRITING
Choose any suggested picture to describe. Do not forget that the ‘reading‘
process is divided into four steps: description, analysis, interpretation and
judgment. Your composition would total 200 words.
Ex. 1. You will hear a radio announcement about two events happening
later today. For questions 1-8, complete the notes.
EVENTS IN LANGHAM TODAY

First Event:
- being held at: (1)_--------------------
- features: painting by Wendy Wilson recently seen on
(2)--------------------
- also being launched: a book called (3) ---------------------------
- Wendy’s speciality: she doesn’t use (4) -------------------------when
painting
opening time: (5)-----------------------
Second Event:
- being held in: (6) -----------------------
- features: Edward Colne at work
- Edward’s speciality: objects made from (7) ---------------------
- Today’s piece: made from (8) ----------------------- and agricultural tools.
72
with your partner.
1. If an artist presented you with a piece of painting and you didn’t like it,
would you tell the truth to the painter or would you pretend that you
appreciate it?
2.What do you know about the development of High Renaissance in Italy?
3. What do you learn about the Golden Age of the British Art, its distinct
national character?
4. Give a detailed description of Gainsborough’s pictures. What was the

function of landscape in his portraits? What effect does he achieve with his
peculiar colour scheme?
5. What were John Constable and William Turner’s favourite subjects and
themes? The forerunner of what trends in art was Turner?
6. How far do you appreciate Modern Art? What is impressionism? Were

you impressed by Claude Monet’s picture entitled ‘Sunrise, Impression‘.
7. Do you think people should be ‘educated’ to appreciate modern art?

How could this be done?
8. Art is not a handicraft; it is the transmission of feelings that the artist has
experienced.
9. Who is your favourite artist? What trend in art are you bent on? What
things influence your artistic tastes?
10. Should entry to the museums and art exhibitions be free? What are the
advantages and disadvantages of free entry?
Ex. 1. You will hear an interview with a young artist who is talking about
her life and work. For questions 1-9, complete the sentences.
73
Lynda identifies (1) ……… as the two most important themes in her work.
Lynda says that the art school she attended had a (2) ………….. approach
to drawing.
Lynda describes her initial riverside sketches as a (3) …………. .
Lynda likes both the size and the (4) …………. of her previous studio.
Lynda describes the journey from home to her previous studio as (5)
…………. .
Lynda was surprised to discover that one of her neighbours was a (6)
…………. .
At first, Lynda worried that she might get (7) … working so close to home.
Lynda explains that her work has become (8) …… in colour since she
changed her studio.
Lynda remains convinced that (9) ………… is the best surface for her to
work on.
Ex. 2. Match the following words with appropriate definitions. Half a

mark is given for each correct answer (1-16).
1. arcade a. a painting that represents scenes from daily life

2. applied art b. the art that restores sb. to health
3. bequest c. the particular way in which an artist paints with
a brush
4. brushwork d. series of arches carried on columns
5. chiaroscuro e. a picture painted with colours mixed with water
6. commission f. art or forms of art that appeal to sense of beauty
7. etching g. a flexible knife used by artists for applying paints
8. the Fine Arts h. a type of still-life representing a vase of flowers
9. fresco i. the forms of art such as pottery, glass, embroidery
10. flower piece j. the art of making a picture using a needle and acid
11. genre painting k. the process of printing from a smooth surface
sothat ink sticks only to the design to be printed
12. healing art l. a piece of work given to sb. to do
13. impressionism m. a design painted on a wall while the plaster is wet
14. lithography n. a thing that one leaves to sb. else when one dies
15. palette knife o. the treatment of light and dark parts in a painting
16. water-colour p. a style of painting that creates the general
impression of a subject by using effects of colour
and light
74
Ex. 3. Fill in the blanks (1– 21) with the correct particle or preposition
where necessary.
1. The Gallery acquires about 80 new portraits a year, about half (1) …
bequest or gift.
2. The earliest work (2) … Leonardo’s hand which we know today is
the angel (3) … profile (4) … the left (5) … Andrea del Verrochio’s
‘The Baptism of Christ’.
3. In the famous statue (6) … David Michelangelo achieved the
difficult transition (7) … normal scale (8) … the colossal one (79) … a
flaw.
4. (10) … from the unfinished tomb (11) … Pope Julius II, the most
important work of this period is the elaborate painting (12) … the
ceiling of the Sistine Chapel (13) … the Vatican.
5. (14) … stake is nothing less than our appreciation of Michelangelo
and scores (15) … other major artists.
6. The exhibition drew (16) … a close.
7. (17) … the Impressionists were bent (18) … freeing nature (19)
….sham, so the Expressionists hoped to liberate their own feelings from
all trace (20) … artificiality.
8. In the study for the Sistine Chapel ceiling the Lybian Sybil is drawn
(21) … red chalk.
Ex. 4. Read the text below. Use the word given at the end of the lines to
form a word that fits in the space in the same line (1-10).
A TIME OF CHANGE
What we mean by the Renaissance is the rich (1) …… CULTURE

development that began in the late fourteenth century.
It (2) …… in northern Italy and spread northwards ORIGIN
during the subsequent two centuries.
Literally meaning rebirth, this was characterized by a
(3) …………interest in classical learning and values. NEW
Three discoveries, the compass, firearms and the printing
press were essential conditions for the new epoch. The first
of three, the compass, made (4).............possible and became NAVIGATE
the basis for great voyages of discovery.
75
The second, firearms, gave the Europeans military (5) …….. SUPERIOR
over the American and Asiatic cultures. Finally, printing
played a vital role in disseminating the new ideas of the
Renaissance. The spirit of the Renaissance ultimately took
many forms. It was expressed at first by intellectual movement
called (6) ……… . HUMAN
This philosophy can be best understood as a reaction against the
seemingly (7) …... dark ages in which every aspect of life TERMONATE
was seen through divine light. It brought with it a new
confidence in man’s worth, in striking contrast to the biased
mediaeval emphasis on the (8) ……. nature of man. PERFECT
The humanists of the Renaissance took as their frame of
(9) …………man himself. REFER
For perhaps the first time in western history, man’s potential
seemed (10) ………… . LIMIT
There was so much to be done, for the restless men of this new age.
space. Use only one word in each space.
(1- 16).
TATE MODERN
The Tate Modern, a gallery (1) …… modern art in London, opened (2)
……. doors in May 2000. In its first year, it attracted more (3) …… 5.25
million visitors, but some people were surprised (4) ….. its success. A lot
of people in the UK are not interested (5) …… modern art, and even get
angry (6) …… the large sums of money which are spent (7) …… it. The
museum’s success has been to bring (8) ….. a new audience for art. Half
the visitors are under 35 years of age, and the gallery (9) …… helped to
make modern art ‘cool’. How is this possible? Firstly, many visitors talk
to each other (10) …… the building itself, (11) ……. that the art on
display. The building (12) ……converted from a power station, and the
architects (13) ……. designed the Tate Modern decided to keep many of
the building’s industrial features. Secondly, the gallery organized its
collection into themed areas, such as ‘Still life, Real Life and Objects’,
(14) ……. of arranging the works in the order they were produced, (15)
…….is the approach people have got used (16) ……. over the years.
76
Ex. 6. Fill in who, which, whose, where, why, that, how, whom (1-21).
1. Our new neighbours, (1) …… live in the flat (2) ……. is just below
ours, own the gallery (3) ……. is showing the Picasso exhibition.
2. It is possible (4) ….. the most important happening in the years Goya
spent in Saragossa was (5) …… he got to know a group of artists (6) …….
most outstanding member was Francisco Bayeu, (7) …… went to Madrid
in 1763 (8) …… he began to work under the orders of Mengs.
3. Young Diego Velazques from Seville, (9) …… took his maternal
surname , began studying philosophy and Latin rhetoric, but soon realized
(10) ……. neither syllogisms nor the study of Latin had anything at all in
common with his incipient artistic vocation.
4. El Greco must have stayed in Venice till 1576, leaving it in that year,
perhaps to escape from the plague (11) …….caused the death of Titian. It
appears (12) ….. he went first to Madrid, (13) ….. he probably got to
know Dona Jeronima de las Cuevas, an aristocratic lady (14) ……some
say was his mistress and others his lawful wife, by (15) …… he had a son
called Jorge Manuel (16) ……. might be the young gentleman painted by
El Greco in the portrait in the Museum of Fine Arts in Seville.
5. There is a legend in (17) ……… Zurbaran is the hero: it states (18) ……
in his village, Zurbaran did a caricature of a certain rich landowner named
Silverio de Luarca with such spitefulness (19) …… the man ridiculed
decided to take revenge, (20) …… he did by killing the artist’s father. The
legend goes on to tell (21) …… the son of the murdered man recognized
the odious Silverio in Madrid and ran him through with his sword.
UNIT 5 PEOPLE AND PERSONALITIES
5.1. READING
Ex. 1. You are going to read a newspaper article about happiness. Seven
(A –H) the one which fits each gap (1-8). There is one extra paragraph
which you do not need to use.
77
THE SECRETS OF TRUE HAPPINESS
A happy nature is a gift we all wish we’d been born with. Everybody
knows someone with this gift: the cheerful type of person with a positive
attitude who will always say a glass is half full rather than half empty. It’s
the person who is not easily put off when things go wrong and who
appears to lead a happier life as a result. (1) ---------.
But what is the secret of happiness? And how can we achieve it?
Psychologists define this feeling of well-being as ‘when thoughts and

feelings about one’s life are mainly positive’. The key seems to be
contentment with what you already have, emotionally, materially and
professionally. The more people try to keep up with others, for example,
the more likely they are to be dissatisfied with life. (2) ----------
David Lykken, Professor of Psychology at the University of Minnesota, is

the leading specialist in happiness. As a result of studying 300 sets of
twins, he now believes that we each have our own fixes ‘happiness point”,
a level we always return to, whatever happens to us in life. (3) -------------
But does this mean we are stuck with the level of happiness we were born
with? Dr. Michael Issac, a psychiatrist, believes this is not necessarily the
case. This is because although a person’s temperament is not easily
changed, their character can be. The former determines what kind of things
make someone happy, but not how much pleasure that person obtains from
them. (4) ---------. This is why Dr Isaac believes we need to study happy
people and learn how to be like them.
(5) ------- They also tend to be interested in things other than themselves.
This could be through their day-to day-work, for example, or by caring for
others less fortunate, or by having some kind of spiritual focus to their life.
Happy individuals also tend to relate to other people and are able to give
and receive affection. (6) ------- . They are, therefore, more likely to belong
to things like sports teams, choirs and political parties. Researchers at
Harvard University have found that people involved in such activities were
78
happier than those who were not, and that this had nothing to do with how
well-off people were financially.
Another factor in happiness appears to be physical activity. Exercise

improves a person’s mood and gets rid of tension. But there must be a
balance between activity and rest, because stress results in unhappiness.
(7) ---------
But mental activity can be just as important. Psychologists believe it’s

possible to train yourself to recognize happiness and, therefore, feel the
benefits of it more often.
(8) -------One way of doing this is to set yourself the task of noticing, say,
five different happy moments in the day. The more you recognize when
there is a decision to be made about how you feel, the better you’ll become
at choosing happiness over misery, it is claimed.
A That’s why being part of a social group, such as a family, a community

or a club adds to their overall sense of well-being.
B Such people, for example, seem to find satisfaction in activities which

are meaningful and give a feeling of personal achievement.
C The latter develops in response to the experiences a person has during

his or her life.
D There will always be someone else with more than you, so trying to
compete can often lead to frustration and anxiety.
E To avoid this, it is important to pick a sport or activity you enjoy and

which you do when you want to, rather than you think you should.
F In other words, no matter how happy or unhappy an individual event

may make us, this is just a temporary state.
G The key, apparently, is not taking your feelings for granted, but rather
learning to celebrate them.
H Other scientists, however, maintain that happiness is not so difficult to

achieve.
79
I Such people may be healthier too, since there seems to be a link
between happiness and good health.
Ex. 2. You are going to read a newspaper article about happiness. Seven
(A –H) the one which fits each gap (1-7). There is one extra paragraph
which you do not need to use.
HAPPY AS YOUR GENES ALLOW
The true key to happiness, says researcher David Lykken, lies in our genes.
To many of us, this notion might seem absurd. Humans seem to be on an
emotional roller coaster, the ups and downs of which often appear to be
determined by fate. We feel good when we win an award or make a new
friend; bad when we have to face one of life’s inevitable setbacks.
1 ------------------------ ----------------
Lykken’s interest in happiness was sparked by his earliest research into its
possible determinants. Scientists have tried for years to identify a link
between contentment and marital status, socioeconomic position,
professional success and other factors. Yet they invariably come up empty
handed. “I was intrigued by the way that things like beauty, wealth and
status never seemed to make much difference,” says Lykken, a semi-
retired professor at the university of Minnesota.
2 ----------------------------------------
As part of the comprehensive research on the siblings, Lykken had asked
his subjects a range of questions about how happy they felt. He decided to
revisits those studies to see if he could establish a genetic connection. The
results, says Lykken, were surprising. He found a very high correlation
between happiness and genes as revealed by the similarities in the twins’
responses to questions, irrespective of whether they had been raised
together or apart.
3 -----------------------------------------
Nine years on, therefore, he decided to ask the same subjects the same
questions. The evidence Lykken found suggested that their contentment
was 90 per cent genetic. Both twins’ previous responses and those made
almost a decade later enabled the answers of the other twin to be predicted
with a high level of accuracy. Lykken’s first reaction was to label the
pursuit of happiness as a futile exercise.
4 -----------------------------------------
80
In his own life, Lykken concentrates on completing small tasks that give
him a great deal of satisfaction. “I’ve just spent the morning writing, which
is something I like and that I am pretty good at,” he says. ”This afternoon,
I’ll bake some loaves of bread, because I need that for my morning toast. I
just discovered that American Psychological Association wants to give me
an award, and that makes me feel good, but maybe not as good as that
daily baking.
5 -----------------------------------------
The demeanour of those we live with is another vital factor. Teenagers
with happy parents tend to be happy themselves. It is not until they leave
home that they find their own set point. Likewise, a husband or wife’s
inner contentment has a large bearing on that of their spouse. Marrying an
upbeat person is probably the best mood enhancer around.
6 -----------------------------------------
In the science fiction work Brave New World, for example, people who
took ‘happy pills’ were incapable of seeing life as it truly was. Fans of
Woody Allen, the perpetually depressed actor and film maker, will
remember the scene in the film Annie Hall in which he asked the strolling
couple why they are so happy. “Because we are so shallow and mindless,”
they reply.
7 -----------------------------------------
Lykken is skeptical. “Even if you can speak their language, they might not
have the same psychological vocabulary for expressing how they feel at
any given moment,’ he says. Lykken refuses to believe that there is any
correlation between the state of the society’s technical or intellectual
development and personal happiness. In fact, he argues that good humour
is probably favoured by evolution. The gloomiest probably don’t do very
well in the romance stakes,’ he theories. ‘ So, as a human race, we’re
probably getting slightly happier over time.’
A Then I began to ask myself whether those findings may have been
influenced by how people were feeling on a certain day – if they had just
cut themselves, for example, or had trouble finding a parking space,’ he
says.
B Lykken also advocates control of anger as another regular way of

boosting happiness questions. ‘People would rather feel anger than feel
scared,’ he says. ‘When we are angry we feel strong, but in the long run, I
believe it’s more harmful to happiness than anything else.’
81
C The surest way to do this, Lykken believes, is to lose sight of our
purpose in life. We describe the case of a Californian firefighter - the
patient of a friend – who recently retired from the service and quickly
became depressed. His mood picked up when he discovered that many
windows in the neighbourhood needed to have things fixed round the
house.
D Some philosophers question whether humans should actually be

seeking such happiness including arrangements in the first place. Joy is
sometimes associated with ignorance, they argue, causing happy people to
‘see the world through rose-tinted glasses’.
E According to Lykken, however, each person possesses a ‘happiness set

point’ – the level of contentment to which we return after the impact of
such specific events is absorbed. While humans titter wildly around that
point during their lives, experiencing moments of extreme elation or
depression, in the long run they gravitate back to their pre-set happiness
level.
F ‘I said at the time that trying to be happier might be the same as trying
to be taller,’ he recalls, but he no longer views his research in that light.
While the individual’s sense of well-being might be 90 per cent
predetermined, people still have substantial leeway to control their
emotions. Lykken believes humans can – and should – aim to achieve
happiness slightly above their pre-set level.
G In the late 1990s, the psychologist realized that he might be able to

shed some further light on the subject. ‘That was a happy moment,’ he
jokes. Over a long period of time, Lykken had been following the progress
of 300 pairs of identical twins. Identical twins help scientists differentiate
between the effects of the environment and heredity. Because twins’
genetic make-up is the same, small differences between them argue in
favour of heredity. Large divergences point to the environment as the
greater determining factor.
H Some people would rule out even this possibility, insisting that
happiness is inconsistent with modern times. Contemporary lives are so
stressful, they say, that joy becomes elusive. Primitive tribes are better off.
82
We should feel nostalgic for ‘simpler’ times when we felt content with so
much less.
5.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex.1. Match the following words with appropriate definitions (1-16).
1. affable a. saying very little; not communicating at all

2. austere b. a cheerful person who likes to be w
3. a chequered career c. full of great energy or enthusiasm
4. demeanour d. small articles, items of various sorts, without
much value
5. extrovert e. marked by periods of good and bad luck
6. longevity f. a person whose character or abilities make
him not suitable for a job, position
7. moral scruples g. pleasant and friendly, easy to talk
8. melancholy h. deep sadness that lasts for a long time,
9. odds and ends i. reduction of efforts; pretence that you don’t
understand
10. to rely on hunches j. a person who tries to impress others
11. square peg in round
hole k. feelings that prevent one from doing or
allowing sth. that one thinks may be wrong
12. a show-off l. long life
13. a softy-softy
approach m. severe and morally strict
14. taciturn n. to have confidence in an idea based on a
strong feeling
15. trepidation o. great worry or fear about sth unpleasant that
may happen
16. zealous p. a way of behaving; conduct
Ex.2. Fill in the blanks (1 – 19) with the correct particle or preposition
where necessary.
1. I don’t see why anybody has to get (1) … a temper. 2. Eccentrics get (2)
… … more than people can and they do it (3) … the sheer thrust of their
personality. 3. As far as possible (4) … surrender you have to be (5) …
good terms with all people. 4. Many persons strive (6) … high ideas and
83
everywhere life is full of heroism. 5. (7) … a wholesome discipline, be
gentle with yourself. 6. It’s not your fault that they lack (8) … the spirit of
prophecy and art. 7. My parents always drummed some foolish out-of-date
ideas (9) … me. 8. She agreed that her mother tried to bind her (10) …
bands (11) … steel. 9. The children of the famous had enough to put (12)
… … . 10. An intuitional search (13) … knowledge is akin (14) …
Christian mysticism. 11. Typical Ram personalities have minds that go
(15) … their passion (16) … rushing (17) … things. 12. You see now how
everything fits (18) … . 13. It prevents you from getting the most (19) …
… your life.
Ex. 3. For questions 1 – 8, read the text below. Use the words in the list to
the right of the text, to form one word that fits in the same numbered space
in the text.
COMPROMISE IS NOT CURE FOR CONFLICT
The capacity to communicate openly and honestly in a

relationship does not guarantee (1)…………. to distress. VULNERABLE
At times, one person may (2) ……… the other, causing VALUE
frustration and conflict.
A compromise is normally reached, but this amounts to an
(3) …... strategy. AVOID
Perhaps people should abandon the (4) ……… to smooth TEND
things over, in favour of an (5) ……… process, where more EXPLORE
fundamental questions are asked.
Though this may be very (6) ……… at the time, the airingPLEASE
of basic (7) ……… often leads each person to view GRIEF
the other more (8) …….. in the long run. SYMPATHY
Ex. 4. Complete the second sentence so that it has the similar meaning to
the first sentence, using the word given. Do not change the word given.
You must use between three and eight words, including the word given (1-
10).
1. He suffers from headaches, depression and hyperactivity.

prone
He …………………….. hyperactivity.
84
2. She is a person who always lets you down.
on
……………………………………her.
3. Jeremy joined the cricket club a year ago.
member
Jeremy’s ………………………..a year.
4. The suspect could not explain why he had sand in his boots.
account
The suspect ………………………………. in his boots.
5. It is a foregone conclusion that Mark will get the job.
saying
It ……………………………………………. the job.
6. I always think about transport costs when job hunting.
consideration
I always ………………………….. when job hunting.
7. Becky didn’t tell you because she assumed you already knew.
granted
Becky didn’t tell you ………………(that) you already knew.
8. The news was a shock to us.
aback
We ……………………….. news.
9. They tried very hard to finish by midnight.
best
They ……………………………..by midnight.
10. Your sending her flowers in hospital was a thoughtful gesture.
kind
It ……………………………….. in hospital.
Ex. 5. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense (1-16).
1. If she were rich, she …….. (not/have) to work.

2. Go and see a doctor in case you …….(have) a serious illness.
3. You won’t understand this unless you ……(pay) attention.
4. What ……. (you/give) me if I …….(keep) your secret.
5. Even if he …….(beg) me I would not help him.
6. If this case ….. (go) to trial, it will cause a national outcry.
7. Supposing no one ………. (invent) the silicon chip, …….(things/be)
different now?
8. What ……. (you/do) if the teacher caught you cheating in the test?
85
9. If I …….(be), I ……….. (not/listen) to his lies.
10. If he ……..(not/eat) that sandwich, he would not have suffered from
food poisoning.
11. Father Christmas won’t bring you any presents unless you …… (be) a
good girl.
12. As long as you ……..(do) your best, no one will criticize you.
13. He put the answer phone on in case anyone ……. (want) to leave him a
message.
14. Supposing we ………(be/stop) by the police, what …… (we/say)?
15. If you ……. (tell) me you were cold, I ……. (put) the fire on.
Ex.6. Write the correct conditional for the following sentence (1-12).
1. He must eat meat. He asked for a steak.

…………………………………………………….
2. She isn’t reliable. She would never have let you down.
…………………………………………………….
3. They didn’t ban hunting. The tiger is endangered.
…………………………………………………….
4. Aren’t you sure? Why did you agree to it then?
…………………………………………………….
5. My father loves Shirley Bassey. He bought all her records.
…………………………………………………….
6. He is a pessimist. He always looks on the black side.
……………………………………………………
7. He hasn’t got a free weekend. He would have visited us, then.
…………………………………………………….
8. He has made a lot of friends. He isn’t lonely now.
…………………………………………………….
9. You are soaked. Why didn’t you bring an umbrella with you?
…………………………………………………….
10. He can’t be in trouble. He would have called by now.
…………………………………………………….
11. He had lost his security pass. He wouldn’t be allowed to enter the
building.
…………………………………………………….
12. They can’t have caught the ferry. Otherwise they would be here by
now.
……………………………………………………
86
5.3. MEDIATION
АНГЛІЙЦІ, ЯКІ ВОНИ...
Національний характер живе скрізь. Але жодному іншому

народу це не так притаманно як англійцям, які ніби мають патент на
живучість своєї натури. Стабільність та постійність – найяскравіші
риси англійців. Вони менше, ніж інші народи, піддаються впливу
часу. Важливо підкреслити, що при всій своїй стабільності, характер
складається із досить суперечливі, навіть парадоксальних рис, деякі з
них досить очевидні, інші навпаки – важко помітні.
Матеріалістичний народ – хто має сумніви щодо цього? Англійці
дали світу велику кількість містиків, поетів, ідеалістів. Народ
колоністів, вони виявляють безмежну прихильність до своєї країни,
до свого народу. Невтомні морехідці та землероби, вони одночасно
пристрасні садоводи. Їх допитливість дозволила їм познайомитись з
кращим з того , чим володіють інші держави, але все ж вони
залишились віддані своїй країні. Захоплюючись французькою кухнею,
англійці не імітуватимуть її у себе вдома. На рідкість
законослухняний народ, вони обожнюють читати про злочини та
насильство. Будучи втіленням конформізму, вони в той же час є
закоренілими індивідуалістами, і серед них є багато ексцентриків.
Все це парадокси, до яких слід додати ще один: вони рідко
бувають загадковими та непередбаченими. Несправедливо
стверджувати, ніби англійці ніколи не мінялись. Зміни відбуваються
скрізь. На краще чи на гірше, споконвічні риси англійської натури і
зараз глибоко впливають на національний характер та загальний
стиль життя.
Англійці не люблять розголошувати стан своїх справ. Якщо це
письменники, вони не розмовляють про свої книжки. Якщо це
мислителі, вони не обговорюють свої теорії. Якщо це політики, вони
не оприлюднюють свої програми. Коротко кажучи, вони ніби
вважають своє трудове життя чимось відокремленим від життя в
суспільстві.
Англія – це країна терпіння, наполегливості, розважливої
послідовності в думках; країна, яка поважає не гучну абстрактну
теорію, а маленькі тверді камінчики повсякденного досвіду.
87
Нічого, здавалось би, не приховує про себе Англія. І ніхто так не
вміє сміятися над нею, як вона сама над собою.
ЯК БУТИ ІНОЗЕМЦЕМ В АНГЛІЇ.
Іноземцем взагалі не варто бути. Це непристойно і ознака

поганого смаку. Немає рації робити вигляд, що це не так. Злочинець
може виправитися і стати гідним громадянином своєї країни.
Іноземець не може виправитися. Він завжди залишиться іноземцем.
Він може стати британцем, але ніколи не стане англійцем.
Варто змиритися з сумною дійсністю. Є благородні англійці, які
можуть вам пробачити. Є щедрі душі, які можуть зрозуміти, що це не
ваша провина. Не забувайте, що англійці вважають іноземців
потішними. Їм здається комічним, що люди розмовляють іноземними
мовами, тиснуть один одному руки.
Англія та англійці стали володарями світу ще з наполеонівських
часів. Важко очікувати, щоб англійці не стали зверхніми, стільки часу
домінуючи у світі.
Попри все, Англія чудова, багата традиціями країна. Щоб її
зрозуміти, необхідно подолати звичку підходити до іншого народу зі
своїми мірками. Поводьтеся скромно. У Франції вважається грубим
дати розмові затихнути. В Англії – поспішати підтримувати її. Якщо
ви чемпіон світу з тенісу, скажіть: “Так, я граю з горем навпіл”. Якщо
ви один перепливли Атлантику на маленькому човні, скажіть: “Я
трохи займаюсь парусним спортом”.
В багатьох відношеннях англійці найввічливіший та
найзухваліший народ у світі. Їх ввічливість виникає з поваги до
людської особистості і заохочується доброзичливістю. Англійська
ввічливість – це неперевершене мистецтво. Навіть якщо з вас
вірьовки в‘ють, цей процес втілений в таку галантну форму, що ви
нізащо не здогадаєтесь, що вас використовують.
Їх зверхність – це складніше почуття, що являє собою суміш
підозрілості, байдужості та недоброзичливості. В той же час англієць
привітний, людяний, витриманий. Він має почуття обов‘язку,
громадського порядку, бережливості та любові до тварин.
88
5.4. WRITING
1. Write a descriptive assay about a person you admire or a suggested

personality, explaining why you admire him/her (in about 250 words).
Follow the guidelines for descriptive essays in your textbooks.
2. Write an essay on the quotation ‘Selfishness and kindness, courage,
laziness, idealism and sensuality, vanity, shyness, disinterestedness,
nervousness, obstinacy and diffidence, they can all exist in a single person
and form a plausible harmony’. (W.S. Maugham)
3. Write an essay in 200-250 words on the topic ‘What kinds of cultural
misunderstanding could arise due to national differences’/
Ex. 1. Listen to Part A of the call and decide if these statements are True
or False.
THE RADIO PHONE-IN
1.Mark is unemployed.
2. Mark left school a year ago.
3. Mark is no longer the same boy.
4. Rachel mentions three changes of character.
5.Rachel doesn’t like his friends.
6,Rachel knows that Mark is taking drugs.
7.A television has disappeared from the home.
8. Mark likes listening to music.
9.Money isn’t safe in the home.
10.Mark’s father is away from home a lot.

with your partner.
1.Do you know the origin of the word “humour”? How does it relate to the
word ‘temperament’?
2.Are eccentrics well-adjusted in life or feel ill at ease? Discuss advantages

and disadvantages of eccentricity.
89
3. What feelings do you experience or see others expressing at home, at the
university, in the streets? Do any of these feelings worry you? How do you
deal with them?
4. Do you agree that it is superhuman to be always bright and happy, and

never to feel depression, helplessness, or sadness.
5. A lifetime of happiness! No man alive could bear it: it would be hell on

earth.
6. Do you agree with those who insist that happiness is more an attitude to
life than the state of things.
7. Men are traditionally portrayed as the hunters and warriors and women
as the home-makers and child-carers. Does this mean that men are
automatically more aggressive, with a greater capacity for violence? Are
women automatically gentler and more supportive?
Ex. 1. Listen to the text and write if the following statements (1-9) are
True or False according to the text.
A VISIONS OF THE FUTURE
1. Nostradamus worked as a doctor after leaving university.

2. Nostradamus’ first wife was killed by the Black Death.
3. Nostradamus began writing his prophecies before his second marriage.
4. The prophecies predicted what would happen over the next ten
centuries.
5. Nostradamus’ divining technique was based on ancient methods.
6. Few people were convinced by Nostradamus during his lifetime.
7. Nostradamus is believed by some people to have predicted the rise of
Hitler.
8. One of the quatrains pinpoints Napoleon’s birthplace.
9. One quatrain is believed to warn of a nuclear war around the year 2000.
90
Ex. 2. Match the following words with appropriate definitions (1 – 16) .
1. affection a. willing to believe anything or anyone

2. anger-prone b. a single man who is unlikely to marry
3. as fit as a fiddle c. too important to be changed or arg
4. benevolent d. not following only one style but using a
wide range
5. bind with bands of steel e. a warm gentle feeling of caring for sb.
6. confirmed bachelor f. the fear of and desire to avoid sth.
unpleasant
7. cowardice g. unable to express feelings in a natural way
8. a dog in the manger h. showing a desire to be kind, generous
9. an eccentric i. a person more interested in his own
thoughts
10. extravagant j. a person who stops being a friend when
one is in trouble
11. a fair-weather friend k. to treat sb. in a strict manner
12. gullible l. a person who prevents others from
enjoying sth. that is useless to him
13. hobby-horse m. likely to get angry, to suffer from,

to do sth.
14. introvert n. in very good physical condition
15. inhibited o. willing to use more of sth. than it is
necessary
16. sacrosanct p. a person’s favourite topic of conversation
where necessary.
1. It gets (1) … the way every time to decide to push (2) … the boundaries
of your life and jump (3) … new relationship. 2. You set (4) …….vicious
circle (5) …….. self-blame which only acts to make the problem worse. 3.
We do choose how we shall live: courageously or (6) … cowardice,
honourably or dishonourably, (7) …purpose or (8) … drift. 4. (9) … many
respects Sweden is a country of relatively small class differences. 5. They
insure that they are (10) … the right place (11) … the right time. 6. Snake
personalities often make their way to the top, but they (12) … no means
pushy, using others to get them there. 7. The students were all (13) …
91
tenterhooks as they waited the results of the examination. 8. They are
always (14) … odds (15) … each other (16) … how to bring up their
children. 9. She’ll be nice (17) … your face and then stab you (18) … the
back. 10. Despite losing the game we put (19) … a brave face and
congratulated the winning team (20) … the victory.
Ex. 4. For questions 1 – 8, read the text below. Use the words in the list to
the right of the text, to form one word that fits in the same numbered space
in the text.
FRIENDS
Everyone wants to have friends, but building up new

relationships is not always easy.
A few people are born with outgoing (1) ……….; they have PERSON
a (2) ……… ability to make new friends wherever they go. NATURE
But not many people are (3) …….. at ease in a room full of COMPLETE
strangers.
Most of us feel (4) ………. when we meet new people, and NERVE
this can occasionally make us appear (5) ……,when in fact FRIEND
we are just shy.
In any case, the development of new friendships is a gradual
process. It doesn’t just happen overnight. Long-standing
friendships (6) ……. have several things in common. GENERAL
The friends enjoy the same sorts of (7) … , and share similar ACTIVE
beliefs and values, they are (8) …… to one another, and they TRUTH
are also (9) ……… of one another when they have problems. SUPPORT
Ex. 5. Complete the second sentence so that it has the similar meaning to
the first sentence, using the word given. Do not change the word given.
You must use between three and eight words, including the word given (1 -
11)
1. It is not our habit to eat so early.

used
We ……………………..so early.
2. I don’t mind whether you come in the morning or the afternoon.
difference
It ………………………………in the morning or the afternoon.
92
3. Most of the committee voted for the proposal.
favour
The ……………………………..the proposal.
4. Don’t pay any attention when she complains.
notice
Don’t …………………………... complaints.
5. ‘That meal would have satisfied a king!’ he exclaimed.
fit
‘That …………………… !’ he exclaimed.
6. The war has caused emigration to increase.
resulted
The war ………………………. emigration.
7. The board had a secret meeting in order to discuss changes in company
policy.
doors
The board ……………………….company policy.
8. I was about to ring him when he called.
point
I …………………….when he called.
9. Sheila often suffers from really bad headaches.
prone
Sheila …………………… really bad headaches.
10. He suggested that we should invite Tom to the party.
invited
He ……………………. to the party.
11. The new presenter certainly has plenty of confidence.
lack
The new presenter ………………………confidence.
Ex. 6. Write a wish for each of the following sentences (1-9).
1. Mathilda wanted to be auditioned for the National Ballet.

……………………………………………………….
2. You didn’t put the ice cream in the fridge and now it’s spoilt.
……………………………………………………….
3. You didn’t do mathematics in high school and now you regret it.
………………………………………….……………
4. Theresa’s dog keeps the neighbours awake because it barks all night.
……………………………………………….………
93
5. You have lost your reference from one of your previous jobs and now
you need it for an interview.
………………………………………………
6. You want to go on holiday this summer, but you haven’t got any leave
yet.
……………………………………………………….
7. You neglected to have your clothes dry-cleaned.
……………………………………………………….
8. Louise realized she left her lecture notes at home.
……… …………………………………………
9. Tim didn’t have enough time to go to the bank during his lunch hour.
…………….…………………………………………
94
UNIT 6 PEOPLE AND NATURE
6.1. READING
Ex.1. You are going to read an article about the impact the motor car has
had on everyday life. Choose from the sentences A-I the one which fits
each gap (1-7). There is one extra sentence which you do not need to use.
There is an example at the beginning.
A It is a problem that can be solved given the right levels of commitment.

B Immediate steps are needed to check the emissions from car engines.
C The number of vehicles on our roads is set to double over the next thirty
years.
D There are other victims too.
E The average speed of traffic in central London is the same as in the era
of the horse and cart of 80 years ago.
F We do not need cars to show what we are worth.
G This would make people think twice before getting into their cars.
H Most teenagers now expect to have their own car once they hit the age
of 18.
I Lead in petrol has been shown to cause brain damage in young children.
THE CURSE OF THE MOTOR CAR
We are all familiar with the story of Frankenstein, the professor who
created a monster that eventually led to his own destruction. In my
opinion, the mass-produced car, which was born in the early part of this
century, is set to strangle us in the next.
Just consider the awful impact that the car has had on modern life. 0-----
E-----. Lives in many big cities have become miserable because of the
congestion, noise and pollution from motor vehicles.
It is the young who have been put most at risk. It has become far too
hazardous to let children cycle freely on the roads. There has been an
enormous increase in the number of juvenile asthma cases and respiratory
problems. 1--------------.
95
Nevertheless, in my opinion, the impact of the car is nowhere more visible
than in the small villages of what was once our countryside. As far as I am
concerned, it is these and their inhabitants that have suffered the most.
Huge juggernauts thunder down narrow streets and the high street became
the permanent traffic jam. Pedestrians risk their lives by stepping off
narrow pavements. 2-------------. The slaughter of wildlife has become so
common as to cease to be horrific.
This story is all too familiar, yet there is worse to come. 3-----------. Does it
mean that we will be living in a wilderness of tarmac and concrete? Or is it
perhaps time to tackle the monster? Now, I am not suggesting that we can
turn back the clock and uninvent the car in any way. What I am saying is
that we have to find imaginative solutions to our transport needs if we are
to avoid choking themselves to death, or living in a wilderness made from
concrete and tarmac. I do believe, however, that the problem can be dealt
with on three levels: internationally, nationally and, last but not least, on a
personal level.
On the international level, governments must cooperate to ensure that

motor manufacturers are working to produce more efficient engines which
demand less in fuel and which are much cleaner. They should sets limits
for engine sizes and production. 4----------------. Manufacturers must be
made to fit effective filters to all new vehicles. Damage to the ozone layer
or acid rain do not respect national boundaries.
Let us now look at what can be done on a national level. Road tax should
be up to ten times more for vehicles with engine size over, say, 2 litres.
Cars without effective filters and catalytic converters should be taken off
the roads immediately. The government should put up the price of petrol
immediately. 5--------------. Road pricing for journeys would also help with
this. Next, it should develop a public transport policy that does not have
the private motor car at its center. It is a fact that building more roads
actually increases traffic. Public transport such as reliable trains and buses
should receive a far greater investment.
Lastly, what can we do as individuals? First and foremost, we need to rid

ourselves of the mentality that we cannot do without our cars and that they
are a reflection of our success and status in society. Fifty years ago it was
96
unusual for a family to have a car. Now, along with washing machines and
annual holidays abroad, it has become the norm. 6-----------.
Next, we should make immediate changes to our lifestyles and walk or use
bicycles for shorter journeys. We should become politically active and
make it clear that transport policy is the key issue in how we decide to
spend our vote.
To sum up, I have tried to show that there are steps that can be taken to
reduce the damage caused by the car. 7-------------. However, only by
acting as individuals first can we expect governments to act in their turn.
By accepting responsibility and acting upon it, we can avoid our lemming-
like journey down the one-way street to extinction.
Ex. 2. For questions 1 – 15, choose from the sections A–E. The sections
may be chosen more than once. When more than one answer is required,
these may be given in any order. There is an example at the beginning (0).
Which section of the article mentions

a person who was often in a different country from their pet? 0 ------ C
a person who gained a skill at an early age? 1 ------
someone who behaved in a way not typical of them? 2 ------
a person who got a pet by chance? 3 ------
a creature that started to behave in a disturbed manner? 4 ------ 5 -----
a person who was very upset about leaving their pet? 6 ------
a statement which was not believed by another person? 7 ------
a creature that was able to predict an event happening

at irregular interval? 8 ------ 9 ------
a pet that got angry when its owner went out? 10 ------
a situation that could have been more serious than it was? 11 ------
97
someone who recognized the sound made by their pet? 12 ------
a pet that appeared to be jealous? 13 ------
a creature that predicted a change in a routine? 14 ------
a creature that only reacted in a particular way when its owner

was involved? 15------
THE UNEXPLAINED POWERS OF ANIMALS
A Some pets seem to have an amazing ability to locate their owners.

Twelve-year-old Bobby Chesson came across a racing pigeon in his back
yard in West Virginia, USA. He looked after it, calling it pigeon 167 after
the identification number on its leg-ring, and it became his pet. Then
Bobby was taken to hospital for an operation. One dark, snowy night about
a week after his admission, the boy had a fluttering at the window of his
hospital room. He asked his nurse to open the window, telling her that his
pigeon was outside. Just to humour him, she did so – and in flew pigeon
167,having flown over 100 miles to find him.
B Unusual powers are not confined to pet birds but are seen in other
animals, which have a close bond with their owner. Herminia Denot grew
up on a ranch in Argentina, and learned to ride almost before she could
walk. She was very attached to her horse Pampero, but the time came
when she had to go away to boarding school in the capital Buenos Aires
and, much to her dismay, Pampero could not accompanied her. The gaucho
(cowboy) who looked after the horse said that at the end of each term, as
the time of Hermania’s return grew near, ‘Pampero would go crazy. He
used to gallop around the field neighing.’ When she was due to arrive, the
horse would stand by the gate, looking south towards the train station. But
on one occasion, Pampero stood looking in the opposite direction. And this
time Hermania arrived by road – from the north.
C Anticipatory behaviour is common in various creatures. David Waite

worked from his home in Oxford, but his job as a public relations
consultant also involved lengthy trips abroad. In his absence, David’s
parents used to stay in the house to deal with telephone calls from his
98
clients and to feed Godzilla, his cat. David used to ring home frequently to
check that all was well and get any messages. ‘Whenever I called,’ says
David, ‘Godzilla would run and sit beside the telephone as it started to
ring. My calls were made at different times of day – they weren’t regular.
And she totally ignored all the other calls. The only explanation I can think
of is that it was some kind of telepathy.’
D Sometimes telepathic communication can work from pet to owner.

Dolores Katz, from New Mexico, tells the story of a time when her dog,
Eric, seemed to communicate with her telephathically. ‘One day while I
was at work it started to thunder and rain. As I worked, I got more and
more agitated. Somehow I knew that Eric needed me. At last I couldn’t
take it any more. I hardly ever take time off, but this time I dropped
everything and rushed home.’ Dolores found Eric lying in the back room
surrounded by broken glass, with his paws bleeding badly. Frightened by
the storm, he had run into a glass door. Fortunately, a possibly tragic
situation was avoided as she was able to get Eric to the vet in time to deal
with his injuries.
E Occasionally, a pet’s attachment to one particular owner can show

itself in strange ways. Celia and David Watson, who live in Sussex,
England, used to have a parrot called Oscar, ’I couldn’t go near Oscar
when David was in the room – he seemed to resent me taking David’s
attention,’ says Celia, ‘The bird would just try to attack me without
warning. I couldn’t give him his food or even touch his cage. And when
David left the room, Oscar would fling himself against the side of the cage
in fury.’ The parrot was quite calm when David was away at work, but
started to get excited ten to twenty minutes before David arrived home.
‘Oscar used to run around in his cage making little noises and fluttering his
wings,’ says Celia, ‘He always knew when David was going to arrive.’
99
6.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1. Match the following words with appropriate definitions (1-16).
1. bottle/can bank a. basic structures and facilities for an

organization or a country to function
efficiently
2. contamination b. recovery of raw materials to reuse them
3. carnivore c. making sth impure by adding dangerous
substances
4.demographic explosion d. all the plants and living creatures in a
particular area
5. deforestation e. a large container in a public place where
empty bottles, cans are placed
6. ecosystem f. an empty area of land that is not
or can’t be used
7. endangered species g. gradual rise in temperature of the earth’s
atmosphere caused by an increase of gases
8. fossil fuel h. waste matter from human bodies,
factories, towns
9. greenhouse effect i. an animal that eats meat
10. a going concern j. plants in general, plants found in a
particular environment
11. habitat k. a business that is making a profit and is
expected to do well
12. infrastructure l. removement of trees and forests
from a place
13. reclamation m. an animal that is in danger of becoming
extinct
14. sewage n. the natural environment of an animal
or a plant
15. vegetation o. a great and sudden increase of population
16. wasteland p. coal or oil formed over millions of years
from the remains of animals and plants
100
where necessary.
1. Recycling materials (1) … household waste can have considerable

benefits (2) … the environment. 2. It is estimated that some 70 to 75 per
cent of materials (3) … scrap cars is recovered. 3. (4) … the Environment
Protection Act 1990, local authorities are required to make plans for the
recycling of waste. 4. Encouraging research (5) … recycling technologies
and other initiatives have also been set (6) … . 5. In the Lake District 30
per cent of jobs can be directly attributed (7) … tourism. 6. There was
gossip that Tom had once been concerned (8) … something crooked. 7.
You feel absolutely no concern (9) … your future. 8. Elizabeth was
concerned (10) … setting (11) … hostile and oppressive governments in
Eastern Europe. 9. Little (12) … little, the level of poison in the river
began to rise. 10. Two years ago, the park was closed for the public (13) …
good. 11. (14) … … household garbage, industrial chemicals had (15) …
years been dumped in the Pinehaven landfill. 12. Archaeologists still arrive
(16) … droves, lured (17) …remains hidden. 13. Dan always made a point
of dropping (18) … , not so much (19) … account of the coffee, which as
good , (20) … … the woman who owned it.
the list
WASTE NOT …
In Britain, 28 million tonnes of household rubbish is generated each year,

and the country is running out of holes in the ground (1) ……… . The
government says that from now on, dumping waste should be a last resort
that is reserved for things (2) ………….. . And there are other possible
solutions. Passing on the things we no longer need to somebody who does,
is environmentally better than recycling, (3) …… .
Clothes, newspapers and so on are relatively well-known candidates for

recycling and re-use, but old electrical goods present more of a problem.
While larger items, such as fridges and freezers, tent to have a value as
scrap metal, many smaller things do not (4) ……. .
101
A company with computers it no longer needs, finds it much easier than a
householder to pass them on to another user, (5) ……… . Almost all
dealers who buy old computers are keen on to collect and deal with large
quantities, (6) …… . Another big problem is a growing amount of
unwanted mobile phones, estimated at up to 25 million in Britain alone.
But binning any mobile is a bad idea because the batteries count as
‘hazardous waste’ (7) ……….. . Some companies operate what’s called a
‘Take Back’ scheme to help with this problem.
A and then redistribute to those in need

B but they are not the only ones
C but don’t want to bother with single items
D and are simply buried
E because it uses less energy
F or get them recycled
G and will collect it from private homes
H and should be handled with care
I which can either be recycled nor burned
J to put it all in
Ex. 4. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the
first sentence, using the word given (1-10).
1. As soon as he was promoted, he started the pursuit of material

affluence.
No sooner …………………………………………………………...
2. The number of cars has increased so much that it is a key factor of
global warming.
So …………………………………………………………………....
3. If we had been told the truth earlier, I would have fined the polluters.
Had …………………………………………………………………..
4. All strict safety regulations had been taken and a flexible policy had
been adopted.
Not only……………………………………………………..…………
5. The government won’t alter its policy on human waste disposal.
On no account …………………………………………………
6. I have seldom lived at a basic subsistence level.
Seldom ……………………………………….
102
7. She had no sooner dropped in to tea than the telephone rang.
No sooner …………………………………………………..
8. I have never heard about harmful wavelengths of ultraviolet radiation.
Never before ………………………………………………………..
9. The police didn’t know that the man was a criminal.
Little …………………………..……………………
10. They shouldn’t destroy marine habitats under any circumstances.
Under no circumstances……………..………………………….
Ex. 5. A Put a, an or the where necessary (1 – 17).
1. The window alcove measures exactly (1) …. metre across.2. When you
go to (2) … Athens, don’t forget to visit (3) … Acropolis and (4) …
Ancient Agora. 3. (5) … famous actress wanted to be married in (6) …
British castle. 4. My new BMW motor cycle can reach speeds of over 300
kilometres (7) … hour. 5. The community managed to raise quite (8) …
large sum of money for the building of the new school. 6. Many people are
attracted by (9) … unknown and (10) … unexplained in (11) … nature. 7.
During (12) … Napoleonic Wars, the army tried to defeat (13) … Russia.
8. This government doesn’t care about (14) … jobless. 9. (15) … Indian
Ocean lies between (16) … West coast of Australia and (17) … country
from which it was named: India.
6.3. MEDIATION
Ex. 1. Translate the following text into English.
ГЛОБАЛЬНЕ ПОТЕПЛІННЯ ТА ЙОГО НАСЛІДКИ
Найвідоміші вчені планети передбачають для Землі жахливі

наслідки глобального потепління. Приблизно через 100 років Крим
перетвориться в маленький острів, третя частина планети стане
пустинею, а Лондон, Париж та Нью-Йорк опиняться під водою. До
кінця теперішнього століття Земля в тому вигляді, в якому ми її
знаємо, перестане існувати. Глобальне потепління викличе масштабне
танення полярного льоду, що призведе до затоплення величезних
територій. Одночасно з цим зміна клімату спричинить перетворення
третини суші на планеті в пустиню. Це, напевно, найсумніше з усіх
103
існуючих прогнозів зробили співробітники Хедлі, Центру
кліматичних прогнозів і аналізу при метеослужбі Великобританії.
Повені та засухи зроблять неможливим вирощування
продовольчих культур, підтримку надійної системи санітарії та
обмежать доступ до ресурсів питтєвої води.
Дослідження Центра Хедлі чудово вписуються в апокаліптичну
концепцію ‘кінця світу‘, яка вже давно розробляється ведучими
екологами. Вчені зробили висновок, що кількість територій, які
можна буде назвати екстримально посушливими, збільшиться в
десять разів. Якщо сьогодні таких площ на планеті всього 3%, то в
2100 році їх буде більш ніж 30%.
Ті регіони планети, де засухи бувають і сьогодні, на приклад
Африка, в майбутньому перетворяться практично в голу пустиню.
Утворяться пустині на місці лісів, які займають величезні території в
Європі, Азії та США. Одночасно з пустинею сушу почне поглинати і
світовий океан.
Схоже на те, що Антарктида залишиться єдиним населеним
континентом до кінця цього століття, якщо людство не почне вживати
заходи для боротьби з глобальним потеплінням.
Ex. 2. Translate the following text into English
ГЛОБАЛЬНЕ ПОТЕПЛІННЯ ТА ЙОГО НАСЛІДКИ
У епокаліптичних прогнозів досить критиків. Серед них і ті вчені,

які говорять про перебільшені масштаби та наслідки глобального
потепління, і ті, які вважають його міфом. Екологи заявляють, що
настає глобальне потепління, спричинене викидами парникових газів.
Час від часу певні дослідження підтверджують докази критиків.
Минулого року американські вчені , користуючись даними
супутникового мониторингу, констатували, що озоновий шар планети
перестав скорочуватись в обсязі. Відповідно, зупинився ріст озонової
дірки над Антарктидою. На хвилі загального оптимізму, що виник у
наслідок цих подій, дослідники прогнозували, що відновлення
озонового шару відбудеться вже через кілька десятиліть.
Але на початку жовтня цього року Всесвітня метеорологічна
організація при ООН повідомила, що розміри озонової дірки над
Антарктидою досягли нової рекордної позначки – 29,5 кв.км. Все
більше і більше дослідників схиляються до думки , що ні Кіотський
104
протокол, ні інші заходи, які вживаються для зниження концентрації
парникових газів в атмосфері, не зможуть запобігти подальшому
скороченню концентрації об‘єму азоту.
Серед іде щодо охолодження клімату Землі є абсолютно
фантастичні думки. На приклад, установка величезного дзеркала між
Землею і Сонцем за орбітою Місяця.
Задум такий: це створило б велику площу тіні на диску Сонця,
який видно з Землі і скоротило б кількість сонячного світла, енергії та
радіації, яка попадає на нашу планету.
Ще один монументальний проект передбачає поширення в верхніх
шарах атмосфери найдрібніших часток сірки, які б могли відбивати
частину сонячного світла назад в космос. Але більшість вчених
зауважують, що масштабні геоінженерні проекти занадто ризиковані.
Ніхто не візьметься передбачити їх наслідки.
6.4. WRITING
Write a discursive essay on the suggested topics (250-300 words). Follow

the guidelines for discursive essays in your textbook.
1. Overpopulation is perhaps the biggest global problem that our

generation will face.
2. Smoking is the cause of millions of deaths and pollution. Therefore,

there should be a worldwide ban on smoking. To what extent do you
agree?
3.In recent years our diet has become increasingly poor.
4. Environmental problems are really social problems anyway.
5. The 21st century: for better or worse?
Ex.1. You are now going to hear an interview between Peter Whitehead,
the presenter of a current affairs programme, and Frances Kelly, the
105
leader of the Campaign for Clean Air. While you listen, decide if the
following statements are True or False (1-8).
1. The government is acting too slowly for Frances.

2. Sulphur dioxide is produced by power stations.
3. Britain is one of the worst polluters.
4. Carbon monoxide causes heart problems in adults.
5. In the short term, carbon dioxide isn’t dangerous.
6. There is little evidence to show these gases have a bad effect on the
development of children.
7. The greenhouse effect will cause droughts.
8. Frances believes that the government has a limited responsibility.

with your partner.
1. Are you optimistic or pessimistic about the future? What makes you
think so?
2.Protecting the environment is the most important problem facing the

world today. Speak on all the different ways of protecting it.
3. Dwell on some natural and man-made catastrophes that threaten the

world. Which are the most serious ones? Which are you most/least afraid
of?
4. The energy crisis is a big challenge for each country and its government.
Optimistic and pessimistic forecasts for nuclear energy and fossil fuels
have been claimed.
5. Chernobyl dependency is still a priority and a severe strain to national

budgets. What associations and implications does the name of Chernobyl
have for you personally?
6. What evidence of climate change could you name? What are the causes?
106
7. What factors have been responsible for species becoming extinct?
Which of the species were destroyed intentionally by man? What do you
think is the best way to protect endangered species?
Ex. 1. You will hear a radio report about a wildlife holiday in the
Yellowstone National Park in the USA. For questions 1-9, complete the
sentences with a word or short phrase.
Michela describes the man she met in Canada as being (1) ………….. by
his experience.
As a species, the wolf is now officially classed as (2) ………….. in North
America.
It is thought that as many as (3) …………. visitors have seen the
reintroduced wolves at Yellowstone.
On Michela’s first evening in Yellowstone, a (4) ………gave visitors a talk
about wolves.
Coyotes, which have longer ears and (5) ………. colouring, are often
mistaken for wolves.
Michela’s personal guide originally trained to be a (6) ……….. .
Around half the wolves in the park are now fitted with (7) ……to help
people locate them.
Ken advised Michela to look for wolves on hillsides where (8)..……….
could be seen through the snow.
Michela used a particularly good (9) ……….. to study the wolf she
eventually saw.
Ex. 2. Match the following words with appropriate definitions (1-16).
1. calamity a. the care and management of the natural

environment
2. conservation b. the production or release of sth., light, heat, gas
3. drought c. a place where wastes are kept or stored
4. deteriorate d. not controlled or kept within limits
5. economic sticks
and carrots e. a group of Australian animals that carry their
young in a fold of skin on the mother’s stomach
6. emissions f. an event that causes great harm or damage;
107
7.energy consumption g. concerned with the protection of the
environment
8. erosion h. the using up sth. (fuel)
9. green/soft tourism i. an animal that kills and eats other animals
10. marsupials j. a period of continuous dry weather
11. predator k. destruction of sth. or wearing sth. аway
gradually
12. rainfall l. the state of soil containing the high
level of salt
13.repository of waste m. to become worse in quality or condition
14. spawn (of fish) n. to produce eggs
15. salinity o. the total amount of rain that falls in a certain
time period
16. unbridled (tourism) p. the reward and the threat of punishment used
together as a means of making sb. try harder
where necessary.
1. (1) … the new millennium, we need a new beginning, a fresh start. 2.

Our own way of life is (2) … threat. 3. This is a global problem (3) …
catastrophic implication for human health. 4. Coastal habitats (4) … coral
reefs and sea grasses are smothered and the sea creatures that live there are
wiped (5) … . 5. Thousands of shellfish, sea turtles and other marine
creatures fall victim yearly (6) … this new ‘black death’. 6. He could
visualize the dog getting skinner and skinner and finally wasting (7) … …
a shadow of his former self. 7. The fate of the communities blighted (8) …
Chernobyl will continue to haunt discussions (9) … energy generation for
decades to come. 8. The Department’s total expenditure (10) … research
related to climate change was over $14 million. 9. (11) … a metre rise (12)
… sea levels, 200 million could become homeless. 10. 95 per cent of the
native plants are unique, and many are (13) … the verge of extinction. 11.
We should do something (14) … 240 species currently threatened (15) …
extinction. 12. (16) … American national bird, the bald eagle has been
protected (17) … various ways (18) … 1940. 13. Students sometimes drop
(19) … while they are in class or at the lecture. 14. Many governments
have signed (20) … … measures, which will help to minimize climate
change, to cut carbon dioxide emissions.
108
Ex. 4. For questions 1– 9, read the following text and then choose, from
the list
GENETIC ENGINEERING
When Charles Darwin published On the Origin of Species in 1859, the

Bishop pf Worcester’s wife was most distressed. ‘Let us hope it is not
true,’ she remarked. ‘But if it is, let us pray that it does not become
generally known!’
Supposing that we had been alive a hundred years ago, would we have
been repelled by the suggestion that humans and apes may have had a
common ancestor? And had our ancestors been born in modern times,
would they have been similarly repelled by the thought of ‘designer’
babies? I suspect that the answer to both questions would be (1) ……… . I
have tried to rationalize (2) …………. to genetic engineering. I personally
feel that if we were supposed to be perfect, we should have been designed
that way. Surely (3)……….. is an invasion of the human self. (4)
…………. , can we honestly say that human self is to be found in our
genes?
From the medical point of view, genetic engineering has opened up

exciting possibilities for the treatment of genetically related disorders. (5)
…………. , the real problem with new science is that it threatens to
undermine the categories through which we understand our world: (6)
………… .
Like the bishop of Wolcester’s wife, (7) …………… wishes to shut out the
facts that might upset its moral universe.
Yet, if morality had originally been based on reason, (8) ………..

justifiable. Unfortunately, morality has its origin in prejudice, ritual and
habit, and, as a result, the possibilities (9) ……….. are increasingly
constrained.
109
A On the other hand
B our attitudes might have been
C in the affirmative
D afforded the scientific advance
E our moral and social codes
F experimenting with genes
G my own response
H any kind of activity
I the anti-science lobby
J However
Ex. 5. Put a, an or the where necessary (1 – 11).
1. Did you know that (1) … gold was discovered in Australia in (2) …
1850s?
2. Hikers in (3) … Loch Ness reported seeing (4) … large moving mass at
dawn.
3. (5) … reigning monarch stayed at a plush five-star hotel in (6) … city
centre.
4. (7) … Bermuda Triangle has received notoriety as (8) … area of
misfortune because (9) … number of vessels have disappeared there. 5.
(10) … director will chair (11) … meeting tomorrow so everybody
should come prepared.
space. Use only one word in each space (1 – 16).
DISAPPEARING WORLD
The land is not the (1) … victim. Rainforests are a richly populated
habitat. In the rainforests of Madagascar there are at (2) … 150.000
individual species of plants and animals which are found nowhere (3) …
in the world, and more are being discovered all the (4) … . Furthermore,
approximately 50% of all endangered animal species live in the world’s
rainforests. The destruction of the forests effectively represents a complete
removal of all these plants and animals. Deprived (5) … their natural
environments, they will disappear altogether. Again, this process is
110
irreversible. Man, no (6) … how powerful he considers himself, does not
have the power to re-establish the species he is so willfully destroying.
The destruction (7) … the rainforests is a pressing problem of our times
(8) … not one that is regarded seriously by everyone. The (9) … affluent
nations regard the issue as (10) … of preservation; deforestation must
stop. When it comes to the poorer countries, the issue is not so cut and
dried. (11) … these people, the rainforests represent a source of economic
prosperity, a point that obviously takes precedence (12) … ecological
concerns. A solution must be found (13) … the damage caused by the
deforestation that is destroying the rainforests becomes irrevocable.
Deforestation is carried out by (14) … involved in the timber industry and
also by migrant farmers. The latter occupy an area of land, strip it, farm it
(15) … its natural mineral supply is used up and then move on. The land is
left useless and exposed and a process of erosion (16) … into effect,
washing soil into rivers thereby killing fish and blocking the water’s
natural course.
111
UNIT 7 GRAMMAR REVISION
7.1. MORPHOLOGY
7.1.1. The Noun
Ex. 1. Decide if the statement is general or specific. Fill in the blanks with
a, the or 0 article.
1. ... dog is sleeping. 2. … dog has four legs. 3. … elephants have big
ears. 4. … elephants are hungry. 5. … sun is bigger than …moon. 6. …
women generally live longer than … men. 7. … women are talking over
the telephone. 8. … window is broken. 9. … window is made of glass. 10.
… children are playing. 11. … children can generally learn a foreign
language faster than … adults. 12. … coffee is hot. 13. … coffee contains
caffeine. 14. … sugar is on the shelf. 15. … sugar is sweet.
Ex. 2. Fill in the blanks with a / an where required.

A. 1. This is … book. It is my … book. 2. I have … sister. My sister
is … engineer. My sister’s … husband is … doctor. 3. I have … spoon in
my plate but I have no … soup in it. 4. Mr. Black lives in … flat 10. 5. I
often get … letters from my friends. 6. Take … bus 9. It goes down …
Pushkin Street. 7. I like … meat and my wife likes … fish. 8. … Australia
is both … island and … continent. 9. Damascus is … ancient city in …
Syria. 10. … uncle of mine told me … interesting story.
B. 1. The Jones have got … television. We haven’t got one. 2.
Watching … television is how most people spend their free time. 3. … rice
is very good with … chicken. 4. Do you like … boiled chicken? 5. … deer,
… wild duck, … tiger are plentiful in this region. 6. … man has always
fought, … woman has been the preserver. 7. A lot of people drink …
coffee with milk. 8. My bus wasn’t due for twenty minutes, so I was
having … nice coffee, just to pass the time. 9. … tooth for … tooth, … life
for … life – that is … philosophy of … violence. 10. … water is essential
for … life. 11. … life without … happiness is not … life at all.
112
Ex. 3. Fill in the blanks with the where required.
A. 1. Books are … heavy things. 2. … books I bought were all

second-hand. 3. I really dislike … cars. 4. … cars were waiting at the
lights. 5. … dogs are animals. 6. … dogs are in the garden. 7. … gold is an
important metal. 8. … gold in the ring is of high quality. 9. … honesty is
always … best policy. 10. … honesty of Mr. Brown is above question. 11.
… rice we eat is … brown rice. 12. … butter is made from … milk. 13.
Where is … butter?
B. 1. In … theatres of Shakespeare’s time …actors were often treated
like servants. 2. A doctor’s first duty is to preserve …life. 3. I’ve just been
reading … life of Mozart. 4. In 1492 … Christopher Columbus sailed from
… Spain for … Far East and landed in … San Salvador. 5. … rivers of …
eastern part of … United States flow towards … Atlantic Ocean. 6. …
climate of … southern Italy is very warm. 7. My son is studying in …
Florida University. 8. … Hague is a city in … Netherlands. 9. … water in
… lake Baikal is very clear. 10. … English of … Shakespeare is often
difficult to understand. 11. … Robinson whom I know lives next door to
… Browns. 12. … largest river in … Germany is … Rhein. 13. … lake
Erie is one of … Great Lakes in … North America. 14. Rita plays … violin
and her sister plays … guitar. 15. … Declaration of Independence was
drawn up in 1776.
Ex. 4. Fill in the blanks with a / an, the where required.

A. 1. We have … big dog. … dog is very clever. 2. Yesterday I
received … letter from my … friend. … letter was interesting. 3. This is
… very difficult question. I don’t know … answer to it. 4. There is …
very big piano in …hall. 5. This is … good book. Take … book from …
table. 6. I can see … nice … coffee-table in … middle of … room to …
right of … door. 7. There is … beautiful picture in … my father’s study.
… picture is on … wall to … left of … window. 8. … people usually have
… breakfast in … morning. 9. Yesterday father told us … very interesting
story at … breakfast. 10. Every day my husband goes to …work, my son
goes to … school and I go to … institute.
B. 1. … Florida State University is smaller than … University of
Florida. 2. Ken’s brother is in … prison for robbery. Ken went to …
prison to visit him. 3. Tom left … university without doing his exams. 4.
How many people go to … university in your country? 5. John’s mother is
a regular churchgoer. She goes to … church every Sunday. 6. We stopped
113
to visit … church. It was a beautiful building. 7. Two people were injured
in the accident and were taken to … hospital. 8. When Ann was ill we all
went to … hospital to visit her. 9. The British Prime Minister lives in …
Downing Street. 10. We flew from London to … Orly Airport in Paris. 11.
Which hotel are you staying at? – At … Hilton Hotel. 12. If you want to
buy some new clothes, the shop I would recommend is … Harrison’s. 13.
Mr. Jenkins reads …Daily Telegraph but his wife reads … Times. 14. …
Tate Gallery is the main modern art museum in London. 15. One of the
nicest parks in London is … St. James’s Park which is very near …
Buckingham Palace.
Ex. 5. Fill in the blanks with a / an, the, some, any or 0.

A.
A. Where are you going?
B. I’m going to … post office. I need to buy … stamps.
A. I’ll go with you. I want to mail … package to my parents.
B. What’s in … package?
A…. shirts for my father, … coat for my sister, and … money for my
mother.
B. You should never send … money by mail.
A. I know. My mother never received … money that I sent in my last
letter. But what can I do? I don’t have … checking account.
B. You can buy … money order at … bank.
A. How much does it cost?
B. Well, if you have … account in … bank, it’s usually free. If not, you’ll
probably have to pay 50$ or more.
A. What about … currency exchange on Wright Street? Do they sell. …
money orders?
B. Yes.
A. Why don’t we go there? We can save … time. It’s on … same street as
… post office.
B.
Conversation 1: between two students at the same school.
A. Is there … cafeteria at this school?
B. Yes, there is. It’s on … first floor of this building.
A. I want to buy … cup of coffee.
B. You don’t have to go to … cafeteria. There’s … coffee machine on this
floor.
A. I only have a one-dollar bill. Do you have … change?
114
B. There’s … dollar-bill changer next to … coffee machine.
Conversation2: between two students (A and B) in the same class
and, later, the teacher(T).
A. Where’s … teacher? It’s already 7:00.
B. Maybe she’s absent today.
A. I’ll go to … English office and ask if anyone knows where she is.
B. That’s … good idea.
A few minutes later…
A.I talked to … secretary in … English office. She said that … teacher
just called. She’s going to be about 15 minutes late. She had … problem
with her car.
Ten minutes later…
A. Here’s … teacher.
T. I’m sorry. I’m late.
A. Did you fix … problem with your car?
T.I didn’t have time. I left … car at home and took … taxi to school.
Ex. 6. Correct the following sentences where required.

Model: Everest was first climbed in 1953. – Right.
Milan is in north of Italy. – Wrong (the north).
1. Last year we visited Canada and United States. 2. South of
England is warmer than north. 3. We went to Crimea and swam in Black
Sea. 4. Jack has visited many places in USA. 5. A friend of mine used to
work as a reporter in Middle East. 6. Next year we are going skiing in
Swiss Alps. 7. Dnieper is longest river in Ukraine. 8. United Kingdom
consists of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

1. Єдина телевізійна програма, яку він дивиться, – новини. 2.
Ми слухаємо радіо ввечері. 3. Це був гарний фільм? – Це був
найкращий фільм, який я бачив. 4. Після обіду ми пішли на
прогулянку до моря. 5. Говерла – найвища вершина Карпатських гір.
6. Друга світова війна закінчилася у 1945 році. 7. Чотири п’ятих
населення Об’єднаного Королівства становлять англійці. Інші
народи, які проживають у Британії, валлійці, ірландці, шотландці. 8.
Темза і Северн – головні ріки Британії. 9. Де знаходиться Болівія? –
У Південній Америці. 10. Ви коли-небудь бували в Об’єднаному
Королівстві Великої Британії та Північної Ірландії? 11. Сполучені
Штати Америки знаходяться між Мексикою та Канадою. 12. Ніл –
115
найдовша ріка Єгипту. 13. Маніла – столиця Філіппін. 14. Скелясті
гори – це хребет на заході Північної Америки. 15. Північне море
знаходиться між Британією та Норвегією. 16. Панамський канал
з’єднує Атлантичний та Тихий океани.
Ex. 8. Use is or are with the nouns.
A. News, physics, trunks, spectacles, phonetics, scissors, billiards,

scales, gymnastics, troops, optics, mathematics, shorts, pyjamas, cards,
drafts, arms, series, mumps, ethics, means.
B. 1. Politics … an interesting subject to study. 2. Darts … a game
played in British pubs. 3. Their wages … too low. 4. Your trousers … a bit
long. 5. His clothes … terribly old. 6. Athletics … becoming more and
more popular these days. 7. Measles … a common illness. 8. My thanks …
due to all of you for your kindness. 9. My glasses ... dirty; I can’t see
properly. 10. Mary’s binoculars … very powerful. 11. The Middle Ages …
time of feudal rivalries. 12. The acoustics of this hall … excellent. 13. Two
hours … hardly enough time to see all the sights. 14. Ten dollars … a fair
price. 15. Five tons … too big a load for the truck. 16. The public … asked
to help. A reward of $100 … offered; a hundred pounds … a lot of money.
17. That pair of pants … dirty. 18. “The New York Times” … a good
newspaper. 19. The class … working on their individual projects today. 20.
Those deer … old. 21. When a young deer … motionless, its colouring
will hide it well. 22. The family … fighting among themselves constantly.
23. The fish in the aquarium … waiting for their daily feeding. 24. There
bacteria … being studied by university scientists. 25. The Portuguese …
fortunate to have such a beautiful coastline. 26. English … heard all over
the world.
Ex. 9. Complete the sentences with the given nouns. Add final s / es if
necessary. Use each noun only one time.
Advice, change, city, garbage, hardware, homework, information,

junk, luggage/bag-gage, music, progress, river, screwdriver, stuff,
thunder, traffic, travelling, trip.
1. I have some coins in my pocket. In other words, I have some …
in my pocket. 2. The Mississippi, the Amazon, and the Nile are well-
known … in the world. 3. I like to listen to operas, symphonies, and folk
songs. I enjoy …. 4. Since I came to the United States, I have visited
116
Chicago, New York, and Miami. I want to visit other … before I return to
my country. 5. The street is full of cars, trucks, and buses. This street
always has heavy … , especially during rush hour. 6. In the last couple of
years, I’ve gone to France, India, and Canada. I like to take … . In other
words, … is one of my favourite activities. 7. I put some banana peels,
rotten food, and broken bottles in the waste can. The can is full of … . 8.
They have a rusty car without an engine, broken chairs, and an old
refrigerator in their front yard. Their yard is full of … 9. Paul has books,
pens, papers, notebooks, a clock, scissors, a tape recorder, and some other
things on his desk. He has a lot of … on his desk. 10. The children got
scared when they heard … during the storm. 11. Tools that are used to
fasten screws into wood are called … . 12. I went to the store to get some
nails, hammers, and screws. In other words, I bought some … . 13.
Tonight I have to read 20 pages in my history book, do 30 problems in
algebra, and write a composition for my English teacher. In other words, I
have a lot of … to do tonight. 14. Ann took three suitcases, a shoulder
bag, and a cosmetics case. In other words, she took a lot of … in her trip.
15. Toronto is 356 ft./109 m above sea level. The population of the
metropolitan area is over 3,000,000. I found (this, these) … in the
encyclopaedia. 16. I didn’t feel good. Ann said, “You should see a
doctor”. Tom said, “You should go home and go to bed”. Martha said,
“You should drink fruit juice and rest”. I got … from three people. 17.
My English is slowly getting better. My vocabulary is increasing. It’s
getting easier for me to write and I make fewer mistakes. I can often
understand people even when they talk fast. I’m satisfied with the … , I
have made in learning English.
Ex. 10. Find the mistakes and correct them.
A. 1. She has two children. 2. One of her daughter is a doctor. 3.

Eleven millions peoples died in the war. 4. The news are on TV at 6
o’clock. 5. His pants is very expensive. 6. Every students wants to pass
this course. 7. Math is one of my favourite subject at school. 8. Five man
left early. 9. The news aren’t as bad as we expected. 10. Can I borrow
your scissors? Mine isn’t sharp enough. 11. The trousers you bought for
me is not my size. 12. A word of thanks are enough.
B. 1. Mary always has fresh egg because she raises chicken in her
yard. 2. Outside my window, I can see a lot of tree, bush, grass, dirt, and
flower. 3. Tom gave me some good advice. Milly also gave me some
117
good suggestion. 4. Yoko learned several new word today. 5. I drank two
glass of water. 6. Window are made of glass. 7. Jack wears glass because
he has poor eyesight. 8. It took me a lot of time to finish my homework. I
had a lot of assignment. 9. I have been to Mexico three time. I’ve spent a
lot of time there. 10. There are typewriter, copier, telephone, and staple in
typical business office. A business office needs a lot of equipment. 11.
The air is full of smoke, dust, carbon monoxide, and many other harmful
substance. We must seek to reduce air pollution. 12. I like to read good
literature. I especially like to read novel, poetry, and essay. My favourite
poet are Longfellow and Wordsworth. I have always liked their poem. 13.
You can find a lot of time – saving machine in a modern factory. Modern
factory need modern machinery. 14. There are more star in the universe
than there are grain of sand on the beaches on earth.
Ex. 11. Join the words according to the given model.

Model: The door / the room. The door of the room
The mother / Ann. Ann’s mother
A. 1. The camera / Tom. 2. The eyes / the cat. 3. The top / the page.
4. The toys/ the children. 5. The company / success. 6. Byron / poems. 7.
The books / his grandchildren. 8. The parents / John. 9. The toys / the
twins. 10. The profession / these men. 11. Books / students. 12.
Secretary / Doctor Black.
B. 1.The daughter / Charles. 2. The father / James. 3. The
surname / Helen and Peter. 4. The music / Glinka and Chaikovsky. 5. The
name / her sister-in-law. 6. The birthday / his stepfather. 7. The newspaper
/ today. 8. The meeting / last Saturday. 9. The rain / last night. 10. The
show / next evening. 11. The journey / a day. 12. An interval / two weeks.
13. The largest city / Italy. 14. System of Government / Britain. 15. The
treasure / the world.
Ex. 12. Paraphrase the following sentences using the noun in the
possessive case or the of – phrase. If two forms are possible, give them
both.
1. John has a brother. 2. Thomas has a sister. 3. Sophocles wrote

plays. 4. Keats wrote poetry. 5. The cow gives milk. 6. The captain made
an error. 7. The ship has a siren. 8. The siren made a noise. 9. Some thing
has a name. 10. The school has a history. 11. The world has problems.12.
Europe has art treasure. 13. The holiday lasted a week. 14. The work took
118
a year. 15. My brother-in-law has a house. 16. The book has pages. 17.
The newspaper was published this evening. 18. The man over there has a
strange name.
Ex. 13. Paraphrase the phrases below as in the model.

Model: John’s book – John has a book.
His father’s consent – His father gave his consent.
1. John’s beard. 2. John’s story. 3. John’s present. 4. John’s mistake.
5. John’s punishment. 6. John’s supper. 7. His father’s interest. 8. His
father’s conclusion. 9. His father’s influence. 10. A picture of my
mother’s. 11. A debtor’s prison. 12. A two weeks’ interval.
Ex 14. Complete the sentence with the possessive form of the noun given
in brackets as in the model.
Model: The (boy) hat is red. – The boy’s hat is red.

1. (Mrs. Smith) husband often gives her flowers. 2. The (boy) hat
is red. 3. The (children) toys are all over the floor. 4. I fixed (the child)
bicycle. 5. (The baby) toys are in her crib. 6. (The babies) toys are in their
cribs. 7. Tom and Bob are married. (Their wives) names are Cindy and
Jane. 8. That is my (wife) coat. 9. (Sally) last name is White. 10. (Phyllis)
last name is Young. 11. That’s my (boss) office. 12. These are my (bosses)
offices. 13. This is a (woman) purse. 14. The store sells (women) clothes.
15. Do you know my (sister) husband? 16. Do you know my (sisters)
husbands? 17. Did you read (yesterday) newspaper? 18. There are many
problems in (today) world. 19. It would cost me (a month) salary to buy a
new refrigerator.
Ex. 15. Complete the sentences with the appropriate form out of those
given in brackets.
1. I stepped on (the tail of the cat, the cat’s tail). 2. (The job of
Caroline, Caroline’s job) is difficult. 3. The (leaves of the trees, trees’
leaves) are turning golden. 4. Have you seen (the newspapers of this
morning, this morning’s newspapers)? 5. Look! The cat is eating (the
food of the dog, the dog’s food). 6. Be careful, (the back of the car, the
car’s back) is very near a hole in the road. 7. Our maths teacher is (the
husband of our French teacher, our French teacher’s husband). 8. John
and his children are having (a holiday of three weeks, three weeks’
119
holiday) in France. 9. (The house’s front door, the front door of the house)
is green. 10. (The sun’s rays, the rays of the sun) are very strong at the
Equator.
A. 1.Ім’я чоловіка, якого я бачив вчора. 2. Новий менеджер

компанії. 3.Рішення уряду. 4. Новий театр міста. 5. Назва книги. 6.
Економічна політика країни. 7. Другий поверх будинку. 8. Садок
наших сусідів. 9. Результат футбольного змагання. 10. Парламент
Великої Британії. 11. Поезія Шекспіра.
В. Кімната мого друга, кімнати моїх друзів, учитель Бесс,
книга Джеймса, сини нашого викладача, листи ваших економістів,
подруга Мері, сукні моїх сестер, весілля Джека і Джил, будинок
містера та місіс Картер, машина Браунів, вчорашня газета, вечірні
новини, населення Землі, назва вулиці, тижнева відпустка, початок
оповідання, капелюх полісмена, хвіст коня, п’ятихвилинна
прогулянка, діти Дона та Лінди, сьогоднішній волейбольний матч,
туризм нашого регіону, директор школи, міський кінотеатр, батьки
Майка.
7.1.2. The Pronoun
Ex. 17. Replace the nouns underlined by personal pronouns as in the

model.
Model: Sit with John. — Sit with him.
1. Close the door. 2. Open the window. 3. Talk to Mr. Brown. 4.
Listen to Ann and me. 5. Repeat the question. 6. Sit with Alice. 7. Dance
with Peter. 8. Look at those girls. 9. Listen to Mary. 10. His wife is in
Moscow now. 11. Jane, buy a magazine for Granny. 12. Alec and Mary
are engineers by profession.
1. John, give the book to Henry. 2. Tell the answer to the students.
3. My sister and I have got a room of our own. 4. Kate, read this story to
Mary and me. 5. Peter, bring flowers for your mother. 6. Send the letter to
your parents. 7. Can you and Mary get supper for you, Mary and me? 8.
Can you, Mary and I get supper for you, Mary and me?
120
Ex. 18. Fill in the blanks with the personal pronouns as in the model.
Model: Mr. Black is hungry. Bring … a sandwich.
Mr. Black is hungry. Bring him a sandwich.
A. 1. Ann is in the hospital. Take … these flowers. 2. Mr. and Mrs.
Dale are in France. Write… a letter. 3. We are thirsty. Bring … a bottle of
Coca-Cola. 4. Jim is in class. Take … this message. 5. Mrs. Brown is
here. Give … those magazines.6. The children are hungry. Bring … the
large red apples. 7. Al is here. Give … your telephone number. 8. Barbara
is at home. Take … this book. 9. We’re in the kitchen. Bring … the
glasses. 10. The class is too small. … is going to be cancelled.
B. 1. I have a wonderful family. I love … very much and … love
me. 2. I looked up some information about the average American family. I
found out that … consists of 2-3 children. 3. The soccer team felt
unhappy because … had lost in the closing moment of the game. 4. A
basketball team is relatively small. … doesn’t have as many members as a
baseball team. 5. The audience clapped enthusiastically. Obviously … had
enjoyed the concert. 6. The audience filled the room to overflowing. …
was larger than I had expected. 7. The crowd became more and more
excited as the premier’s motorcade approached. … began to shout and
wave flags in the air. 8 The crowd at the soccer game was huge. …
exceeded 100.000 people. 9. The office staff gave … boss a gold watch
when she retired. 10. The office staff isn’t large. … consists of a
secretary, a file clerk and receptionist. 11. When a student wants to study,
… should try to find a quiet place. 12. Everyone who came to the picnic
brought … own food. 13. Anyone can learn how to dance if … wants to.
14. Someone forgot … umbrella. I wonder whose it is. 15. Each student
in Biology has to spend three hours per week in the laboratory where …
does various experiments. 16. A pharmacist fills prescriptions but … is
not allowed to prescribe medicine.
Ex. 19. Choose the correct form of the personal pronoun to complete the
sentences below.
A. 1. When I came back from France I brought (they, them) all a

present. 2. Here’s a snapshot of (he, him) and his dog. 3. Are you going to
vote for (he, him) or (she, her)? 4. This is something for you and (I, me)
to think about. 5. Bill won’t go to the party without (she, her). 6. We live
closer to the school than (they, them) live. 7. The dress fits you better than
(she, her). 8. The referee penalized (they, them) more often than (we, us).
121
9. Although I was just as guilty, the teacher scolded Fred more than (I,
me). 10. You’ve been working much harder than (I, me) have.
B. 1. Mary and (I, me) both wanted to ring you yesterday. 2. (She,
her) and (I, me) first met at Alice’s party. 3. Mr. Thomas always gave
(she, her) and (I, me) the same marks. 4. Only (he, him) forgot about the
test. 5. It was (she, her) that asked the question. 6. No one except (she,
her) brought a lunch. 7. The first ones in line were Nancy, Jim and (he,
him).8. They offered their seats to you and (I, me). 9. There should be no
secrets between you and (he, him). 10. The picnic won’t be any fun
without you and (they, them). 11. This is a picture of Scott, his sister and
(I, me). 12. Everyone but (he, him) did well on the test. 13. If you were (I,
me) where would you go for vacation? 14. My teacher thinks that I am
more intelligent than (he, him).
Ex. 20. Choose the correct form of the possessive pronoun to complete
the sentences below.
1. My parents have a car. (Their, theirs) doesn’t have air
conditioning. 2. My wife and I have a car. (Our, ours) car is a Chevy. 3.
Your car is old. (My, mine) is new. 4. My car has a new battery. (Your,
yours) has an old battery. 5 Can I borrow (your, yours) car? (My, mine) is
broken. 6. My sister has a car but (her, hers) car needs a new battery. 7. Is
this bicycle (your, yours)? 8. This is (my, mine) typewriter. 9. This is (her,
hers) problem. 10. Those glasses are (my, mine). 11. Are there (your,
yours) shoes? – No, they are (their, theirs). 12. (Your, yours) suitcase is
bigger than (my, mine).
Ex. 21. Paraphrase the following sentences as in the model.

Model: He is my friend. — He is a friend of mine.
1. Kate is his distant relative. 2. Her uncle is in the Far East now. 3.
Let me introduce my cousin to you. 4. Their great friend is a doctor. 5.
Our grandson is a first-year student at the University. 6. Is Helen your
niece? 7. It is my habit to get up early. 8. It is his favourite expression. 9.
He is our colleague. 10. It is her idea.
122
Ex. 22. Fill the blanks with the correct forms of the possessive pronouns
as in the model.
Model: We have … English class here. — We have our English
class here.
A. 1. Paul keeps … books in the bookcase. 2. I usually go to see …
friends in the evening. 3. They often take … children to this park. 4. Do
you help … parents? 5. The film is very interesting but I don’t
remember … title. 6. Mary does … work well. 7. Pete and Ann teach …
children music. 8. Have you got a pencil? Kate has got no pencil to write
with. Give her …. 9. Charlotte insisted that the coat was … . 10. Alice
brought a friend of … to class yesterday. 11. I forgot my book so I
borrowed … .12. The little boy dropped his ice-cream so his mother gave
him … .
B. 1. Tell him not to forget his ticket, ask Helen not to forget …
either. 2. Take … English magazines and give me …. 3. Look at the cat,
… coat is so thick. 4. Everyone will feel proud if the team finishes …
season without a loss. 5. The family has sold … summer home. 6.
Everyone did … best on the homework. 7 Anyone who wishes can bring
… husband to the party. 8. It is surprising that no one turned in … papers
on time. 9. If I can do … homework, you should certainly be able to do
… . 10. Neither of the boys had … hair cut lately. 11. Either the students
or the teacher will give you … book. 12. Either Martin or Jones will give
… report next. 13. Not only the players but also the coach has on …
uniform. 14. Not only the director but also the members of the choir
invited … friends. 15. Both the cat and the dog spend … days outside. 16.
Both John and Mary are returning to … class.
Ex. 23. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the personal or
possessive pronouns.
A. Fill in each blank with I, I’m, me, my or mine.

1. … a student. 2. … live in an apartment near school. 3. …
apartment is on the first floor. 4. … parents often visit … . 5. They don’t
have a computer. They use … .
B. Fill in each blank with we, we’re, us, our or ours.
1. … classroom is large. 2. … study English here. 3. … foreign
students. 4. The teacher helps … learn English. 5. The teacher brings her
book, and we bring … .
123
C. Fill in each blank with you, you’re, your or yours. Pretend you
are talking directly to the teacher.
1. … the teacher. 2. … come from the U.S. 3. My first language is
Polish. … is English. 4. … pronunciation is very good. 5. We see …
every day.
D. Fill in each blank with he, he’s, his or him
1. I have a brother. … name is Paul. 2. … married. 3. … has four
children. 4. My apartment is small. … is big. 5. I see …on the
weekends.
E. Fill in each blank with she, she’s, her or hers.
1. I have a sister. … name is Marilyn. 2. I visit … twice a week. 3.
… lives in a suburb. 4. … a teacher. … husband is a doctor. 5. My
children go to private school. … go to public school.
F. Fill in each blank with it, it’s or its.
1. A dog is a good pet. … a good friend. 2. … teeth are sharp. 3. …
bites when … angry. 4. … has a good sense of smell. 5. … wags … tail
when … happy.
G. Fill in each blank with they, they’re, them, their or theirs.
1. My parents rent … apartment. 2. My apartment is small, but …
is big. 3. … very old now. 4. … live in a suburb. 5. I visit … on the
weekends.
Ex. 24. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the reflexive pronouns
as in the model.
Model: I saw … in the mirror. — I saw myself in the mirror.
A. 1. Let me introduce … . 2. Go there … . 3. They know it … . 4.
Let me speak with the child … . 5. Let her do the work … . 6. We prefer
living by … . 7. She found … a job without much trouble. 8. She can’t
solve the problem by … . 9. They talk about … at the meeting. 10. No
one can help him. He needs to help … . 11. You should like … more. 12. I
promised … to lose ten pounds.
B. 1. Helen! Do this exercise … and let Peter and Bob do it … too.
2. Children! Dress …! 3. You can’t expect a baby to take care of … .4.
One can easily injure … while skiing. 5. I can’t help you, Bob. You’ll
have to solve your problem by … . 6 Jane did not join the rest of us. She
sat in the back of the room by … . 7. You may think Stan is telling the
truth, but I … don’t believe him. 8. It is important for all of us to be
honest with … . 9. Now that their children are grown, Mr. And Mrs.
Grayson live by … . 10. You … have to make that decision, Ann. No one
124
can make it for you. 11. I don’t know what to tell you, Sue and Jack. You
will have to take care of that problem … . 12. When everybody else
forgot his birthday, Ralph decided to give … a birthday present. He
bought a new shirt for … .
Ex. 25. This is a conversation between two women at lunch. They are
discussing weight. Fill in each blank with a reflexive pronoun.
A. Help … to a piece of cake.

B. I can’t. I’m on a diet.
A. But you look so thin.
B. I have to watch … . I go to an over-eating group.
What goes on at those groups? Do you just talk about food?
Food … is not the most important topic. We learn to like … better.
A. You mean you don’t like … .
B. When I’m overweight, I look at … and think I’m ugly. I don’t like …
very much when I’m fat.
A. But you’re the same person, fat or thin.
B. I know that, but sometimes I don’t feel it.
A. Are people in your group successful at losing weight?
B. One woman promised … a year ago that she would lose 50 pounds by
January, and she did. We’re so proud of her.
A. Every year I tell … that I’m going to lose 10 pounds, but it never
happens. I get very angry at … .
B. You have to like … whether you’re fat or thin. You said so … .You
should join our group.
A. I don’t know if other people can help me. My brother lost 30 pounds,
and he did it by … . No one helped him.
B. That’s great. But some people can’t do it by … . They need the help of
a group. Why don’t you come to our group next Tuesday night?
A. Let me think about it.
Ex. 26. Fill in the blanks with the interrogative pronouns.
1. … rides a bike to school? 2. … explains the grammar? 3. … of

them speaks Spanish? 4. … usually sits near the door? 5. … student
arrived first today? 6. … usually happens after classes? 7. … wants to
repeat this course? 8. … needs help with this lesson? 9. … of her sons
goes to private school? 10. … of our students came late today? 11. … is
125
that girl over there? 12. … is your brother-in-law? 13. … old is your little
daughter? 14. … many are you in the family? 15. … are you at home? 16.
Here are the books. … is yours? 17. … will you be free? — Tomorrow.
18. … do you live with? — I live with my sister. 19. … has the right
answer? — I have the right answer. 20. There’s no name on this book. …
is it? 21. … parents speak English? — My parents do. 22. … gives you
English books to read? — My friend does. 23. … are you looking at? —
I’m looking at my son.
Ex. 27. Fill in the blanks with the relative pronouns as in the model.
Model: Do you know … time is? — Do you know what time is?
1. I couldn’t understand … she said. 2. That’s the man … wife
works in the office. 3. The woman … lives across the street won a
thousand dollars. 4. The girl … team lost the game is very unhappy. 5.
The man doesn’t know … he’s doing. 6. The man … lives next door is
very friendly. 7. We know a lot of people … live in London. 8. Where are
the eggs … were in the fridge? 9. The woman … I wanted to see was
away on holiday. 10. Do you know the girl … Tom is talking to? 11. We
saw some people … car was broken down. 12. The hotel … we stayed
wasn’t very clean. 13. The last time … I saw her, she looked very well.
14. The girl with … he fell in love left him. 15. Ben works for a company
… makes typewriters. 16. Jack has three brothers all of … are married.
Ex. 28. Combine the following individual sentences into single sentences
with relative clauses as in the model.
Model: A woman helped me. I thanked her. — I thanked the
woman who helped me. Some boys are following us. Do
you know them?
Do you know the boys who are following us?
1. A man repaired our television. We paid him. 2. Some girls took
your magazines. I saw them. 3. A woman owns that company. We know
her. 4. A policeman found her handbag. She thanked him. 5. Some
tourists arrived at the airport. I met them. 6. A pretty girl works at the
bank. Do you know her? 7. A tall man was here a little ago. Did you see
him? 8. Some people are talking in the hall. I heard them. 9. Feline
bought a camera. The camera has three lenses. 10. This book contains
some useful information. I found the book last week. 11. The doctor is
with a patient. The patient’s leg was broken in an accident. 12. John has
received a scholarship. John’s grades are the highest at school. 13. This is
126
a book. I have been looking for this book all year. 14. Mr. Bryant looks
very sad. Mr. Bryant’s team has lost the game. 15. William wants to
become a judge. William’s brother is a lawyer.
Ex. 29.Complete the sentences choosing the most suitable ending from the box and
make it into relative clause.
he invented the telephone it makes clothes
she runs away from home it gives you the meaning of
words
they are never on time it won the race
they stole my car it can support life
they used to hang on that it was found last week
wall
1. John works for a company that makes clothes. 2. The book is
about a girl … . 3. What was the name of the horse … . 4. The police
have caught the men … . 5. Alexander Bell was the man … . 6. Where are
the pictures … ? 7. The police are still trying to identify the body … . 8. A
dictionary is a book … . 9. I don’t like people … . 10. It seems that Earth
is the only planet … .
Ex. 30. Fill in the demonstrative pronouns as in the model.

Model: … is tea and … is coffee. — This is tea and that is coffee.
1. … article is easy and … one is difficult. 2. Pass me …
magazines. Thank you. 3. Who is … little girl at the window? 4. … books
are mine and … are yours. 5. Are … men over there your friends? 6. …
flowers are beautiful, aren’t they? 7. Leave … two dictionaries on my
table and take … books on the table over there to the library. 8. … picture
is framed and … one is not. 9. … roof is red and … one is green. 10. …
are my friends. 11. … newspapers are old. 12. … are newspapers and …
are magazines. 13 … are not my books, …are her books. 14. Is … Ann’s
hat?
А. Цей хлопчик, та дівчинка, ці учні, ті студенти, ця сукня, та

книга, ті яблука, ці зошити, та парта, ця дошка, ці дерева, ті окуляри,
цей малюнок, ця газета.
В. 1. Це – моя книга, а то – ваша. 2. Це моя машина, а та – їхня.
3. Це – його портфель, а той – її. 4. Це зошити наших студентів. 5.
127
Той годинник – його. 6. Я бачу цього кота. 7. Він бачив тих собак. 8.
Чиї ці сукні? 9. Чий це годинник?
Ex. 32. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the indefinite pronouns
as in the model.
Model: I have … money in my pocket. — I have some money in
my pocket.
Do you have … time to help me? — Do you have any time
to help me?
A. 1. Have you got … lessons tomorrow morning? 2. There are …
books on the shelf. 3. Are there … apple-trees in the school garden? 4.
Give me … time to think about it. 5. They did not bring … chairs into the
room. 6. She translated … articles into English. 7. Do you know …
proverbs in English? 8. We wanted to make … sandwiches but we found
we hadn’t got … bread. 9. There aren’t … good films this week. 10.
Please buy … stamps for me on your way to work.
B. 1. Will you have … tea? There is … hot water in the kettle. 2.
You may read … book you like. 3. Where can I buy … flowers? 4. I’m
interested in … information you can give me on this question. 5. May I
have … water, please? 6. Give me … money if you have … . 7. If you
have … idea about it, please tell it to me. 8. If you see … nice prints, buy
them, please. 9. If we have … extra time, we’ll go over the homework.
10. He left home without … money. 11. Come to see me … time you
want. 12. Sing … song you like. 13 Didn’t he give you … money? 14.
Aren’t there … stamps in the drawer? 15. We did the work without …
difficulty. 16. Before you go … further, we must agree on procedure. 17. I
can’t stay here … longer.
1. Ви вивчали яку-небудь іноземну мову минулого року? 2. Хто

має питання? — Дехто із нас має питання. 3. Деякі статті дуже
цікаві. 4. Він прочитав які-небудь англійські книги минулого місяця?
5. Деякі учні роблять тут свої уроки. 6. Я не маю ніяких німецьких
журналів вдома. 7. Ви маєте яких-небудь друзів у Києві? — Так, я
маю декілька. 8. У нього нема ніяких запитань. 9. До обіду є хліб?
10. Вона не помітила ніяких помилок в цьому реченні. 11. Ваш
батько розмовляє якою-небудь іноземною мовою? 12. У відрі немає
ніякої води.
128
Ex. 34. Fill in the blanks with the compound forms of the indefinite
pronouns as in the model.
Model: There is … important in the letter.
There is something important in the letter.
Is there … new? — Is there anything new?
A. 1. It’s dark here. I cannot see … . 2. She knows all about it, but
she doesn’t want to tell us … . 3. You must do … to improve your
pronunciation. 4. Ask … to help you in this work. 5. Did you say …? 6.
Please give me … interesting to read. 7. Will … go to the library right
after classes? 8. Did you hear … about this film? 9. There is … in the
next room who wants to talk to you. 10. I haven’t any more money about
me, so I cannot buy … else. 11. Is there … in your groups who lives in
the hostel? 12. Can you see … through the fog?
B. 1. Will you give me … to eat? I’m hungry. 2. If … calls while
I’m out, ask him to wait. 3. If there is … else you want, please let me
know. 4. Where can I get … to drink? 5. When can I find … here who can
give me some information on this question? 6. Let me know if …
happens. 7. Do … you can to help him. 8. … of our students speak
English during the break. 9. … of us know her address. 10. … of them
must speak to the teacher about it. 11. If there is … interesting in this
magazine, let me know. 12. Don’t ask him about … .
Ex. 35. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate indefinite or negative
pronouns.
1. I haven’t read all of this book but I’ve read … of it. At least I
know … about the subject. 2. It is a big book, but we must read it all
during the year. We can’t leave … out. 3. Has smoking … to do with
cancer? … people believe smoking has … to do with cancer at all. Others
feel that it might have … to do with it, but they don’t know what. 4. I
haven’t read … of the last four chapters yet, so I know … about them,
I’m afraid. 5. … doctors insist that people should give up smoking. 6.
Here are two keys. Will … of them fit this drawer? — No, … of them
will. There is in fact … key for that drawer. 7. Where is the book? — It’s
on the table. — But there is … there. 8. Please tell us the story … knows
it yet. 9. Are there … letters for me? — No, there aren’t letters for you.
There are … letters in the letter-box. 10. I have got … time to speak to
you now. I’m very busy. 11. I know … about your town. Please tell me …
129
about it. 12. The other day we went to see our friends, but … was at
home.
Ex. 36. Fill in the blanks with the defining pronouns each or every.
1. … man in the crowd raised his hand. 2. There were police on …
side of the square. 3 The crowd lined … side of the street. 4. Everyone in
the team received a prize. … received a medal too. 5. The ceremony will
be repeated … four years. 6. The players received $100 … . 7. They were
… looking anxiously at the referee. 8. Not … horse can run fast. 9. …
boy in the class passed the examination. 10. … seat in the theatre was
taken.
Ex. 37. Fill in the blanks with the defining pronouns all, everything or
everybody (everyone) as in the model.
Model: Ann knows … in the street.
Ann knows everybody (everyone) in the street.…
I’ve eaten today is a sandwich. — All I’ve eaten today is a
sandwich.
1. Tom is very popular. … likes him. 2. … was very kind to us.
They did … they could to help us. 3. Jill doesn’t do any of the
housework. Her husband does … . 4. Margaret told me … about her new
job. It sounds quite interesting. 5. Can … write their names on piece of
paper, please? 6. I can’t lend you any money. … I’ve got is a pound and I
need that. 7. I can’t stand him. He disagrees with … I say. 8. I didn’t
spend much money in the shops. … I bought was a pair of gloves. 9. Why
are you always thinking about money? Money isn’t … . 10. He didn’t say
where he was going. … he said was that he was going away. 11. … has
got his faults. Nobody is perfect. 12. … I want is peace and quiet. 13. …
likes this song. No wonder you can hear it everywhere. 14. Thank you for
your explanation. I understand … now.
Ex. 38. Make up sentences using both, neither, all and none as in the
model.
Model: Both of those women are clever. — Neither of them is
stupid.
None of these books are cheap. — All of them are expensive.
1. Both of those boys are tall. 2. All of those men are sick. 3. None
of them are happy. 4. Neither of these hats is good. 5. Both of them are
130
cheap. 6. All of those oranges are good. 7. None of those bottles are full.
8. Neither of these cups are clean. 9. Both of them are small.
Ex. 39. Fill in the blanks with the defining pronouns both, either, all or
the negative pronouns neither, none, no. Use of if necessary.
1. … the three boys had any money, so they couldn’t go to the

cinema. 2. I saw two films and liked … them very much. 3. She has two
boyfriends but doesn’t want to marry … them. 4. … the two applicants
was suitable for the job, so I didn’t employ … them. 5. … John and Mary
will help you if they can. 6. … passengers must show their boarding
passes. 7. … four boys thought that the competition was too difficult. 8.
The Blues won the football match, but … the players played well; in fact
… played quite badly. 9. … the men entered the competition but … them
won. 10. … the two cars was suitable for the job, so we didn’t hire …
them. 11. There are two solutions, but … is perfect, I don’t like … the
alternatives. 12. I tried all keys but … them worked. 13. … pupils knew
their new teacher. 14. … of them knew the way. 15. There are two
windows in my room. It was very warm, so I had … them open.
Ex. 40. Use neither … nor, either … or, both … and in the sentences.
1. My sister and I were upset when we heard the news. 2. You can
change trains at this station or the next one. 3. My friend and his wife
were surprised when they saw me so late. 4. My son and I like football
very much. 5. My sister and I have been to the museum. 6. The children
and their parents enjoyed the play. 7. Books and magazines are sold in
this shop. 8. A boat and a ship were seen in the distance. 9. They said the
room was light and bright, but in fact it was not large or bright. 10. You
can have some apples or fruit juice. 11. It’s urgent, so could you phone or
telex? 12. He didn’t write or phone. 13. You must go at once or wait till
tomorrow. 14. London and Paris are crowded in summer because they are
famous.
Ex. 41. Make up sentences using another as in the model.

Model: There’s a magazine on the table (on the chair).
There’s another magazine on the chair.
1. Mr. Black has a clock in his office (in his bedroom). 2. Peter has
a radio in his car (in his study). 3. There’s a library on Main Street (on
131
Lime Street). 4. There’s a bottle on the shelf (on the floor). 5. Nancy has a
mirror in her bathroom (in her bedroom). 6. She has a pen in her pocket
(in her desk). 7. There’s a bus stop at the post office (at the bank). 8.
There’s a notebook on the table (in the desk). 9. There’s a cat in the tree
(on the roof).
Ex. 42. Make up sentences using one and the other as in the model.
Model: There are two dictionaries in the bookcase
(Spanish/French). — One is Spanish and the other is French.
1. We have two lamps (yellow / green). 2. Al has two radios (cheap
/ expensive). 3. Barbara has two hats (new / old). 4. Sam has two brothers
(tall / short). 5. Nancy has two cats (black / white). 6. There are two roses
in the vase (red / white). 7. There are two girls at the bus stop (fat / thin).
8. There are two letters on the table (from England / from France). 9.
There are two libraries in the city(on Maine Street / on Lime Street). 10.
There are two houses on High Hill (modern / old).

Ще одна сорочка, ще одна сукня, ще один костюм, ще одна
пара чобіт, інше пальто, інша валіза, інші костюми, інші магазини,
інші адреси, інші речі; Роман, Олег та інші студенти; Марія, Ганна та
багато інших; Київ, Одеса та інші міста; інші учні.
Ex. 44 Fill in the blanks with the appropriate forms of the defining
pronoun other.
1. I got three letters. One from my father. … one was from my
sister. … letter was from my girlfriend. 2. Look at your hand. There is a
total of five fingers. One is your thumb, … is your index finger, … is
your middle finger,… is your ring finger. And …finger (the last of the
five) is your little finger. 3. Look at your hands. One is your right hand,
… is your left hand. 4. I invited five people to my party. Out of those five
people, only John and Mary can come. … can’t come. 5. I invited five
people to my party. Out of those five people, only John and Mary can
come. … people can’t come. 6. I would like some more books on this
subject. Do you have any … that you could lend me? 7. I would like to
read more books about this subject. Do you have any … books that you
could lend me? 8. There are many means of transportation. The airplane
is one means of transportation. The train is … . 9. There are many means
of transportation. The airplane is one. … are the train, the automobile
132
and the horse. 10. There are two women standing on the corner. One is
Helen Jansen and … is Pat Hendricks. 11. Alice reads The New York
Times every day. She doesn’t read any … newspapers. 12. Some people
prefer classical music, but … prefer rock music. 13. He will graduate in
… two years. 14. I’m almost finished. I just need … five minutes. 15.
Two countries border on the United States. One is Canada. … is Mexico.
16. One of the countries I would like to visit is Sweden. … is Mexico. Of
course, besides these two countries, there are many … places I would like
to see. 17. Some people are tall; … are short. Some people are fat; … are
thin.
7.1.3. The Adjective and the Adverb
Ex. 45. Fill in each blank by putting the two words in brackets in the
correct order. Remember to remove the –s from plural noun modifiers.
Model: People need a (coat / winter) in December.
People need a winter coat in December.
1. He bought a (car / beautiful). 2. In the supermarket we put our
things in a (cart / shopping). 3. I need a (spoon / tea) to stir my tea. 4. To
fry eggs you need a (pan / frying). 5. A (driver / taxi) drives a taxi. 6. The
school is closed during (vacation / Christmas). 7. She took a (vacation /
very / long). 8. A (worker / factory) has a (job / hard). 9. Many (factories /
automobiles) use robots. 10. (Students / colleges) buy their (books / texts)
at the (stores / books). 11. I had a (meeting / long / pretty) with my boss.
Ex. 46. Put the adjectives in brackets in the correct position as in the
model.
Model: A beautiful table (wooden / round). — A beautiful round
wooden table.
1. An unusual ring (gold). 2. An old lady (nice). 3. A good-looking
man (young). 4. A modern house (attractive). 5. Black gloves (leather). 6.
An American film (old). 7. A large nose (red). 8. A sunny day (lovely).
9. A hot bath (nice). 10. An ugly dress (orange). 11. A red car (old / little).
12. A metal box (black / small). 13. A long face (thin). 14. A wide avenue
(long). 15. A big cat (fat / black). 16. A little village (old / lovely). 17.
Long hair (fair / beautiful). 18. An old painting (interesting / French).
19. An old shirt (cotton / white). 20. A black bag (plastic / small).
133
Ex. 47. Choose the right word, adjective or adverb, from the words in
brackets.
Justify your choice.
A. 1. He looked (angry / angrily). 2. He looked at me (angry /
angrily). 3. The soup smells (good / well). 4. The sauce tastes (strange /
strangely). 5. The cook tasted the sauce (careful / carefully). 6. Everybody
looked at Mary (curious / curiously). 7. Mary’s make-up looked (curious /
curiously). 8. This perfume smells (different / differently) from the last.
9. We now smelled smoke very (distinct / distinctly). 10. Please, shut the
door (quiet / quietly). 11. Can you be (quiet / quietly), please? 12. Do you
feel (nervous / nervously) before the examination? 13. The doctor felt the
patient’s leg (thorough / thoroughly). 14. The dog seems very (clever /
cleverly). 15. She does everything (clever / cleverly).
B. Last week I had my first job interview in the U. S. I wanted to
do (good / well). A (good / well) friend of mine told me about a resume
service. He told me that this service helps you to prepare your resume
(good / carefully). I wanted my resume to look (carefully / professional). I
never wrote a resume before, so I used this service. I wanted to have a
(perfect, perfectly) resume.
A few days before the interview I worked very (hard / hardly) to
prepare answers to possible questions. The night before the interview, I
chose my clothes (careful / carefully) and ironed them. I wanted to appear
(neat / neatly). My friend told me that it’s best to look (conservative /
conservatively), so I chose my dark-blue suit. I went to bed (early), as
(usual / usually), but I did not sleep (good / well) because I was
(extreme / nervous).

Багато зошитів, багато молока, багато води, багато днів, багато
газет, багато крейди, багато снігу, багато років, багато картин, багато
музики, багато хлопчиків, багато дівчаток, багато чаю, багато
лимонів, багато мяса, багато кімнат, багато вчителів, багато роботи,
багато повітря, багато птахів, багато машин.
Мало будинків, мало чаю, мало чашок, мало хліба, мало вікон,
мало паперу, мало кави, мало музики, мало радості, мало супу, мало
дерев, мало трави, мало дітей, мало іграшок, мало світла, мало парт,
мало ковбаси, мало соку, мало книг, мало квітів, мало солі, мало
друзів, мало тепла.
134
Ex. 49. Make up questions with much or many.
Model: Tom has a lot of customers (friends). — Does he have
many friends?
He has a lot of work (money). — Does he have much
money?
1. Mrs. White buys a lot of bread (milk). 2. She has a lot of glasses
(cups). 3. She drinks a lot of coffee (tea). 4. She puts a lot of cream in
her coffee (sugar). 5. She eats a lot of fruit (vegetables). 6. Al eats a
lot of hot dogs (hamburgers). 7. He drinks a lot of tomato juice (orange
juice). 8. Barney meets a lot of people (pretty girls).
Ex. 50. Make up negative sentences with much or many.

Model: John has a lot of books (clients). — But he doesn’t have
many clients.
Ann has a lot of free time (fun). — But she doesn’t have
much fun.
1. Mrs. Dale has a lot of money (free time). 2. He has a lot of
employers (friends). 3. He smokes a lot of cigars (cigarettes). 4. He drinks
a lot of coffee (tea). 5. Nancy reads a lot of magazines (books). 6. She
writes a lot of postcards (letters). 7. She has a lot of envelopes (paper). 8.
She goes to a lot of movies (plays). 9. Her car uses a lot of gas (oil).
Ex. 51. Fill in the blanks with many, much, a great number (of), a great
deal (of).
Model: We have many (a great number of) apples this year.
We have much (a great deal of) time.
1. They’ve got  tape-recorders in the laboratory. 2. Doctor
Smith’s wife has  flowers in her garden. 3. She has  trouble with her
boy. 4. The doctor has  patients. 5. A housewife has  work to do. 6.
He has got  English books in his library. 7. We have got  spare time
today. 8. I spend  money on books. 9. She buys  milk for her
grandchildren. 10. Please, don’t put  pepper on the meat. 11. There
were  plates on the table. 12. I never eat  bread with soup. 13. Why
did you eat so  ice-cream? 14. She wrote us  letters from the country.
15.  of these students don’t like to look up words in the dictionary. 16.
 in this work was too difficult for me. 17.  of their answers were
excellent. 18.  of their conversation was about the institute. 19. There
are  new pictures in this room. 20.  of her advice was useful.
135
Ex. 52. Fill in the blanks with a few, (very) few, a little, (very) little as in
the model.
Model: I’d like to ask you  questions.
I’d like to ask you a few questions. I need a little more
information.
A. 1. I have  money, so we can go to the cinema. 2. I have 
money, so we cannot go to the cinema. 3. This girl works very , that’s
why she knows nothing. 4. Mother gave us  apples and we were very
glad. 5. He didn’t like the camp: he had  friends there. 6. The hall was
almost empty: there were  people in it. 7. I can’t buy this expensive hat
today: I have too  money. 8. She left and returned in  minutes. 9. I
think you can spare me  time now. 10. Be quick, please, we have very
 time. 11. My mother knows German  and she can help you. 12. If
you have  spare time, look through this book, please. 13. He had 
English books at home, so he had to go to the library for more books.
B. 1. After Rodney tasted the soup, he added  salt to it. 2. I
don’t like a lot of salt on my food. I add  salt to my food. 3. The
professor lectured very clearly. As a result  students had questions at
the end of the class period. 4. I have to go to the post office because I
have  letters mail. 5. Every day Max goes to his mailbox, but it is
usually empty. He gets  mail. 6. Driving to the stadium for the baseball
game was easy. We got there quickly because there was  traffic. 7. My
friend arrived in the United States months ago. 8. I think you could use
some help. Let me give you  advice. 9. Because the family is very
poor, the children have  clothes. 10. Are you finished? — Not, yet. I
need  more minutes. 11. Are you finished? — Not, yet. I need  more
time. 12.  days ago I met a very interesting person. 13. Into each life,
rain must fall (a saying). 14. I was hungry, so I ate  nuts. 15.
Margaret likes sweet tea. She usually adds  honey to her tea.
Sometimes she adds  milk, too. 16. He’s a lucky little boy. Because
his parents have taken good care of him, he has had  problems in his
young life.
Ex. 53. Fill in the blanks with much, many, little, few, a little, a few.
136
1. Are there  college-graduates among your friends? — Yes,
there are . 2.I have got  time. I must hurry. 3. I have  time and can
help you. 4. There are  cups on the table but there are  glasses on it.
5. We know very  about it. Tell us everything you know. 6. Very 
people know Doctor Sandford. 7. There are  girls in the family, aren’t
there? 8. There’s very  chalk at the blackboard. Go and fetch some
more. 9. It’s a secret. Very  people know about it. 10. Please, add 
more tea in my cup. 11. There is  paper in the box. I need more. 12.
May I take  sheets of paper? 13. I have  money, I cannot buy this
hat. 14. Can you give him  colored pencils? 15. Busy people don’t
have  free time. 16. Was there  snow last winter? 17.  Americans
prefer to live in big cities. 18. There’s  crime in a big city. 19. You will
need  time to do this exercise. It’s easy. 20. He is a busy man. Ha
doesn’t have  friends. 21. My brother is a young teacher. Every day he
spends  time preparing for his lessons. 22. I know very  about this
writer. It is the first book I am reading. 23. The pupils of our class ask 
questions at the lesson. They want to know everything. 24. You do not
make  mistakes in your spelling. Do you work hard at it? — Oh, yes, I
do. I work very  . 25. Does your sister read ? — Yes, she does. And
your brother? — Oh, he doesn’t. He has so  books, but he reads very
.
Ex. 54. Fill in the blanks with so or such.

Model: Come on! Don’t walk  slowly! — Come on! Don’t walk
so slowly!
I’ve never done  a stupid task. — I’ve never done such a stupid
task.
1. I was surprised that he looked  well after his illness. 2.
They’ve got  a lot of money; they don’t know what to do with it. 3.
She is a very pretty girl. She’s got  beautiful eyes. 4. Everything is 
expensive these days, isn’t it? 5. Why did you ask them  stupid
questions? 6. It was  a boring film that I fell asleep in the middle of it.
7. The wind was  strong, it was difficult to walk. 8. The food at the
hotel was very bad. I’ve never eaten  awful food.
Ex. 55. Use such instead of so as in the model.
137
Model: The book was so good that I couldn’t put it down.
It was such a good book that I couldn’t put it down.
1. The road is so narrow that it is difficult for cars to pass each
other. — It is. 2. The weather was so warm that I didn’t need a coat. —
It  . 3. His feet are so big that he has difficulty finding shoes to fit
him. — He has got  . 4. There were so many people in the room that
we couldn’t move. — There were ....
Ex. 56. Complete the sentences. Use enough + one of the words from the box.
people good fit money plates sweet
information study
1. Have you got  to pay for all these things? 2. My English is
not  for an interpreter’s job. 3. We had 12 people for dinner last night
but we didn’t have  . 4. Jane didn’t pass her examination because she
didn’t  . 5. The party on Sunday was very quiet. There weren’t 
there. 6. Is your tea , or would you like some more sugar? 7. I can’t
give you an answer because I haven’t got  . 8. William couldn’t run
more than 200 meters because he wasn’t  .
Ex. 57. Fill in each blank with too or very.

Model: My sister is … beautiful. — My sister is very beautiful.
I’m … short to touch the ceiling. — I’m too short to touch
the ceiling.
1. My grandfather is in … good health. He runs five miles a day. 2.
I’m … sick to go to work today. I’ll just stay in bed. 3. I can’t believe I
won the lottery. It’s … good to be true. 4. She won the lottery. She’s …
happy. 5. She should be in an easier English class. This class is … hard
for her. 6. That meal was delicious. You’re a … good cook. 7. He is a …
good person. He always helps his friends and neighbours. 8. My son
is only six years old. He’s … young to stay home alone. 9. Yesterday I
saw a … beautiful sunset. 10. I can’t reach those boxes on that shelf. It’s
… high for me.
Ex. 58. Make one sentence using too or enough from the two sentences
given as in the model.
Model: We couldn’t eat the food. It was too hot.
The food was too hot to eat.
138
1. I can’t drink this coffee. It’s too hot. This coffee is  . 2.
Nobody could move the piano. It was too heavy. The piano  . 3. I can’t
wear this coat in winter. It’s not warm enough. This coat is  . 4. Don’t
stand on that chair. It’s not strong enough. That chair is  . 5. Two
people can’t sleep in this bed. It’s not wide enough for two people. This
bed is  .
Ex. 59. Complete the following sentences with so, such, too, enough,
very.
1. That piece of wood is no good. It’s not long … . 2. They all

thought the new manager was … pleasant but a bit lazy. 3. They enjoyed
themselves … much that they didn’t want to leave. 4. The coffee is … hot
to drink. 5. That screwdriver is not big … for this job. 6. She had  a
good voice that everyone asked her to sing again. 7. The film was 
good. I would even like to see it again. 8. It was  an old record that we
could hardly hear the music. 9. That jacket is  big for you. 10. The
guitarist played  badly that the audience walked out. 11. You speak 
quietly that I can’t hear what you say. 12. It was  a heavy box that Mary
could not lift it. 13. The sea was  rough that the fishing-boats did not
leave harbour. 14. It’s  foolish to smoke, as it is known to be dangerous
to health. 15. Air pollution is making some cities  unpleasant for
civilized life. 16. There weren’t  chairs for everyone to sit down.
Ex. 60. Some adjectives are non-comparable because they have an

absolute meaning. From the adjectives, given below, pick up the ten
which are non-comparable.
Perfect, restless, unique, dead, active, lonely, serious, complete,
helpful, wrong, total, futile, breakable, main, new, principal, right, sound,
effective, good.
Ex. 61. Change these statements so that they use as  as.

Model: The teacher speaks English more fluently than I (do).
I don’t speak English as fluently as the teacher (does).
1. A car costs more than a motorcycle. 2. Cream has more fat than
milk. 3. Women live longer than men. 4. The teacher speaks English
139
better than I do. 5. Chicago has more people than Miami. 6. Tokyo is
more crowded than Los Angeles. 7. Do you spell better than the other
students in the class? 8. Did you go to bed later or earlier than your
roommate last night? 9. That horse runs faster than mine. 10. A big house
is usually more expensive than a small one. 11. The weather was worse
yesterday than it is today. 12. He can throw a ball farther than I can.
Ex. 62. Comparing now and then. Albert is thinking about life today and
life 40 years ago. Complete his sentences. Use  than or not as as.
Model: Cars / fast. — Cars are faster than they were.
Children / more things. — Children have got more things
than they had. People / not work / hard. — People don’t
work as hard as they did.
1. Life / expensive. 2. People / not / friendly. 3. Films / violent. 4.
People / live / long. 5. House / good. 6. Families / not big. 7. Children /
freedom. 8. People / eat / good food.
Ex. 63. Compare the objects according to the given model.

Model: A lemon - an apple (sour). — A lemon is sourer than an
apple.
An apple is not so sour as a lemon.
1. The Black Sea – the White sea (warm). 2. Oil – water (light). 3.
Butter – caviar (cheap). 4. Stone – wood (heavy). 5. Carrots – cucumbers
(useful). 6. China – Japan (large). 7. Meat – vegetables (expensive). 8.
Japanese – Spanish (difficult).
Ex. 64. Write sentences with not as  as and comparative (older / more
difficult etc.)
Model: Mexico City / London / expensive / crowded. — Mexico
City isn’t as expensive as London but it is more crowded.
1. City life / village life / friendly / exciting. 2. Motorways /
country roads / interesting / fast. 3. Travelling by plane / travelling by bus
/ cheap / comfortable. 4. Egypt / Iceland / green / warm. 5. Bicycles /
cars / comfortable / easy to park.
Ex. 65. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the adjective or adverb
in brackets.
140
1. Your work is  than that of John (good). 2. Clare is  than
Mike (old). 3. Mary is  student of your group (bright). 4. Nothing
can be  than a swim on a hot day (nice). 5. Yours is  dictation, I’m
sorry to say (bad). 6. This book is as  as the one you are reading
(interesting). 7. Who in your family gets up  in the morning (early)? 8.
Will you please drive  than this (slowly)? 9. Which is  way to
University (near)? 10. July is  and  month of the year (hot, dry). 11.
George is  than William. He is  in our family (old). 12. This street is
 and  than that one (narrow, quiet). 13. I’m going to get to the party
 than you (soon). 14. Which is  room in your flat (large)? 15. There
is  snow in the garden than in the street (much). 16. There is  sugar
in this sugar-basin than in that one (little).
1. Роман — найвищий хлопчик у класі. 2. Моя квартира менш

зручна. 3. Взимку дні коротші, ніж влітку. 4. Який день найкоротший
у році? 5. Ваша дочка старша моєї. 6. Це питання найважливіше. 7.
Ви бачите найвищий будинок у Києві. 8. Це — найцікавіша книжка,
яку я прочитав. 9. Ганна — найкраща студентка нашої групи. 10.
Чому ви так запізнились! — Краще пізніше, ніж ніколи. 11. Вибачте,
я не зміг прийти раніше. 12. Сьогодні погода тепліша, ніж вчора. 13.
Петро сказав, що це найкращий телевізор. 14. Я вважаю, що це один
з найкращих номерів у готелі. 15. Її робота набагато цікавіша, ніж та,
що вона мала два роки тому. 16. Студенти попросили лектора
говорити повільніше, щоб вони могли конспектувати. 17. Хоча ця
сукня краща за ту, я не візьму її – мені не подобається колір. 18. Хто
найдужчий у вашій групі? — Андрій.
Ex. 67. Write sentences with the  the. Choose a half-sentence from box
A to go with a half-sentence from box B.
Model: The earlier we leave, the sooner we’ll arrive.
A: the earlier we leave B: the faster you learn
the longer he waited the more you have to pay
the more I got to know him the sooner we’ll arrive
the more you practice your English the more profit you’ll make
the longer the telephone call the more impatient he became
the more goods you sell the more I liked him
141
Ex. 68. Select the correct form in the brackets in the following sentences.
1. Of the four dresses I like the red one (better / best). 2. My cat is
the (prettier / prettiest) of the two. 3. Your assignment is different (from /
than) mine. 4. The colder the weather gets, (sicker / the sicker) I feel. 5. A
mink coat costs (twice more than / twice as much as) a sable coat. 6. This
summary is (the better / the best) of the pair. 7. The museum is the
(farther / farthest) away of the three buildings. 8. (The sooner / sooner)
you take your medicine, the better you will feel. 9. Of the two landscapes
that you have shown me, this one is (the more / the most) picturesque. 10.
My house is (the same / as) high as his. 11. That child behaves (the most /
most) carelessly of all. 12. This book costs twice (as much as / more than)
the other one. 13. She takes (the same / such) courses as her husband. 14.
The more he slept, (the more / the most) irritable he became. 15. Jerome
has half (as many / more) records now as I had last year. 16. The more
you have, (the more / more) you want.
Ex. 69. Correct the mistakes where necessary.

Model: He got up more early than she did. — He got up earlier
than she did.
1. I am the same tall as my brother. 2. New York City is the larger
city in the U. S. 3. That man is smarter that his wife. 4. The youngest
student in the class has more better grades than you. 5. A big city has
crime more than a small town. 6. I have three sons. My oldest son is
married. 7. I visited many American cities, and I think that San Francisco
is the more beautiful city in the U.S. 8. New York is one of largest cities
in the world. 9. My uncle is the most intelligent person in my family. 10.
She better speaks English than I do. 11. Texas is one of the biggest state
in the U.S. 12. He more carefully drives than his wife.13. Paul is one of
the youngest students in his class. 14. She is richer than her best friend,
but her friend is happier than. 15. My computer is moderner than yours.
16. Jack is more good player than me. 17. It’s a bit hotter today. 18. Is it
more interesting as his last book? 19. He paid less than you for the ticket.
20. My mother is the same age like my father. 21. Ann’s headache is
badder today. 22. She lives much more far away now. 23. He put the new
books on the tall books shelf. 24. I’m too tire to go to a late movie. 25. A
truck driver often gets sleepy and has to rest at a truck stop. 26. She has
two wonderful children and a great husband.
142
7.1.4. The Preposition
Ex. 70. Answer the questions using in, at, on with the words in brackets.
Model: Where is the label? (the bottle) — On the bottle.
1. Where’s the man standing? (gate) 2. Where’s Tom sitting? (arm
chair) 3. Where’s the picture? (wall) 4. Where’s Ann standing? (top /
stairs) 5. Where’s the cat? (bottom / stairs) 6. What’s Nick doing?
(looking / mirror) 7. Where’s the dog? (yard) 8. Where’s the bank? (left)
And the library? (right) 9. Where’s the notice? (door) 10. Where’s the
man standing? (corner)
Ex. 71. Complete the sentences using in, at, on with the words or phrases
from the box.
bed sea the National a farm
school prison Theatre the cinema
the airport the station
hospital
Model: My train arrives at 11.30. Can you meet me …
My train arrives at 11.30. Can you meet me at the station?
1. I didn’t feel very well, so I stayed … . 2. Are they showing any
good films … this week? 3. Many people are  for crimes that they
didn’t commit. 4. I like the countryside. I think I’d like to work  5. Did
you get on well with your teachers when you were  . 6. We went to a
play  .7. Ann was injured in a road accident a few days ago. She is still
 .8. It was a very long voyage. We were  for 10 weeks. 9. Our
flight was delayed. We had to wait  .

У кімнаті, на столі, вранці, в садку, на автобусній зупинці,
зліва, справа, посередині, на вулиці, в кіно, на річці Темзі, на
узбережжі, попереду, позаду, у лікарні, в університеті, влітку,
навесні, на сніданок, на роботі, машиною, трамваєм, до Австралії.
Ex. 73. Complete the sentences using to, into, on, by, in.
Model: When are you going  Spain? — When are you going to
Spain?
143
1. I’m tired. I’m going … bed. 2. What time are you going  the
office? 3. I decided not to go  car. 4. We went  a very good party
last night. 5. I saw John  the morning. He was  a bus which passed
me. 6. Sorry I’m late. I missed the bus, so I had to come  foot. 7. The
cheapest way to travel  New York is  metro. 8. I must go  the bank
today to change some money. 9. I had lost my key but I managed to climb
 the house through a window. 10. Ann has just returned  England
after 2 years  France. 11. I didn’t feel like walking, so I came home 
a taxi.
Ex. 74. Put in prepositions if necessary.

1. I can’t play  the piano myself, but I’m fond going … concerts.
2. Pete explained  me that he was late  classes because he had missed
the train. 3. Let’s go  the cinema tonight, shall we? 4. Can you show us
the way  the Bolshoy Theatre? 5. It’s one  the best theatres 
Moscow. 6. My friend was  Kyiv last week. Now he is  home. 7.
What do you usually have  dinner? 8. If I manage to finish my work 
time, I’ll be glad to join  you. 9. When this actress plays the part 
Eliza, the theatre’s always packed. 10. The other day a man came  
me  the street. It was an old friend and I was surprised he had
recognized me  once. 11. We are going to have a test  the 5th 
December. 12. Could you come  my place  Sunday? 13. We live  a
block  flats in the centre of Kyiv. 14. There’s a table  the middle 
our living room 15. What can you see  this picture?
Ex. 75. Complete the sentences. Each time use in, at, on with one of the
phrases from the box.
the front row New York the west coast
the third floor the back of the class the Swiss Alps
my way to work the back of the envelope the window
the right the front page of the
newspaper
Model: The headquarters of the United Nations is  .

The headquarters of the United Nations is in New York .
1. In most countries people drive  . 2. I usually buy a newspaper
 in the morning. 3. Last year we had a lovely skiing holiday… . 4. San
144
Francisco is  of the United States. 5. She spends all day sitting  and
watching what is happening outside. 6. I have to walk up a lot of stairs
every day. My flat is  and there is no lift. 7. I read about the accident.
There was a report . . 8. We went to the theatre last night. We had seats
 . 9. I couldn’t hear the teacher very well. She had a quiet voice and I
was sitting  . 10. When you send a letter, it is a good idea to write your
name and address  .
1. Це дуже небезпечно, коли діти грають у футбол на вулиці.

2. Я зустріну тебе на трамвайній зупинці о десятій годині. 3.
Нещасний випадок трапився на перехресті вранці. 4. Поглянь тільки
на це гарне поле! 5. Я не можу знайти Тома на цій фотографії. 6. Брат
Мері мешкає у невеличкому селі на півдні Англії. 7. Париж
знаходиться на річці Сена. 8. Офіс містера Бойла знаходиться на
другому поверсі. 9. Театр — у центрі міста, напроти нього —
бібліотека, а позаду — банк. 10. Він змушений вставати о шостій
ранку, щоб встигнути на роботу вчасно.
Ex. 77. Supply appropriate prepositions.
1. Max is known  his honesty. 2. Mr. and Mrs. Jones have

always been faithful  each other. 3. Do you promise to come? I’m
counting  you to be there. 4. Trucks are prohibited  using residential
streets. 5. The little girl is afraid  an imaginary bear that lives in her
closet. 6. Do you take good care  your health? 7. I’m worried  this
problem. 8. I don’t agree  you. 9. We decided  eight o’clock as the
time we should meet. 10. Who did you vote  in the last election? 11.
How many students were absent  class yesterday? 12. It is important to
be polite  other people. 13. The farmers are hoping  rain. 14. Jason
was late because he wasn’t aware  the time. 15. We will fight  our
rights.
Ex. 78. Put prepositions in the blank spaces and read the story.
145
Richard Savage lived  London  great poverty. He wrote the
story  his life. He was short  money.  a time, as a result  his lack
 food, he became ill. He got better, thanks  the doctor who looked 
him. The doctor sent a bill  Savage  his visits. He waited  several
weeks and then sent the bill  him again.  the end, he came  the
house and asked  his money. “I expected gratitude  you, as you owe
your life  me”, the doctor said. “I am not ungrateful  you  what
you did, so I will give my life  you”, Savage answered. Tears came 
the man’s eyes and ran  his cheeks. Then he handed  the doctor two
volumes entitled “The life  Richard Savage”.
Ex. 79. Supply an appropriate preposition for each of the following.

1. Do you believe  ghosts? 2. Anthony is engaged  my cousin.
3. Mrs. Ballas substituted  our regular teacher yesterday. 4. I can’t
distinguish one twin  the other. 5. Did you forgive him  lying to you?
6. Children rely  their parents for food and shelter. 7. Tim wore
sunglasses to protect his eyes  the sun. 8. Chris excels  sports. 9.
Andrea contributed her ideas  the discussion. 10. I hope you succeed 
your new job. 11. I’m very fond  their children. 12. The firefighters
rescued many people  the burning building. 13. I don’t care  spagetti.
I’d rather eat something else. 14. Charles doesn’t seem to care  his bad
grades. 15. Sometimes Bobby seems to be jealous  his brother.
7.1.5. Modal Verbs
Ex. 80. Translate the sentences from English into your native language.
Pay attention to the modal verb can (could) and its equivalent to
be able (to).
1. The girl can read now, but she can’t write. 2. What can I do for
you? Can I help you? — Yes, please. 3. Can I have your pencil for a
minute? — Certainly. 4. We couldn’t speak English last year. Can you do
it now? — I’m afraid, I can’t. 5. Could you help me, please? — Certainly.
6. I had some free time yesterday and was able to go to my friend’s. 7.
You will be able to see the sea from our bedroom window. 8. I’m afraid I
shan’t be able to come to your party next Friday. 9. When we went into
the house, we could smell some gas. 10. She spoke in a low voice but I
could understand what she was saying. 11. I can’t speak German. Can
you? — No, I can’t either. 12. Mary can’t be so careless. 13. He will be
146
able to give me this book when he reads it. 14. I think she won’t be able
to solve this problem. 15. Last year I could not ski but now I can. 16.
Could you tell me the way to Trafalgar square?
Ex. 81. Fill in the blanks with could or was/were able (to).
1. I can’t sing now but I  sing very well when I was a child. 2.
Did you persuade them? — Yes, it was difficult, but we  persuade them
3. My grandfather was very clever, he  speak five languages. 4. He
can’t play tennis very well now but he  play quite well when he was
younger. 5. Did they find your house? — Yes, it took them a long time
but they  find it. 6. I looked for the book everywhere but I  find it
(negative). 7. The fire spread quickly but everyone  to escape. 8. She
can’t run very fast now but when she was at school she  run faster than
anyone else. 9. He had hurt his leg so he  walk very well (negative). 10.
Did you win the match? — Yes, it wasn’t easy but I  win. 11. I can’t
swim very far these days but ten years ago I  swim from one side of the
lake to the other. 12. Did the thief escape? — Yes, the policeman chased
the thief but he  to escape. 13. She wasn’t at home when I phoned but I
 contact her at her office. 14. I looked very carefully and I  see a
figure in the distance. 15. My grandmother loved music. She  play the
piano very well.
Ex. 82. Fill in the blanks with can, could or to be able (to). Some of the
sentences are negative.
1. In my country you  get married when you are sixteen. 2.
Speak up! I  hear you! 3.  I borrow your dictionary? 4. I’d love 
help you, but I  . I’m sorry. 5. I  get into my house last night because
I’d lost my key. 6. Women  vote in England until 1922. 7. I’m learning
Spanish because I want  speak to people when I’m in Mexico. 8. The
doctor says I  walk again in two week’s time. 9. It’s cold today, you 
go without your coat on. 10. Have you a friend whom you . trust?
11.He  see me. I came when he had gone. 12. I am not a person who 
tell a lie. 13. It’s raining today. We  have a walk. 14. How  you make
such a mistake as to suppose that I was younger than you? 15. Say what
you like but you … do this work in two days. 16. The box was too heavy.
He  carry it himself. 17. Sh! She  hear you! 18. How strange!  you
believe that? 19. The meat was underdone I … eat it. 20. You  tell me
147
what he said. 21. The water is too dirty. You  drink it. 22. I  swim. I
expect you  . Everyone  except me. 23. The text was too difficult. We
 translate it without a dictionary.
Ex. 83. Translate into English using can (could) and its equivalent to be
able (to).
1. Я не можу чекати на нього. 2. Чи можеш ти відповісти на це
запитання? 3. Хто може перекласти це речення? 4. Ми не могли
дістатися до університету до 9 години. 5. Вона не зможе навчитися
гарно грати на піаніно. 6. Я не зможу прийти на наступне заняття з
англійської мови. 7. Вона не могла йти так швидко. 8. Що я можу
зробити для вас? 9. Ви не могли зробити це без моєї допомоги. 10.
Вона не могла закінчити школу минулого року. 11. Коли ви зможете
це зробити? 12. Чи зможе ваша сестра купити нам завтра квиток? 13.
Ви можете допомогти їй накрити стіл для обіду? 14. Чим я можу
бути корисним вам? 15. Ви зможете взяти участь в обговоренні цього
питання? 16. Він не міг піти з ними в сад, бо йшов дощ. 17. Хто з вас
зможе перекласти цю статтю за годину? 18. Мері не могла запросити
так багато гостей на вечірку. 19. Моя подруга вміє грати на скрипці.
20. Мій брат умів розмовляти англійською, коли був дитиною. 21. Чи
зможуть вони дістати квитки на цю виставу? 22. Ольга не могла
повірити, що він зараз у Києві. 23. Ти зможеш це зробити завтра? 24.
Я зможу дати тобі книгу на кілька днів після того, як прочитаю її
сама. 25. Коли ви зможете провідати нас? 26. Йому було добре видно.
27. Я дуже радий, що вони змогли прийти. 28. Я вмію грати в теніс,
однак я не в змозі грати зараз, бо погано себе почуваю.
Pay attention to the modal verb may (might) and its equivalent to
be allowed (to), to be permitted (to).
1. May I go to the post office with Mike? 2. May we take notes
with a pencil? 3. You may go now. 4. If you have done your homework,
you may go for a walk. 5. May children play with scissors? 6. You may
not cross the road when the light is red. 7. Don’t give the vase to the
child: he may break it. 8. Don’t go to the woods alone: you may lose your
way. 9. It stopped raining and mother told us that we might go out. 10.
Who said that the children might go for a walk? 11. The children are old
enough. They are allowed to go to school alone. 12. Were you permitted
to take this book? 13. You will be allowed to go to the disco when you do
148
your lessons. 14. When shall I be permitted to have ice-cream? 15.
Yesterday she was not allowed to come home late. 16. You won’t be
permitted to go to the cinema alone.
Ex. 85. Make up sentences as in the models.

Model A: To take your pen. May I take your pen? — Of course,
you may. (I’m afraid, not, I need it.).
To smoke here; to use your dictionary; to wait for you; to leave the
room; to clean the blackboard; to have a bite; to come later.
Model B: To smoke here. — He said you might smoke here.
To answer the question; to stay here; to take this book; to read the
text; to watch TV in the evening; to help your friend with his English.
Model C: To take this book. — I am (was, will be) allowed to take
this book.
To talk at the lessons. — We are not (were not, won’t be)
allowed to talk at the lessons.
To use father’s tape-recorder; to go to the mountains on holidays;
to swim in cold water; to keep books for more than a fortnight; to invite
your friends to your birthday party.
Model D: I’ll probably do it today. — I may do it today.
Perhaps she will ring you up. — She may ring you up.
It’s possible that he will go there. — He may go there.
1. It’s possible that he will come tomorrow. 2. I’ll probably give
you a call tonight. 3. Perhaps she is ill. 4. It’s possible that the Browns are
in Brighton, but I am not sure. 5. They will probably arrive tonight. 6.
Perhaps Ann will be sent on an archaeological expedition.
Ex. 86. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the modal verb may or
its equivalents.
1. I  bring sister to your party? 2. He asked if he  bring his
sister to the party. 3. After they had finished their work, the children 
watch TV. 4. He  join the sports section as soon as he is through with
his medical examinations. 5. Becky’s mother said that everybody  take
part in the picnic. 6. If you don’t put on a raincoat, you  get wet to the
skin. 7. It  rain soon. 8. He  go home if he likes. 9. As soon as the
boy  leave the room, he smiled a happy smile and ran out to join his
friends outside. 10. Be careful: you  fall. 11. The doctor says I am
149
much better. I  get up for a few hours every day. 12. Where’s Jack? —
I’m not sure. He  be in his office.
Ex. 87. Translate into English using modal verb may (might), and its
equivalents to be allowed (to), to be permitted (to).
1. Ви можете прийти пізніше? 2. Можна мені задати питання?
3. Ви можете почекати мене в коридорі. 4. Можна мені
зателефонувати вам сьогодні ввечері? 5. Він сказав, що мені можна
залишитись там. 6. Вчитель сказав, що ми можемо зробити цю
вправу вдома. 7. Дітям дозволили піти погуляти. 8. Олегу дозволять
послухати музику після занять. 9. Мама сказала, що Петро може
пообідати вдома. 10. Чи можу я поїхати до лікаря? 11. Дітям
дозволили піти спати о дванадцятій годині. 12. Він, мабуть, зараз
вдома.
Ex. 88. Fill in the blanks with can or may in the correct form.
1.  you play the piano? 2.  Benny watch TV before going to
bed? 3. I think I  do the work myself. 4.  your friend speak English?
5.  I have another cup of tea? 6. You  stay a little longer if you like.
7. I  hear you. Speak louder, please. 8. You  take the book home. 9.
 I visit you one of these days? 10. you lift this box? 11. When the fog
lifted we  see where we were. 12. She asked me if she  use my
dictionary. 13. The telephone is out of order. I  not hear anything. 14.
 you help me a little? 15.  he read the letter? 16. You  think
whatever you like. 17. I  not walk so quickly. I have a weak heart. 18.
You  take the textbook. I don‘t need it any longer. 19. When you get
there, tell them to wait. I  be a little late. 20. I  come at six. I‘ll be
free by that time 21. None of us know what  happen before it is
finished. 22. This  be a great idea. It  also be a trap in which England
will perish. 23. I told them he  be in the garden. 24. Don‘t send him
away. We  need his advice. 25. I fear they  miss the train. They left
rather late. 26. He  be a medical student though I‘m not sure.27. It was
a year or two ago, or it  be three years ago. 28. She came to ask her
mother if she  stay and dance a little longer.
150
Pay attention to the modal verb must and its equivalent to be (to),
to have (to).
1. You must work hard at your English. 2. Everybody must come to
school in time. 3. Must we learn the poem today? 4. You must not talk at
the lessons. 5. You must not make notes in the books. 6. It must be very
difficult to learn Chinese. 7. Don’t ring him up: he must be very busy. 8.
It must be very difficult to solve such problems. 9. He must work
systematically if he wants to know French well. 10. He is to come here at
five o’clock. 11. He was to telephone the moment she was out of danger.
12. Roses were to be planted round the pond. 13. We were to go to the
cinema that afternoon. 14. When was the train to leave? 15. She is so
clever that they won’t have to hire a tutor for her. 16. They had so many
debts that they had to sell a few precious gems. 17. She lives so far that
she has to get up at 5 a.m. 18. She is so naughty that we often have to
punish her. 19. She missed him so much that he had to return to her. 20.
She has such rich parents that she doesn’t have to work. 21. We have such
a big house that we have to hire two servants.
Ex. 90. Make up sentences as in the models.

Model A: To be ready to answer all the questions. — You must be
ready to answer all my questions.
To come by 5 o’clock; to do this work; to clean your teeth every
morning; to help your mother about the house; to see the doctor; to listen
to the teacher attentively; to water the flowers every day.
Model B: To call the doctor — He has to call the doctor because
mother is ill.
To stay at home; to write the exercise at home; to get up early in
the morning; to buy some biscuits; to look up new words in the
dictionary; to go to bed late; to write a composition on Sunday.
Model C: To explain the grammar rule once more. — He had to
explain the grammar rule once more because it was
difficult.
To get ready for the dictation; to look up new words in the
dictionary; to work hard at her pronunciation; to learn the rule by heart; to
have short rest; to go to bed after midnight.
Model D: To wait for a long time. — You’ll have to wait for a long
time because I have a lot of work to do.
151
To get the necessary books; to write the exercise; to send her a
telegram; to speak to your English teacher; to go to bed now; to make a
report in English; to have tea instead of coffee.
Model E: To come to the examination at 10 o’clock. — I am (was)
to come to the examination at 10 o’clock.
To have classes at 11 o’clock; to have a short break after classes; to
have an English class on Tuesday; to have winter vacation in January; to
come to the University at 8.30; to clean the flat on Saturday; to start my
work at 9.
Ex. 91. Finish the sentences as in the models.

Model A: I am very tired (to rest a little). — I must rest a little.
1. You are very sleepy (to go to bed). 2. Nick wants to be a teacher
of History (to study History). 3. They are ill (to stay in bed). 4. We want
to get some books on ancient History (to go to the library). 5. I don’t feel
well (to stay at home). 6. We have a lot of things to do for tomorrow (to
stay at the library). 7. He lives far from the University (to get up early). 8.
She is going to make a report on international situation (to look through
the latest newspapers and magazines).
Model B: You had breakfast at 7 o’clock. It is 12 o’clock (to be
hungry). You must be hungry.
1. You had a lot of work to do (to be tired). 2. Your father is in the
bath-room (to be taking a shower). 3. I advise you to ring him up (to be at
home now). 4. Ask Nick to help you with political economy (to know it
well). 5. It is already 8 o’clock in the morning (to be ready to leave for
the University) 6. Her hair is long and thick (to be difficult to comb her
hair). 7. They read all the necessary books and magazines long ago (to be
ready for exams). 8. Tomorrow she will have a seminar in literature (to be
at the library preparing for a report now).
Ex. 92. Give short answers to the following questions: Yes, you (I, etc.)
must. No, you (I, etc.) needn’t.
1. Must we go to the University during our holidays? 2. Must you
do your lessons right after classes? 3. Must you hurry if you have plenty
of time? 4. Must a student read a rule once more if everything is quite
clear to him? 5. Must you have coffee for your breakfast every morning?
6. Must you go to the library if you have all necessary books at home? 7.
Must we write a long composition?
152
Ex. 93. Make up the sentences and change them as in the model.
Model: We are not allowed to smoke here. — We mustn’t smoke
here.
To speak Ukrainian at our English lessons; to talk at the lectures; to
miss our classes; to be late for classes; to smoke in the classroom; to
make a noise in the library; to look out of the windows in trams or buses;
to work at English by fits and starts; to waste the time before exams.
Ex. 94. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the modal verb can,
may, must.
A. 1. What  we see on this map? 2.  you speak Spanish? —
No, unfortunately, I  . 3. At what time  you come to school? 4.  I
come in? 5. You  not smoke here. 6.  I take your book? — I’m afraid
not: I need it. 7. He  not speak English yet. 8. I have very little time: I
 go. 9. They  not go to the park today because they are busy. 10. You
 read this text: it is easy enough. 11. This child  spend more time out
in the open air. 12. They  ask me about him. What should I say?
B. 1. I have forgotten my own language and  speak nothing but
yours. 2. We  go somewhere. We  wander about for ever. 3. You
 see much of interest there. 4. It seemed possible they  return. 5. No
good looking back; things happen as they  . 6. How  you let things
slide like that, Dick? 7. I think you  be glad of some coffee before you
start back to your hotel. 8. You  not go out so late at night. 9. I think it
 happen sooner or later. 10. And though he undressed and got into bed
he  not sleep. 11. I  come tonight,  I not? 12. Somebody is
knocking at the door. It  be John. — It  not be John. It is too early for
him to be back. 13. He  be a medical student though I’m not sure. 14.
Whatever the reason  be, the fact remains. 15. A fool  ask more
questions than a wise man  answer. 16. You  go when you have
finished your composition. 17. When  you come and see me? — Let
me see: I  not come tomorrow for I  be at the meeting but on Sunday
I  come. 18. Waiting  be endless, you know.
153
Ex. 95. Translate into English using modal verbs.
1. Чи можна вам допомогти? — Так, будь ласка. 2. Ви повинні
запам’ятати адресу і піти туди відразу ж. 3. Якийсь чоловік хоче
бачити вас. — Можемо запросити його сюди. 4. Чи повинна я
заплатити вам відразу ж? — Ні, не потрібно, я можу зачекати. 5. Ви
повинні підписати листа і поставити дату. 6. Він може це зробити
вчасно, чи не так? 7. Чи можу я бачити лікаря? — Так, він у кабінеті.
Сюди, будь ласка. 8. Можна ввімкнути радіо? — Мабуть, що ні. Діти
повинні йти спати. 9. Чим можу допомогти? — Ви можете багато для
мене зробити. 10. Можна задати вам запитання? — Так, будь ласка.
Ex. 96. Make up questions with the correct form of to have (to) as in the
model.
Model: Tom had to go to the police station. Why?
Why did Tom have to go to the police station?
1. We had to get up very early to catch the bus. At what time?
2.Ann has to leave tomorrow. At what time exactly ? 3. We had to
answer a lot of questions at the examination. How many questions ? 4.
George had to pay a parking fine. How much  ? 5. I have to get up early
tomorrow. Why  ? 6. My mother has to go abroad a lot. How often  ?
7. I have to leave tomorrow morning. What time ? 8. We had to wait for
ages. How long ? 9. I have to take my car to the garage. Why ? 10.
Peter had to stay in bed for a week. Why ?
Ex. 97. Choose the correct verb form from those given in brackets.
1. You (mustn’t / don’t have to) tell Mary what I told. It’s a secret. 2.
The museum is free. You (mustn’t / don’t have to) pay to get in. 3.
Children (mustn’t / don’t have to) tell lies. 4. Jerry’s a millionaire. He
(mustn’t / doesn’t have to) go to work. 5. I (mustn’t / don’t have to) do my
washing. My mother does it for me. 6. We (mustn’t / don’t have to) rush.
We’ve got plenty of time. 7. You (mustn’t / don’t have to) play with guns.
They’re dangerous. 8. This is my favourite pen. You can borrow it but you
(mustn’t / don’t have to) lose it. 9. Shall I come with you? — You can if
you want, but you (mustn’t / don’t have to).
Ex. 98. Fill in the blanks with must or have (to).

154
1. Don’t worry about that. You  do as you think best. 2. My
mother was unwell, and I  go to the chemist’s. 3. I  go and look at the
dinner. 4. Yesterday’s rain spoilt my hat completely. I  buy a new one. 5.
There was no one to help him so he  move the furniture himself. 6. “Oh,
hallo”, — she said, — “I thought you  have gone home”. 7. They didn’t
answer my first knock so I  knock twice. 8. You  always come to me
if anything goes wrong. 9. He was very sorry to think that he would 
part with it. 10. I had a sleepless night. I  go and see the doctor and get
him to give me something. I can’t go on like that.
Ex. 99. Paraphrase the given sentences using to be (to) as in the model.
Model: The lecture is supposed to begin at eight. — The lecture is
to begin at eight.
I expect her to come and help. — She is to come and help.
It was planned that we should wait for them at the door.
We were to wait for them at the door.
Who will take care of children? — Who is to take care of
children?
1. What am I supposed to do if they come too early? 2. It was
arranged that the youngest children would play on the beach. 3. We expect
you to show the place to her. 4. I am expected to leave tomorrow at the
latest. 5. This is Dora. It is arranged that she will share the room with you.
6. And who will do the cooking? 7. It is expected that two more apartment
houses will be built here. 8. It was arranged that the cup final would be
played that afternoon. 9. Who will meet you at the station? 10. It was
arranged that he should speak at the conference.
Ex. 100. Fill in the blanks with the modal verb must or the correct forms
of its equivalents to be (to) and to have (to).
1. She  send a telegram because it was too late to send a letter. 2.
They decided that she  send a telegram every tenth day. 3. Do you know
this man? He  be our new teacher of History. 4. It is raining. You  put
on your raincoat. 5. You  go out today. It is too cold. 6. I  wear glasses
as my eyesight is very weak. 7. Where  the lecture to take place? 8.
Peter  return the books to the library. We all want to read it. 9. It was
raining hard and we  wait until it stopped raining. 10. I  ask him about
it tomorrow as today he has already gone. 11.  I go there right now? —
Yes, you  12. I’m glad the lessons will begin later now. The children 
155
get up so early. 13. Children  play with matches. 14. It was late and they
 light the fire to cook their supper. 15. You  give it back to me before
you go. 16. I made a few mistakes, so I  do the whole exercise again. 17.
She  be married next month. 18. You  miss this film: it is
extraordinary good. 19. Jim  make a speech at the meeting but he had
fallen ill, so Tom  speak instead. 20. We  be there at 12 sharp. 21. We
 wait long. The bus came almost at once. 22. You … learn the whole
poem.
Ex. 101. Translate into English using the modal verb must and its
equivalents to have (to) and to be (to).
1. Мені доводиться вставати рано. Я мушу починати роботу о 8
годині. 2.Заняття в школі мають закінчитися о другій годині дня. 3.
Мені потрібно поговорити з вами. 4. Ми повинні виконати домашнє
завдання на понеділок. 5. Поїзд мав прибути о 12 годині. 6. Мені
потрібно буде зателефонувати додому. 7. Я мав зустріти свого друга,
але не зміг. 8. Їм не довелося довго чекати. 9. Я маю бути вдома о
дванадцятій годині, і мені потрібно поквапитись, тому що зараз вже
за дванадцять хвилин дванадцята. 10. Коли має закінчитися цей урок?
11. Мені доведеться зателефонувати йому та дізнатися , коли ми
маємо їхати туди. 12. Де я мушу на вас чекати? 13. Чи повинен я
зустріти їх на станції? — Ні, не потрібно. Ви мусите чекати на них
тут.
Ex. 102. Fill in the blanks with the modal verbs can, may, must, need or
their equivalents in the correct forms.
1. You  bring your books to class tomorrow. We are going to
listen to a wireless programme. 2. You  learn the poem. You  only
read it. 3. You  be late for the concert. 4. I  hardly say how important
it is. 5. I’m going to bed. I  be up early tomorrow. 6. If you have got a
ticket, you  queue. You  go straight in. 7. You  take my exercise-
book if you want. 8. We are late. We  take a taxi. 9. I  type this letter
for you. 10. I like the house, but I have not decided yet. My wife  see it
first. 11. The train  come at 5, but something has happened. 12. You 
be careful. 13. You strike a match I  see well enough. 14. You  be rude
in order to make her obey, otherwise she  complain to your boss and you
 work. 15. You  study hard in order to be a lawyer. 16. We  prepare
for my coming exam yesterday, but I  look after my sick sister. 17. The
156
doctor said, “The child is very ill. He  be taken to the hospital at once”.
18. The question  be discussed in tomorrow’s debate. 19. You  do
whatever you like. 20. He  swim very soon. 21. They  knock twice
before the door opened. 22. You  drive a car at night without lights. 23.
The day we … start it rained worse than ever. 24. You  tell him my
telephone number. He knows it. 25. We  live without food and water. We
 eat and drink.
Ex. 103. Translate into English using the modal verbs or the correct forms
of their equivalents.
А. 1. Я можу показати вам дуже цікаву статтю. 2. Ми повинні
відвідати цю лекцію у понеділок. 3. Ми не можемо обговорювати ці
питання після занять, тому що я повинна піти. 4. Чи може вона
перекласти ці англійські тексти? 5. Чи повинні ми повернути ці
журнали сьогодні? 6. Ви можете зачекати у моєму кабінеті. 7. Я
повинна піти до бабусі у понеділок.8. Можливо, мій брат знає її
адресу. 9. Вам не потрібно йти до бібліотеки, тому що ви й так маєте
вдома багато книжок і можете взяти будь-яку книжку, яку захочете.
10. Коли наступний урок англійської? — Він має бути у п’ятницю
вранці. 11. Чи можна ввімкнути радіо? — Мабуть, що ні. Діти повинні
йти спати. 12. Текст настільки важкий, що йому доводиться дивитися
у словнику майже кожне слово.
В. 1. Ця студентка могла зробити всю роботу сама. 2. Він міг
піти до бібліотеки з вами. 3. Вчора ми повинні були виконати багато
письмових вправ. 4. Нам з Колею довелося йти швидше, щоб не
запізнитися на вокзал. 5. Вчора я повинен був залишитися вдома. 6. Ці
студенти могли розмовляти англійською ще минулого року. 7. Вам не
потрібно було вставати так рано. 8. Моя маленька племінниця так
втомилася у неділю, що була не в змозі щось робити. 9. Мені
дозволили взяти цю книгу. 10. Хто сказав, що діти можуть йти на
вулицю? 11. Їм дозволили прийти в суботу. 12. Ввечері він був дома,
тому що йому не потрібно було йти до університету.
С. 1. Коли ви зможете приїхати до нас? 2. Чи зможу я доїхати до
площі Пушкіна дванадцятим тролейбусом? – Звичайно, зможете. Він
має зараз прийти. 3. Мені доведеться зателефонувати йому ще раз і
довідатися, коли мають початися збори. 4. Кому дозволять взяти
участь у дискусії. 5. Йому потрібно буде купити нові черевики. Його
черевики зовсім старі.
157
Ex. 104. Analyse the meaning of can (could), may (might), must, should +
have + V-ed, III.
1. Can she have done it? 2. The woman must have been at actress
once. 3 He cannot have thought of this himself. 4. Oh, dear, I must have
given you the wrong dial. 5. Can he have found their shelter? 6. Could she
have come here last year? 7. He can't have gone without seeing us. 8. They
may have lived here since the house was built. 9. You could have made
quite a nice program out of hers, I suppose. 10.1 may have lost your
address. 11. He must have gone abroad. 12. We should have informed Dick
about our plans. 13. You shouldn't have read the letter. 14.1 can't have
found my scarf myself J must have lost it. 15. Grandfather might have
secretly married the girt. 16. If the woman is a thief, the police should be
informed.
Ex. 105. Choose between must + Perfect Infinitive and should + Perfect
Infinitive in the following sentences.
1. Henry was deported for having an expired visa. He ... (to have) his
visa renewed. 2. Juliet was absent for the first time yesterday. She ... (to
be) sick. 3. The photos are black. The X-rays at the airport... (to damage)
them. 4. Blanca got a parking ticket. She ... (to park; negative) in a
reserved spot, since she had no permit. 5. Carmencita did very well on the
exam. She ... (to study) very hard. 6. Janet did very badly on the exams.
She (to study) harder. 7. German called as soon as his wife had her baby.
He ... (to be very proud). 8. Eve had to pay $5.00 because she wrote a bad
check. She ... (to deposit) her money before she wrote a check. 9. John isn't
here yet. He ... (to forget) about our meeting. 10. Alexis failed the exam.
He ... (to study; negative) enough.
Ex. 106. Choose the correct answer in each of the following sentences
according to meaning and tense.
1. Marcela didn't come to class yesterday. She (will have had / may
have had) an accident. 2. John didn't do his homework, so the teacher
became very angry. John (must have done / should have done) his
homework. 3. Sharon was supposed to be here at nine o'clock. She (must
forget / must have forgotten) about our meeting. 4. Where do you think
Juan is today? I have no idea. He (should have slept / may have slept) late.
5. George missed the class today. He (might have had / might had had) an
accident. 6. Robert arrived without his book. He (could have lost / would
have lost) it. 7. Thomas received a warning for speeding. He (should have
158
driven / shouldn't have driven) so. fast 8. Henry's car stopped on the
highway. It (may run / may have run) out of gas. 9. The grass is wet. It
(must have rained / could have rained) last night. 10. John (must have gone
/ might have gone) to the movie yesterday, 11. The cause of death (could
have been / should have been) bacteria. 12. The policeman (shall make /
should have made) a report about the burglary.

І. Він би міг прийти, якби ми його запросили (але ми не
запросили). 2. Ви б могли запросити мене на своє весілля (докір). 3.
Вам не варто було б їхати на тому автомобілі з несправними
гальмами. Ви б могли потрапити у серйозну аварію (але не
потрапили). 4. Джон, мабуть, втратив самоконтроль. 5. Вона сказала,
що її батьки, мабуть, вже приїхали. 6. Він, напевне, не там завернув
(не в тому місці). 7. Невже Джон збрехав мені? 8. Чому тут нема
Тедді? Він, напевне, запізнився на поїзд. 9. Ніхто, мабуть, не купив цю
картину. 10. Йому варто було б порадити Томасу приєднатися до нас.
11. Гарольду слід було б бути більш обережним. 12. Напевне, ваш
суворий погляд перешкодив Тому у всьому зізнатися. ІЗ. їй
обов'язково треба було зателефонувати мамі та попередити, що вона,
можливо, не приїде. 14. Ви могли б принести книги вчасно. 15.
Можливо, вона загубила сумку. 16. Ви могли б запропонувати свою
допомогу, коли він потрапив у халепу. 17. Можливо, він зробив це,
ніхто не знає. 18. Він, можливо, заблукав. 19. Він, напевне, зробив
помилку. 20. Невже, він дійсно зробив все так, як обіцяв тобі? Це так
на нього не схоже.
Ех. 108. Complete the following sentences with shall, will, would.
1. Now and then Gavin ... stop to point out silently some rarity. 2.
When we were at the seaside, we ... go bathing every day. 3. She ... walk to
the station when the weather was fine. 4. He's very good. He ... play with
that toy for hours on end. 5. As she grew old she ... often talk about her
father. 6. Kate is very generous. She ... lend you money if you need it. 7.
When he needed extra money, he ... work overtime. 8. Mrs. Selby is a
chatterbox. She ... carry on talking for hours and hours if you give her a
chance. 9. When we went out, Jack ... always take an umbrella with him
whether it was raining or not. 10. He ... always say something which
makes me laugh. 11. He ... slam the door when he comes in. 12. I want to
run my own establishment. And you … one day. 13. Marry, ... you marry
159
me? Yes, I ... . 14. He ... fall to smoking cigarette after cigarette and the
glowing stubs ... lie around like petals. 15. The victory of peace can and ...
be won. There ... be no war. 16. My boy ... not be worried. 1 ... protect
him. 17. He ... always say something which makes us laugh. 18. ... we
have our classes from 4 till 6? 19. ... I stick a stamp on the postcard? 20.
Barbara ... marry not the man they like, but the man I like. 21. ... you have
rum in your tea? 22. Promise not to be angry and you .... know the very
truth. 23. We ... reduce unemployment.
Ex. 109. Complete each sentence with will, would, won't, wouldn't.
1. If you ... tell me the truth, I ... get your enemy to tell me lies. 2. I
asked her several times to be careful but she ... listen to me. 3. Don't worry.
I ... look after your garden, 4. I had two Indian girls to teach. Their parents
were old-fashioned and ... send them to school 5. He ... sit for hours
reading, paying no attention to what was going on around him. 6. I'm
always tired these days. – Well, you ... go to bed so late every night, it isn't
surprising. 7. I ... be careful with the car, I promise. 8. I ... call you when I
am ready. 9. I ... keep you any longer. 10. I've asked him until I'm blue in
the face. He ... tell me anything. 11. But we ... win, we have to win. 12. He
thought I was a freak because I... carry a weapon.
Ex. 110. Translate the sentences into English.

1. Я просила, я благала, але він так і не дав мені грошей. 2. Не
розумію, чому вікно не відчиняється. 3. Я не зміг з'їздити за місто у
минулу неділю, бо батьки нізащо не дозволили взяти їхню машину. 4.
Він сказав, що йому потрібно поїхати через кілька днів, та ми й
слухати не хотіли. 5. Я ліг і намагався заснути, але сон не приходив. 6.
Ми нікому не скажемо, про що ми дізналися. Не хвилюйтесь. 7. Він
часто бачив, як вона посміхалася чомусь. 8. Зазвичай вечорами він
сідав на веранді і викурював цигарку. 9. Сестра нізащо не хотіла брати
мене на пікнік. 10. Щонеділі вона зазвичай сідала за піаніно і співала
нам. 11. Ми не можемо змиритися з тим, що він відстає від групи. 12.
Друзі намагалися переконати мене, та я не хотів їх слухати.
Ех. 111. Translate the sentences into English using shall, should, will,
would in the positive or negative form.
1. Ви отримаєте задоволення завтра, не сумнівайтеся. 2. Я нізащо
не зміню свою професію. 3. Я прохаю її не палити, та вона всеодно
продовжує палити. 4. Я, бувало, пізно лягав спати та пізно прокидався.
160
5. Увімкнути світло? У кімнаті стає темно. 6. Вона пожалкує про це, я
впевнений. 7. Зазвичай він вигулює собаку перед сном. 8. Дитина
погано себе поводить. 9. Перш; ніж я піду, дайте мені попити, або я
помру від спраги. 10. Ви не залишите кімнату, доки я вам не дозволю.
11. Що б ти робив, якби мене не було поруч? 12. З якої причини мені
обманювати тебе? 13. Я зустрічався з нею. Бувало, вона купляла мені
чашечку кави. Мені потрібно було б відмовитись, та я був дурний. 14.
Чи не бажаєте ви зняти пальто? •
Ех. 112. Fill in the blanks with must not or need not.
I. You ... ring the bell, I have a key. 2. 'You ... play with matches',
said Mother. 3.1 ... go to the shops today. There is plenty of food in the
house. 4. You ... strike a match; the room is full of gas. 5. We ... drive fast;
we have plenty of time. 6. You drive fast; there is a speed limit here. 7.
You ... turn on the light; I can see quite well, *». You ... ask a woman her
age. It's not polite.
Ex. 113. Fill in the blanks with didn't have to or needn't have.
1. You ... (bring) your umbrella, as we are going by car. 2. You ...
(water) the flowers, as it is going to rain. 3. I ... (translate) it for him, he
did it himself, he understands Latin. 4. I ... (answer) the questions, which
saved me a lot of trouble. 5. I knew I ... (lock) the door after me, but how
was I to know you wanted to come out, too? 6. I ... (ring) the bell because
the door opened before I got to it. 7. I ... (help) them at all, they themselves
knew what to do. 8. I ... (write) to him because the news was already
known to him. He phoned me shortly afterwards. 9. You ... (listen) to him.
His information was misleading. 10. You ... (buy) such a lot of flowers.
We've already got more than necessary. 11. He ... (get up) so early every
day. It was only on that particular occasion that he did. 12. You ... (stay) if
you didn't want to. We could have done without you just as well.
Ex. 114. Give negative replies to the following questions.

Note. Mustn't in a reply means "не можна" (заборона),
needn’t – "не потрібно" (немає необхідності),
can't – "не можна" (немає можливості),
I'm afraid not – ввічлива відмова.
1. May I go out and play in the street? –.... It's dangerous to play in the
street.
2. May I open the window? –.... It's cold outside.
161
3. Must he come here today? – .... He may come tomorrow.
4. May I take your textbook for a moment? –.... I must finish the
exercise.
5. Must 1 bring the ear-phone? –.... It's the monitor's task.
6. Can I see the Dean? –.... He is busy.
7. Must we all come to the laboratory at 12? – .... You may come half an
hour later.
8. May I write with your pencil? –.... It's broken.
9. May I take it at home? – .... The book is not mine.
10. Can I speak to the secretary? –... He is out.
Ex. 115. Complete these sentences using the modal verbs must, mustn't,
can, can't, needn't; sometimes two answers are possible.
Model: You needn't wait any longer. You can go now.
We mustn't make a noise. We must be quiet.
You must move your car. You can't / mustn't park here.
I. You mustn't leave the door unlocked. You ... lock it. 2. You can
only smoke in the canteen. You ... smoke in this room. 3. We needn't do the
washing up now. We ... do it tomorrow. 4. We can stay a bit longer. We ...
go now. 5. You can't keep on using my tennis shoes. You ... buy your own.
6. You can keep those magazines. You ... give them back to me. 7. He must
tell her this news. He ... keep silence. 8. He needn't go to the library I ...
give her the book she needs. 9. You can do your homework in the evening.
You ... do it now. 10. You needn't get up early. I ... cook my breakfast
myself. 11. You mustn't be late. We ... take a taxi.
Ex. 116. Choose the most suitable answer: A, B, C.

1. It isn't cold. You ... wear a coat. (A. mustn't, B. needn't, C. can't).
2. You ... fall asleep when you drive a car. (A. mustn't, B. needn't, C. must).
3. You ... drive a car without a license. (A. needn't, B. can't, C. mustn't). 4.
He ... get up early. It's Sunday today. (A. must, B. mustn't, C. needn't). 5.
You ... ring her up. She is coming tomorrow. (A. mustn't, B. needn't, C.
must). 6. She is waiting for you. You ... hurry. (A. must, B. mustn't, C.
needn't). 7. If you want to speak English, you ... be afraid of making
mistakes. (A. mustn't, B. must, C. needn't). 8. The weather is fine today.
You ... close the window. (A. must, B. needn't, C. mustn't). 9. You feel bad.
You ... go to see a doctor. (A. need, B. must, C. can). 10. You ... have a
passport to visit most foreign countries. (A needn't, B. mustn't, C. can't).
162
11. I... go to bed early on Sunday; we are going hiking on Monday. (A.
can, B. needn't, C. must).

1. У мене немає цих книжок вдома і мені потрібно ходити до
бібліотеки. 2. Мені не довелося їй писати. Мені не треба було писати
їй. 3. Їй не потрібно зараз поспішати. 4. Нам не потрібно було
залишатися там довго. 5. Вам не треба палити. Ви повинні більше
приділяти уваги власному здоров'ю. 6. Їй не можна виходити. Вона ще
хвора. 7. Ви не повинні говорити російськoю на уроках англійської
мови. 8 Мені треба туди йти? – Ні. 9. Нам не потрібно буде їм
телефонувати. 10. Йому не потрібно йти у їдальню обідати. Він може
пообідати тут. 11. Вам не треба було звати лікаря. Але ви позвали. 12.
Вам прийдеться їх провести. Вони не знають дороги.
Ех. 118. Change these sentences to express a) certainty, b) supposition, c)

disbelief. Use modal verbs in the correct grammatical forms. Pay attention
to the form of the infinitive.
Model: The flight has been cancelled.
(a) Certainty: The flight must have been cancelled.
(b) Supposition: The flight may / might have been cancelled.
(c) Disbelief: The flight can't /couldn't have been cancelled.
A. 1. The door is locked on the inside, 2. Jane sprained her ankle. 3.
Helen has been held up by the traffic. 4. He is still lecturing at Moscow
University. 5. The Browns will make a stop-over in Paris. 6. The treaty will
be ratified in the near future. 7. They didn't get Mr. Carter on the phone. 8.
Joseph didn't recognize you. 9. The case against Mr. Tucker will be
dismissed. 10. Robert won't violate traffic rules.
В. The driver took a side-road. 2. You've left your passport at home.
3. There was a mistake in the calculations. 4. This point was added later. 5.
Evans is digging in the garden. 6. The mechanic is testing the engine. 7.
Jean has forgotten all about it. 8. Donald will go on holiday in June. 9. Guy
will clear it up. 10. He has an alibi.
C. 1. Ann is so naive. 2. We missed our stop. 3. The Mortlakes have
been away since October. 4. They are still debating the problem. 5. Mr.
Hammond will be voted down. 6. Roy was fined for speeding. 7. Mr.
Sanders will change his mind. 8. Nobody will get injured. 9. Mr. Blant was
not elected. 10. The plane won't crash.
163
1. Очевидно, міс Грей – гарна акторка. 2. Очевидно, вона буде
мати головну роль у новій п'єсі. 3. Очевидно, Максу ще не поставили
телефон. 4. Можливо, ви забули паспорт вдома. 5. Не може бути, щоб
вони не знали міфу про Ікара. 6. Можливо, Брауни вже переїхали на
нову квартиру. 7. Напевне, він вирішив, що цю п'єсу не слід дивитися.
8. Не може бути, щоб Девід не привітав їх. 9. Очевидно, Мері
розлучилася з Джоном. 10. Можливо, ми зустрінемо їх у Фоксів.
Ех. 120. Insert the appropriate modal verb.

I. He has insulted our family and he ... suffer for it! 2. You ... not
have gone out without an umbrella in such rainy weather. 3. I'm afraid I ...
have sounded a bit unfriendly over the phone. 4. "I ... to have told
Soames," he thought, "that I think him comic". 5. We ... live to their age,
perhaps. 6. Here she ... sit, sewing and knitting, while he worked at the
table. 7. Why ... you be different from other people? 8. "Good morning",
said the girl, "I believe you... Tony. Have I guessed right?" 9. If you ... read
without spectacles, and I believe you ... be so good, as to read this letter for
me. 10. Captain Steerforth, ... I speak to you for a moment? 11. Ann felt
she ... not stand much more of this discussion. She said she ... go on with
her work and began to rise. 12. Why ... one make trouble for oneself when
one is old? 13. ... you do me a favour and meet her at the station? 14. He
was not old, he ... not have been more than forty. 15. The day we ... to start
it rained worse than ever. 16. You ... not hurry. There is plenty of time. 17.
Mother has fallen ill, so I ... to change my plans. 18. We didn't know what
to do: the key ... not turn and we ... not get into the room. 19. I ... not to
have left Cape Town last night. I wish I had not. 20. ... I speak to Mr. Pitt,
please? – I'm afraid he's out at the moment .... you ring back later?
Ex. 121. Insert the appropriate modal verb.

We must make decisions all the time! But we ... never be certain
whether we are right or wrong. The work you choose to do ... be suitable
for you or it ... not. The person you marry ... be perfect match or ... be the
worst possible choice. Suppose you have saved money for the future. You
… invest it wisely so that it grows in value or you ... lose the bet in a
foolish moment. You think you have a healthy diet, but the food you eat...
actually be very bad for you and ... be the cause of terrible illness. Perhaps
you travel a lot by plane. All the flights you make are routine, but one of
them ... be your last. Decisions! Decisions! But we don't learn from
164
experience. Experience is the quality that allows us to go on making the
same mistakes with more confidence.
Ex. 122. Choose the most suitable modal verb in brackets.

1. I suppose the young ... (should, must, have to) learn for
themselves. 2. It was inevitable that both Role and Noel ... (should, would)
see a difference in Peri. 3. Why ... (should, shall) I be angry with the girl I
love? 4. "I didn't know you were here", she began. "But I thought you ...
(may, might, could) be". 5. I was afraid to go near the room window when
I went upstairs lest I ... (should, would, might) see him. 6. Neither this
foolish talk nor any other talk ... (shall, will) part us. 7.1 tried to catch the
bridle but the horse ... (would, will) not let me come near its head. 8. The
fire alarm went and we ... (must, had to) be out of the building in two
minutes. 9. The night-coach by which Susan ... (was, had to) go was on the
point of departure. 10. And he says you ... (must, might) be in love for you
sat on deck all night and scribbled verses all day in your table-book. 11.
How (can, dare) you look me in the face and do it, sir? 12. We had enough
foreign currency left, so I (couldn't, didn't have to) buy any more 13. You
(can, have to) wear a uniform in the army. !4. You (must, have to) keep out
of the room. It's private. 15. It isn't cold outside. You (mustn't, needn't)
wear a coat.
7.2. INDICATIVE MOOD.

TENSE AND VOICE FORMS OF THE VERB
7.2.1. The Indefinite Form of the Verb in the Active Voice
Ex. 123. Translate from English into your native language. Explain the use
of the Present Indefinite tense.
1. Leaves become green in spring and yellow in autumn. 2. Ann
always brings some flowers with her when she comes to the office. 3. In
the evening my parents watch TV or listen in. 4. Time passes at different
speeds according to what you are doing. 5. Actions speak louder than
words. 6. We have a class in English Grammar from 9 till 11 on Saturday.
7. She speaks three foreign languages. 8. Come to my place on Thursday if
you are free. 9. Tell him to wait when he comes. 10. The train arrives in a
few minutes. Let’s go to the platform. 11. The trains arrive and leave
according to schedule. 12. My sister has a soft voice. She sings beautifully.
165
13. Do you hear that noise? 14. She knows how to tell the time in English.
15. They want to buy some new chairs. 16. The Sun rises in the East.
Ex. 124. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Indefinite tense.
1. My little sister (to go) to school every day. 2. Bad students never
(to work) hard. 3. It often (to snow) in winter. 4. He (to wake up) at seven
and (to have) breakfast at half past seven. 5. Mother always (to cook) in
the morning. 6. There (to be) a girl downstairs who (to want) to talk to
you. 7. My friend (to go) there nearly every week. 8. The children (to play)
all the morning and (to sleep) in the afternoon. 9. She (to be) a school-girl.
She (to go) to school in the afternoon. 10. Jane (to be) fond of sports. She
(to do) her morning exercises every day. 11. For breakfast she (to have)
two eggs, a sandwich and a cup of tea. 12. After breakfast she (to go) to
school. 13. It (to take) him two hours to do his homework. 14. Your
nephew (to read) English books in the original? 15. You (to understand)
the words of this English song? — Yes, I (to think) that now I (to
understand) them. 16. Whom you (to see) there? — I (not to know) this
man but it (to seem) to me that it (to be) Doctor Sandford. 17. The girl (to
sing) well but she (not to play) the piano. 18. How often he (to come)
home so late? 19. How many foreign languages your grandfather (to
speak)? 20. How long it (to take) your son to prepare a report in English?

1. Заходьте, будь ласка. Не звертайте уваги на безладдя. 2. Хто
готує їжу у вашій сімї? — Звичайно, мама. — Де ти звичайно
обідаєш? — Звичайно, я обідаю дома, але інколи їм у заводській
їдальні. 3. Я звичайно ходжу в кіно у суботу та неділю, бо в інші дні
тижня я дуже зайнята. 4. Ви не заперечуєте, якщо я запалю? —
Анітрохи. — Бажаєте цигарку? — Дякую вам, але я не палю. 5.
Скільки вам потрібно часу, щоб приготувати сніданок вранці? — Я не
готую сніданок вранці, тому що в мене мало часу; я випиваю чашку
чаю або кави і зїдаю бутерброд. 6. Як правило, я не маю часу вранці
підмітати підлогу, витирати пил та мити посуд. Я тільки прибираю
постіль та відчиняю вікно, щоб провітрити кімнату.
Ex. 126. Translate from English into your native language. Explain the use
of the Past Indefinite tense in the sentences.
166
1. She studied English a year ago. 2. He finished his design last
night. 3. We walked home yesterday. 4. Yesterday I skied in the country. 5.
The students went to London two years ago. 6. It rained a great deal last
summer. 7. She didn’t come in time for dinner yesterday. 8. My daughter
finished her report in time. 9. When did the last conference take place? 10.
It took him some years to master English. 11. We saw the dean some
minutes ago. 12. Pete didn’t forget to put his clock forward and so was not
late in the morning. 13. They took the book by Dickens last week. 14.
When my son was in the country in winter, he played snowballs almost
every day. He used to skate and ski too. 15. The man entered the room, sat
down at the table, ordered some food, and began to read a newspaper.
Ex. 127. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Indefinite tense.
1. He (to stay) at the Institute after classes on Monday. 2. Some
years ago she (to live) in the country. 3. She (to make) an interesting report
at the conference. 4. Last year he (to work) at the factory. 5. Yesterday we
(to go) home by metro. 6. It (to take) me half an hour to get home on
Sunday. 7. We (to see) the film a week ago. 8. He (to do) his best to learn
to speak English correctly and to understand it. 9. Last night we (to watch)
a hockey match. 10. I (not to go) to work yesterday. 11. Tom (not to shave)
in the morning because he (not to have) time. 12. When you (to come) to
this town? — I (to come) here before the war. 13. Where you (to buy) this
dictionary? — I (to buy) it at the Central book shop two days ago. 14. She
(not to say) anything about it yesterday. 15. He (not to rush) because he
(not to be) in a hurry. 16. Whom you (to meet) at the conference? 17. She
(not to be) interested in the book because she (to read) it last year. 18. How
many exercises you (to do) at the last lesson?

1. Моя подруга Марія прийшла до мене в суботу після роботи.
2. Ми вирішили повторити перед диктантом слова з п’яти уроків. 3.
Ми повторили граматичні правила та зробили багато вправ. 4. Чи
дивилися ви вчора кіно по телевізору? — Так. Чи сподобалось воно
вам? — Не дуже. 5. Чи записала ти лекцію вчора на магнітофон? —
Так, а що? 6. Коли ти приїхав? — Я приїхав учора. 7. Де ви жили
минулого року? Ми жили в Києві. 8. В минулому році я не дуже
часто ходив до театру, бо в мене не було часу. 9. Тобі сподобалася ця
картина, чи не так?
167
Ex. 129. Translate the following sentences into your native language. Pay
attention to the expressions used to (would) + V0 and to get (be)
used to + Ving. Use the models.
Model A: This is the town I used to leave in.
Це місто, в якому я раніше жив.
She would walk to the station when the weather was fine.
Вона, бувало, ходила на станцію пішки, коли погода
була гарна.
1. In the evenings captain Brown would come to their place and
they would play a game or two of chess. 2. She used to sit before the open
window watching with the interest the busy life of the street. 3. The two
sisters are no longer as much alike as they used to be. 4. It’s a pity she
can’t sing as she used to any longer. 5. I used to get up early in the
morning when I was a child. 6. She used to be my best friend but we aren’t
friends any longer. 7. He never used to smoke. 8. He didn’t use to play
chess, but now he plays very well.
Model B: John was used to swimming every day when he was at the
University. Джон звик плавати кожного дня, коли він
був в університеті.
1. We got used to cooking our own food when we had to live alone.
2. We were used to writing our exercises in our copy-books. 3. The man is
used to reading his newspaper in the morning. 4. He got used to drinking
tea without sugar. 5. She was used to getting up very early when she was a
student. 6. They are used to staying alone.

1. Зараз дитина вже не плаче так часто, а раніше вона плакала
щоночі. 2. Марія звикла пити каву щоранку? 3. Коли моя матуся
хворіла, я, бувало, сиділа біля неї годинами. 4. Вчора моя подруга
витратила дуже багато грошей, тому що купила собі дуже дорогу
сукню. 5. Я не ходила вчора на роботу, бо дуже погано себе почувала.
6. Вона не прийшла на вечір, бо ми її не запросили. 7. А хіба ти вчора
не ходив до своїх друзів? – Ні, я був дуже зайнятий.
Ex. 131. Translate from English into your native language paying
attention to the use of the Future Indefinite tense.
1. I shall become an engineer in two years. 2. He won’t stay in town
on Sunday. 3. They will invite them to the theatre tomorrow. 4. On
Monday he’ll get up early. 5. She will enjoy skiing in the forest next week.
168
6. It will take you long to master this speciality. 7. The hall will be full of
students in an hour. 8. They will understand you if you don’t speak fast. 9.
It will be impossible for us to get into the hall when the lecture begins. 10.
When my wife is ready, we’ll join you. 11. It’ll take you less time if you
go by car. 12. We shall know English well in case we go to the language
laboratory every day.
Ex. 132. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Indefinite or the Future
Indefinite.
1. When he (to return), I (to give) him the key. 2. I (to stay) in bed till
the clock (to strike) seven. 3. If I (to see) him, I (to be) very glad. 4. If you
(to eat) all that, you (to be) very sick. 5. We (to stop) working as soon as
you (to be) tired. 6. He (to buy) the house when he (to have) enough
money. 7. As soon as the holidays (to begin), the beach (to be) very
crowded. 8. He (to be) late for the train if he (not to start) at once. 9.
Unless I (to have) a quiet room, I (not to be) able to do any work. 10. We
(to have) to move upstairs if the river (to rise) any higher. 11. He (to open)
the door if you (to give) him the key. 12. If you (to want) to work here next
year, you (to have) to study at the evening department.
Ex. 133. Translate what is given in brackets using the Present Indefinite or
the Future Indefinite tense.
1. Ask him if he (поїде на море). 2. You will enjoy yourself if you (
поїдете на море). 3. They say (буде дощ); the clouds are gathering. 4. We
shan’t be able to go out if (буде великий дощ). 5. I don’t know when he
(прийде). 6. Tell him to wait when he (прийде). 7. Tell Mother we (не
скоро повернемось). It’s much too far away. 8. I’ll talk to him about if I
(побачу його сьогодні). 9. Ask him if he (одягне плащ); it looks like rain.
10. Please tell him the news as soon as you (зустрінете його).
Ex. 134. Fill in the blanks with shall and will where necessary.
1. Ask if they … go in for their examination on Tuesday. 2. I have
no idea when I … finish reading this book. 3. The students … receive
grants if they … study well. 4. We don’t know when we … have a test in
Grammar. 5. Tell me when the meeting of the first-year students … take
169
place. 6. My friend asks me if I … go to the library with him. 7. They …
rest in the south till the classes … begin. 8. You must translate this text
before the teacher … come. 9. They … take the children out if they …
finish the work earlier. 10. I don’t know if they … finish the work earlier.
Ex. 135. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Indefinite tense or to be
going to form.
1. I (to help) you to pack your bags? 2. We (to have) the house
painted in May. 3. What time you (to be) ready for the party? 4. Those
people (to try) to cheat you. 5. I (to finish) this work tonight even if I don’t
get to bed until midnight. 6. I (to write) to you as soon as I arrive. 7.
Perhaps the manager (to visit) the factory if he has the time. 8. I can’t
come to your party on Saturday because I (to get married). 9. I borrowed
the money because I (to buy) a new car next week. 10. Look at those
clouds: there (to be) a storm. 11. If you ask him, he (to do) it for you. 12.
When summer comes, I expect the weather (to be) hot and it (to rain) little.
13. My God! Those two cars (to crash)! 14. That tree makes the house very
dark. - Very well, I (to cut) it down. 15. I don’t feel well, I think I (to faint).

А.1. Коли ми складемо іспити, ми поїдемо до моря відпочивати.
2.Через два роки я стану вчителем. 3.Ти поїдеш завтра на прогулянку
з нами? 4. Вони матимуть перерву о дванадцятій чи об одинадцятій
годині? 5. Ми не будемо складати іспит з історії України цього місяця,
чи не так? 6. Ми збираємось складати його наступного семестру. 7.
Не бійтесь, він не буде ставити таких запитань. 8. Я зроблю цей
переклад, якщо не буду зайнятий. 9. Я збираюсь вивчати німецьку
мову наступного року. 10. Ми будемо раді бачити вас у нас вдома.
В. 1. Я зроблю все можливе, щоб оволодіти англійською мовою.
2. Ви отримаєте насолоду, якщо підете на концерт цього актора. 3.
Сьогодні я залишусь вдома на той випадок, якщо Джон зателефонує
мені. 4. Щось сталося з моїм телевізором. Сьогодні я не буду його
ремонтувати, тому що я не маю жодної вільної хвилини. Я
відремонтую його завтра. 5.Діти підуть спати дуже рано, тому що
завтра вони виїздять на море. 6. Діти не будуть дуже стомлені після
170
такої прогулянки. 7. Як тільки збори скінчаться, я тобі повідомлю. 8.
Що ви збираєтесь робити завтра ввечері? – Я збираюсь поїхати на
вокзал, щоб зустріти свого товариша. 9. Ми не зголодніємо, якщо
пообідаємо зараз. 10. Як тільки дощ вщухне, ми підемо гуляти, чи не
так?
Ex. 137. Use the Present Indefinite, the Past Indefinite, the Future
Indefinite or to be going to instead of the infinitives in brackets.
A. 1. Who usually (to do) his homework in this room? – This
student (to do). 2. I (to live) near my office last year. I always (to walk)
there. 3. How well your friend (to speak) English? – He (to speak) badly.
4. What language you (to learn) five years ago? – I (to learn) French. 5.
What language you (to be going) to learn next year? 6. Who you (to
discuss) this question with last night? 7. He (to have) an operation next
week. 8. It’s very cold. I (to light) a fire. 9. If I (to find) your passport, I (to
telephone) at once. 10. You (to go) with me to the theatre if I (to invite)
you? 11. I (not to go) to the party if the weather (to be) bad.
B. 1. I (not to work) at this office three years ago. 2. Ask him if he
(to know) him two months ago. 3. I (not to hear) anything. You just (to
imagine) things. 4. You (to go) to the auction tomorrow? – Yes, I (to go)
but (not to buy) anything. 5. The Queen (to open) Parliament next month.
6. They (to invite) twenty guests. 7. What she (to be going) to do with the
money? 8. The police (to arrest) him if they (to catch) him. 9. Ask him
when he (to take) his exams. 10. Unless you work very hard, you (not to
be) successful. 11. I (to lend) you money a month ago. When you (to
repay) me? 12. Unless you (to be) more careful, you (to have) an accident.
13. You (to realize) that you (to stand) on my toe? 14. When you (to come)
to Moscow? – A week ago. 15. No one (to know) when he (to come)
tomorrow or whether he (to come) at all. 16. I think he (to make) progress
very soon because he (to work) very hard. 17. He (to light) a cigarette and
(to look) at me for about three minutes. 18. What you (to do) on your last
day off? – I (to spend) it with my friends. 19. If anyone (to call) when we
(to be) out, tell them we (to be) back at five. 20. He (to draw) the candle
towards him, (to take) his pen and (to begin) a letter to his mother.

А. 1. Я навчаюся у Київському національному лінгвістичному
університеті. 2. Щодня я ходжу на лекції і практичні заняття. 3. Моя
171
сестра працює на великому заводі. 4. Зазвичай вона дістається до
заводу автобусом, чи не так? 5. Вона витрачає півгодини на те, щоб
доїхати до заводу. 6. Але вчора вона витратила сорок п’ять хвилин
через сильний снігопад. 7. Де і коли вона обідає? 8. Вона обідає в
їдальні. 9. Ви прийшли додому вчора о 7 годині вечора, чи не так? 10.
Ми повечеряли, послухали передачу УТН о 21 годині і переглянули
цікавий фільм. 11. Ви лягаєте спати рано чи пізно? 12. Ми ніколи не
лягаємо спати рано. 13. Коли я одержу квартиру, я куплю меблевий
гарнітур. 14. Він буде дуже радий, коли вона прийде сьогодні. 15. Ви
поговорите з ним, якщо побачите його на лекції? 16. Ви
зателефонуєте мені, як тільки приїдете до Києва? 17. Моя сестра
Галина збирається відсвяткувати день народження своєї доньки
наступного тижня. 18. Вона збирається запросити всіх друзів своєї
доньки. 19. Вони завжди приносять багато квітів і подарунків.
В. 1. Всі подивилися на них з цікавістю. 2. Вчора ніхто не дав
мені відповіді на моє запитання, тому сьогодні я збираюся обговорити
його знову. 3. Коли вони були молодими, вони, бувало, їздили у
відпустку до Криму. 4. Якщо ви не поквапитеся і не візьмете таксі, ви
спізнитесь на поїзд. 5. Я не бачила його до того часу, доки він не
повернувся до Англії влітку. 6. Не виходьте з автобуса, доки він не
зупиниться. 7. Раніше вона була гарною спортсменкою, а зараз вона
дуже зайнята, тому що збирається вступати до університету і не має
багато часу на тренування. 8. Він приєднається до вас, як тільки
закінчить свою роботу. 9. Якщо піде сніг, то не буде так холодно, чи
не так? 10. Де живе ваш приятель? - А хіба ти не знаєш його адреси?
Я був впевнений, що ти бував у нього раніше. 11. У вас заняття з
англійської мови по понеділках чи по вівторках? 12. Коли приходить
декан вашого факультету? – Як правило, він приходить о дев’ятій
годині, але вчора він прийшов значно раніше. 13. Хто написав цю
книжку? Вона дуже цікава, і дуже шкода, що я не знаю її автора. 14.
Не хвилюйтесь, він незабаром прийде. Він ніколи не запізнюється.
7.2.2. The Continuous form of the verb in the Active Voice
Ex. 139. Translate into your native language. Explain the use of the
Present Continuous tense in these sentences.
1. I am reading a very interesting article in the newspaper. 2. Listen,
she is singing so well. 3. Now he is working at the Pedagogical Institute. 4.
172
I am staying at home today. 5. My grandmother is always grumbling. 6.
Look, they are crossing the street. 7. The expedition is starting in some
days. 8. My little nephew is such a naughty boy, he is continually worrying
his parents. 9. This writer is working at a new book of poems. 10. They are
leaving for Bulgaria in a week.
Ex. 140. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Continuous tense and
explain its use.
1. Please, be quiet. I (to try) to concentrate. 2. Look! It (to snow). 3.
Why you (to look) at me like that? Have I said something wrong? 4. You
(to make) a lot of noise. Can you be a bit quieter? 5. Excuse me, I (to look)
for a phone box. Is there one near here? 6. Listen! Can you hear those
people next door? They (to shout) at each other again. 7. Why you (to
wear) your coat today? It’s very warm. 8. I (not to work) this week. I’m on
holiday. 9. I want to lose weight. I ( not to eat) anything today. 10. Please
don’t make so much noise. I (to study). 11. Let’s go out now. It (not to
rain) any more. 12. Listen to those people. What language they (to speak)?
13. They (to come) to see me tomorrow. 14. Tom isn’t free today in the
evening, he (to go) to see his mother in the hospital. 15. You (to go) to the
party on Sunday? 16. I (not to work) tomorrow in the evening. 17. What
are you doing these days? - I (to work) at my article. 18. I (to look for) a
job now.
Ex. 141. Choose the correct variant.

1. Vegetarians are people who (don’t eat / are not eating) meat. 2.
Look out! My husband (comes / is coming). 3. Some people still think the
sun (goes / is going) round the earth. 4. I (play / am playing) tennis every
weekend. 5. Who (sits / is sitting) in my chair? 6. What (happens / is
happening) in golf if you lose the ball? 7. An alcoholic is a person who
(drinks / is drinking) too much and can’t stop. 8. Look! (She wears / She’s
wearing) the same shoes as me. 9. What (are you looking / do you look)
at? – A strange bird. 10. We (usually stay / are usually staying) with Peggy
when we go to Chicago. 11. Can you explain why water always (runs / is
running) downhill? 12. What (do you do / are you doing) with my coat?
13. Nobody (gets / is getting) up early for fun. 14. Not many passenger
planes (fly / are flying) faster than sound. 15. Excuse me, what language
(do you speak / are you speaking)? 16 Where is Tom. – He (is having /
has) a shower at the moment. He always (has / is having) a shower at 8
o’clock. Why are you so nervous? – He always (has / is having) a shower
173
when I need him. 17. Excuse me, but you (are sitting / sit) in my place. –
Oh, sorry, I’m so absent-minded, I always (make / am making) mistakes.
18. Where (are you / are you being), Roy? – I (am / am being) in the
sitting-room. I (am reading / read). 19. Listen! What a nice piece of music!
– I (don’t hear / am not hearing) anything.
Ex.142. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Indefinite tense or the
Present Continuous tense to express an action in the near future.
1. Now we are very busy as we (to leave) tomorrow. 2. In summer
we always (to leave) for the country. 3. Let’s go to the platform, the train
(to arrive) in five minutes. 4. The delegation of English teachers (to arrive)
by plane tonight. 5. On Monday I (to take) an exam on the History of
England. 6. Students (to take) exams twice a year. 7. My sister (to come)
on Sunday. 8. When my friends (to come) to our town, they usually (to
stay) at our house. 9. My friend (to arrange) a party tonight. 10. When they
(to arrange) a party, they usually (to invite) all our family. 11. Hurry up!
The last train (to leave) in a few minutes. 12. Their friends (to leave) for
the Crimea in a week. 13. Why you (to hurry)? – I (to have) a lecture at 11
sharp. 14. Where you (to go) tonight?
Ex. 143. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Continuous tense or to
be going to form.
1. I (to play) bridge tonight with Tom and Ann. 2. He (to have) an
operation next week. 3. It’s very cold. I (to light) a fire. 4. My nephew (to
come) to stay with me next weekend. – Where you (to put) him? – I (to
put) him in the room in the tower. 5. What you (to tell) the police? – I (to
tell) them the truth. 6. When you (to have) your next lesson? – I (to have)
it on Monday. 7. We (to take) the children to the seaside this summer. 8. I
(to give) him a football for the next birthday. 9. She (to sing) in her first
big concert next month. 10. What you (to do) with the money? 11. I (to
pick) you up at 6.30. Don’t forget. 12. I (to compete) in the bicycle race
tomorrow. 13. Mr. Pitt has just phoned to say that he (not to come) back till
Wednesday night. 14. The Town Council (to build) a new school here.
Ex. 144. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Indefinite tense or the
Present Continuous tense. Explain the usage of the tenses.
1. I (not to belong) to a political party. 2. Hurry up! The bus (to
come). I (not to want) to miss it. 3. The River Nile (to flow) into the
Mediterranean Sea. 4. The river (to flow) very fast today – much faster
174
than usual. 5. It ever (to snow) in India? 6. We usually (to grow)
vegetables in our garden but this year we (not to grow) any. 7. Can you
drive? – No, but I (to learn). My father (to teach) me. 8. You can borrow
my umbrella. I (not to need) it at the moment. 9. George says he’s 80 years
old but I (not be believe) him. 10. Ron is in London at the moment. He (to
stay) at the Hilton Hotel. He usually (to stay) at the Hilton Hotel when he’s
in London. 11. This machine (not to work). It hasn’t worked for years. 12.
He (to appear) at the Fortune Theatre next week. 13. She (to appear) to
have a problem. 14. Why you (to look) at me like that? 15. It (to look) as if
it’s going to rain. 16. I (to see) what you’re trying to say. 17. I (to see) the
manager this afternoon. 18. I (to think) you’re right. 19. What you (to
think) about? 20. I (to feel) very tired today. 21. I (to feel) she’s making a
mistake.
Ex. 145. Translate the following sentences into English.

А. 1.Він все ще працює. 2. Вона ще читає ту книгу? 3. Вони
зараз не вчаться. У них канікули. 4. Я збираюсь допомогти йому. 5.
Вони приїздять наступного четверга. 6. Що він робить? – Дивиться
телевізор. 7. Зараз на вулиці йде сніг. 8. Том зараз складає іспит. 9.
Хто це стоїть біля столу? – Там стоїть наш викладач. 10. Вони зараз
йдуть обідати. 11. Який фільм зараз показують? 12. Він зараз вдома.
Він готується до контрольної роботи. 13. Моя подруга навчається в
університеті. А зараз вона відвідує місячні курси водіїв. 14. Вони
виїжджають ввечері, а зараз вони збирають речі. 15. Про що він мене
запитує? Я його не розумію.
В. 1. Я не знаю, чим він зараз займається. 2. Чоловік, про якого
ви розповідаєте, мій друг. 3. Книга, яку я зараз читаю, дуже цікава. 4.
Вам подобається чай? – Так, дякую. Це вперше, коли я п’ю чай із
задоволенням. Зазвичай я п’ю тільки каву. 5. Я пишу їй листа знову,
хоча й не вірю, що вона мені відповість. 6. Що ти робиш сьогодні
ввечері? – Я збираюсь піти до своїх батьків. Вони завжди кличуть
мене до себе, і якщо я сьогодні не прийду, вони образяться. 7. Еліс
вдома? – Так, але вона приймає душ. Якщо ви збираєтесь чекати, то
проходьте до кімнати. – Так, я зачекаю. 8. Послухайте! Хтось співає у
сусідній кімнаті. – Так, я чую, це моя улюблена пісня. 9. Хто це так
кричить нагорі? – Це наша сусідка. Вона завжди кричить. 10.
Допоможи мені знайти ключ. Я завжди все гублю. 11. Коли я
приходжу додому, моя дружина завжди готує вечерю. 12. Чи ви йдете
175
сьогодні на вечірку? – Так, але ми трохи запізнимось, починайте без
нас. – Завжди у вас якісь справи.
Ex. 146. Choose the correct verb form.

A. 1. I (saw / was seeing) a very good programme on TV last
night. 2. I (cooked / was cooking) and I dropped the knife. 3. It was 8.00 in
the morning. A lot of people (stood / were standing) at the bus stop waiting
to go to work. 4. A magnificent oak tree (stood /was standing) in the
middle of the garden. 5. I (studied / was studying) politics at university. 6.
He (studied / was studying ) the effects of radiation when he suddenly
died. 7. When I woke up this morning, it (rained /was raining). 8. It (rained
/ was raining) every single day of the holidays. 9. Ann (waited / was
waiting) for me when I arrived. 10. We (did not go /were not going) out
because it was raining. 11. What (did you do / were you doing) at this time
yesterday? 12. Yesterday Sam (worked / was working) hard all day long.
B. 1. While I (shopped / was shopping) this morning, I (lost / was
losing) my money. I don’t know how. 2. Last week the police (stopped /
were stopping) Alan in his car because he (travelled / was travelling) at
over eighty miles an hour. 3. How (did you cut / were you cutting) your
finger? 4. I asked him what he (thought / was thinking) about. 5. I (thought
/ was thinking) the game was extremely good. 6. The flight (lasted / was
lasting) three hours. 7. George (fell / was falling) off the ladder while he
(painted / was painting) the ceiling. 8. Last night I (read / was reading) in
bed when suddenly I (heard / was hearing) a scream. 9. (Did you watch /
were you watching) television when I (phoned / was phoning) you? 10.
Tom (took / was taking) a photograph of me while I (did not look / was not
looking). 11. I (broke / was breaking) a plate last night. 12. The waiter
asked us if we (waited / were waiting) for him or we just (rested / were
resting).
Ex. 147. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Indefinite tense or the Past
Continuous tense.
A. 1. When we (to go) out, it (to rain). 2. I wasn’t hungry last
night. I (not to eat) anything. 3. You (to watch) television when I (to
phone) you? 4. Jane was not at home when I went to see her. She (to
work). 5. I (to get) up early this morning. I (to wash), (to dress) and then I
(to have) breakfast. 6. The postman (to come) while I (to have) breakfast.
7. We (to meet) Joan at the party. She (to wear) a red dress. 8. The boys (to
176
break) a window when they (to play) football. 9. I was late but my friends
(to wait) for me when I (to arrive). 10. I (to get) up at 7 o’clock. The sun
(to shine), so I (to go) for a walk. 11. He (not to drive) fast when the
accident (to happen). 12. Margaret (not to go) to work yesterday. She was
ill. 13. What you (to do) on Saturday evening? – I (to go) to the cinema.
14. What you (to do) at 9.30 on Saturday evening? – I (to watch) a film in
the cinema. 15. They (to sit) in the garden when it (to start) to rain.
B. 1. At six o’clock this morning I (to have) a wonderful dream,
but then the alarm (to go) off. 2. This time yesterday I (to lie) on the beach.
3. When I walked in, they all (to talk) about babies. 4. I saw Sid when I (to
come) to work this morning. He (to shop). 5. She (to meet) her husband
while she (to travel) in Egypt. 6. While I (to talk) to Mrs. Singleton,
somebody (to walk) into my office and (to steal) the computer. 7. When
Jake (to come) in, everybody (to stop talking). 8. I (to look) out of the
window and (to see) that we (to fly) over the mountains. 9. I (to wake) up
to find that water (to pour) through the bedroom ceiling. 10. He (to break)
his leg while he (to play) football. 11. I (to go) to see how she (to be) and
found she (to cry). 12. She (to tell) me she (to have) a bad time with her
husband.
Ex. 148. Translate the sentences into English and explain the usage of
tenses.
А. 1. О сьомій годині ранку вчора я працював. 2. З п’ятої до
сьомої вечора вона готувала вечерю. 3. Вчора увесь день вони
готувались до іспиту. 4. Коли він прийшов, ми пили чай. 5. Що ви
робили вчора в цей час? 6. Де ви були о сьомій вечора вчора? – Я
працював у бібліотеці. 7. Він читав книгу, коли я увійшов. 8. Поки я
відпочивав, він наполегливо працював. 9. Я не знав, що він пише
роман. 10. Ми закінчували роботу о шостій годині позавчора. 11. Він
запросив вчора на прогулянку до парку. Погода була гарна, сонце
сяяло, дув легкий вітерець, на небі не було жодної хмаринки. 12. Коли
він увійшов, на годиннику була 2-а година, усі спали. 13. Вчора я
запізнився, тому що о 9 годині я все ще чекав на автобус. 14. Я не міг
зайти до директора, тому що він із кимось розмовляв. 15. Він казав,
що йде дощ.
В. 1. Коли я чекав на трамвай, я побачив Алана, який стояв
поблизу мене і з кимось розмовляв. 2. Коли поїзд зупинився, я
побачив свого брата, який стояв на пероні і чекав на мене. 3. Куди ви
йшли, коли я зустрів вас біля бібліотеки? 4. У той час, коли я читала,
177
мій брат готувався до іспиту. Він мовчки сидів за столом, щось писав і
не хотів відповідати на телефонні дзвінки. 5. Коли я увійшов, він мене
не побачив, тому що він щось читав. 6. Потяг не міг зупинитись, тому
що ішов дуже швидко у той момент. 7. Він запитав мене, чи я чекаю
на когось. 8. Я не знав, чи він збирається приєднатися до нас. 9. Що
ви робили з третьої до п’ятої вечора минулої п’ятниці? – Грав у гольф.
Я завжди граю у гольф щоп’ятниці. 10. Він казав, що його звуть
Джон, і додав, що мешкатиме у готелі, поки продовжуватиметься
конференція. 11. Вона побачила, що хтось наближається до них, і
сказала, що не впізнає, хто це. 12. Коли я прокинувся, вона вже
збиралась виходити. Як завжди, вона виходила з дому о восьмій
годині ранку.
Ex. 149. Use the Future Continuous tense to express an action which is
supposed or anticipated in the future.
1. Will you have a cup of tea? – No, thank you. I (to have) lunch
soon. 2. I must be off now. They (to wonder) what has happened to me. 3.
Will you, please, wait a little? He (to come) home soon. 4. I don’t want to
disturb you. I know you (to pack). 5. It’s just the time to see him. He (to
work) in his little garden. 6. He is supposed to be very busy then. He (to
prepare) for his examination. 7. Just a second. You (to see) Nora tonight?
8. What game he (to play) tomorrow?
Ex. 150. Use the Future Continuous tense to express an action which is
supposed or anticipated in the future.
1. Will you have a cup of tea? – No, thank you. I (to have) lunch
soon. 2. I must be off now. They (to wonder) what has happened to me. 3.
Will you, please, wait a little? He (to come) home soon. 4. I don’t want to
disturb you. I know you (to pack). 5. It’s just the time to see him. He (to
work) in his little garden. 6. He is supposed to be very busy then. He (to
prepare) for his examination. 7. Just a second. You (to see) Nora tonight?
8. What game he (to play) tomorrow?
Ex. 151. Complete the sentences with the Future Indefinite or the Future
Continuous forms of the verbs in brackets.
1. Will you (to come) to the concert this evening? 2. I’d rather you
didn’t call tomorrow afternoon. I (to entertain) visitors. 3. What do you
think you (to do) at this time next year? 4. I (to see) him next week, so I (to
mention) it to him then. 5. I (to work) late at the office this evening, so I
178
(not to get) home till about ten. 6. You (to disappoint) her if you don’t go.
Now that you’ve promised, she (to expect) you. 7. Do you think they still
(to wait) for us when we get there? – Oh, yes! They (not to go) till we
arrive. 8. When you arrive at the airport, an escort (to wait) for you. You
(to recognize) him very easily. He (to wear) a dark green suit and a yellow
tie.
Ex. 152. Choose the correct verb form.

A. 1. I (will be coming / am coming) to London next Wednesday to
see some customers. 2. (Will you be / are you) free any time in the
afternoon tomorrow? 3. She (will be working / will work) in London while
I (will be staying / am staying) there. 4. My company (will open / is
opening) a new office in Bonn next year. 5. When (will you be going / are
you going) to Germany? – On Monday. 6. If I get a taxi, I (will work / will
be working) in my office at 12.30. 7. Don’t worry, I (will see / will be
seeing) you at the airport. 8. Bye, I (will see / will be seeing) you on
Thursday. 9. I’m sure you (will be looking / will look) through the
morning newspaper when she returns. 10. While it (is raining / will be
raining), we (will be staying / will stay) at home.
C. 1. So you’ve sold the house? When (will you move / will you
be moving)? 2. Darling, I love you. (Are you going to / will you) marry
me? 3. I hear you’ve been offered a new job. (Do you / are you going to)
accept it or not? 4. Do you think they (will find / find) a way to stop
people ageing soon? 5. Hurry up and buy your ticket. The train (will
leave / will be leaving) soon, and I don’t want to miss it. 6. Which platform
(will it / does it) leave from? 7. Damn! We (are going to / will be) late for
the party. By the time we get there, all the others will have eaten, and there
(will be / is going to be) nothing left for us. 8. When (are you going to get /
will you be getting) changed? The taxi (will arrive / will be arriving) any
minute, and you aren’t even ready yet! 9. Don’t worry. We’ve got lots of
time. What time (will the play start / does the play start)? 7.00, isn’t it? If
the traffic (isn’t / won’t be) too bad, we (will be sitting / will sit) on our
seats at 6.45. We (will have time / have time) for a quick drink. 10. What
time (are we going to get back / will we be getting back)? I (have to tell /
will have to tell) the babysitter.
Ex. 153. Express a future action using different future forms and explain
the usage of the form.
179
A. 1. Your plane (to arrive) at 14.05. 2. What you (to do) this time
next week? 3. Take the medicine. You soon (to feel) better. 4. What you (to
do) while you (to be) on holiday? 5. I (to have) lunch with the director
tomorrow. 6. Mind the baby! She (to touch) the fire! 7. Ring me tonight. I
(to give) you my number. 8. It (to remain) cold and there (to be) snow on
the hills. 9. Don’t phone at 8.00 because I (to have) dinner. 10. He looks
pale. I think he (to faint). 11. They (to knock down) that old building. Isn’t
it a shame? 12. Don’t worry about the mess. I (to tidy up). 13. Next term
(to begin) on September 1. 14. When do you think they (to start)? 15. I (to
go) to a party tomorrow night. Would you like to come too? 16. According
to the weather forecast it (to rain) tomorrow. 17. I’m sure Tom (to get) the
job. He has a lot of experience. 18. I can’t meet you this evening. A friend
of mine (to come). 19. Tom isn’t free on Sunday. He (to work). 20. I think
it (to cost) about $ 3000 to rebuild the garage. 21. Alice (to have) a baby.
22. I (to play) tennis with Stan on Sunday. 23. He (to win). He always
does. 24. Don’t tell her. She (to tell) everybody else. 25. She (to get
married) on Friday at the local church. 26. It (to rain), look at those clouds.
B. John and Anita (to get) married in two week’s time. The church
ceremony (to start) at 3.00, so all the guests (to have) to be in their seats by
2.50. John’s brother, Paul, (to be) his best man, so he (to have) to make
sure all the arrangements go smoothly. At 5.00 they (to have) the reception
in the King’s Head Hotel and at 10.00 they (to go) to Italy for their
honeymoon. They (to stay) in a hotel near Lake Como for two weeks, and
when they (to come) back, Anita (to start) looking for a job. By the time
it’s all over, it (to cost) them over two thousand pounds! What a lot of
money!

A. 1. Завтра о сьомій годині ранку я буду працювати. 2. З 15-ї до
17-ї години ми будемо писати контрольну роботу. 3. Цілий день вони
будуть обговорювати це питання. 4. Коли він прийде, усі вже будуть
танцювати. 5. Що ти будеш робити завтра в цей час? – Я буду
готуватись до іспиту. 6. Ми будемо вечеряти, коли ви прийдете. 7.
Завтра я буду вдома увесь день. 8. У неділю увесь день ми будемо
готуватись до їх приїзду. 9. Завтра в цей час я буду їхати потягом до
Києва. 10. О 12 годині він все ще буде перекладати статтю.
B. 1. Поки я буду роздивлятись навколо, він кудись сховається, і
в той час коли я буду розшукувати його усюди, буде займатися своїми
справами. 2. Що ти будеш робити увесь час, поки ми будемо їхати
180
потягом? Потяг буде їхати до Москви цілих три доби. 3. Вони
приїдуть завтра о 12 годині, коли діти вже будуть спати. 4. Поки ти
будеш відпочивати, я буду займатися своїми справами, чи не так? 5.
Що ти будеш робити, поки нас не буде вдома? - Увесь цей час я буду
виконувати домашні вправи; мені здається, що, коли ви прийдете, я
все ще буду цим займатись. 6. Якщо ти прийдеш раніше, його не буде
вдома: він буде складати іспит. 7. Я буду готуватись до занять, поки
вона буде писати свого листа. 8. Він буде працювати з восьмої до
дев’ятої години, тому не треба телефонувати йому у цей час. 9. Він
казав, що завтра о вісімнадцятій годині він буде розмовляти з
кореспондентом. 10. Чи вона говорила тобі, що в той час коли ми
будемо розмовляти з ними, вона буде думати про наш успіх?
7.2.3. The Perfect form of the verb in the Active Voice
Present Perfect tense in these sentences.
1. She has read a very interesting book this week. 2. They have
chosen light-green wall-paper. 3. Have you seen my watch anywhere? 4. I
have not finished my letter yet. 5. She has bought a new carpet. Let’s go
and look at it. 6. Has Charles passed his exams yet? 7. I will let you know
as soon as I have finished. 8. You will get used to our methods when you
have worked here a bit longer. 9. He’s been ill since the beginning of the
month. 10. This play has been on for a fortnight.
Ex. 156. Supply subordinate clauses with the verbs in the Present Perfect
tense.
1. I don’t know why (she – not to come). 2. She asks why (you – to
lay the table). 3. I’d like to know why (he – not to answer my letter). 4.
Tell me why (you – to quarrel). 5. She doesn’t say why (she – to refuse to
take this work). 6. She wants to know where (they to go to). 7. He can’t
say where (the dog – to appear from). 8. Tell me, please, how long (you –
to live in this town). 9. I wonder how long (she – to work at our Institute).
10. He asks what (you – to cook for supper). 11. I’d like to know what (to
happen to the cake). 12. I can’t guess why (they – to part).
Ex. 157. Copy the sentences arranging them in the following way: 1.
Sentences expressing the completion of actions. 2. Sentences expressing
durative actions.
181
1. Glad to see you! Haven’t seen you for ages. 2. I have lived in
Moscow since childhood. 3. Have you done your morning exercises? 4.
Robert has studied English for five years already. 5. Ann has made a new
dress. 6. The children have just come home from a walk. 7. Has anyone
cleaned the blackboard? 8. Why haven’t you brought your exercise book?
9. Kitty has been asleep for two hours, it’s time to wake her up. 10.
Something has gone wrong with the radio-set. 11. I haven’t had time to
repair radio since last Monday. 12. Have you heard the news? 13. The bell
has gone, let’s begin our lesson. 14. It’s two o’clock, so I’ve been here for
two hours.
Ex. 158. Complete the following sentences with the given alternatives
using since or for.
1. I haven’t seen you … (May, three years). 2. We have been here …
(an hour and a half, January). 3. They have lived in this street … (1970, a
long time). 4. Nobody has written to me … (many weeks, my birthday). 5.
I haven’t been to my native town … (I was 17, ten years). 6. She has loved
to sing … (she was a child, all her life). 7. We have met regularly … (we
finished school, five years). 8. She hasn’t spoken to me … (more than two
weeks, last week).
Ex. 159. Make up sentences with since and for as in the model.
Model: I know George. This started in 1995.
I have known George since 1995.
I know George. This started five years ago.
I have known George for five years.
1. Rob has a Mercedes. He bought it five years ago. 2. She is in London.
She arrived there four days ago. 3. Jack is here. He arrived here on
Thursday. 4. I know Sue. I first met Sue two years ago. 5. I have a camera.
I bought it in 1985. 6. They are married. They got married six months ago.
7. Bill is a teacher. He began to work 3 years ago. 8. Brian is ill. He fell ill
last Monday.
Ex. 160. Fill in the blanks with been or gone.

1. Where is Ann? – She’s on holiday. She … to Italy. 2. Hello! I …
just … to the shops. Look! I’ve bought lots of things. 3. Jim isn’t here at
the moment. He … to the shops. 4. Are you going to the bank? – No, I …
already … to the bank. 5. He’s on holiday at the moment. He’s … to Spain.
6. Where’s Jill? – She’s not here. I think she’s to the bank. 7. Hello, Pat.
182
Where have you …? – I’ve … to the bank. 8. Have you ever … to
Mexico? – No, never. 9. My parents aren’t at home this evening. They’ve
… out. 10. There’s a new restaurant in town. Have you … to it? 11. Paris is
a wonderful city. I’ve … there many times. 12. Helen was here earlier but I
think she’s … now.

A. 1. Я прийшов, щоб поговорити з вами про одну справу. 2. Я
купив цікаву книжку. Хочете її прочитати? 3. Чи ви зачинили двері? 4.
Ви розірвали рукав сукні. 5. Чому ти відчинив вікно? – Прохолодно.
6. Денис тільки-но вийшов. Вам треба трохи зачекати. 7. Я вже помив
яблука. 8. Сергій вже повернувся до Дніпропетровська? – Ні, він ще
не повернувся. 9. Я ніколи не читала цієї книжки. 10.Чи ви колись
розмовляли зі своїм викладачем про це? 11. Він снідав дуже пізно
сьогодні. 12. Чи ви читали сьогодні газету? 13. Вона була у Парижі
тричі. 14. Вони знають один одного п’ятнадцять років, і впродовж цих
років у них добрі стосунки. 15. В них ніколи не було автомобіля.
B. 1. Що трапилось? 2. Куди він пішов? 3. Я вже прочитала цю
книжку. 4. Почався дощ. 5. Я його ще не бачила. 6. Ви коли-небудь
катались на ковзанах по замерзлій річці? 7. Сьогодні я не була в
бібліотеці. 8. Впродовж року я часто бачила їх у кіно. 9. Я не
зустрічала його з весни. 10. Скільки років ти живеш на цій вулиці? 11.
Вона давно працює в інституті? 12. Діти вже прийняли душ. 13. Ви
ще не погасили світло? 14. Ти взяла з собою парасольку? 15. Я вже
відпрацювала тут 5 років. 16. Зима вже почалася. 17. Я ніколи не був у
цьому театрі. 18. Збори тільки-но розпочалися. 19. Ми вже
переглянули газети. 20. Вона завжди була присутня на наших зборах.
21. Я не був у кіно з вересня. 22. Пробачте, я забув ваше прізвище. 23.
Ми не бачили його останнім часом. 24. На цьому тижні він не
відвідував занять. 25. Останнім часом вона прочитала декілька
англійських книжок в оригіналі. 26. Ми ще не обговорювали це
питання на зборах. 27. Я дуже радий вас бачити. Ми не зустрічались з
1985 року, чи не так? 28. Я загубив свій ключ і не можу потрапити до
кімнати. 29. З якого часу вони не відвідують занять? 30. Останнім
часом він часто працював у цій бібліотеці. 31. Ходімо до їдальні. – Ні,
дякую, я вже пообідав. 32. Він зайнятий впродовж цілого тижня. 33. У
цьому році наші студенти прочитали кілька англійських книжок. 34.
Чи ви коли-небудь були у Волгограді? 35. Де зараз ваш брат? Я не
зустрічався з ним з того часу, як ми закінчили школу. 36. Він зайнятий
183
впродовж цілого тижня. 37. Чому ви не вивчили ці слова? Я був
зайнятий вчора. 38. Вони збираються продати свій будинок. Ви що-
небудь чули про це? 39. Він ніколи не бачив таких гарних картин. 40.
Як давно ви його знаєте? – Я знаю Бориса з дитинства.
Ex. 162. Finish up the sentences choosing appropriate adverbial modifiers

from the brackets.
1. My cousin didn’t ring me up … (at 10 o’clock, since 10 o’clock).
2. I have not seen him at home … (at dinner time, since dinner time). 3. He
did not say a word about it … (at the beginning of supper, since the
beginning of supper). 4. I have been here … (yesterday, since yesterday).
5. It snowed heavily … (on Sunday, since Sunday). 6. My little child has
been ill … (in summer, since summer). 7. They did not know anything
about each other … (when they met, since they met). 8. The child was
frightened … (when he saw the doctor, since he saw the doctor). 9. My
elder sister has lived in the country … (when she graduated from the
Institute, since she graduated from the Institute). 10. My children have
studied English … (last year, since last year).
Ex. 163. Choose the correct tense from the forms given in brackets.
1. I (haven’t seen / didn’t see) much of Al lately. 2. Who is she? I
(’ve never seen / never saw) her before. 3. I (’ve done / did) a lot of stupid
things in my life. 4. She (has left / left) school last year. 5. When (have you
got / did you get) married? 6. I’m sorry. I (haven’t finished / didn’t finish)
yet. 7. I (’ve often wondered / often wondered) what he does for a living.
8. He (has caught / caught) the plane at eight this morning. 9. I (’ve read /
read) a lot of her books when I was at school. 10. (Have you seen / did you
see) any good films recently?
Ex. 164. Fill in the blanks with the Present Perfect tense or the Past
Indefinite tense of the verbs in brackets. Change the position of
adverbs if necessary.
1. a) I … this book when I was a child. b) I … this book; it is rather
interesting (to read). 2. a) I … him in summer. b) I … him since summer
(not to see). 3. a) I … the letter yesterday. b) I just … the letter (to post). 4.
a) She … everything in the evening. b) At last she … everything; now she
can go to bed (to do). 5. a) My watch was all right at 10, but at 11 it … . b)
My watch was all right at 10, but now it … (to stop). 6. a) She … . the
184
Hermitage two days ago. b) I already … the Hermitage, now I want to go
to the Russian museum (to visit). 7. a) They … on Sunday. b) Ring them
up, they … (to return). 8. a) Yesterday the weather …. b) Put on your coat,
the weather … (to change).
Ex. 165. Use the Present Perfect tense and the Past Indefinite tense
instead of the Present Indefinite tense and put them into a natural context
to justify the use of the tenses:
1. Peter often takes his wife to the theatre. 2. Her mother goes to the
south every summer. 3. My sister always helps me to wash the dishes. 4.
My teacher tells me to be more attentive at the lectures. 5. He seldom
borrows books from the library. 6. His aunt gives lessons twice a week. 7.
Her husband delivers lectures at the University. 8. My granny often reads
books to my children. 9. Every month she buys a lot of new books. 10. He
tells me about it every time he sees me. 11. Mary doesn’t often drink
coffee. 12. My boy-friend goes to the country every week.
Ex. 166. Put the verb in brackets into the Present Perfect tense or the Past
Indefinite tense.
A. 1. My friend is a writer. She (to write) many books. 2. We (not to
have) a holiday last year. 3. You (to see) Alan last week? 4. I (to play)
tennis yesterday afternoon. 5. What time you (to go) to bed last night? 6.
You ever (to be) to the United States? 7. My hair is clean. I (to wash) it. 8.
I (to wash) my hair before breakfast this morning. 9. When I was a child, I
(not to like) sport. 10. Kathy loves travelling. She (to visit) many
countries. 11. John works in a bookshop. He (to work) there for three
years. 12. Last year we (to go) to Finland for a holiday. We (to stay) there
for three weeks. 13. I (to play) a lot of tennis this year. 14. She (to have)
six different jobs since she left school. 15. He (to run) away from school
three times when he was fourteen. 16. How many cups of coffee you (to
drink) today? 17. In those days, Andrew (to come) to stay with us most
weekends. 18. Shakespeare (to write) poems as well as plays. 19. Since my
brother lost his job, he (to write) two books. 20. I’m not cooking today – I
(to cook) all the meals yesterday. In fact, I (to cook) most of the meals this
week. 21. Would you believe I (to make) twenty-three phone calls today?
22. Our team are rubbish. They just (to lose) eight games one after the
other.
185
B. 1. Jill (to buy) a new cat two weeks ago. 2. His hair is very short.
He (to have) a haircut. 3. Last night I (to arrive) home at half past twelve. I
(to have) a bath and then I (to go) to bed. 4. You (to visit) many museums
when you were in Paris? 5. My bicycle isn’t here any more. Somebody ( to
take) it. 6. When you (to give) up smoking? 7. I (not to eat) anything
yesterday because I (not to feel) hungry. 8. Why you (not to want) to play
tennis last Friday. 9. The car looks very clean. You (to wash) it? 10. I (to
lose) my key. I can’t find it anywhere. 11. You (to see) the film on
television last night? 12. Mr. Clark (to work) in a bank for 15 years. Then
he gave it up. 13. Molly lives in Dublin. She (to live) there all her life. 14.
Bob and Alice are married. They (to be) married for 20 years. 15. When
we were on holiday, the weather (to be) awful. 16. The weather (to be)
very nice recently, don’t you think? 17. My grandfather died 30 years ago.
I never (to meet) him. 18. I don’t know Carol’s husband. I never (to meet)
him. 19. I (not to play) golf when I was on holiday last summer.
Ex. 167. Translate into English using the Present Perfect tense or the Past
Indefinite tense.
1. Коли приїхав твій брат? 2. Ти вже бачив його? 3. Дощ вже
почався. 4. Вчора падав великий сніг. 5. Я живу в цій квартирі з
минулого року. 6. Годинник задзвонив о шостій. 7. Вона не була в кіно
з минулого місяця. 8. Минулого місяця я бачила її двічі. 9. Я дуже
зголодніла, бо нічого не їла зранку. 10. Вчора вона дуже втомилася і
лягла спати дуже рано. 11. Він пішов до своєї кімнати, увімкнув радіо
і ліг на канапу. 12. Цього року ми зустрічалися не часто. 13. Вони
часто зустрічалися на вулиці. 14. Взимку вечорами вони зазвичай
ходили в кіно. 15. Чи ви вже бачили цей фільм? Коли ви його бачили?
16. Ви вже записалися до нашої бібліотеки? Коли ви записалися до
бібліотеки? 17. Чи ваша група вже прочитала цю книжку? Коли ваша
група закінчила її читати? 18. Чи тато вже повернувся з роботи? Коли
він повернувся? 19. Чи ви коли-небудь були у Києві? Коли ви там
були? 20. Чому ви не вивчили слова? – Я був зайнятий вчора.
Ex. 168. Use the Past Indefinite tense or the Present Perfect tense instead
of the infinitives in brackets:
1. How long you (to know) him? – I (to know) him since 1978. 2. He
(to live) in Moscow for two years and then he (to go) to Siberia. 3. When
he (to arrive)? – He (to arrive) at 2 o’clock. 4. I (to read) this book when I
was at school. 5. I can’t go with you as I (not to finish) my work. 6. His
186
clock is slow. – It isn’t slow. It (to stop). 7. You (to have dinner) yet? 8.
The lecture (to begin) at 7 o’clock and it (to last) for 3 hours. 9. We (to
miss) the tram. Now we’ll have to walk. 10. You (to see) Kitty on
Monday? 11. I (to lose) my pen. You (to see) it anywhere? 12. It (to rain)
heavily the day before yesterday. 13. You ever (to try) to give up smoking?
14. Why you (to switch on) the light. It is not dark yet. 15. When it (to
happen)? 16. He (to leave) for the Far East two years ago and I (not to see)
him since. 17. Why you (to take) my pen while I was out? You (to break)
it. 18. Jack (to leave) already. – Oh, really? When he (to go)? – He (to go)
an hour ago. 19. She (to take) eight lessons in English this month. 20.
You (to meet) Mrs. Jones yet? – Yes, I have. – When you (to meet) her? – I
(to meet) her two weeks ago. 21. Her husband (to graduate) from the
Institute this year. 22. She (to miss) a lot of French lessons last month.
Ex. 169. Use the Present Indefinite tense, the Present Continuous tense or
the Present Perfect tense instead of the infinitives in brackets.
1. Peter, what Bob (to do) there? – He (to look for) his fountain-pen.
He (to lose) it somewhere. 2. What he (to do)? – He (to write) his degree-
work. He (not to finish) it yet. He (to collect) the necessary material for it,
and now he (to write) the conclusion. 3. Will you, please, lend me your
pen for a moment? I (to leave) mine at home and now (to have) nothing to
write with. – I (to be) sorry but I (to be going) to write myself. Ann (not to
write), she can give you her pen. 4. Where (to be) Ann? – She (to be) in the
kitchen. – What she (to do) there? – She (to wash up). – I already (to help)
my mother with the house work and (to come) to ask Ann to go to the
cinema with me. 5. Who (to play) the piano? Mary still (to have) her music
lesson? – No. The lesson (to be) over and the teacher already (to go).
Mother (to play) for little Kitty. 6. She (to send) me a letter that she (to
come) in a few days. 7. What you (to look for)? – I (to look for) my
dictionary. I just (to see) it somewhere. I (to think) it (to lie) on the
bookshelf. 8. You (to read) “The Gadfly” by Voynich? – I (to read) it now,
I (not to finish) it yet. It (to be) a very good book, I (to like) it very much.
Ex. 170. Translate into English using the Present Continuous tense, the
Present Indefinite tense or the Present Perfect tense
А. 1. Одягни пальто і шапку. Стало прохолодно, подув сильний
вітер. 2. Сьогодні на обід прийде Олена. – Я давно її не бачила. Вона
дуже змінилася? – Ні, не дуже. 3. Хто тільки-но вийшов з кімнати? –
Не знаю, я нікого не помітив. 4. Ти бачила Мері сьогодні? – Ні, вона
187
захворіла. Вона хвора вже десять днів. 5. Що ти збираєшся робити
після занять? – Хочу піти в кіно. – Не йди без мене, зачекай, доки я
тобі не зателефоную. – Добре. 6. Ви ходили в кіно на цьому тижні? –
Ні, я дуже зайнята останнім часом. – Ви повинні подивитися новий
фільм, він вам, напевно, сподобається. 7. Я дуже задоволена, що ви
прийшли. Ви завжди приносите гарні новини. 8. Вони вже поїхали? –
Ні, вони від’їжджають потягом о третій. 9. Ви часто ходите до театру?
– Так, досить часто, і сьогодні йду. 10. Ми давно його не бачили.
Неллі каже, що він дуже змінився.
В. 1. Я хочу поговорити з Аленом. Він вже прийшов? – Так, він
повернувся півгодини тому і зараз чекає на вас у бібліотеці. 2. – Чи
Сем вже пішов? – Так, він пішов додому відразу після наради. – Але
ж ми домовились з ним разом повечеряти сьогодні. – Він казав, що
буде чекати на вас вдома. 3. Вона попросила доглянути її малюка,
поки вона не повернеться. 4. Я вирішила поговорити з ним, коли він
прийде, але я не впевнена, чи він прийде взагалі. 5. Ви знайшли ключ,
який загубили вчора? – Так, знайшла. – А де ви його знайшли? – Я
знайшла його у своїй сумочці. 6. Ти читаєш ту книжку, яку вчора
купила? – Так, я вже прочитала більше, ніж половину. Вона дуже мені
подобається. 7. Як вам вдалося покласти книжки на ту полицю? – Я
використав драбину. 8. Як ви написали диктант? Покажіть мені його.
Ви не зробили жодної помилки! 9. Навіщо вона увімкнула світло? Я
його вимкнув, ще досить видно. 10. Він спакував речі і готується до
від’їзду. 11. Він увімкнув світло і сів за стіл, щоб перевірити свої
записи. Вже було темно надворі. 12. Все своє життя вона любила
дітей, тому вона працює у дитсадку.
Ex. 171. Make the following sentences interrogative, negative and

interrogative-negative. Explain the use of the Past Perfect tense.
1. He had washed his hands before he sat down to dinner. 2. The
students had finished translating the article by 5 o’clock. 3. The
watchmaker hadn’t cleaned my watch by the time I came. 4. She had
trained much before the Olympic Games began. 5. When the taxi arrived
they had already finished packing.
Ex. 172. Use when or after to make one sentence from each pair as in the
model:
Model: I did my homework. Then my friend rang.
188
When I had done my homework, my friend rang.
1. Mary spoke to the teacher. Then Ann came to him with her
work. 2. The film began. Then we came to the cinema. 3. The rain stopped.
Then we went to the river. 4. Kate woke up. Then the clock struck seven.
5. He finished school. Then he began to work at the publishing house. 6. I
wrote to my boyfriend. Then I watched television for an hour. 7.
Everybody had a chance to say what they thought. Then we took a vote. 8.
I posted the letter. Then I felt much better about everything. 9. She stopped
trying to lose weight. She looked much healthier. 10. He bought presents
for everyone in his family. Then he bought something for himself as well.
Ex. 173. Use the Present Indefinite, the Present Continuous, The Present
Perfect or the Past Indefinite tenses instead of the infinitives in brackets.
1. Mr. Smith (to move) to his new house yet? – No, not yet. He (to
be) still in his old one. He (to move) next week. 2. I (not to be) to Moscow
since I was a child. My wife and I (to go) there next summer. – You (to
decide) where you will stay there? – No, not yet. – When I (to be) in
Moscow I (to stay) with my friends. 3. You (to have) lunch yet? – No, I (to
go) to have it at 1 o’clock. Let’s have it together. – Oh, I’m sorry. I just (to
have) mine. I (to have) it at 12 o’clock. 4. When the young man (to enter)
the room, she (to look) at him in surprise. “What you (to go) to tell me?
Why you (to come)?” 5. It is Friday today. You (to see) him this week? –
Yes, I (to see) him on Monday. 6. Your brother (to return) from the North?
– Yes, he (to come) two days ago. 7. Every day I (to wind up) my watch at
nine o’clock in the evening. 8. I (to want) to get tickets to the Bolshoi
Theatre. – You (to want) to hear the new opera? You (not to hear) it yet? 9.
You (to be) to the Crimea? When you (to be) there? – I (to stay) there for
two months in 1978. I (to remember) I (to like) everything there, and most
of all I (to like) the sea. 10. Ann, what you (to do) here? – I (to wait) for a
friend of mine.
Ex. 174. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Indefinite tense or the Past
Perfect tense.
189
A. 1. The house was very quiet when I got home. Everybody (to go)
to bed. 2. I felt very tired when I got home, so I (to go) straight to bed. 3.
Sorry I’m late. The car (to break) down on my way here. 4. There was a
car by the side of the road. It (to break) down and the driver was trying to
repair it. So we (to stop) to see if we could help. 5. Was Tom there when
you arrived? – No, he (to go) home. 6. Was Tom there when you arrived? –
Yes, but he (to go) home soon afterwards. 7. I (to be) sorry that I (not to
be) nicer to him. 8. Nobody (to come) to the meeting because Angela (to
forget) to tell people about it. 9. I (to see) them last night. – I know. 10.
Because he (not to check) the oil for so long, the car (to break) down. 11.
She couldn’t find the book that I (to lend) her. 12. All the people we (to
invite) turned up, and some that we (not to invite). 13. They never (to find)
where he (to hide) the money. 14. It was a firm that I never (to hear) of. 15.
When she (to come) in, we all knew where she (to be). 16. The lesson
already (to start) when I (to arrive).
B. When I (to go) to Paris last spring for a job interview, I (not to be)
there for five years. I (to arrive) the evening before the interview, and (to
spend) a happy hour walking round thinking about the good times I (to
have) there as a student.
As I was strolling by the Seine, I suddenly (to see) a familiar face – it was
Nedjma, the woman I (to share) a flat with when I was a student, and
whose address I (to lose) after leaving Paris. I could tell she (not to see)
me, so I (to call) her name and she (to look) up. As she (to turn) towards
me, I (to realize) that she (to have) an ugly scar on the side of her face. She
(to see) the shock in my eyes, and her hand (to go) up to touch the scar;
she (to explain) that she (to get) it when she was a journalist reporting on a
war in Africa. She (not to be) uncomfortable telling me this; we (to feel) as
if the years (not to pass), as if we (to say) goodbye the week before. She
(to arrive) in Paris that morning, and she (to have) a hospital appointment
the next day. The doctors (to think) that they could remove the scar, but
she would have to stay in Paris for several months. Both of us (to have) the
idea at the same time: if I (to get) the job, we could share a flat again. And
we could start by having a coffee while we (to begin) to tell each other
everything that (to happen) to us in the past five years.

А. 1. Вчора до 3 години він вже закінчив свою статтю. 2. Коли
ми приїхали на станцію, потяг вже відійшов. 3. Я підійшов до вікна.
Дощ вже скінчився. 4. Я прокинувся о 9 годині ранку. Мати вже
190
встала і приготувала сніданок. 5. До 9 години ранку вона вже
переклала цей лист. 6. Він казав, що вже купив подарунки до Різдва
для всієї родини. 7. Ми зустрічались з ним вчора. Тоді він ще не
поговорив з директором. 8. Коли я зателефонував йому вчора, його
сестра сказала, що він пішов до театру. 9. Я прийшов, коли вони
почали обідати. 10. Він сказав, що ніколи не був в оперному театрі.
11. Вчора він придбав новий годинник, тому що загубив свій старий.
12. До початку цього тижня все вже було влаштовано.
В. 1. Як, ти ще не зробив домашнє завдання? Чому ти не зробив
його вчора? 2. Мій друг був дуже блідий, коли я його зустрів, я
зрозумів, що з ним щось трапилось. Я запитав його про це, але він
відповів, що нічого не сталося. 3. Я нікого не знав у цьому місті, коли
Пітер познайомив мене зі своїми друзями. 4. Коли мій приятель
пішов, я згадав, що забув повернути йому книжку. 5. До восьмої
години Джек закінчив роботу. Він вийшов на вулицю. Дощ скінчився,
у небі сяяло сонце, але було досить прохолодно. Коли він ішов
додому, він зустрів свого приятеля, якого давно не бачив. Приятель не
впізнав Джека, тому що з того часу, як вони бачились, минуло багато
років. 6. Скільки книжок, з тих що я вам рекомендував, Ви прочитали
до початку цього місяця? – На жаль, я не прочитав жодної, тому що
займався тоді іншими справами, але зараз я читаю вже другу книжку з
того списку. 7. Коли я підійшов, Мері розмовляла зі своїм викладачем
про контрольну роботу, яку вони писали позавчора. Коли до нас
наблизився Джон, Мері вже закінчила розмову з викладачем і
розповідала мені, яку вечірку вона вирішила влаштувати з приводу
свого дня народження.
Ex. 176. Use the Past Indefinite tense or the Past Perfect tense with the
conjunctions hardly … when … , scarcely …. when … , no sooner ….
than.
1. Five o’clock hardly (to strike) on the morning of the nineteenth of
January when Bessie (to bring) a candle into my little room and (to find)
me already up and nearly dressed. 2. Hardly I (to read) more than the first
three chapters when I (to hear) a conversation going on in the next room.
3. Scarcely we (to make) ourselves comfortable in the parlour when an old
fellow (to come) in smoking a long pipe. 4. No sooner he (to leave) the
room than another man (to come) in. 5. Scarcely I (to finish) my work
when my friends (to arrive). 6. Hardly we (to close) the door when a
snowstorm (to begin). 7. No sooner I (to come) home and (to switch) on
191
the TV than the figure-skating (to begin). 8. He hardly (to come) to his
native town when he (to get) a telegram.

1. Не прочитав він і трьох сторінок, коли задзвонив телефон. 2. Я
не був і п’яти хвилин у приймальні, як мене запросили до директора.
3. Ледве двері зачинилися за нею, як я згадала, що саме хотіла їй
розповісти. 4. Не встигла я зайти сьогодні до університету, як зустріла
дівчину, з якою вчилась у школі. 5. Ледве ми встигли закінчити писати
контрольну роботу з граматики, як продзвенів дзвоник на наступне
заняття. 6. Не встигли ми дійти до набережної, як розпочався салют.
Ex. 178. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Indefinite tense, the Past
Continuous tense or the Past Perfect tense.
A. 1. After Dickens’s family (to leave) Chatham and (to settle) down
in London, things went from bad to worse. 2. By the time I (to get) to the
University, the meeting already (to begin). 3. Yes, Mary? What you (to
say)? 4. Then he (to get) up and (to go) to the kitchen and (to open) the
fridge. 5. My mother (to make) sandwiches in the kitchen and (not to hear)
the bell. 6. Mrs. Oliver (to have) her breakfast in bed when the telephone
(to ring). 7. After I (to pass) the entrance examinations, I (to become) a
student of the University. 8. We (to pack) everything by the time the taxi
(to arrive). 9. When we (to go) to see them last night, they (to play) chess.
10. I (to understand) the true state of affairs even before I (to read) your
letter. 11. The silence in the room (to tell) that the rain (to stop). 12.
Margot (to go) to the door and (to lock) it and (to return) with the key.
B. 1. He even (not to count) the money that Lammiter (to hold) out to
him. 2. I (to look) at her. She (to smile) to herself and (not to answer) my
question at once. I (to repeat) it. 3. For some time she (not to realize)
where she (to be) and what (to happen). 4. She (can) not think why she
(not to think) about it before. 5. While we (to watch) the last scene, Jean’s
warm tears (to fall) upon my hand one by one. 6. While she (to wash) the
dishes, she (to drop) two cups but none of them (to break). 7. He (to look)
through the window and (not to seem) to notice us. 8. She (to turn) half
about and (to see) that the rain (to stop) and it (to be) a little brighter
outside. 9. He (to tell) me that they (to be) at the same public school and
(to be) friends ever since. 10. Peter (to walk) aimlessly up and down the
room for a long time. He (not to know) what to do. 11. He (to make) good
progress in French as he (to be taught) by an experienced teacher. 12. I (to
192
go) quietly into the room. She (to sit) by the window staring at something.
13. They (to wander) about the forest for several hours. At last they (to
decide) to return. 14. She (to get) into bed, (to lay) her head on the pillow
and in two minutes (to sleep) like a child. 15. He (to make) tea and (to eat)
the biscuits which Mrs. Aberdeen (to bring) him.
Ex. 179. Make the following sentences interrogative and negative. Explain
the use of the Future Perfect tense.
1. I’ll have finished my work by the time you come. 2. The guests
will have arrived by the time you return home. 3. She will have already
dined by the time I call on her. 4. By eleven o’clock we shall have
decorated the New Year tree. 5. Before you ring me up, I’ll have already
laid the table. 6. By that time tomorrow they will have arrived in their
native town. 7. By this time next year she will have graduated from the
University.
Ex. 180. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Perfect tense.
1. By this time tomorrow we (to have) our injections. 2. By the end
of next year I (to be) here twenty-five years. 3. By next winter they (to
build) four houses in that district. 4. I (to save) $250 by this time next year.
5. By the time we get to the party, everything (to be) eaten. 6. The train (to
leave) before we reach the station. 7. If I continue with my diet, I (to lose)
10 kilos by the end of the month. 8. By the end of my university course I
(to attend) 1200 lectures. 9. By the time he leaves school, his parents (to
spend) $6.000 on his education. 10. When you come back, I (to finish) all
my housework. 11. The police (to hear) of the theft by this time. 12. On the
fourth of next month he (to be) in prison for ten years. 13. When we reach
the Crimea, we (to do) half of the journey. 14. If you don’t hurry, the sun
(to rise) before we reach the top. 15. By midnight he (to be) unconscious
for forty-eight hours.

1. Я закінчу свої справи до того часу, коли ви прийдете. 2. Чи всі
іспити ви складете до кінця січня? 3. Коли ви дістанетесь до театру,
вистава вже почнеться. 4. До 8 години ранку вони вже поснідають. 5.
До 9. 30 матч вже закінчиться. 6. Коли ти прийдеш до нього, Джим
вже ляже спати. 7. До початку наступного місяця він вже витратить
усі свої гроші. 8. Наступного понеділка буде 3 роки, як Чак у Британії.
193
9. Коли ви закінчите читати цю книжку, ви вивчите багато нових слів
та конструкцій. 10. До цього часу завтра вони вже перетнуть канал.
11. Якщо ви зателефонуєте мені о 10 годині, я вже поговорю із
секретарем. 12. Мені б хотілося знати, коли вона повернеться. Якщо
вона прийде після 1 липня, я її не побачу, тому що вже поїду на
курорт.
Ex. 182. Rewrite the sentences using the imperative or a future form in one
clause, and the Present Perfect tense in the other.
Model: I (to give) you these journals after I (to look) them through.
I will give you these journals after I have looked them through.
1. They (to join) us as soon as they (to finish) their work. 2. I (to
ring) you up after I (to book) the tickets. 3. I (to let) you know as soon as I
(to finish). 4. (Not to start) on Section 2 until you (to complete) all the
questions in Section 1. 5. (Not to make) up your mind until you (to give)
the matter some thought. 6. I (to be) ready for some lunch by the time I (to
finish) digging in the house. 7. You (to get) used to our methods when you
(to work) here a bit longer. 8. Please (not to smoke) until after the plane (to
take off). 9. He (to make) a very fine tennis player when he (to have) a
little more experience. 10. As soon as we (to solve) this problem, we (to be
able) to go ahead.
Ex. 183. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Indefinite, the Future
Continuous, the Future Perfect, the Present Indefinite or the Present
Perfect tenses. Remember that in clauses of time the Present Indefinite
tense and the Present Perfect tense are used to denote future actions.
1. By the end of the year I (to read) five of Shaw’s plays. 2. They (to
leave) the country before you (to go) to see them. 3. Don’t you know what
Peter (to do) at 7 o’clock? 4. I think mother (to cook) the dinner by the
time I (to come) home. 5. By the end of the next term we (to learn) a lot of
new words. 6. I hope, when you (to rewrite) this exercise, there (not to be)
so many mistakes in it. 7. I expect you (to grow up) by the time I (to come)
back from England. 8. She (not to have) any pudding until she (to eat) her
potatoes. 9. When I (to learn) a thousand English words, I (to be able) to
read a newspaper? 10. I (to write) all my exercises long before you (to
come) back. 11. Don’t ask for another book before you (to read) this one.
12. When I (to call) on her, Mary (to lay) the table. 13. When the hands of
194
the clock (to be) close to midnight, our train (to approach) Vladivostok. 14.
I hope that by the end of the year she (to teach) us to speak English a little.
15. Sit down, and when you (to rest), I (to show) you the garden.
Ex. 184. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets.

A. Mrs. White (to visit) her son John’s school tomorrow. When she
(to get) there at 2 p.m., he (to have) the games, but this (not to matter) as
she first (to go) to see the headmaster. By the time they (to finish) to talk,
the lesson (to be) over and John (to have) a shower so that he (to be) ready
to go home with his mother. In two hours John (to do) all his homework
and (to be) quite free. When I (to arrive) at their house, John and his
parents (to have) dinner. After dinner we (to listen) to the new records.
Mrs. White (to make) some coffee by the time we (to stop) listening. We
(to sit) in the dining-room and (to have) hot coffee. Then I (to go) home.
B. My friend’s brother (to finish) his studies by spring and he (to
look) forward to teaching. After he (to graduate), he (to go) to a village to
teach and I think he (to become) a good teacher and children (to like) him.
Now he (to work) hard as he (to know) that time (to fly) quickly and it
may happen that he (to have) no time to revise everything thoroughly.
Yesterday we (to study) together. I (to help) him with his degree paper.
Tomorrow he (to work) all day long and in the evening we (to go) for a
walk as I think he (to finish) his work by that time.
Ex. 185. Use the Present, Past or Future Perfect tenses instead of the
infinitives in brackets.
A. 1. The news that he (to leave) the town was a surprise to all of us.
2. Edward is a dear, I always (to be) very fond of him. 3. By the time you
come, we (to do) the greater part of the work. 4. He asked himself if he (to
see) her before. 5. By the end of last school year we (to learn) a lot of new
words. 6. When he (to count) the money, he put it away. 7. I don’t know
anything about it. I (not to see) him lately. He (to be) mostly in London all
these days. 8. When by half past two he (not to appear), Dora was worried.
9. When I (to be) in your country for five years, I shall write a book about
it. 10. I’ll stay until you (to do) your translation. 11. Those who (to write)
the test, may leave the classroom.
B. 1. By six o’clock tomorrow I (to finish) my translation. 2. The
police told not to let go out anybody who (to enter) already. 3. Next year is
Ted and Amy’s 25th wedding anniversary. They (to be) married for 25
years. 4. I (to be) to many parts of South America. First I (to go) there 10
195
years ago before I graduated from the University. 5. Of course we are late
as usual. The film just (to begin). 6. We’re late. I expect the film already
(to start) by the time we get to the cinema. 7. She (to be) the BBC German
correspondent since 1992. By the beginning of the next year she (to work)
for the BBC for 10 years. 8. When you finish this book, you (to learn) over
a thousand words. 9. Now I’ve got a BMW. I (to have) it for two years. I
(to buy) it before I got married. 10. We got married 9 years ago. Now we
(to be) married for nine years. 11. By the end of the month the committee
(to come) to some conclusion. They (not to come) to any conclusion yet.
12. We’ll start at five if it (to stop) raining by that time. 13. When you (to
read) these books, put them away. 14. John expected to get a decent rise
because he (to be) with the company for many years. 15. I already (to
phone) Justin at the office, but I can’t get hold of him. And we won’t see
him tonight, either. By the time we get home, he (to go) out.
Ex. 186. Translate into English using the correct forms of the verbs.
1. У кінці цього року буде 5 років, як ми знаємо один одного. 2.
Вчора я зустрів дівчину, яка була закохана в мене, коли ми разом
навчались в університеті. – Ти вже розповідав мені про це. 3. Ти був
колись у Франції? – Так, я поїхав туди перед тим, як почав працювати
в нашій компанії. 4. До 1 липня буде два тижні, як вони на морі. 5. Я
вже два рази відвідав виставку картин Ренуара. Це чудово. Я ще
ніколи не бачив більшості з цих картин. 6. Я теж збираюсь піти
подивитись ті картини. – До того часу, як ти вирішиш піти туди,
виставка вже закінчиться. 7. Я загубив свої окуляри. Чи ти їх не
бачила? – Я впевнена, що ти знайдеш їх до того часу, як почнеться
футбольний матч по телевізору. 8. Чи ви вже повечеряли? – Ні, але ми
закінчимо вечерю, коли ти прийдеш по мене. 9. Він - вчитель з
двадцяти одного року. Наступного місяця буде 6 років, як він працює
у школі. Він почав тут працювати ще до того, як ми познайомились.
10. Ти вже згадала його телефон? – Ні, він сказав мені свій телефон
перед тим, як пішов з вечірки, але я його забула.
7.2.4. The Perfect Continuous form of the verb in the Active Voice
Ex. 187. Translate the sentences arranging them in the following way: 1.
Sentences with the Present Perfect Continuous Inclusive, 2. Sentences with
the Present Perfect Continuous Exclusive.
196
1. He has been looking for this exciting novel in many libraries. 2.
He has been working here for many years. 3. He has been drinking coffee
every day for many years. 4. I have been waiting here for ten minutes. 5.
I’m so tired! I have been trying to reach you by telephone for an hour. 6.
He has been speaking English all his life. 7. She has been working with
tape-recorder at the language laboratory for hours but her pronunciation
hasn’t improved yet. 8. He has been making a lot of mistakes in his
dictations lately. 9. I have been thinking of going to the Far East for many
years but I have had no chance yet. 10. Carlos has been studying at the
University for six months. 11. They have been waiting for him for two
hours, but he hasn’t appeared yet.
Ex. 188. Fill in the blanks with for or since.

1. I’ve been reading this book … last week. 2. They’ve been listening
to the music … 5 hours now. 3. My grandmother has been staying with us
…. Christmas. 4. He has been writing the letter … . 20 minutes now. 5.
Jack has been having a bath … half an hour.
Ex. 189. Use the Present Continuous tense or the Present Perfect
Continuous tense instead of the infinitives in brackets.
1. What you (to look) at? – I (to look) at that picture over there. I (to
look) at it for almost half an hour and still can’t understand what it is. 2.
What Mary (to do)? – She (to practice) the piano. She (to play) since 12
o’clock. I think she must have a rest. 3. Here you are at last! I (to look) for
you everywhere. 4. Why you (to smile) Robert? – I (to watch) your kitten.
What a playful little thing it is! 5. I see you (to write) letters all the
morning. Is it the last letter you (to write) now? 6. You (to sit) here for a
long time. You (to wait) for anybody? 7. How long you (to study) English?
– For three years already. 8. I (to work) at my report since Monday. Now I
(to write) the conclusion. 9. Mary’s mother (to rest) in the garden all day
because she is ill. 10. She (to sleep) for 10 hours! You must wake her! 11.
David (to wash) his hands. He just (to repair) the TV-set. 12. Why you all
(to laugh)? Jim (to tell) you his anecdotes? 13. It’s six o’clock. I (to wait)
for Ann for half an hour. I must be off now.
Ex. 190. Use the Present Perfect tense or the Present Perfect Continuous
tense instead of the infinitives in bracket:
A. 1. You (to pass) your exam in English literature? 2. I (to try) to
learn English for ten years, but I (not to make) good progress yet. 3. That
197
book (to lie) on the table for weeks. You (not to read) it yet? 4. I (to wait)
here for her since 7 o’clock and she (not to come) yet. 5. I (to think) about
you all day. 6. I can’t help being angry with you: you (to sit) here all the
time and (to do) nothing. 7. There’s nothing to be proud of, you (not to get)
a single excellent mark as yet. 8. I (to work) so hard this week that I (not to
have) time to go to the cinema. 9. I (to know) her all my life and we
always (to be) good friends. 10. I just (to talk) to him, he agrees to help us.
B. 1. That man (to stand) outside for hours. 2. The castle (to stand)
on that hill for 900 years. 3. Ann (to garden) all afternoon. She (to plant) a
lot of rose bushes. 4. James (to go) out every night this week. 5. He (to
see) a lot of Alexandra recently. 6. How long you (to wait)? 7. I (to wait)
long enough I’m going. 8. Her family (to farm) this land since the tenth
century. 9. She only (to farm) for two years, but she’s doing very well. 10.
I (to learn) German for six years. 11. I (to learn) most of the irregular
verbs. 12. My mother (to do) all her Christmas shopping. 13. I (to do)
Christmas shopping all day. 14. I (to clean) the car. Doesn’t it look nice?
15. You look tired. - I (to wash) clothes all day. 16. There’s a strange smell
in here. You (to cook) something? 17. Why is your shirt wet? – I (to clean)
the windows. – You (to finish)? – No, I (to clean) five of them and there
are two more to do. 18. Sorry, I’m late. – That’s all right. I (not to wait)
long.
Ex. 191. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct forms.

Dear Eileen
Hope things are OK with you. The doctor (to come) yesterday. He
(not to like) my cough. I (to lie) in bed looking at the ceiling since
Tuesday and I can tell you I’m fed up with it. I never (to be) ill like this
before – don’t know what’s happening to me. And the weather’s terrible. It
(to rain) all day, and I can’t even have a cup of tea to cheer myself up
because the milkman (not to come) this morning. Don’t know why – I’ m
sure I (to pay) his bill.
Alice (to get) married last week, so now all Mary’s kids (to leave)
home. She won’t know what to do with herself, will she?
Lucy Watson (to move) to Doncaster. Since Fred (to die) she (to be)
all alone. It (to be) a heart attack, apparently. I’m sorry she (to go) – we
(to be) neighbours for over thirty years and she always ( to be) friendly and
ready to help out.
198
Amy (to leave). My cleaning lady, you remember? I’m glad. She
(not to be) much use and I (not to trust) her since she (to break) all those
plates and (to say) it (to be) the cat.
There (not to be) much change in the village. Some new people (to
take) over the shop. They seem quite nice. Hope they’re more efficient
than old Joe.
No more news. Write when you’ve got the time.
Love Emma.

А 1. Ганна дуже втомлена. Вона багато працювала. 2. Джордж
тільки-но повернувся з пляжу. Він дуже червоний. Він лежав на сонці.
3. Очі маленького хлопчика червоні та мокрі. Він плакав. 4. Кевін
вчить вірш вже півгодини. 5. Я вивчаю іспанську мову з грудня. 6.
Вона шукає роботу вже півроку. 7. Джек не палить вже п’ять років. 8.
Вона працює в цій фірмі з 18 січня. 9. Як довго ви живете на Хай
стріт? 10. Дощ іде вже дві доби. Як довго це ще буде тривати?
В 1. Лінда подорожує по Європі три місяці. Вона побувала вже в
шести країнах. 2. Джиммі грає у теніс з 11 років. Він вигравав у
національному чемпіонаті чотири рази. Вперше він виграв, коли йому
було 16 років. 3. Білл та Енді знімають фільми з тих пір, як закінчили
коледж. Вони зняли разом десять фільмів. Коледж вони закінчили 6
років тому. 4. Як довго ви вже на мене чекаєте? – Біля півгодини. –
Прошу мені вибачити, я займався невідкладними справами. 5. Ганна
цілий день писала листи. Вона написала 8 листів. Вона почала писати
листи, коли ще був ранок. 6. Руки Тома дуже брудні. Він ремонтував
машину. Зараз він вже відремонтував її. 7. Мій брат зараз вивчає в
університеті французьку мову. Він почав її вивчати в лютому. Зараз
він вчиться вже три місяці. 8. Коли Боб та Еліз побралися? У квітні
минулого року. Вони живуть щасливо вже майже рік. 9. Чи ви часто
їздите у відпустку? – Ні, вже минуло 5 років, як я був у відпустці
востаннє. – Як, ти 5 років працюєш без відпочинку? – Так, це
почалося, коли я перейшов у цю фірму. 10. Том хворіє. Він захворів
ще перед святом. Він вже два тижні не відвідує занять. – Так, я кілька
разів дзвонив йому, але не зайшов до нього, тому що в мене зараз
багато роботи: я складаю іспити.
199
Ex. 193. Use the Present Indefinite, the Present Continuous, the Present
Perfect or the Present Perfect Continuous tenses instead of the infinitives
in brackets.
1. Will you, please, lend me your pen for a moment? I (to leave)
mine at home and now (to have) nothing to write with.- I (to be) sorry but I
(to be going) to write myself. Ann (not to write), she can give you her pen.
2. Where Ann (to be)? – She (to be) in the kitchen. – What she (to do)
there? – She (to wash) up. – I already (to help) my mother with the
housework and (to come) to ask Ann to go to the cinema with me. 3. They
(to build) that bridge for several months but they (not to finish) it yet. 4.
Edward is coming. – How nice! I (not to see) Edward for years. 5. Don’t
forget we (to have) a party tomorrow. Be sure to bring Bob with you if he
(to come) back from Liverpool. 6. (To be) anything the matter with you?
You (to be) so pale. – Nothing the matter. I just (to finish) my work and (to
be) a little tired. 7. Who (to play) the piano? Mary still (to have) her music
lesson? – No, the lesson (to be) over and the teacher already (to go).
Mother (to play) for little Kitty. 8. He (to lose) his dictionary. He (to look)
for it all day but (not to find) it yet. 9. I can’t wait any longer. I (to wait)
since five o’clock. 10. She (to send) me a letter that she (to come) in a few
days. 11. You (to understand) what they (to talk) about? 12. What you (to
look) for? – I (to look) for my dictionary. – I just (to see) it somewhere. I
(to think) it (to lie) on the bookshelf. 13. He (to write) a new play for the
last two years but he (not to finish) it yet.14. My friend Robert (to study)
French for the last three years and now he (to learn) German.
Ex. 194. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Perfect Continuous tense
and explain the usage of this form.
A. 1. I was cold because I (to stand) in the snow for an hour. 2. The
dog (to swim) in the river so he was all wet. 3. I remember you were
absolutely exhausted when you arrived. What you (to do)? 4. When we got
home, the police (to wait) for us for half an hour. 5. We (to travel) for two
hours before we realized that we were on the wrong train. 6. He said he (to
work) hard all day. 7. The children (to play) outside for an hour when it
began to rain. 8. When I first met him, he (to play) football for five years.
9. He said he (to subscribe) to this magazine for a long time. 10. When I
saw him, his hands were very dirty. He (to repair) his car. 11. Jane said that
she (to play) tennis since June but she is very good at it.
B. 1. John Latton, 39, an engineer at Felton Plastics in Upton, had a
lucky escape after an accident on the A34 in the early hours of the
200
morning. Mr. Latton fell asleep while driving and crashed into a pile of
sand left by workers who (to repair) the road. When he left Felton Plastics
at 3.00 this morning, Mr. Latton (to work) for 72 hours without any sleep.
A passing motorist discovered the accident after the engineer (to lie) in his
car with a broken leg for half an hour. Ambulance workers said that if Mr.
Latton (to drive) any faster, his injuries might have been much worse.
Ex. 195. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present or the Past Perfect
Continuous tenses.
1. At last you are here! I (to wait) for you for over twenty minutes.
2. He knows quite a lot of English. He (to learn) for six years. 3. She
finally said “Yes”. He (to ask) her to marry him for years. 4. I think I need
a break. I (to work) solidly for the last three hours. 5. The manager went
down with pneumonia. He (to look) unwell for several days. 6. The new
one-way scheme (to operate) for just over twelve months, and traffic has
improved considerably as a result. 7. Antonia knew that they just (to talk)
of her. 8. They (to live) in that town for ten years and then moved to the
country.
Ex. 196. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Indefinite, the Past
Continuous, the Past Perfect or the Past Perfect Continuous tenses.
A. 1. Jim was on his hands and knees on the floor. He (to look) for
his cigarette lighter. 2. We (to walk) along the road for about 20 minutes
when a car stopped and the driver offered us a lift. 3. When I arrived,
everyone (to sit) round the table and (to talk). Their mouths were empty
but their stomachs were full. They (to eat). 4. When I arrived, everyone
was sitting round the table with their mouths full. They (to eat). 5. When I
arrived, Ann (to wait) for me. She was rather annoyed with me because I
was late and she (to wait) for a very long time. 6. When he came, we (to
work) for an hour. 7. When he came, we (not to finish) our work, we still
(to work). 8. I saw that he (to look) for his passport. He (to look) for it
since the telegram (to come). 9. How long the Campbells (to wait) before
the circus arrived? 10. You (to discuss) the plan for half an hour when I
joined you, hadn’t you?
B. 1. When I came to the station, the train (not to arrive) yet, but a
lot of people (to stand) on the platform. Suddenly I saw my friend. He said
that he (to wait) for the train too, he (not to wait) for a long time, he just
(to come). 2. When I (to leave) home, it (to rain) and as it (to rain) since
the morning, the fields were quite muddy. 3. The postman (to come)
201
yesterday? – Yes, he (to come) before we (to start) our breakfast. He (to
bring) me a letter which I (to expect) for a long time. 4. Outside it was
bitterly cold. All day a freezing wind (to blow) off the lake, and since five
in the afternoon a fine powder of snow (to fall). 5. We (to walk) in silence.
He already (to tell) me all that (to be) interesting about himself, we (to
talk) for almost two hours, and I (to have) nothing more to tell him. 6. She
said that this noise (to go) on since she (to sit) here. 7. I knew that the
children (to live) with their aunt for eight months since their mother (to be)
ill. 8. We (to climb) for six hours when we at last (to reach) the summit of
the mountain. 9. When George (to decide) to introduce Mary to his
parents, they (to know) each other for half a year since she (to come) to
live in this town.

А 1. До 1998 року я пропрацював тут (уже) п’ять років. 2. Коли
він прийшов, ми вже годину працювали. 3. Він казав, що вчора о 3
годині він працював над своєю книгою. 4. Сандра була впевнена, що з
9 до 11 він працював у офісі. 5. Коли я вперше зустріла його, він грав
у футбол шість років. 6. До 1999 року він робив фільми вже 10 років;
до цього часу він зробив 13 фільмів. 7. Він казав, що любить оперу з
дитинства та ходить до оперного театру з 8 років. 8. Коли вони
прийшли до театру, вистава йшла вже п’ятнадцять хвилин. 9. Коли я
прийшов сюди, він був директором нашого заводу вже три роки. 10.
Він казав, що в цей час вчора він розмовляв по телефону зі своїм
братом.
В. 1. Я чув, що ви відмовились від думки перекласти цю статтю,
хоч займались цим перекладом кілька місяців. Що ви будете робити
далі? 2. Гроза скінчилась, але небо скрізь було вкрите темними
хмарами, дув сильний вітер, який не припинявся вже два дні. 3.
Скільки часу ви вивчали англійську, коли вступили до цього
інституту? 4. Відвідувач тривалий час роздивлявся книжки, коли
нарешті обрав ту, яка йому сподобалась. 5. Ми почувалися дуже
втомленими, тому що чекали на них дуже довго. 6. Як довго ви стояли
у черзі, до того, як вам пощастило купити квиток? 7. Вони були дуже
голодні, тому що не їли вже дві доби. Здавалось, що ніколи у житті
вони не їли такого смачного хліба. 8. Я тренувався вже півгодини,
коли прийшов мій тренер і показав мені нові рухи, які я раніше не
виконував. І коли мої друзі прийшли по мене, я відпрацьовував саме
ті нові елементи. 9. Коли я побачив їх, вони були дуже втомлені, тому
202
що цілий день ходили на лижах. 10. Ми йшли пішки вже близько
години, коли нарешті знайшли Пітера. Він чекав на нас зовсім не на
тому місці, де ми домовлялися зустрітись.
Ex. 198. Change the tense of the verb into the Future Perfect Continuous
as in the model.
Model: Tomorrow at 6 Oliver will be waiting for his friends.
By 6 o’clock tomorrow Oliver will have been waiting for his friends
for half an hour.
1. When his friends come, he will be listening to music. 2. In two
hours Max will be flying in a plane to America. 3. When the plane lands,
he will be sleeping. 4. At 8 today we shall be walking around the park.5.
When we meet them, they will be walking around the park. 6. Tomorrow
at 5 I shall be translating the article. 7. In an hour she will be painting the
door of her house. 8. When you phone her, she will be sleeping. 9. When I
see her, she will be working at her papers.
Ex. 199. Express the future in the appropriate way.

A. 1. It (to rain) tomorrow. 2. Look at those clouds. It (to rain) any
minute. 3. We (to get) married in the spring. 4. The train (to leave) at
11.00. 5. At 8 o’clock I (to have) dinner. 6. By the year of 2012 the
population of the world (to reach) six billions. 7. By 6 o’clock she (to
work) at her report for 5 hours. 8. I (to see) a doctor this afternoon. 9. I (to
give) you my phone number. 10. When we get married, we (to know) each
other for 2 years.
B. 1. By December I (to work) here for five years. 2. When you
come, we (to have) dinner together. 3. When he returns from work, all the
family (to have) tea. 4. Tomorrow at 9 o’clock I (to sit) in my armchair
reading a newspaper. 5. When they come, we (to work) for an hour. 6.
Tomorrow (to be) my birthday. I (to live) on the earth for 20 years by
tomorrow. 7. If you come so late, they (to wait) for you for more than an
hour. 8. On Friday he (to retire). By that day he (to work) for this company
for 20 years. 9. When you (to phone) me? If you (to phone) me at 6, I (to
watch) TV. 10. I’m glad to say that I (to finish) my book by next month. I
(to work) at the book for 2 years by next Wednesday.
C. Bill: Do you know, Joan, by next month I (to live) in this house
for twenty-five years?
Joan: Yes, and my family and yours (to be) neighbours for 25 years too.
They (to have) 25 years together without any quarrels or trouble.
203
Bill: Yes, and how long your family (to be) in this town?
Joan: Well, my father was born here, so in March , when he has his
birthday, he (to complete) 48 years here.
Bill: How is your father’s work getting on?
Joan: When he has finished the house he is building now, he (to build) six
houses this month.
Bill: That’s good. When he (to finish) this house?
Joan: By the end of November, probably. He (to work) on it for two and a
half months by then. By the end of this year he (to build) houses for 20
years.
Bill: My father (to be) a doctor for sixteen years by next June, and he (to
work) in this town for eight years by next January.
Joan: You (to finish) your medical studies by 2005?
Bill: I (to graduate) from the Institute, I hope, but I (not to do) my hospital
work yet. By the summer of 2012 I (to study) medicine for five years.
Joan: Well, by that time I (to finish) my studies and I (to work) as a teacher
for a year, I hope.

1. Якщо ви не візьмете таксі, концерт вже триватиме півгодини,
коли ви приїдете до театру. 2. Якщо ви не подзвоните їй у цей час,
вона вже годину буде спати. 3. Відішли свого листа сьогодні. Коли я
повернусь додому, він вже буде цілий день чекати на мене. 4. Через
рік буде 20 років, як він пише пісні. До того часу він напише вже
близько 200 пісень. 5. Коли я напишу листа, я негайно піду та
відішлю його, але не знаю, коли вона його отримає. Можливо, коли я
приїду до неї, лист ще буде йти. 6. Він говорить, що завтра о 3 годині
буде працювати над перекладом цієї статті. Це буде вже 2 дні, як він її
перекладає. Чи це колись скінчиться? 7. Чи Джейн все ще хворіє? –
Так, завтра буде тиждень, як вона хворіє. – Вона не відвідує занять з
понеділка і дуже багато пропустила. – Нічого, я допоможу їй. 8. Як
довго ви вже знайомі? – У середу буде вже рік, як ми знаємо один
одного, і за два місяці ми збираємось побратися. 9. Я не знала, що у
вас є донька! – Так, вона вже доросла. За місяць буде два роки, як
вона живе окремо. 10. Яка жахлива погода! Щодня іде дощ. От і
сьогодні цілий день ллє! – Дійсно, завтра буде рівно тиждень, як ми
не бачили жодного промінця. 11. Чи буде Анна тебе зустрічати на
вокзалі? – Так, вона збиралася. Але ж наш поїзд запізнюється.
Здається, коли ми прибудемо, вона буде чекати на нас вже півтори
204
години. – Може, вона не прийде? – Ні, вона прийде обов’язково, але,
можливо, коли наш поїзд добереться туди, вона вже піде. 12. Що ж
робити з дітьми? Коли прийдуть гості, вони ще будуть спати. - Нічого,
до того часу вони будуть спати вже дві години. Цього достатньо, і ми
зможемо їх розбудити.
Ex. 201. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense.
A. 1. How long you (to sit) here? 2. It (to rain) since the morning
and we cannot go out. 3. She felt chilly after she (to swim) for an hour. 4.
He (to read) before the fire for half an hour when the telephone rang. 5.
The boys were tired because they (to play) football. 6. He (to work) since I
came here. 7. What you (to do) since I saw you last? 8. They (to live) in
that town for ten years and then (to move) to the country. 9. We (to walk)
in silence for some time when James (to speak). 10. Where you (to be) all
the time? 11. When we come to the theatre, the performance (to last) for 20
minutes. 12. I’m sorry, I didn’t know you (to wait) for me for half an hour.
B. 1. Don’t leave till we (to discuss) our plan in detail. 2. I hope that
by the time I (to be) back with the flowers, you (to finish) dressing for the
theatre. 3. They are very slow in everything, so by the time they (to begin),
we already (to finish). 4. I can go only after I (to look) through the
morning papers. 5. By the first of January she (to work) 30 years at the
library. We are going to congratulate her. 6. I (to write) Lucy after I (to
pass) all my exams. She always (to ask) me about examination results. 7.
I’m afraid you (to be) late and they (to sell) all the tickets by the time we
(to arrive). 8. If we (not to make) haste, they (to arrange) everything all by
themselves by the time we (to come) and then they (to reproach) us as
being lazy-bones. 9. Don’t forget to dust the room when you (to make)
beds. 10. Be sure to come before six or he (to go) already.

А. 1. Я чекаю на вас вже півтори години. 2. Він тут працює з
1980 року. 3. Поклич дітей! Вони грають на вулиці вже зранку. 4. Як
довго ти робиш цей переклад? 5. Він вивчав англійську мову вже два
роки у 1999 році. 6. Він казав, що чекає на тебе вже дві години. 7. Я
ніде не працюю з 1998 року. 8. З якого часу цей чоловік тут сидить? 9.
Наступного місяця я буду працювати в цій школі три роки.
(Наступного місяця буде три роки, як я працюю в цій школі). 10. Я не
розмовляю англійською мовою вже 5 років. 11. Він шукав свій зошит
205
цілий ранок, доки не знайшов його під газетою на столі. 12. Мені
здається, що дощ іде вже цілу вічність.
В. 1. Що ви тут робите? – Я чекаю на трамвай. – Чи довго ви
чекаєте на нього? – Так, я вже тут 15 хвилин, але жоден трамвай ще
не з’явився. 2. Цікаво, що зараз робить Ганна? – Вона проглядає
ранкову пошту. – Скільки часу вона цим займається? – Мені здається,
вона працює з 9 години. Вона вже прочитала усі телеграми і зараз
проглядає листи. 3. а) Він давно почав вивчати англійську мову. б) Він
давно вивчає англійську мову. 4. а) Ваш молодший син давно закінчив
інститут? б) Його старша донька вже давно працює? 5. Я майже дві
години шукав свій підручник, коли ви подзвонили і сказали, що
знайшли мій підручник у своєму портфелі. 6. Чи давно ти носиш свої
черевики? Чому у них такий поношений вигляд? – Я ношу їх всього
близько двох місяців. Вони виглядають такими поношеними, тому що
під час відпустки я взував їх майже щодня, коли ходив у турпоходи. 7.
Жодна з цих статей зараз не використовується. Ми всі дуже зайняті,
тому усі ці матеріали повністю у вашому розпорядженні. 8. Коли вони
вперше порушили це питання? Скільки часу ви його вже розглядаєте?
9. Після того, як усі кімнати були замовлені, ми вирушили
роздивлятись місто. 10. Останнім часом наші вчені зробили багато
важливих відкриттів.
С. 1. Чи давно ви чекали на директора? 2. Як довго це питання
розглядалося, доки ви дійшли згоди? 3. Чи давно ви знаєте його? – З
1980 року, коли він вперше приїхав у це місто. 4. Чому ви самі не
шукали журнал? – Тому що перед цим шукав його півтори години,
доки це не почали робити мої колеги. 5. Коли вони увійшли до
кімнати, господар встановлював нову лампу. Він сказав, що робить це
вже півгодини, але досі з цим не упорався. 6. Коли я її бачив востаннє,
вона була вдягнена в ту ж саму синю сукню, в якій була у тебе на
вечірці того разу. 7. Я не думав, що вона носить цю сукню так довго,
вона виглядає ще зовсім новою. 8. Хоча мій друг давно був без
практики, він виграв університетський турнір з шахів. 9. Вона
півгодини відповідала на питання білета на іспиті, доки професор не
сказав, що цього достатньо. 10. Коли ми дісталися до лісу, дощ, який
йшов всього півгодини, вже скінчився і знову яскраво сяяло сонце. 11.
Як довго він грає у хокей? – У 2012 році буде вже 10 років, як він грає
в цю гру, і схоже, що це йому ніколи не набридне.
7.2.5. Tenses of the Verb in the Passive Voice
206
Ex. 203. Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice.
A. 1.They offered me a cup of tea. 2. Students take examinations at
the end of each term. 3. Mother baked the birthday cake. 4. The children
asked me to read this story. 5. The waiter will serve you breakfast in five
minutes. 6. Father taught me to ride a bicycle. 7. George Simenon wrote
this story. 8. People speak English in many countries. 9. The doctor told
him to lie in bed for three days. 10. I shall give you a cup of coffee if you
want. 11. They close the shop at five. 12. Columbus discovered America in
1492.
B. 1. What are they discussing? 2. The professor is examining our
group. 3. The Spartans were celebrating a religious festival when a
messenger came from Athens. 4. They are building a new school in our
district. 5. What film are they demonstrating in the lecture room? 6. He
had a feeling that someone was following him. 7. They were watching and
taking pictures of a UFO. 8. They were interrogating the first witness when
I came into the courtroom. 9. They are counting the prize money. 10. They
are relieving him of his duty because of his age.
C. 1. They have offered me a job at a local bank. 2. Have you
warned them about the meeting? 3. Someone has stolen a picture from a
museum. 4. I have lost some secret papers. 5. We have kept this meat in
the fridge for a week. 6. The police have found a dead body in the park. 7.
They had packed the suitcases when the bellboy arrived. 8. I didn’t attend
the meeting because you hadn’t warned me. 9. The room looked dirty as
we hadn’t cleaned it for a week. 10. They will clear up the situation when
they have known some more facts. 11. They will have repaired my shoes
by the evening.
Ex. 204. Change the following sentences using Prepositional Passive

Constructions.
A. 1. He listened to the lecture very attentively. 2. They always
laugh at his jokes. 3. They talked a lot about this film. 4. We have never
heard of him since. 5. The aunt will look after the children well. 6. We
have just sent for the doctor. 7. Somebody is waiting for you downstairs. 8.
Nobody laughed at him when he said it. 9. The guests looked for the ring
everywhere. 10. They speak highly of this textbook. 11. They insisted on
these terms. 12. I think that we can rely on this information.
B. 1. They take good care of their grandmother. 2. We disagreed
with this statement. 3. He said that everybody had objected to that
207
proposal. 4. Nobody has slept in that room lately. 5. They agreed upon the
date of the conference. 6. He reads to his daughter every night. 7. I think
he will refer to this example in his lecture. 8. The dean has just approved
of the timetable. 9. He knew they had resorted to kidnapping. 10. I am sure
that the newspapers will have commented on this event by tomorrow
morning. 11. Can they arrive at an agreement? 12. They are not living in
this house now. 13. The teacher was finding fault with my report when the
bell rang. 14. I am afraid they will not pay attention to his advice. 15. The
ship left the harbor and we lost sight of it. 16. We haven't made use of his
tools for a long time.
Ex. 205. Make these sentences passive using the modal verbs:
A. 1. You can do it tomorrow. 2. She must write it at once. 3. You
can use this material for your work. 4. I can’t send off the letter today. 5.
We couldn’t finish the work in time. 6. You may leave the dictionaries on
the table. 7. We must do this work every day. 8. You should change the end
of the story. 9. The committee ought to discuss this question
immediately.10.You should open the window. It’s too stuffy in the room.
11. I have to wind up my watch regularly. 12. He has to translate this text
today.
B. 1. She could have booked the ticket yesterday. 2. Can they have
completed the work? 3. He can’t have translated the article. 4. She could
have given an answer last week. 5. You might have already served the tea.
6. They must have answered this difficult question. 7. You must have
understood this phrase in a wrong way. 8. He may have forgotten your
invitation. 9. He should have taken them to the airport in his car yesterday.
10. You shouldn’t have disturbed your father. 11. You ought to have told
them about it. 12. You ought to have translated the text last week. 13. He
should have sent these letters by fax. 14. You must not throw your things
about.
Ex. 206. Fill in the blanks with the prepositions by or with:

1. The meeting was attended … thousands of people. 2. The football
game was watched … great interest. 3. At the foot of the mountain we
were joined … a group of tourists. 4. Some plants are quickly affected …
cold. 5. The fire was put out … water. 6. The lectures will be delivered …
well-known scientists. 7. The cases are being packed … skilled workers. 8.
They were threatened … danger. 9. This theatre was designed … a famous
architect. 10. He said that the letter had been signed … the director. 11.
208
The bread was cut … a sharp knife. 12. When we entered the room the
contract was being checked … the legal adviser. 13. The sky is covered …
clouds. 14. The child was covered … a blanket … his mother. 15. This
note is written … a very bad pen, that’s why you can’t read it. 16. Can you
open the door … this key? 17. Much damage was done … the storm. 18.
This book has been written … three authors. 19. Trams are set in motion
… electricity. 20. The new school building will be surrounded … a garden.
21. Who has this house been built … ?
Ex. 207. State where the combination to be +Participle II is a Simple

Verbal Predicate and where it is a Compound Nominal Predicate:
1. This cottage is built of wood. Cottages are generally built of
wood. 2. The door is shut, so we can’t come in. When the door is shut on
the last visitor, the work is still continued in the museum. 3. These books
are being sold out fast. This book is sold out. 4. This fence is painted every
year. The fence is painted, don’t touch it. 5. The door of our flat is locked
at 11 p.m. The door is locked, so nobody is in. 6. I don’t know who this
play is written by. 7. This dress is made of silk. 8. This table is covered
with green paper.
Ex. 208. Put questions to the underlined words:

1. Fifty students were admitted to the faculty last August. 2. I have
been woken up by the noise in the street. 3. He was given a form to fill in.
4. The tea will be served till 5 because of the conference. 5. She was
greeted very warmly. 6. Two men were arrested after the robbery. 7. My
colleague will be sent to London to lecture on Russian history.8. Wait a
little, your papers are being looked through. 9. French is spoken in France
and Canada. 10. This television program is watched mostly by teenagers.
11. The car is being repaired at the moment. 12. The windows were being
cleaned while I was there. 13. All her affairs will have been settled before
she gets married. 14. He said that detailed instructions had been given.
Ex. 209. Put the verbs in brackets into the appropriate forms of the
Passive Voice:
A. 1. The printing press (to invent) in the fifteenth century. 2. Last
night I (to invite) to a party by a friend from Scotland. 3. Spain and
Portugal (to visit) by millions of tourists every year. 4. These strawberries
are fresh; they (to pick) yesterday. 5. The menu in that restaurant (to
change) every month. 6. The results of the examination (to know)
209
tomorrow. 7. Today rugby football (to play) in many countries. 8. Bicycles
must not (to leave) in the hall. 9. He (to operate on) next week. 10. I’m not
wearing my black shoes today. They (to mend). 11. This room (to use)
only on special occasions. 12. It was a lonely road, and the girl was afraid;
she thought she (to follow). 13. This street (to sweep) now. 14. This room
(not to use) for ages. 15. Dictionaries may not (to use) at the examination.
16. The question just (to discuss). 17. Switch on the radio. A very good
concert (to broadcast) now. 18. She (to take) to hospital tomorrow. 19.
Everything (to do) before we came. 20. The last student (to examine) when
I entered the room. 21. The book (to leave) in the classroom yesterday. 22.
Thousands of new houses (to build) every year. 23. This station (to
construct) by next year.
B. 1. This piece of music (to know) to me. But it never (to play) so
wonderfully. 2. When I came into the cinema, a new film (to show). I was
sorry that I (not, to tell) about the show before and was late for the
beginning as the end impressed me greatly. 3. It is raining and football (not
to play). 4. The mother (to tell) not to worry about the sick boy. He (to
examine) soon by the doctor. 5. When you come here in summer, their
house (to repair). 6. It’s a very good class. It (to teach) by Mr. Smith. 7. I
(to introduce) to him last week but I am afraid I shall not recognize him if I
meet him again. 8. This book (to speak) about for two months. 9. I wonder
what (to build) here? 10. The letter (to post) four days ago. 11. What will
you do if you (not to meet) at the station? 12. Don’t come into the
compartment; the berth (to fix) now. 13. The first draft resolution (not, to
discuss) yesterday; it (to withdraw) long before the beginning of the
meeting. 14. He is not in town; he (to send) on a special mission. 15. A
new underground line (to construct) now. They say one of its stations (to
build) in my street. 16. It was three o’clock. We (to tell) to hurry because
we (to wait). 17. His pen (not to make use of) yet. 18. Do you believe that
such a problem can (to solve)? 19. It must (to do) without delays. 20. By
the time he arrives everything (to settle). 21. His presence seldom (to take
notice of). 22. The plan (to approve)? - No, it (to discuss) now. - How long
it (to discuss)? 23. The money (to lend) to him two months ago, but it (not
to give) back yet. 24. English pronunciation always (to pay attention to).
25. When dirty streets (to lose sight of) he sighed with relief. 26. This
tradition must (to keep) in Great Britain since medieval times. 27. By now
the news must (to spread) all over the city. 28. He didn’t seem to be
surprised when I told him about his promotion. He might (to tell) about it
before. 29. This work ought to (to complete) yesterday.
210
Ex. 210. Translate the following sentences into English using the Passive
Voice:
A. 1. Найважливiшi новини друкуються у ранкових газетах. 2.
Нацiональна галерея у Лондонi була побудована у 1838 роцi. 3.
Рiшення прийнято. Нiчого вже не можна змiнити. 4. Вам допоможуть
через п’ять хвилин. 5. Такi запитання на вступних iспитах не
ставлять. 6. Послухай! Грають якусь дуже знайому мелодiю! 7. Вiн
вiдчув, що за ним хтось iде. 8. Дiти пiшли спати лише пiсля того, як
ялинку було прикрашено. 9. За що його критикують? – Його лекцiї
нiхто не слухає. 10. Цю iнформацiю треба запам’ятати. 11. Усi
пiдручники було спродано до початку навчального року. 12. Речi вже
упаковано? - Так, валiзи вже готовi, а сумку зараз пакують. 13. Це
мiсто було засноване в XI столiттi. 14. Багато смачних страв готують з
овочiв та фруктiв.
В. 1. Не заходьте до залу, його провiтрюють. 2. Коли ми
повернулися, речi вже були складенi. 3. Пошту вже принесли. 4. До
вашого приходу стiл буде накритий. 5. Бiлизну прали, коли хтось
постукав у двері. 6. На усi вашi запитання будуть вiдповiдi пiсля
лекцiї. 7. Про умови контракту домовилися, i вiн був пiдписаний. 8.
Вони стояли й махали рукою, доки автомобiль не зник з очей. 9. Дiтям
розповiдають зараз вечiрню казку. 10. Вчора усiм учасникам
конференцiї були врученi копiї цiєї декларації. 11. На його книги
посилаються усi лiнгвісти. 12. На цьому тижнi йому запропонували
цiкаву роботу. 13. Вам не доведеться чекати. Коли ви прийдете, усi
документи будуть перевiренi, а листи надрукованi. 14. Лист
друкували, коли я увiйшов. 15. Квитки вже були замовленi, коли вiн
подзвонив. 16. Завтра йому повiдомлять про цi новини. 17. Це
питання можна відкласти до наступної наради. 18. На таких дівчат
часто звертають увагу. 19. Проблемам викладання іноземних мов було
приділено багато уваги на останнiй конференції. 20. У нашiй країнi
завжди пiклуються про ветеранiв вiйни. 21. На цього студента можна
покластися. 22. Проти його пропозиції нiхто не заперечував. 23.
Мабуть, ця стаття була прочитана ще вчора. 24. Невже цi списки було
змiнено на тому тижнi? 25. Вашу машину слiд було вiдремонтувати
перед подорожжю, але тепер вже пiзно про це говорити. 26. Це велика
колекцiя. Мабуть, її збирають вже давно. 27. Цю подiю слiд було
прокоментувати ще у вчорашньому випуску новин.
211
Ex. 211. Put the verbs in brackets into required tense and voice form:
A. 1. Nobody (to see) him yesterday. 2. The telegram (to receive)
tomorrow. 3. He (to give) me this book next week. 4. The answer to this
question can (to find) in the encyclopedia. 5. We already (to show) the
historical monuments of the capital to the delegation. 6. Budapest (to
divide) by the Danube into two parts: Buda and Pest. 7. Yuri Dolgoruki (to
found) Moscow in 1147. 8. Moscow University (to found) by Lomonosov.
9. You can (to find) interesting information about the life in the USA in
this book. 10. They (to repair) the clock now. 11. All the texts just (to look
through). 12. The room (to clean) and (to air) now. 13. It was so dark, that
the houses could (not to see). 14. I am sure I (to ask) at the lesson
tomorrow. 15. The article (to publish) by next month. 16. We (to send) our
daughter to rest in the south every year. 17. She (to watch) TV when I
entered the room. 18. Your report must (to divide) into three parts. 19. We
(to plant) all the trees by the middle of last autumn. 20. New children’s
books (to sell) in that shop when I entered yesterday. 21. You may (to
leave) your hat and coat in the cloak-room downstairs. 22. The trucks (to
load) by three o’clock yesterday. 23. The key may (to leave) with the clerk
downstairs. 24. Mushrooms (to gather) in autumn. 25. I (to give) a very
interesting book at the library last Friday. 26. When I came home, they (to
eat) the sweets.
B. 1. I (to look) for my gloves since morning. 2. The letter (to write)
by a left-hander. I (to understand) it after I (to read) it several times. 3.
When the teacher entered the classroom the students still (to translate) the
text. 4. The expression of gratitude ( to follow) by a knock at the door. 5.
The flowers (to water) by the time you come. 6. Many questions (to ask)
and (to answer) before they got to the truth. 7. He must (to do) these
exercises yesterday. 8. I (to introduce) to him last week but I am afraid I
(not to recognize) him if I meet him again. 9. April Fool’s Day (to mark)
for the last few years in Russia too. 10. This box ought to (to take) to the
station two days ago. 11. Where your car usually (to repair)? 12. We (to
visit) the palace many times. 13. How long the girl (to teach) music? 14.
He (to wound) when he (to try) to stop the man attacking a young girl. 15.
Some of them told me that the Browns (to move) to New York. 16. The
children already (to put) to bed when I came home. 17. The suit-cases are
ready. They must (to pack) yesterday. 18. Could he (to invite) to the party
yesterday? 19. My parents (not to approve of) heavily made up girls. 20.
His books (to refer to) by all those who work at this problem. 21. The elder
brother (to send for) as soon as we knew that news. 22. What aspects of
212
social life (to touch on) in his next interview? 23. While I’m away my
mother (to look after) my children. 24. I can’t (to find) my key. It might (to
lose). 25. I’m sure this declaration (to insist on). 26. Mary looks happy.
She might (to pass) her exam well. 27. The article (to translate) now, it (to
publish) as soon as they (to return) it. 28. He complains that he always (to
find fault with). 29. Suddenly we (to lose sight of) the man who was going
ahead of us. 30. This pen (not to make use of) yet. 31. Finally after we (to
wait) for half an hour, salad, beefsteak and tea (to serve).
7.2.6. The sequence of tenses. Reported (Indirect) speech
Ex. 212. Use the verb in the principal clause in the Past tense and make
all the necessary changes:
Model: He says he is a student.
He said he was a student.
A. 1. She says she learns two foreign languages. 2. We know they
live far from the centre of the town. 3. I'm afraid they don't know each
other. 4. He thinks his parents are sleeping now. 5. I'm sure she isn't going
to tell us the truth. 6. They say it's raining hard in their district. 7. She says
she has known the Smiths for a long time. 8. I don't know who has brought
the telegram. 9. The boss says your application hasn't been considered yet.
10. They say they received the letter yesterday. 11. She writes they moved
into the new flat a month ago. 12. She says these papers were delivered
yesterday. 13. I suppose my friend will come to the party. 14. They don't
know when the meeting will be over. 15. She tells us she will be on time.
16. We know they'll be waiting for us at the entrance to the theatre. 17. The
children hope they'll be having a very good time with their granny. 18. The
teacher says her students will have finished the test by 11 o'clock. 19. They
are sure they will have improved their English by the end of the term. 20. I
know I can do without anybody's help. 21. Father thinks I cannot solve this
crossword puzzle. 22. The weather forecast says the weather may change
for the better next week. 23. The boss says I should type these papers
today.
B. 1. I'm sure she will help you if you ask. 2. I'm afraid you won't
recognize me when we meet. 3. He says he'll be passing my house when he
goes to school. 4. I'm sure your brother will be watching TV when you
come home. 5. She promises she will give me the book when she has read
it. 6. They say they will let us know as soon as they make a decision. 7.
Mother says she won't let me go for a walk unless I've done my
213
homework. 8. I know that he has told her that he receives letters from his
brother every week. 9. She says that he has told her that he is writing a
new play. 10. I think she knows that he has taken the first place in the
chess tournament. 11. I think he will tell her that he intends to go there. 12.
I know they were having breakfast from 8 to 9 o'clock. 13. He says he was
working at the language laboratory from 3 till 5 p.m. 14. He says he has
been waiting for her since 11 in the morning. 15. She says she was doing
the flat at the moment. 16. She says that she was working when I rang her
up. 17. He says he met his schoolteacher when he was getting out of the
train. 18. They say they have been staying here for 3 days. 19. He says he
has been studying English for 2 years. 20. He says that Byron was born
on January 22, 1788. 21. The teacher says that water boils at 100 degrees
centigrade. 22. He tells us that we mustn't cross the road against the red
light. 23. It so happens Mother has to stay at home and cook dinner for us.
24. I think it must be her house. 25. They tell us we needn't bother about
the tickets. 26. I'm glad I don't have to get up early tomorrow. 27. I
suppose you mustn't speak to your mother in such a way. 28. My friends
say I ought to speak at the meeting.
Ex. 213. Put the following statements into Indirect Speech using the verbs
in brackets. Don’t forget to change the tenses where necessary.
Model: He said to his friends, “I am leaving for Kyiv on Monday”
(to inform)
He informed his friends that he was leaving for Kyiv on
Monday.
She will say to the teacher, “I could not write my
composition because I was ill” (to explain).
She will explain to the teacher that she could not write the
composition because she was ill.
A. 1. She tells us, “I can’t swim” (to warn). 2. My friend said, “I
work only three days a week” (to inform). 3. She told me, ''You don't eat
enough!'' (to assure). 4. He tells us, ''She has got red hair'' (to think). 5. He
has said, ''I know I won't be able to do it'' (to admit). 6. Mother will say,
''Jack returned an hour ago'' (to point out). 7. She tells me, ''My husband
met them a few days ago'' (to confess). 8. He told me, ''I think she will
come'' (to promise). 9. He has told us, ''They are not English'' (to suspect).
10. They told us, ''We are going to stay in London'' (to declare). 11. He
said, ''They have been away for a long time'' (to agree). 12. The doctor
says, ''She's hurt her ankle rather badly'' (to remark).
214
B. 1. He told the manager, ''It's the worst job I've ever had'' (to
murmur). 2. I tell them, ''I know this job can be done on time'' (to assure).
3. He said, ''She doesn't think she'll be there'' (to reply). 4. Arthur will say,
''They are the best secretaries I've ever had'' (to admit). 5. The doctor said,
''I am afraid she's broken her leg'' (to be sure). 6. He has told us, ''I've
decided I'm going to stay in London after all'' (to contess). 7. He said, ''I
know they won't go to the country if it rains'' (to assure). 8. He told me, ''I
shall buy some new stamps for you if you give me this one'' (to promise).
9. They told us, ''We won't be able to join you until this work is completed''
(to warn). 10. My father told me, ''I think I shan't go to the beach with you
today because I am very busy'' (to remark). 11. He said, “I'm sure this
question has been discussed since the manager entered the room'' (to
assure). 12. Kitty says, ''When I came Jane was playing the piano'' (to
reply). 13. John told me, ''I was writing a letter to my father at that time
yesterday'' (to assure). 14. He told me, ''I have been writing a letter to my
father for an hour'' (to explain). 15. My friend told me, ''I have been
looking for you since the very morning'' (to confess).
Ex. 214. Put the following questions into Indirect Speech with the
introductory verbs in the past tense. Vary the introductary verbs: to
ask, to inquire, to wonder, to want to know, to try to find out.
A. 1. Does Jane live in London? 2. Did your brother study at Oxford
University? 3. Is basketball played in many countries? 4. Do you play
tennis every day? 5. Have you ever seen the pyramids of Egypt? 6. Were
they taught English literature at school? 7. Are your children still skating?
8. Has the mail arrived yet? 9. Is your letter still being typed? 10. Have
you been talking on the telephone all this time? 11. Will you be met at the
station? 12. Will you be helping him tomorrow? 13. Are there any
questions? 14. Will it take us long to get there? 15. Do I have to hand in
the paper today? 16. Has the classroom been aired long? 17. Did she learn
to play the guitar? 18. Will she take part in the performance? 19. Was Mike
still taking an exam when you entered the room? 20. Had they already left
by the time you went to the station? 21. Has the decision been already
taken? 22. Will she be training at 10 tomorrow? 23. Do you know when
the results will be out? 24. Were they watching TV at 7 p.m. yesterday? 25.
Has she been studying German since October?
B. 1. What are you talking about? 2. What other countries do you
like to visit? 3. What did the director tell you? 4. What colour was her
hair? 5. Where can I see you next week? 6. Why didn't you come to the
215
party last night? 7. How far is it to the Hawaii? 8. How many bedrooms
are there in your new house? 9. When was she sent on business? 10. What
is being discussed now? 11. Who was he speaking to when I came up to
him? 12. How long has she been talking to him? 13. How much money is
spent on it every week? 14. Who will the role of Hamlet be played by? 15.
How long will it take us if we go there by plane? 16. How many articles
will you have translated by the end of this month? 17. When was this task
fulfilled? 18. How long has he been working here? 19. What is shown in
this diagram? 20. What is he going to do on Sunday? 21. Who has this
book been written by? 22. Since when have they been developing this
project? 23. What was he cleaning at 6 yesterday? 24. Who is the author of
this book? 25. Had it started raining before you came home?
Ex. 215. Put the following imperative sentences into Indirect Speech:
1. ''Open the safe!'' the raiders ordered the bank clerk. 2. ''Please do
as I say'', he begged me. 3. ''Help your mother,Peter'', Mr.Pitt said. 4.
''Don't make too much noise, children'', he said. 5. ''Do whatever you like'',
she allowed us. 6. ''Don't miss your train'', she warned them. 7. ''Read the
document before you sign it'', the lawyer warned his client. 8. “Will you
fill in the blank again, please?'' he asked Mr. Brown. 9. ''Buy a new car'', I
advised him. 10. ''Don't drive too fast'', she begged him.11. ''Don't put your
bicycle near my window'', forbade the shopkeeper. 12. ''Would you like to
come to the cinema with me?'' he asked her. 13. ''Cook it in butter'', I
advised her. 14. ''Send for the fire brigade'', the manager ordered the porter.
15. ''Will you pay at the desk, please?'' said the shopassistant to her. 16.
''Don't argue with me'', the teacher told the boy. 17. ''Pull as hard as you
can'', he advised her. 18. ''Don't lend anything to her'', he advised us. 19.
''Will you make me some coffee, Betty?'' he asked. 20. ''Now, Mr Bryan,
could you start at the beginning?'' he requested. 21. ''Will you tell Bill his
mother wants him on the phone?'' she asked the secretary. 22. ''Please,
don't try to keep anything from me'', she begged her daughter. 23. ''Hello,
Irene'', he said. ''Please,come here”. 24. ''Good night'', she said. ''Wake me
up at eight, won't you?''. 25. ''Good-bye, Mrs Hall'', Nick said. ''Thanks for
the company.''
Ex. 216. Put sentences with modal verbs and their equivalents into
Indirect Speech. Vary the introductory verb.
1. ''If what you have said is true I must go to the police'', he said. 2.
''You don't need to come in tomorrow'', said my employer. ''You may take a
216
day off.'' 3. ''I'll be busy next week and won't be able to help you'', she said
to us. “Besides this text must be typed and as for me, I cannot type, so I'll
have to ask somebody to do it'', she added. 4. ''You mustn't come in
without knocking'', she said. 5. ''Your ticket may cost five pounds'', he told
me. 6. His father said: ''You should work harder next term if you want to
know more.'' 7.''You mustn't play with knives, children'', said their mother.
8. ''You needn't get up till nine tomorrow'', I warned. 9. ''After the lecture I
have to go home quickly'', he said. 10. ''You should try to repair your
chair'', she said. - ''I can, but nothing will come of it'', answered the boy.
11. The official said, ''This passport photo isn't like you at all. You must
have another one taken.'' 12. ''I must go to the dentist tomorrow'', she said
to me. ''I have an appointment.'' 13. ''I will go to bed. I had to get up very
early today'', he said.14. ''I couldn't meet her. I was working'', he said. 15.
''Ann's English is very poor. She must study very hard'', the teacher said.
16. ''Something was wrong with the receiver, I could not hear you well
yesterday'', she said.
Ex. 217. Use say or tell in the correct form:

1. He … he hadn't been invited. 2. He … to give his name. 3.
Mother … Jim to wash up and clean the house when the guests had left. 4.
I couldn't understand what she … .5. In the taxi he … to her he had quitted
his job. 6. She … she would return soon. 7. We … that our examination
would begin at eight. 8. I wondered who … her such nonsense! 9. She … it
to me confidentially but I can't help sharing it with you. 10. They … they
had enjoyed the concert. 11. Who … that smoking is harmful? 12. She …
her not to interfere. 13. He … us he had known them for a long time.
Ex. 218. Put the following sentences into Indirect Speech. Vary the
introductory verbs.
A. 1. Tom said: ”I’m leaving for France next week.” 2. ”I have
something to tell you”, I said to her. 3. Mary asked, ”Is he interested in
English poetry?” 4. ”I met her for the first time on a warm sunny morning
last spring”, he said. 5. ”I’m going to call again tomorrow, mother”, she
said. 6. ”It will be very difficult to persuade her to take care of herself,
doctor”, I replied. 7. ”Return these books to the library, please”, she said to
the girl. 8. ”Does he care much for her?” they asked. 9. ”I’ve been to
Turkey twice, but so far I haven’t had time to visit Istanbul”, said Robert.
10. The guide said, “ By the end of your stay here you will have seen all
the sights of the town.” 11. ”Is she learning Chinese?”, he wondered. 12.
217
”When did he graduate from the University?”, she asked. 13. ”Don’t be
late for the meeting”, he said. 14. ”The president is to come to Madrid the
day after tomorrow”, said the BBC announcer. 15. ”We have a lift but very
often it doesn’t work”, they said to us. 16. ”How can she prove it?” he
said. 17. ”Will you help me to carry this box?” she said. 18. ”We have
bought a new flat. But we don’t like it so much as our last one”, said my
cousin. 19. She said, ”We became friends when we left college.” 20. ”Has
he earned a lot of money?” she wondered. 21. ”What shall we do next?”
they said. 22. Dennis said, ”She was not so young as I expected and not so
beautiful.” 23. The old woman said, ”I’ve lived in this house all my life
and I have never seen any ghosts here.” 24. The man shouted, ”You don’t
know what you are talking about.” 25. The boy said, ”I know these places
very well so I can act as your guide if you want.”
B. 1. ”I have no idea who has done it but I’ll find out”, said Peggy.
2. He said, ”My mother has just been operated on and she will be staying
in the hospital for some days”. 3. ”What is being played?” asked the lady.
4. ”Don’t forget to call me when you get home”, he said to her. 5. ”Some
English newspapers are published not for profit but because of the
prestige they give the publishers”, he said to them. 6. ”She has been sitting
in the garden since the police came”, I said to the officer. 7. ”Have they
been warned?” he wondered. 8. ”Put out the lights when you leave the
house”, the mother said to her son. 9. ”These letters must be sent
immediately as soon as they are translated”, the manager said. 10. ”The
US Constitution has been amended 26 times since 1789 and will be further
revised in the future”, he said. 11. ”Were your papers still being checked
when you came two hours later?” she asked him. 12. ”They were teasing
her at school”, said Len. 13. He said, ”She was reading some letters when
you called her”. 14. ”Will you give Mr. Smith this message?” he said. 15.
He said, ”Why have you been crying, Mary?” 16. ”The workers’ strike was
followed by a series of repressive measures on the part of the company
administration”, said the BBC announcer. 17. He said, ”What have you
been doing with yourself all this time?” 18. ”I won’t come if I am not
invited”, she said to him. 19. ”Are these papers read by average
Englishmen?” he asked the editor. 20. ”The world’s first iron bridge was
built over the river Severn to show how iron could be used”, the teacher
said to his students. 21. ”I have always been convinced that industry is
rewarded”, said Ben to her. 22. ”Were newspapers delivered regularly last
year?” he said. 23. ”Annette will have come to Paris in an hour if there are
no delays”, Pete thought. 24. My guests grumbled, ”It has been raining all
218
the time since we arrived here a week ago”. 25. ”Can a taxi be found
here?” he wondered. 26. ”Stonehenge is often referred to as one of the
mysteries of human civilizations”, said the lecturer. 27. Ann asked, ”How
long have you been working?” 28. ”Will you wait a little, please? The
letters are being sorted out now”, said the secretary. 29. ”Do you mean we
have been invited to the party too?” he asked me. ”I will have fed and
washed the child before you come to fetch him”, she replied.
Ex. 219. Put the following sentences into Direct Speech:

A. 1. The woman said she was feeling bad that day. 2. Tom said he
would go to see the doctor the next day. 3. He told me he was ill. 4. I asked
if they had taken the sick man to hospital. 5. My neighbour asked me to
leave the key at my sister’s. 6. They told me that Nick had not come to
school the day before. 7. He said he had just been examined by a good
doctor. 8. He asked her if she was afraid of thunderstorm. 9. I asked the
secretary if I might speak to the headmistress. 10. He said his health had
greatly improved since then. 11. Mary wondered if Jane would be busy the
next day. 12. He said that he didn’t like the main character of the book
but he could not explain why. 13. The man told us to have our passports
ready. 14. She asked me to hurry up as there was little time left before the
beginning of the meeting. 15. I asked my aunt when she was going to her
home town. 16. He told me that he hadn’t been able to ring me up in time.
17. He asked his group mates to wait for him. 18. He said he couldn’t
understand the rule. 19. She asked her friend if the rain had stopped. 20.
He asked his brother what he would do if he didn't find the book he
needed. 21. She told me she had caught cold. 22. I told my brother that I
was sorry he hadn't kept his promise. 23. The woman told him not to worry
and go home quietly. 24. She said that her brother was playing chess with
her grandmother. 25. He asked why there were so few people in the street.
B. 1. She asked if he’d like to go to the concert and I said that I was
sure he would. 2. She told me to look where I was going as the road was
full of holes and very badly lit. 3. They said that while they were bathing
they saw someone examining their clothes. 4. I asked if she had looked
everywhere and she said that she had. 5. He suggested giving her a bottle
of wine. 6. He said that the new carpet had arrived and asked where he was
to put it. 7. He said that two days previously an enormous load of firewood
had been dumped at his front gate and that since then he hadn’t been able
to get his car out. 8. They offered me some more wine and I accepted. 9.
He said that if I found the front door locked I was to go round to the back.
219
10. She asked the burglars who they were and who had let them in. They
told her to sit down and keep quiet unless she wanted to get hurt. 11. He
asked what the weather had been like during my holidays and I said that it
had been awful. 12. He suggested going down to the harbour and seeing if
they could hire a boat. 13. He said that if I didn’t like escalators I could go
up the emergency staircase. I thanked him and said that I would do that.
14. He suggested that Tom and I should go ahead and get the tickets. 15.
He said that he thought my electric iron was unsafe and advised me to
have it seen to. 16. He said that if war broke out he would have to leave
the country at once. 17. I asked him if he had enjoyed hunting and he said
that he hadn’t. 18. She said that she was surprised to see that the
grandfather clock had stopped and asked if anyone had been fiddling with
it. 19. She said that she had tried to ring her mother up several times on the
previous day but had not succeeded in getting through. 20. I asked her if
she’d like to borrow the book but she thanked me and said that she had
already read it and hadn’t liked it very much. 21. He wanted to know if I
was going to the dance and suggested that we should make up a party and
go together. 22. I told her to stop making a fuss about nothing and said that
she was lucky to have got a seat at all. 23. The clerk in the booking office
inquired if I wanted a single or return ticket. I asked if a return ticket was
cheaper. He said it made no difference. 24. My employer hoped I would
not be offended if he told me that, in his opinion, I would do better in some
other kind of job. 25. I stopped a man in the street and asked him to help
me with my car. The man asked if it would take long, explaining that he
was on his way to catch a train.
Ex. 220. Put the following conversations into Indirect Speech: with the
introductory verbs in the past tense.
A.
MICHAEL: I say, Bill, can you show me around a bit? I only came here
two days ago and I haven’t been anywhere as yet.
BILL: Of course, I shall do it with pleasure. Let’s go at once. And let’s
invite Alice to come with us. She knows a lot about the places of
interest here.
MICHAEL: That’s a good idea.
BILL: Alice, can you come with us? We are going for a walk, and I want
to show Michael some places of interest.
220
ALICE: No, I can’t go with you, boys. I am sorry. Mother told me to buy
some bread, and I forgot about it. I shall have to do it now. Go
without me. I shall go with you some other time.
BILL: It’s a pity. All right, Michael, let’s go.
B.
Lord Arthur said, ”I am waiting, Mr. Podgers”. Mr. Podgers said
with a forced smile, ”It is the hand of a charming young man”. “Of course,
it is!” answered Lady Windermere, ”but will he be a charming husband?
That is what I want to know”. “All charming young men are”, said Mr.
Podgers”. “But what I want are details. Details are the only things that
interest. What is going to happen to Lord Arthur?” asked Lady
Windermere. ”Well, within the next few months Lord Arthur will go on a
voyage and lose a relative, a distant relative”, said Mr. Podgers. Lord
Arthur held out his hand to Mr. Podgers and said, ”Tell me what you saw
there. Tell me the truth. I must know it. I am not a child”. “What makes
you think that I saw anything in your hand, Lord Arthur, more than I told
you? “ “I know you did and I insist on your telling me what it was. I will
pay. I will give you a cheque for a hundred pounds. I’ll send it tomorrow”,
said Lord Arthur.
C. Poirot said, ”Have you courage, Miss Diana? Great courage? You
will need it”. Diana cried sharply, ”What’s in your mind? What are you
thinking about? You stand there and you don’t tell me anything. You are
making me afraid - horribly afraid. Why are you making me afraid?”
“Perhaps,” said Poirot, ”because I am afraid myself.” The deep grey eyes
opened wide, stared up at him. She said in a whisper: ”What are you afraid
of?” Hercule Poirot sighed. He said, ”It is much easier to catch a murderer
than it is to prevent a murder”. She cried out, ”Murder? Don’t use that
word”. “Nevertheless”, said Hercule Poirot, ” I do use it. Miss Diana, it is
necessary that both you and I should pass the night at Hugh’s house. Can
you do that?” “I – yes – I suppose so. But why?” “Because there is no time
to lose. Shall we say that it is an experiment? Do what I ask and make no
questions about it”. She nodded without a word and turned away.
Ex. 221. Translate into English:

А. 1. Я знав, що вона ще не прочитала цього листа. 2. Вiн
сказав, що розрахується з боргами у наступному мiсяцi. 3. Вона
сказала менi, що пише цей твiр вже двi години. 4. Вiн зателефонував
до поліції і сказав, що усi його речi вкраденi. 5.Вони не знали, чи
221
будуть надрукованi результати їх дослiджень. 6. Я вважав, що вiн все
ще працює й не заходив до кiмнати. 7. Я сподiвався, що новий мiст
буде збудований наступного року. 8. Вона сказала, що вихiднi вона
завжди проводить iз сiм’єю. 9. Вони дiзналися, що вчилися в однiй
школi. 10. Я знав, що коли вони повернуться, то подзвонять нам. 11.
Вiн спитав, що я буду робити, коли вийду на пенсiю. 12. Джейн
сказала менi, що вони не поїдуть туди, доки не будуть знати адреси.
13. Ми запитали, що трапилося з Ганною. 14. Вiн поцiкавився, як
давно вона знає цього чоловiка. 15. У нас запитали, чи беремо ми
участь у конференцiях. 16. У своєму листi вiн запитав, чи зможе Джон
замовити квитки на лiтак. 17. Усi були впевненi, що Борис добре
складе iспити. 18. Вiн запитав, хто їх запросив до театру. 19. Вiн
сказав, що йому подобається ця вистава. 20. Ми не знали, що ви
чекаєте на нас. 21. Я хотiв дiзнатися, коли вiн захворiв. 22. Я запитав у
нього, як довго вiн працює над цiєю проблемою. 23. Вона запитала, на
що вони дивляться. 24. Вiн попросив нас не торкатися цих
фотографiй. 25. Вчитель наказав учням не вiдкривати пiдручники. 26.
Мати попросила доньку пограти на пiанiно.
В. 1. Вiн сказав менi, що усе буде зроблено до того, як я
повернуся. 2. Коли вона увiйшла до кiмнати, її запитали, скiльки їй
рокiв, і де вона живе. 3. Вiн сказав, що навряд чи впiзнає цей район,
тому що вiн дуже змiнився. 4. Вони повiдомили, що як тiльки
документи будуть отриманi, вони надiшлють їх нам. 5. Вiн сподiвався,
що до кiнця мiсяця третiй акт п’єси буде написаний. 6. Я ще не
знайшла свого мiсця в партерi, як свiтло згасло. 7. Нiк дуже пишався
тим, що зумiв дiстати квитки. 8. Вона нагадала менi, що зайде до мене
о вісімнадцятій, i у нас буде багато часу до початку вистави. 9. Роберт
знав, що вона не вийде, поки не зробить роботу, i сумнiвався, чи
прийде вона. 10. Вiн порекомендував нам обговорити цю п’єсу, пiсля
того, як ми подивимося її. 11. Вона дала менi програму пiсля того, як
сама прочитала її. 12. Мати сказала дiтям, що не дозволить їм пiти до
цирку, доки вони не зроблять уроки. 13. Вiн повiдомив менi, що наш
проект буде незабаром обговорено, i запитав, чи є в мене ще питання.
14. Я був здивований, коли дiзнався, що вони вiдремонтували
телевiзор. 15. Йому дуже хотiлося поїхати на пiвдень, i ми не думали,
що вiн повернеться швидко. 16. Вiн сказав, що коли вчить уроки,
завжди вимикає радiо. 17. Батько сказав, що ми вирушимо, як тiльки я
поснідаю. 18. Ми розмовляли про свою майбутню роботу. Петро
сказав, що вiн поїде до рiдного села, де буде вчити дiтей. 19. Вiн дуже
222
поспiшав, тому що боявся, що сестра буде чекати. 20. Мiй старший
брат сказав менi, щоб я не вмикав магнiтофон, якщо не знаю, як це
робиться. 21. Я саме снiдав, коли прийшов мiй приятель i сказав, що
менi доведеться поспiшати, якщо я хочу приєднатися до них, тому що
вони вирушають рано. 22. Ми вирiшили, що поки ти будеш робити
переклад, Ганна буде допомагати нам, а потiм ми допоможемо їй
вимити посуд та прибрати кiмнату до того, як її мама прийде з роботи.
23. Ми сподiвалися, що коли вiн повернеться, то вiн візьме участь у
нашiй дискусiї. 24. Джемма знала, що Артур не змiнить свого
рiшення, навiть якщо вона дасть йому пораду, та мiж іншим вона не
хотiла давати йому нiяких порад.
7.2.7. General Review of the tense and voice forms of the verb
Ex. 222. Use the correct tense and voice forms of the verbs given in
brackets.
A. 1. You always (to spend) summer at the sea-side? – Yes, as a rule.
Last summer I (to go) to the mountains, but I (not to find) the rest there as
pleasant as near the sea. 2. This new dictionary (to sell) everywhere now.
3. The hostess said that one more guest (to expect). 4. When they returned,
they (to tell) us many interesting things which they (to see) during their
journey. 5. Two reports on Hemingway’s stories (to make) in our group last
month. 6. The secretary told me that the delegation already (to arrive). 7.
The teacher says this novel must (to read) by all students of our group. 8.
By the end of next week he (to read) about two hundred pages. 9. She
asked me not to speak to him because he (to be) very busy, as he (to do)
some very urgent work. 10. He (to wait) for fifteen minutes when at last he
(to see) her at the end of the platform. 11. I (to meet) him when he (to
walk) across the park. 12. Look! The moon (not to rise) yet, and only two
stars, like two distant lighthouses, (to shine) in the dark blue sky. 13. He is
quite an expert in growing roses. No wonder, he (to grow) them for many
years. 14. She says the president (to interview) on French TV tomorrow.
15. I can’t show you my written work as it (not to return) by my teacher.
16. He asked me how long my relatives (to stay) with us. 17. Many new
houses (to build) in our town lately. 18. This telegram can (to send)
tomorrow. 19. When next summer season (to come), there (to be) a lot of
tourists here. 20. The event (to report) by the newspapers before they
arrived home. 21. He told me that he (to buy) that watch the day before.
22. I asked John if he (to be) at home at three o’clock the next day. 23. At
223
this time tomorrow we (to have) an English class. 24. The letters (to sign)
when I came in. 25. He said that as soon as the engine (to fix) they (to
continue) their journey. 26. The documents (to check) by tomorrow
morning. 27. Last time I (to see) Jim he (to sit) in the park alone. 28. In 15
minutes father (to work) in the garden for three hours. 29. The article is not
ready yet. It still (to write). 30. Yesterday he (to tell) to prepare a speech.
31. She said that her brother (to be) in the living-room where he (to play)
chess with his grandfather. 32. While I (to wait) for him to call up, he (to
have) a good time in the bar. 33. The room (to clean) every morning. 34.
Our train starts late in the evening, so if you (to come) at seven, we still (to
pack) our things. 35. Your answers must (to write) on one side of the paper
only. 36. He promised to come if he (to have) time. 37. The old theatre in
our native town (to reconstruct) last year. 38. I said I (to try) to speak to
her if I (to have) a chance. 39. The examiner told me not to come again
until I (to be prepared) well. 40. All he knew was that somewhere quite
near him a band (to play). 41. You (to hear) from Margaret yet? 42. They
(to drive) at about forty miles an hour when the accident (to happen). 43.
Our office (to decorate) for the celebration and looks cheerful. 44. Andrew
(to arrest) a few days ago. 45. I just (to finish) breakfast when he came up
to my table. 46. I (to have) a bad cold last week but I (to get over) it now.
47. It’s the best meal I (to have) for two years. 48. Peter (to read) by the
fireplace when the door (to open) and the maid (to enter). 49. Ring me up
at 11o’clock, I (not to sleep) yet. 50. The sun (to set) a long time ago, and
it (to begin) to get really cold.
B.1. Tom (to be) ill. He (to run) a high temperature and (to have) an
awful headache. When he (to come) home last night he (to shiver) with
cold and (to cough). We (to call) for the doctor. He (to stay) in bed for a
day or two I (to think). 2. The countryside (to be) wonderful especially
when it (to snow). 3. Laws usually (to discuss) before they (to adopt). 4.
I’ll phone you as soon as she (to appear), but I don’t know when she (to
return). 5. I never (to talk) while I(to work). 6. Could he (to elect) by a
large majority? He is quite unpopular. 7. She’ll talk to the dean if she (to
see) him, but I doubt if she (to see) him today. He’s away. 8. The girl (to
go) downstairs and the hotel owner (to stand up) and (to bow) to her as she
(to pass) the office. 9. Hardly our things (to pack) when it was high time to
go to the station. 10. Watson (to know) that his friend always (to smoke)
pipe after pipe when he (to think) over a difficult problem. 11. If we (to
win) the game, we’ll have a celebration, but we are not sure if we (to win)
or (to lose). 12. He asked her where she (to stay) because he (to want) to
224
see her again. 13. No sooner the bell (to go) than the teacher (to enter) the
classroom. 14. Why you (to smell) the flowers? - They (not to look) fresh
and they (not to smell) fresh. 15. I know they (to leave) for Italy on
Monday. I (not to know) when they (to come back), but they (to send) us a
telegram as soon as they (to get) the tickets. 16. He began to tell me what a
bad time he (to have) before we (to meet). 17. He promised that everything
(to arrange) before the manager (to return). 18. He couldn’t (to conceal) it
from her deliberately. He has always been honest to her. 19. He said that
after he (to walk) for about three hours he (to see) a little village lost in
snow. 20. When I (to wake up) last morning, I (to decide) that I (to visit)
him as soon as his doctor (to allow) me. 21. This is a book I must (to read)
at least three times since I was a boy. 22. She said they (to be) glad to see
Mr. Eliot at any time and she (to know) her husband (to be). 23. The
weather (not to seem) very good today. We (to hope) it (to change) for the
better soon. Anyway if it (to stop) raining we (to be able) to go on a trip.
24. He must (to absorb) in his sad thoughts that’s why he didn’t answer my
question. 25. My sister (to taste) the cake. She says it (to taste) delicious.
26. I feel sick today. I ought (not to eat) so many sweets yesterday. 27. In
the haste of that morning the letter might ( to leave) on the table. 28. He
said the police (to look for) the criminal for two months but (not to find)
him yet. 29. He asked her what (to happen) and why she (to cry). 30. She
said that when the clock (to strike) nine she (to run) up the stairs to her
office because the lift (not to work). 31. You may (to hurt) her feelings by
this remark and that’s why she left looking so displeased. 32. She asked
how long they (to be married) and whether they (to be) happy. 33. She
asked Mr. Brown where he (to be) when they (to drive) his car at midnight.
34. I’ll walk along the beach while you (to bathe). 35. John invited me to
dine with his friends. He (to say) they (to be) delighted and (to add) that he
himself (to be) glad to have a companion. 36. When I (to get) to the
station, I (to learn) that the train (to leave) a few minutes before. 37. He
told me that all previous week he (to prepare) for the examination. 38.
When we (to reach) the wood, we (to find) that a party of strangers (to
occupy) the spot which we (to choose) for our picnic. 39. He said he (to
reach) home by the next morning. 40. They wondered when the machines
they (to order) the previous month (to deliver) to them. 41. He said that his
watch (to be) fast and it could (not to rely on). 42. He (to know) Jane since
the time she (to arrive) from Canada two years ago. 43. Ever since I (to
meet) you, I (to think of) you more than any girl I(to know) ever. 44. I (to
sleep) for some time when I (to remember) that Red Chief (to say) I (to
225
burn) at the stake. 45. When I (to call up) him yesterday, he (to promise)
that the matter (to look into) soon. 46. The doctor who (to send for)
immediately said that the sick man must (to take) to the hospital. 47. He
said he (to want) to read the article which often (to refer to) by the
professor. 48. In the Johntown Flood of 1899 more than two thousand
people (to kill). Furniture (to float) away and homes (to wreck). The flood
(to cause) by a dam that (to break). 49. We cannot (to change) the terms of
payment which (to agree upon) during yesterday negotiations. 50. He
started the car and (to drive) carefully without looking back to see whether
he (to wake up) anyone. 51. Pretty soon the telephone (to ring) and they
said the taxi (to wait). 52. I think the article of the agreement which (to
object to) at the last meeting must (to reconsider). 53. They went directly
to the hotel. The reporter (to promise) to meet them at half-past one but he
(not to arrive) when they (to enter) the hall. 54. The football team which
(to watch) by thousands of people (to play) with great enthusiasm
yesterday. 55. Last Sunday we had a pleasant talk about what we each (to
do) since we (to leave) school. 56. Hardly I (to go out) when I (to
remember) that I (to leave) my umbrella at home.
Ex. 223. Translate into English:

A. 1. Вони живуть у цьому будинку вже 5 рокiв. 2. Тiльки коли
вона вже була у поїздi, вона згадала, що залишила книгу вдома. 3. Не
заходьте до спальнi! Там спить дитина. Вона завжди прокидається,
коли хтось вiдчиняє дверi. 4. Коли я прокинувся, мати вже встала i
готувала чай. 5. Де Мерi? – Вона у бiблiотецi, вона готується до
доповiдi. Вона працює вже три години. 6. Вiн думав, що вони
працюють разом. 7. Вам дають книги для читання? 8. Вона жила у
цьому будинку вже три роки, коли приїхав її брат. 9. Я чув цю пiсню
кiлька разiв, але не можу запам’ятати слiв. Я запишу їх, як тiльки
почую її знову. 10. Моя сестра хворіла вже кiлька днiв, коли я дiзнався
про це. 11. Я приєднаюся до вас, коли вип’ю чай. 12. Коли були
посадженi цi дерева? – Я не знаю, але мати каже, що вони були
посадженi минулого року. 13. Було вже темно, коли вони пiдiйшли до
будинку. Вiяв великий вiтер, ставало все холоднiше та холоднiше. 14.
Цi книги використовуються усiма студентами. 15. Ми сидимо тут вже
двi години, а я ще не розповiла тобi про свою подорож. 16. Вiн сказав,
що не прийде, тому що буде увесь вечiр писати твiр. 17. Коли читали
226
нове оповiдання, хтось постукав у дверi. 18. Вiдповiдь буде
вiдправлено через декiлька днiв. 19. Невже ти не розумiєш, що
навеснi буде вже три роки, як я ношу цей капелюх. 20. Ти знав, що вiн
не написав твiр. 21. Цей переклад буде закiнчено до наступної
п’ятницi. 22. Вiн сказав, що книги вже принесено. 23. Вона сказала,
що iде дощ, i нам краще сидiти вдома. 24. Що ви будете робити завтра
о 8 годинi вечора? – Завтра до 8 години я закiнчу працювати над своїм
рефератом, i о 8 годинi буду дивитися телевiзор. 25. Вiн запитав, чи
зустрiнуть нас на станцiї. 26. Я купила нову сукню. Я покажу її тобi
завтра, коли ти прийдеш до мене. 27. Вона думала, що погода буде
гарна, i вони поїдуть за мiсто. 28. Я вже три рази казав тобi, що
вправу треба переписати. 29. Вас вже запросили на свято? 30. Наш
будинок зараз ремонтують. 31. Я знав, що вони грають у шахи з ранку.
32. Вiн почав писати твiр о 3 годинi. Зараз вже 5, але вiн ще пише
його. Вiн каже, що закiнчить його до 7. 33. Коли прийшла мати, обiд
вже було приготовлено. 34. Вiн сказав, що її можна знайти у
бiблiотецi. 35. Де Джон? – Вiн в аудиторiї. Його саме зараз запитують.
36. Я вважаю, що цi статтi слiд проглянути ще раз.
В.1. Вiн сказав, що зможе закiнчити цю роботу тiльки пiсля
того, як буде отримано увесь матерiал. 2. До того часу як ми дiсталися
до села, дощ припинився, i сяяло сонце. Ми були дуже втомленi, тому
що пройшли понад 10 км. 3. У тебе червонi очi. Ти плакала? 4. Я знав,
що вiн дзвонить їй час вiд часу i запитує, як вона себе почуває. 5.
Джон запитав, чи я знаю про останню подiю i хто розповiв менi про
це. 6. Вiн сказав, що тебе розшукують i тобі слiд iти додому. 7. Ми не
змогли знайти цей будинок, тому що нам дали неправильну адресу. 8.
Невже вiн виграв чемпiонат? Нам слiд було привiтати його з цим ще
вчора. 9. Ми сподiвалися, що нашу телеграму отримають до того, як
ми приїдемо, i наш приїзд не буде несподiванкою. 10. Вiн сказав менi,
що якщо нiхто не зустрiне мене на станцiї, я зможу залишити валiзи у
камерi зберiгання i поїхати до готелю, де вiн зарезервував номер для
мене. 11. Вона сказала, що змушена була ходити до бiблiотеки майже
щодня, бо не могла знайти потрiбнi книги. 12. Я ще не знаю, чи пiду я
до театру в суботу, а якщо поїду, то запрошу тебе. 13. Цiкаво,чи
складе вiн iспит, i якщо складе, то яку оцiнку отримає. 14. Йому
запропонували взяти участь у змаганнi, але вiн вiдмовився. Нiхто не
мiг зрозумiти, чому вiн вiдмовився. 15. Мiй брат сказав, що вони
телефонували i запитували, коли ми переїжджаємо, i пообiцяли
прийти у наступний вiвторок, щоб допомогти нам. 16. Я не знав, коли
227
вiн повернеться з Канади, але був впевнений, що коли вiн приїде,то
подзвонить i розповiсть про те, що бачив. 17. Мерi купила собi нову
сукню i хотiла одягнути її на вечiрку, але дiзналася, що вечiрку
вiдмiнили. 18. Не встиг вiн вiдкрити валiзу, як знайшов краватку, яку,
як вiн гадав, давно загубив. 19. Нам пояснили, що погода у Бразилiї
дощова усе лiто, i якщо поїхати туди вiдпочивати, можна не
дочекатися сонячних днiв. 20. Хотiлося б знати, чи прийде вона до
нас, i якщо прийде, ми розповiмо їй правду. 21. Я знав, що вона буде
здивована, коли дiзнається про те, що трапилося. 22. Бiлл вiдчував,
що хтось стежить за ним, i попрохав мене не телефонувати йому. 23.
Батько запитав, чи спить дитина, i як довго вона вже спить. 24. Мiй
приятель запевнив мене, що вона не знає, що її брат арештований. 25.
Коли я прийшов додому вчора, моя сестра вже повернулася. Вона
сидiла бiля камiна і проглядала старi фотографiї. 26. У мене таке
вiдчуття, що наш план нiколи не буде реалiзований. 27. Я йшов майже
дві години, коли, нарештi, побачив маленький будинок. Я зразу
зрозумiв, що то був той дiм, про який менi розповiдав мiй товариш. Я
пiдiйшов до будинку i постукав. Якась жiнка сидiла бiля вiкна i
читала. Коли вона почула стук, вона встала i пiдiйшла до дверей. 28.
Якщо вiн прийде пiсля того, як я піду, вiддайте йому листа, що
лежить на столi. 29. Напевне, вiн подзвонив їй учора i розповiв усе, бо
вона вже знає правду i виглядає дуже занепокоєною. 30. Зараз бiльше
грошей витрачається на їжу, нiж на одяг. 31. Усi були задоволенi, що я
запросив письменника, про якого вони багато чули, i їм дуже хотiлося
дiзнатися, над чим вiн зараз працює. 32. Ми сподiвалися, що згода
буде досягнута до кiнця зустрiчi. 33. Хiба ви не збираєтесь
обговорювати це питання? - Нi, його вiдкладено до наступного
засiдання. 34. Браун чекав близько години, поки його не запросили до
кабiнету. 35. На цю картину завжди дивляться з цікавістю. 36. На його
приїзд не звернули уваги. 37. Ця помилка могла бути зроблена будь-
ким iз нас. 38. Вiн сказав, що їх тепло привiтали i подякували за
допомогу. 39. Менi сказали, що злочинця шукають. 40. Заповiт
змiнили пiсля того, як вiн одружився. 41. Будинок, де знайшли мертву
жiнку, охороняється полiцiєю. 42. Цими фактами часто зневажають.
43. План був погано обмiркований, i Пола схопили, коли вiн виходив
iз банку. 44. Пiдлiтка заарештували, тому що вiн викрав годинник, i
зараз його допитують у полiцейському вiддiленнi. 45. Вона
сподiвалася, що коли дiстанеться до будинку, батько вже повернеться
з мiста i буде чекати на неї. 46. З хвилину вона дивилася на батька,
228
потiм повернулася i вийшла з кiмнати. 47. Я впевнена, що вони будуть
смiятися над тобою, якщо ти одягнеш цей капелюх. 48. Я вважаю, що
на цьому планi будуть наполягати. 49. Про цю подiю багато говорили.
50. Девiд завжди давав багато добрих порад своїм друзям, але, на
жаль, нiхто з них нiколи їх не дотримувався. 51. Вони сказали, що
пiдпишуть контракт, якщо їх умови буде прийнято. 52. Я купила
телевiзор минулого року. Увесь цей час вiн добре працював. 53. Коли
вона увiйшла до кiмнати, усi помiтили, що її обличчя змiнилося. 54.
Ти пам’ятаєш, у якому штатi знаходиться Бостон. 55. У недiлю вона
завжди встає пiзнiше, але минулої недiлі хтось зателефонував о 5
годинi ранку. Вона не могла заснути, i їй довелося встати. 56. Треба
щось робити, бо ми не можемо чекати, тому що у нас мало часу. 57.
Вiн побачив, що вона зблiдла, i вирiшив не казати правду. 58. Джейн
попросила допомогти розшукати її рукавички i сказала, що шукає їх
вже пiвгодини. 59. Вiн довiдався, що вони зараз виробляють нову
зброю, яку збираються випробувати десь у горах. 60. Коли вона
востаннє виходила з батькiвського будинку, в якому прожила 18
рокiв, вона не думала, що знов повернеться сюди.
7.3. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD:

SYNTHETIC AND ANALYTICAL FORMS
7.3.1. The Use of the Subjunctive Mood in Conditional Subordinate

Clauses
Ex. 224. Translate the following sentences into your native language.
1. If I knew his address, I’d write him. 2. If he had more spare time,
he would help us. 3. If we received that letter tomorrow, we would answer
your question. 4. If she were here, they would ask her a few questions. 5. If
I were you, I wouldn’t dare to argue. 6. He would certainly agree if he
were in your place. 7. Phil would travel if he had more money. 8. If they
didn’t want to go, they wouldn’t. 9. I’d go out if it weren’t snowing. 10. If
she didn’t come to their party next week, they would be very angry. 11.
What would you do if your house were broken into? 12. Elen wouldn’t
give me any money if I asked her. 13. Would you give me money if I asked
you? 14. What would you do if you found somebody’s purse?
Ex. 225. Supply the correct form of the infinitive in brackets.
229
A. 1. If I (to have) enough money, I (to buy) this overcoat. 2. Larry
(to write) them if he (to have) their address. 3. If you (to travel) first class,
it (to cost) over $650. 4. If you (to ask) Esther, she (to help) you. 5. If I (to
stop off) in Boston, I (to stay) with my friends. 6. If you (to see) her now,
you (not to recognize) her. 7. What you (to do) if you (to ask) to help us?
8. If I (to go) to the doctor, he (to give) me a certificate? 9. If I (to be) you,
I (to choose) a different topic. 10. What you (to do) if you (to be) in his
place?
B. 1. How long it (to take) you to get to the University if you (to
move) into this flat? 2. They (not to be pleased) if we (to come) without
asking. 3. I (not to be surprised) if the money (to find) at his place. 4. If he
(to ask) about this case, he (not to tell) anything. He is too frightened. 5.
What (to happen) if there (to be) a serious nuclear accident? 6. If there (to
be) a flood in this area, you (not to get) a penny in compensation. 7. If we
(not to waste) so much money, our resources (to last) longer. 8. I (not to
be) in this job unless I (to be) a Ph. D.! 9. Unless we (to think) new
research was necessary, we (not to spend) money on it. 10. Just imagine
what the world (to be) like if we (not to have) electricity!
C. 1. There (not to be) so many articles on astrology unless so many
people (to be) interested in it. 2. If my car (to be) struck in a traffic jam, I
(to be) very angry. 3. I never (to hit) anybody unless they (to hit) me. 4. If
you (to watch) TV, you (to choose) a western or a comedy? 5. You (not to
get) this job unless you (to have) some qualifications. 6. I (not to let) you
marry my daughter unless you (to start) earning money. 7. You (to make) a
scene if you (to provoke)? 8. I (to refuse) to go unless the company (to
pay) my expenses. 9. Who you (to ask) if you (not to know) how to do it?
10. I (to buy) this car if I (to be) richer. 11. I don’t agree with his economic
policy. I (not to vote) for him unless he (to change) it. 12. No one (to buy)
it unless it (to have) a guarantee. 13. If I (to be) you, I (to see) a doctor
about those headaches. 14. If Nick (to have) a country house, he (to go)
there on Sunday. 15. If you (to have) an argument with your friend, you (to
apologize) first? 16. What you (to do) if one day a millionaire (to ask) you
to marry him / her? 17. What you (to do) if your car (to steal)? 18. If Leslie
(to apply) for the job, he (not to get) it. 19. They (to get) a bank loan if
they (to apply) for it. 20. I (to buy) some of their books if they (to send)
me their price list.
Ex. 226. Match these parts to make conditional sentences.
230
1. They would be disappointed … a. … if I were offered it.
2. Many people would be out of b. … if I lost his ring.

work …
3. I would be surprised … c. … if he sold it.
4. What would happen … d. … if I took his car without asking
5. I would be terribly upset … e. … if we didn’t come to their

party.
6. She would understand everything f. … if this factory closed down.
7. I would take the job … g. … if you overslept tomorrow.
8. He wouldn’t get much money for h. … if he refused to lend you some

his car … money?
9. What would you buy … i. … if you helped me with this
problem.
10. You’d feel better … j. … if I were you.
11. I wouldn’t argue … k. … if you explained the situation
to her.
12. Would you buy this flat … l. … if you won a lot of money?
13. He would be really angry … m. … if you were offered this job?
14. I would be grateful … n. … if I weren’t absolutely sure I

was right.
15. I would listen to the elder’s o. … if you stopped smoking.
advice …
16. What would you say … p. … if you had enough money?

1. Якби я мав гарний словник, я б витратив менше часу на
переклади. 2. Мені подобається цей годинник. Якби він був
дешевшим, я б купив його. 3. Я впевнена, що ви робили б менше
помилок, якби краще знали граматику. 4. Якби рішення цього питання
залежало від мене, я б допоміг вам. 5. Якби Дані виїхав завтра раніше,
то він би був у Нью-Йорку вже ввечері. 6. На вашому місці я б не
сперечався. 7. Я б не погодився з цією пропозицією, якби я був на
231
вашому місці. 8. Якби він не витрачав так багато грошей, йому б не
довелося їх позичати. 9. Він не приїздив би до цього міста кожного
літа, якби йому не подобалося там. 10. Мені більше б подобався
тутешній клімат, якби дощі не йшли так часто. 11. На вашому місці я
б вибрав іншу роботу. 12. Що б ви робили, якби були на моєму місці?
13. Якби ви попрохали їх допомогти, вони б не відмовили вам.
Ex. 228. Translate the sentences into your native language.

1. If he had put on a warm coat yesterday, he would not have caught
cold. 2. If I had seen him yesterday, I’d have given him a piece of my
mind. 3. If he had realized the danger, he would have run away. 4. Tony
wouldn’t have been so depressed if he had known everything. 5. If George
had gone to the party last night, he wouldn’t have seen Bell there. 6.
Unless you had studied film history, you’d never have passed that test! 7.
We wouldn’t have chosen this tour unless it had been escorted. 8. Would
you have gone to Rio if you had known it was going to be so hot there? 9.
Matthew wouldn’t have left the children alone for too long if it hadn’t been
so necessary to see the doctor. 10. How much would you have spent on
your holiday tour if you had gone first class instead of second? 11. If the
mother hadn’t left scissors on the floor, the kid wouldn’t have cut his
finger.
Ex. 229. Change the following sentences according to the model.

Model: If it didn’t rain, we’d go for a walk (yesterday).
If it hadn’t rained yesterday, we’d have gone for a walk.
1. They would come if you invited them (yesterday night). 2. If you
weren’t so careless, you wouldn’t make such a foolish mistake (then). 3. If
they were present, we would discuss it with them (last Monday). 4. If it
were sunny, we’d go to the beach (the day before). 5. If she were ready,
she would take her exam (last week). 6. If Gerry weren’t so busy, I’d ask
him to help me (in the morning). 7. If you had a spare ticket, I’d see the
performance (yesterday). 8. If I knew English better, I’d work as an
interpreter (then). 9. If Phil practiced more, he’d play the guitar better (at
the concert). 10. If I had time, I’d go shopping with you (yesterday). 11.
He would fill in that form if he didn’t forget about it (at the airport).
Ex. 230. Match these parts to make conditional sentences.

1. I’d have gone to see you … a. … if I had known your address.
2. The accident wouldn’t have b. … if she had had enough money
232
happened … on her.
3. They would have come to our c. … if I had known that she was
party … expecting my call.
4. She would have bought that d. … if I had known you were ill.
necklace…
5. We wouldn’t have watched that e. … if you had witnessed the
programme… crime?
6. Tom wouldn’t have been late for f. … if she hadn’t been wearing a
his interview … seat-belt.
7. He wouldn’t have become a g. … if you had checked everything
teacher … before the departure.
8. No one would have bothered you h. … if the driver in front hadn’t
… stopped so suddenly.
9. I’d have sent you a postcard i. … if he had missed the train.
while I was on holiday …
10. He would have never asked you
j. … if he had left some clues, but
to give him a lift … he hadn’t!
11. She would have been injured in
k. … if he had known it would be
the crash … so boring!
12. I wouldn’t have phoned him l. … if he had understood how hard
yesterday … it was going to be!
13. I wouldn’t have fallen off …m. … if you had told us you wanted
to sleep.
14. The man would have been n. … if we hadn’t forgotten to
arrested long ago … invite him.
15. You wouldn’t have left your o. … if he hadn’t been in such a
tickets … hurry.
16. What would you have done … p. … if someone had been holding
that ladder!
Ex. 231. Supply the correct form of the infinitives in brackets.

1. If Joan (to see) him waving, she (to wave) him back. 2. The
secretary (to send) the telex if the manager (to ask) her to do it. 3. I (not to
be) late for work yesterday if I (to have) an early night the day before
yesterday. 4. We (to spend) more time in Edinburgh if we (to know) more
about the city when we were booking the tour. 5. If we (to stay) in Las
Vegas longer, we (to loose) all our money. 6. If we (to take) our children
with us, they (to love) it! 7. If I (to buy) the car earlier, it (to cost) less than
now. 8. I (to spend) less time on this work if I (to have) a better dictionary.
233
9. If I (to know) that it was going to rain, I (to take) an umbrella. 10. I (not
to take) this tour unless they (to provide) a guide. 11. If Jane (not to forget)
to wind up her watch, she (not to be late) for the interview. 12. I (to phone)
you yesterday if you (to be) in town. 13. I (not to catch) cold if I (to have)
my coat on. 14. She (not to scold) me if I (to come) in time. 15. If he (to
know) the exam would be so difficult, he never (to take) it.
Ex. 232. Complete the following sentences. Make use of the suggested
phrases.
1. You wouldn’t have a sore throat … (якби ви не з’їли так багато
морозива). 2. He wouldn’t be in hospital now… (якби він звернувся до
лікаря вчасно). 3. We shouldn’t feel cold … (якби ми вщент не змокли).
4. She wouldn’t have a headache … (якби вона прийняла ліки вчасно).
5. You’d feel quite well … (якби видалили зуба одразу). 6. The girl
wouldn’t walk … (якби їй не зробили операцію). 7. You’d have found
the book sooner … (якби ви завжди тримали свої речі у порядку). 8.
They wouldn’t have furnished the room in such a way … (якби вони мали
хоч трохи смаку). 9. He would have repaired the radio-set long ago …
(якби він мав хоч які-небудь інструменти). 10. You wouldn’t have said
that … (якби знали мене краще).

1. Якби ви взяли таксі, ви б приїхали на вокзал раніше. 2. Якби
ваша пропозиція була отримана на тому тижні, ми б прийняли її. 3.
Цього б не сталося, якби ви були там. 4. Якби ви прийшли раніше, ви
б ще побачились з моїми батьками. 5. Якби вони не відмовилися
допомогти, ми б вчора вже закінчили цю роботу. 6. Якби ви читали
книгу, то ви б краще зрозуміли фільм. 7. Якби завдання не було таке
важке, студенти б виконали його набагато швидше. 8. Якби я узяв із
собою відеокамеру, то зняв би гарний фільм під час подорожі. 9. Якби
я був у місті, коли твій брат приїжджав, я б із ним побачився. 10. Алан
не прийняв би цієї пропозиції, якби не відчував потреби в грошах. 11.
Лорейн не вийшла б за нього заміж, якби не була впевнена в тому, що
це буде гарний шлюб. 12. Я б не почала читати цю книгу, якби мені її
не порекомендували. 13. Девід ніколи б не вступив до університету,
якби не навчався гарно у школі. 14. Ніхто б не запідозрив його в
крадіжці, якби він знищив відбитки пальців.
Ex. 234. Insert the appropriate form of the Subjunctive Mood.
234
A.1. If you aren’t going to live in the house, why you (not to sell) it?
If I (to have) a house I couldn’t use, I (to sell) it at once. 2. No, I didn’t
know any Russian at that time. - But if you (not to know) Russian, why
you (to offer) to give him Russian lessons? - Because I knew that he (to
refuse). He always rejected my offers. 3. Tell him to bring his bicycle
inside. If he (to leave) it outside, someone (to steal) it. 4. Why do people
always wear dark clothes at night? If pedestrians (to wear) light coloured
clothes, drivers (to see) them much more easily. 5. She must have loved
him very much because she waited for him for 15 years. If she (not to
love) him, she (not to wait) so long. 6. He looked so small and weak that
nobody asked him to do anything. If he (to look) strong, he (to be)
expected to dig all like everyone else. 7. The government is talking of
pulling the village down to make room for an airport. If they (to start)
doing it, the village people (to resist)? 8. If you are catching an early train
tomorrow, you (to like) to have breakfast at 7.00? 9. We’ll have to break
the ice on the pond; otherwise the ducks (not to be able) to swim, they (not
to be able) to get food. 10. When he left school, he became a fisherman.
His family didn’t like it at all. They (to be) much happier if he (to become)
a greengrocer like his father. 11. They still say that if he (to go) into the
greengrocery business when he left school, he (to be) comfortably off now,
instead of being poor. 12. But he says that if he (to have) his life again, he
(to make) the same choice.
B. 1. So many parcels and no baskets! If I (to know) that we were
going to buy so much, I (to bring) a basket. 2. No one bathes here. The
water is heavily polluted. If you (to bathe) in it, you (to be) ill for a
fortnight. 3. The only thing I haven’t got is a balcony. If I (to have) a
balcony, I (to grow) plants in pots. Then my flat (to be) perfect. 4. If he (to
stand) on a barrel, we all (to see) him and that (to be) much better. 5. Look
at poor Tom trying to start his car by hand again! If I (to be) Tom, I (to get)
a new battery. 6. I expect you’ll see Jack at the lecture tonight. If you (to
do), you, please (to remind) him about tomorrow’s meeting? 7. The
headmaster decided that Peter was the culprit and expelled him from the
school. A more intelligent man (to realize) that Peter couldn’t have been
guilty. 8. But I blame the real culprit even more. If he (to admit) his guilt,
Peter (not to be) expelled. 9. My unmarried friends are always telling me
how to bring up my children. I sometimes think that if they (to have)
children, they (to make) just as many mistakes as I do.
235
Ex. 235. Translate the sentences into English using the form of the
Subjunctive Mood.
А. 1. Я була б щаслива, якби мала багато братів та сестер. 2.
Якби він міг кататися на лижах, він поїхав би з друзями у гори ще
того тижня. 3. Якби ви доклали зусиль, ви б закінчили роботу за
півгодини. 4. Якби ви працювали старанніше, ви б уже давно
написали цю роботу. 5. На вашому місці я б не хвилювався: вона знає,
що робити. 6. Ми б зайшли до вас, якби не поспішали, але ми
запізнювалися на концерт. 7. Вона почувала б себе краще, якби не
зловживала ліками і частіше дихала свіжим повітрям. 8. Якби він
мешкав у Парижі, він приїздив би до нас кожного тижня. 9. Якби я
знала його краще, я б домовилася з ним про це ще вчора. 10. Вона б
склала іспити краще, якби працювала протягом року. 11. Мені б
сподобався фільм більше, якби він не був чорно-білим. 12. Що б ви
робили, якби зараз були канікули? 13. Ми б дуже хвилювались, якби
він не прийшов вчора.
В. 1. Якби він був вільний вчора, він би зайшов до мене. 2. Якби
ви були вчора на концерті, ви б отримали велике задоволення. 3. Якби
я знала про цю статтю раніше, я б переклала її. 4. Змагання відбулися
б, якби не пішов сильний дощ. 5. Він би ніколи не впізнав мене, якби
я не почала розмовляти з ним. 6. Дівчина не хвилювалася б так
сильно, якби їй не задавали так багато питань. 7. Якби ви допомогли
їй, вона б вже закінчила роботу. 8. Ви б не втомилися так вчора, якби
ви більше відпочивали. 9. З ним би нічого не трапилося, якби він не
поспішав. 10. Якби ви попрохали мене про це тиждень тому, я б
допомогла вам відразу. 11. Якби я був на вашому місці тоді, я б зробив
по-іншому. 12. Якби ви проглянули старі газети, ви б знайшли цікавий
матеріал для свого виступу. 13. Якби він був учора в інституті, ми б
зустріли його. 14. Якби ви відправили телеграму вчора, він би вже
отримав її. 15. Якби вона зайшла до мене вчора, я б допомогла їй у цій
справі. 16. Якби ви не пропустили свій автобус, ви б не спізнилися на
роботу. 17. Я зміг би відремонтувати машину, якби мав необхідні
інструменти
Ex. 236. Read and translate the following sentences. Comment on the
forms and the meaning of the Subjunctive Mood.
1. Were he a sensible boy, he’d behave in a different way. 2. Were I
in your place, I’d do the same. 3. Were she one of my best friends, I’d
share my secrets with her. 4. Weren’t it raining, the children wouldn’t be
236
staying at home. 5. Had she time, she would be able to join the excursion.
6. Had she many children, she wouldn’t be so lonely. 7. Had we been told
about it yesterday, we’d have come earlier. 8. Had she known he would be
here, she wouldn’t have gone away. 9. I don’t know what you would have
done, had you been in my place. 10. Were she cleverer, she wouldn’t have
said such a silly thing. 11. Were Mum with us, she wouldn’t have let you
do so. 12. Hadn’t he been badly wounded, he would have reached the other
bank sooner.
Ex. 237. Complete the following sentences using the words given in
brackets. Mind the inverted word order in subordinate clauses of
condition.
1. (Знав би я про це раніше), I’d have spoken to him. 2. (Не було б
дощу), we’d have had a sail by sea. 3. (Були б вони зараз тут), they
would come to see us. 4. (Склала б вона вже іспити), she could go to the
Crimea with us now. 5. (Був би він вкрай самотнім), we’d invite him
more often. 6. (Вмів би він гарно плавати), this wouldn’t have ended so
tragically. 7. (Вчинив би він так), everybody would have turned away
from him. 8. (Мав би я шанс подивитися цю п’єсу), I should never have
missed it. 9. (Не була б ріка така глибока), we should cross it.

1.Були б зараз канікули, я б поїхав до Москви. 2.
Зателефонувала б вона мені вчора, ми б не виглядали посміховиськом
зараз. 3. Прийшов би він вчасно, вони б вже закінчили роботу. 4.Була
б це правда, він би не заперечував цього. 5. Попередив би він нас, ми
б ніколи не втрутилися в цю справу. 6. Був би він художником, він би
намалював мій портрет. 7. Що б він сказав, був би він зараз з нами? 8.
Сказав би він про це раніше, все було б зараз інакше. 9. Були б в мене
тоді гроші, я прилетіла б літаком. 10. Був би я знову в цих місцях, я
обов’язково сходив би на полювання. 11. Поклали б ви листа до
сумки, ви б не загубили його. 12. Я купила б своєму синові ковзани,
вмів би він кататися
Ex. 239. Read the following sentences. Comment on the form and the
meaning of the Subjunctive Mood. Translate into your native language.
1. But for the late hour, I’d stay a little longer. 2. But for his teeth,
he’d be quite good-looking. 3. But for the girl, he would have left
immediately. 4. But for his illness, he’d have graduated from the college
237
last year. 5. But for the small print, I should have read the book sooner. 6.
The child wouldn’t have begun crying, but for your severe look. 7. You
first brought your friend into our company. We’d never have seen him, but
for you. 8. But for the frost, we should be playing outdoors. 9. But for your
help, I should never have finished my work. 10. Nobody would have
noticed him, but for his innumerable questions. 11. But for me, you’d have
bought that old-fashioned knitted dress. 12. The girl would have lost her
job, but for her father’s help.
Ex. 240. Paraphrase the sentences using but for- phrase. Look at the
model.
Model: I want to go to the cinema with you but I have to take my
examination in English tomorrow. – But for this examination, I should
go to the cinema.
She made an effort over herself and didn’t faint. – But for making an
effort over herself, she would have fainted.
1. He helped me and I managed to find my work in time. 2. He is an

experienced engineer and he gave us good advice. 3. He was in bad
humour the other night and did not produce a favourable impression on my
guests. 4. It began to rain and we didn’t reach the village in time. 5. We
didn’t buy the new suit only because he was short of money at that time. 6.
We felt ill at ease at her presence only because of her vanity. 7. She had a
headache and didn’t take part in our amateur concert. 8. The driver was
very skilled and we reached the camp at daybreak. 9. He had a good
temper so he made friends easily. 10. He was very absent-minded and left
our tickets at home. 11. She couldn’t do the task because she had been
absent at the lecture.

1. Якби не дощ, діти спали б на відкритому повітрі. 2. Якби не
постійна турбота матері, він ніколи б не одужав. 3. Якби не жахлива
спека, ми могли б трохи прогулятися. 4. Якби не його оманлива
усмішка, ми повірили б усьому, про що він говорив. 5. Дівчина не
привернула б до себе уваги, якби не її прекрасні очі. 6. Якби не таксі,
ми б не застали його вдома. 7. Якби не ви, я не прийшла б сюди. 8.
Якби не війна, його доля склалася б інакше. 9. Якби не тиша, що
панувала в будинку, вона нічого б не почула. 10. Якби не годинник, ми
сьогодні проспали б. 11. Якби не ваш лист, він би не довідався про
238
нашу подорож до Москви. 12. Якби не ця погода, вона почувала б
себе непогано. 13. Якби не важливість цієї справи, я б залишився
вдома. 14. Якби не довгоочікуване прибуття мого брата, я пішов би з
вами в кіно. 15. Якби не його впертість, він ще тоді прийняв би вашу
допомогу. 16. Леслі мав би набагато більше друзів, якби не його
характер. 17. Ніхто ні про що б не дізнався, якби не твоя балакучість.
18. Якби вона не була такою неуважною, вона не загубила б свій
гаманець. 19. Якби не шпаргалки (cribs), він би ніколи не склав
екзамен. 20. Ентоні ніколи не став би таким відомим вченим, якби не
його талан.
7.3.2. The use of the Subjunctive Mood in other types of subordinate

clauses
7.3.2.1. Adverbial clauses of concession
Ex. 242. Fill in the blanks using the proper mood form.
1. Even if her things (were, had been) packed, she couldn’t have
been in time for the train. It started at two sharp. 2. I shouldn’t have visited
her even if I (had, had had) time. 3. I shouldn’t have managed to read the
book even if you (had brought, brought) it to me. I had no time. 4. I
shouldn’t have read this article even if it (were, had been) published. I did
not have this issue at home. 5. Even if your words (were taken, had been
taken) into consideration, he wouldn’t have changed his decision. 6. I
should not go there even if you (advised, had advised) me to do this. 7. We
should go there even if you (did not go, had not gone) with us. 8. They
should have come to you even if you (did not invite, had not invited) them.
9. He would not have met you even if you (sent, had sent) a telegram. 10.
They would answer your letter even if they (were, had been) busy. 11.
Even if I (booked, had booked) the tickets beforehand, we couldn’t go to
the concert tonight. 12. He wouldn’t have won the race even if he (were,
had been) a fast runner.
Ex. 243. Use the corresponding mood form instead of the infinitive in
brackets.
A. 1. She (to tell) you nothing even if you (to ask) her. 2. They (not
to come) today even if you (to wire) them. 3. The boy (to go) to school
even if he (to be ill). 4. I (to ring up) you even if I (to have) little time. 5.
239
We (to come to see) her even if we (to be) short of time. 6. He (not to go)
to a holiday camp with you even though the weather (to be) fine. 7. She (to
get up) early even though it (to be) Sunday. 8. We (to talk) about
everything even though we (to know) each other for many years. 9. She (to
speak) so loudly even though there (to be) many people round her. 10. You
(to find) him at home even though you (to call on) him early in the
morning.
B. 1. Even if you only (to think) that I could be of any help to you, I
(to be) very happy to be allowed to stay around. 2. Why say it even if it (to
be) true? 3. I (to get) there even if I (to walk) there all the way. 4. Even
though you (to ask) him twice, he (to do) it again; he is a stubborn boy. 5.
You (not to get) in touch with him even though you (to try): he wasn’t in
town at that time. 6. Even though we (to know) in time, we (not to prevent)
the catastrophe. 7. I (not to go) even if you (to try) to persuade me. 8. But
even if you (to be) right, I (to prefer) to act in my own way. 9. We (not to
achieve) any success even if he (to help) us. 10. Even though he (can pay)
his hotel bill, they (not to give) him any more credit.

1. Ми все одно вивчили б усі слова, навіть якби нас і не
просили. 2. Я все одно б зробила цю вправу, навіть якби ти не
принесла мені книжку. 3. Ми б не запізнилися, навіть якби вийшли на
15 хвилин пізніше. 4. Вона встигла б на потяг, навіть якби пішла
пішки на станцію. 5. Навіть якби ваш товариш був тут, він нічого не
зміг би зробити. Усе вже вирішено. 6. Я не пішла б зараз на вулицю,
навіть якби зараз не було дощу. 7. Навіть якби Джон постарався, він
не зміг би цього зробити.
7.3.2.2. Adverbial clauses of comparison
Ex. 245. Read and translate the following sentences. Comment on the
forms and the meaning of the Subjunctive Mood.
A. 1. He looked as though he were ill. 2. Her face was so white that
she looked as if she were going to faint. 3. I felt as though I were making a
bad joke. 4. It seemed as if he were burning me with his eyes. 5. It was as
though he followed his soul’s thoughts. 6. It looked as if he weren’t
interested in his uninvited guest. 7. He felt as though she did not love him.
8. He looked as though he knew it to be true. 9. He sat in his chair looking
as if he were going to be sick. 10. It seemed as though he had worked an
240
entire day. 11. It was as though nothing had happened. 12. I feel as if I had
eaten too much.
B. 1. He felt awkward as if everybody were looking at him. 2. I’m
sorry to talk about you as if you weren’t here. 3. Try to behave, my dear, as
if nothing had happened. 4. He smiled as though he could read through my
thoughts. 5. She spoke to me as if we had never quarrelled. 6. Everybody
treats me as if I had a disease. 7. He began to shake as though he were
cold. 8. She told me what to do as if she were a doctor. 9. You speak about
him as if he had been cured. 10. The girl got very excited as though she
had never travelled by air. 11. He looked at me sometimes as if he were
sorry for me.
Ex. 246. Use the corresponding mood form instead of the infinitive in
brackets.
1. Two American girls were eating their ices with concentration as if
they (to make) an experiment at their college laboratory. 2. The girls were
neat and clean and their noses, and even legs were identical as though they
(to make) up to the same standard. 3. The girl’s glance was not like a
woman’s but a man’s – very straightforward as if she (to speculate) on
some course of action. 4. The Frenchwoman thanked me formally for her
compact as if nothing (to happen). 5. What struck me most on the square
was the silence. It looked as if it (to be) not a square crowded with the
dead and their relatives but a church during Mass. 6. When Pyle saw blood
on his shoes he looked as if he (to be) about to faint. 7. Your pearls are a
very good imitation, they look as if they (to be) real. 8. The letter was
written in block letters as if one (can) not identify the writer’s hand when
the paper is written in block letters. 9. Coming to Kyiv on a flying visit
after two years’ absence I felt as if I (not to leave) Kyiv for a single day.
10. You look so tired as if you (to work) all day long. 11. Waiting for
Susan on Saturday evening I was so excited as if it (to be) the first time I’d
taken a girl out.12. It was all very clean and shining, very nice too but it
looked as if no human being (to live) ever there. 13. She did that as if
nobody (to exist) in the room. 14. It was as if I (to attack) by an invisible
enemy. 15. She had black hair and a fur jacket and sat bolt upright as if she
(to give) the car its orders rather than driving it. 16. It seemed as if the soft
hand gently caressing me (to turn) hard and big and struck me.
241
A. 1. Здавалося, що він нікому не вірить. 2. Мені здавалося, що
я десь чула цей голос. 3. Що з вами? У вас такий вигляд, наче вам зле.
4. Ви виглядаєте так, наче все літо провели на півдні. 5. Хоча нікого не
було видно, у мене було таке відчуття, неначе за мною спостерігали.
6. Вони поводилися з дівчиною, наче з іграшкою. 7. У кімнаті було
парко, неначе вікна не відчинялися вічність. 8. Він поводиться так,
наче знайомий з усіма. 9. Вона розмовляла з нами так, наче ми були у
чомусь винні. 10. Він почервонів, наче його згнітило моє зауваження.
11. Дівчинка дивилась на батька так, неначе ось-ось заплаче. 12. Він
говорив про книгу з таким поважним виглядом, неначе сам був її
автором. 13. Я пам’ятаю цей роман, неначе тільки що прочитав його.
14. Ви говорите так, неначе вам не шкода своєї власної доньки. 15.
Жінка йшла обережно, неначе підлога була слизькою.
В. 1. Містер Келада подивився на мене здивовано, наче він не
розумів, чому я хочу облишити цю тему. 2. Схоже на те, що невдовзі
буде дощ, захопи парасольку про всяк випадок. 3. Дівчина подивилася
на нього прямо, неначе вона розмірковувала, чи варто його
попереджати про вибух. 4. Вони знищили всі папери, неначе папери
були єдиним свідком їх злочинів. 5. Вибух почувся на великій відстані
від кафе, здавалося, що хтось сильно грюкнув дверима. 6. Здавалося,
що увесь світ розлетівся на частини: я опинився в оточенні уламків
стільців, столів і розбитих пляшок 7. Джо із нетерпінням чекав
повернення у будинок тітоньки, неначе він не мріяв вибратися з нього
всього три місяці тому. 8. Джо був одягнений у свій вихідний костюм
і почувався так, наче було велике свято. 9. Його шинель була сильно
зім’ята і пахла гумою, неначе він спав у ній під дощем багато днів.
7.3.2.3. Subject Subordinate Clauses
Ex. 248. Read and translate the following sentences. Comment on the use
and the meaning of the verb forms in the subject subordinate clauses.
A. 1. It is important that wickedness shouldn’t triumph. 2. It was
absolutely necessary that he should think what had happened. 3. It is
desirable that you should be present here. 4. It was advisable that the boy
should go out earlier than usual. 5. It is demanded that she should leave the
house at once. 6. It was required that they become familiar with the facts.
7. It was arranged that the students should take their examinations in a
week.
242
B. 1. It is a pity it should be raining so heavily. 2. It is a pity you’d
have come so late. 3. It is natural that I’d look run down after the exam. 4.
It was strange that they’d have changed their mind. 5. It’s time you should
tell us the whole truth. 6. It is curious that she should have refused to keep
them company. 7. It is better that he should stay away altogether. 8. It is
right that you should have said it frankly.
Ex. 249. Supply the necessary forms of the Subjunctive Mood for the verbs
in brackets.
1. It’s only natural that those two boys (to want) to play together. 2.
It wasn’t strange that the son (to inherit) his father’s linguistic talents. 3. It
seems surprising now that I (to get away) with it for so long. 4. She was
jealous or surprised and it seemed better that the friendship (to cease). 5. It
isn’t advisable that you (to sit) here alone. 6. It seems fortunate that you (to
meet) us there. 7. It is impossible that the tickets (to be) so expensive. 8. It
is unbelievable that fresh air and exercise (to do) anybody some harm. 9.
It’s wonderful that they (to give) you a present. 10. Is it odd that I (to love)
your brother? 11. It was necessary that the expedition (to have) a radio. 12.
It’s high time she (to be serious). She is not a child already. 13. It’s high
time she (to ring up) me. She promised to inform me about the result of the
exam. 14. It is strange that he (to ask) that question. 15. It’s possible that
he (not to review) the whole material if he got a three. 16. It was
unbelievable that he (not to do) his homework. 17. It is desirable that the
students (to speak) English to each other in class. 18. It was demanded that
the labour conditions (to be) improved. 19. It is important that you (to
answer) his letter not later than tomorrow. 20 It is desirable that the
meeting (to take place) in three days.

A. 1. Необхідно, щоб студенти якомога більше читали
англійських книжок. 2. Було вирішено, щоб студенти читали роман
Джона Брейна “Шлях угору”. 3. Дуже важливо, щоб вони читали цю
книгу в оригіналі. 4. Рекомендується, щоб ви переклали цей уривок,
не користуючись словником. 5. Бажано, щоб студенти виписували
цікаві вирази та застосовували їх у своїй мові. 6. Домовились, щоб ми
243
провели конференцію за цією книгою в кінці семестру. 7. Необхідно,
щоб усі студенти взяли участь у цій конференції.
В. 1. Дивно, що саме ви схвалюєте цю точку зору. 2. Дивно, що
він досі не відповів на наш лист. 3. Шкода, що ви вже зателефонували
йому. 4. Шкода, що він не знає французької мови. 5. Природно, що
люди люблять волю. 6. Цілком природно, що дівчинка була
задоволена подарунком. 7. Вам давно слід було вивчити вірші. 8. Речі
запаковані; час посилати за машиною. 9. Жаль, що ви так мало
розмовляєте англійською на уроках. 10. Вам час переконати її
відмовитися від поїздки, яка не дасть їй нічого путнього. 11. Всім
давно було вже час лягати спати, оскільки було дуже пізно. Але всі
були зайняті роботою. 12. Вам час припинити ці суперечки. Все одно
ніхто з вас не поступиться, і ви ніколи не дійдете згоди. 13. Вам час
вже вирішити, як ви будете проводити свою відпустку. Час минає, а
ще нічого не зроблено. 14. Вам давно час звернутися до лікаря; ви
виглядаєте так, наче давно хворі. 15. Необхідно, щоб лікар ретельно
обстежив дитину. 16. Дуже сумнівно, що він мав захворювання горла
7.3.2.4. Object subordinate clauses
Ex. 251. Read the following sentences and analyze the use of Subjunctive I
and Suppositional Mood in object subordinate clauses.
1. She suggested that Miss Fairly should go to the pictures in the
town, which was only six miles away. 2. Mrs. Pestle had suggested that her
daughter, then already quite well known as a harpsichordist, should join us
in this recital. 3. To begin with, he alluded to my exalted position and
importance, and suggested that I should remove myself to Pretoria. 4. He
then turned to Alice, and before my very face proposed to her that she
should fly with him. 5. The doctor feels that you have made too quick a
change from a mountain climbing to our cloistered life, and he suggests we
send you away, for less than one short year, to some place where you can
have normal exercise. 6. Andrew was there. Ivory insisted that he be
present, in the most genuine and friendly fashion imaginable.
Ex. 252. Use the corresponding mood forms instead of the infinitives in
brackets.
A. 1. He insisted that a young actress (to star) in the play in the
coming year. 2. He requested that she (to partner) him. 3. We ask that you
(to listen) to our convincing arguments. 4. I insist that you (to mention)
244
their names and their good work in your report. 5. We insist that the firm
(to answer) within this month. 6. I insist that you (to press) your trousers
and (to get) a shave. 7. She requested that I (to give) the dictionary to her.
8. My friend strongly advises that we (to attend) these lectures. 9. The
teacher insisted that we (to write) a composition on Tuesday. 10. The
professor proposed that I (not to experiment) alone. 11. She demands that
the students (to work) at the laboratory regularly. 12. The teacher (to
recommend) that we should do the exercise in writing.
B. 1. They arrange that the conference (to take place) in the library.
2. The Dean directed that the meeting (to hold) at four o’clock. 3. We
agreed that we all (to read) the book in the original. 4. Who suggested that
she (to choose) that branch of philology? 5. Don’t you propose that the
discussion (to put an end to)? 6. She suggests that I (to consult) the
professor. 7. The doctor advised that my brother (to go) to the south
immediately. 8. She never suggested that he (to do) anything but paint. 9.
We suggest that their plan (to turn down). 10. The firm insisted that we (to
press) the matter otherwise they wanted to cancel the engagement. 11. I
suggest that our children (to teach) English 12. She thought it an admirable
suggestion that he (to undertake) her daughter’s case. 13. Miss Post had
suggested that the private file (to type) out neatly – it would be easier for
Miss Hairlie to read. 14. I want you to undertake all the arrangements.
Who do you suggest (to do) it?
Ex. 253. Fill in the blanks with one of the verbs: to ask, to insist, to
demand, to request, to suggest, to order. Pay attention to the form you use
1. The man … that his advocate should try to convince the judges
that he was innocent. 2. He … that we should persuade her to see the
doctor at once. 3. The students of the group … that she should attend all
the lectures to pass her examinations. 4. I … that they should settle the
matter themselves. 5. All the members of the group … that everything
should be cleared up before the meeting. 6. Our new friends … that we
should go on a camping trip in the coming year. 7. The teacher … that the
pupils should go on an excursion on Sunday. 8. The girl … that they
should give her another chance to improve. 9. He … that his secretary
should be sent in to him immediately. 10. I … that he should speak his
opinion frankly. 11. They friendly … that she should not take it seriously.
12. Who … that you should consult this doctor? 13. They… that the issue
be discussed in a week. 14. The man … that they should meet in the
library. 15. Nell was resolute in … that she should see the dentist.
245
Ex. 254. Change the structure of the following sentences so as to use the
forms of the Subjunctive Mood in subordinate object clauses. Look at the
model.
Model: He insisted on their coming on Sunday.
He insisted that they come (should come) on Sunday.
1. I proposed to find a doctor and bring him to see Strickland. 2. I
suggest my friend’s postponing the party till next Sunday. 3. Danny
proposed to blow up the sewer. 4. The defence insisted on hearing some
more witnesses. 5. The captain ordered the passengers to leave the deck. 6.
I proposed not to bother him about such trifles. 7. He told them it was time
to have dinner. 8. He demanded our mentioning this fact in our report. 9.
He insisted that it was necessary for me to accompany him. 10. He was
very nice about it and insisted on my accepting an extra week’s salary.
phrases.
1. She suggested … (щоб я відправив книги в Москву поштою).
2. The official advised … (щоб мій товариш відправив телеграму зі
сплаченою відповіддю). 3. The clerk insisted … (щоб відправник
написав своє ім’я повністю внизу бандеролі). 4. They arrange … (щоб
термінові телеграми приносили протягом двох годин). 5. The woman
requested … (щоб я написав прізвище і адресу одержувача в середині
пакету). 6. The man demands … (щоб в нього прийняли замовлення на
розмову з Москвою терміново). 7. The chief directed … (щоб
документи відправили листом на замовлення). 8. I requested … (щоб
нас не роз’єднували, доки ми не закінчимо розмову). 9. The post-
master ordered … (щоб телеграму принесли якнайшвидше). 10. The
girl at the counter requested … (щоб я заповнила бланк).

А. 1. Вона запропонувала, щоб ми прогулялися по саду після
обіду. 2. Студенти проcили, щоб їм показали фільм в оригіналі. 3. Я
розпорядився, щоб для студентів ще раз прочитали лекцію. 4. Ніхто
не наполягає, щоб ви виконали цю роботу сьогодні. 5. Директор
наказав, щоб усі зібралися в актовому залі через дві години. 6. Вона
порадила, щоб ми чекали її біля входу в парк. 7. Він запропонував,
щоб усі студенти брали участь у цій дискусії. 8. Ми домовилися, щоб
всім разом провести її у неділю. 9. Бібліотекар вимагала, щоб я
246
повернула книги в кінці тижня. 10. Він наказав, щоб все приготували
до п’ятої години.
В. 1.Вона попросила, щоб секретар надрукував необхідні
папери якнайскоріше. 2. Пасажири вимагали, щоб водій негайно
зупинив автобус. 3. Викладач запропонував, щоб студенти вибрали
книги для індивідуального читання самі. 4. Він вимагав, щоб його
впустили в дім, ніби в нього було на це право. 5. Мати наполягала,
щоб син сказав їй усю правду. 6. Його батько наполягав, щоб Майкл
отримав освіту, необхідну для джентльмена. 7. Вона дала
розпорядження, щоб Тому вручили листа вранці. 8. Вчитель порадив
студентам, щоб вони працювали влітку гідами-екскурсоводами. 9.
Куратор запропонував, щоб ми обговорили це питання з деканом
and the meaning of the verb forms. Translate them into your native
language.
1. I wish I could speak Spanish. 2. He wished he had his father’s
talent. 3. I wish you were listening to me more attentively. 4. I wish you
were here and knew what we know. 5. Alec wished he hadn’t gone with
them. 6. We wish it were sunny and warm all year round. 7. Mother wished
Ann didn’t have a bad cold. 8. I wished I had stayed in the country longer.
9. She wished she hadn’t been rude to him. 10. We wish we had known
about the incident then. 11. I wish I could have kept us company that night.
12. Steve wished he had stayed up all night. 13. I wish you would come to
my party tomorrow. 14. I wish you would tell me what your theory is. 15.
He only wished he could work more.
Ex. 258. Compose sentences expressing an unreal wish using the sentences
given below for basis. Look at the model.
Model: It is a pity he took leave of us so soon.
I wish he had not taken leave of us so soon.
1. It is a pity you did not restrain yourself from saying those insulting
things. 2. It is a pity you did not comply with their request. 3. It is a pity he
is so shy and self-conscious. 4. I am sorry that my feelings got the better of
me at that moment. 5. It is a pity that the doctor overlooked that vital
symptom. 6. I am sorry that I made that error. 7. It is a pity you can’t go to
the country for a week or so. 8. It is a pity that you lost your temper while
speaking to the teacher. 9. It is a pity Ann did not sing songs as a encore.
She was in fine voice yesterday. 10. It is a pity we did not reach a
247
conclusion on that question yesterday. 11. It is a pity I took my child for a
walk yesterday evening. The weather was nasty; a cold wind was blowing.
phrases.
1. We wish all of us … (to pass the exams successfully). 2. Did you
wish you … (to take part in the last conference). 3. Sometimes he wished
he … (to choose another topic for his graduate work). 4. How I wish that
you … (to take interest in the subject). 5. My mother always wished I …
(to be a teacher). 6. The students wished Professor N. … (to deliver them
lectures on the history of the language). 7. I wish you … (to work hard at
English). 8. My friend wishes he … (to be responsible for these lectures).
9. How we wish we … (to have courses in literature). 10. The speaker
wished that the students … (to pay more attention to those important
facts).
Ex. 260. Use the corresponding mood form instead of infinitive in

brackets.
1. I wish I (to buy) that grey hat instead of this one. It was more
expensive, but the quality was much better. 2. His words created such a
stir, he wished (to utter) them but it was too late. 3. It looks like raining, I
wish we (to take) our raincoats. 4. I wish you (to be) there to witness
everything yourself. 5. The child is crying, I wish I (to know) how to calm
her. 6. I wish you (to finish) your homework already. We could go for a
walk now. 7. I wish I (to know) it was your favourite writer. I would have
bought the book for you. 8. All the time she wished (not to mock) at the
poor boy. 9. I wish they (to stop) making so much noise so that I could
concentrate. 10. Mike wished that the editors (to permit) him to copy some
of their material. 11. Joel wishes that he (to spend) his vacation on the Gulf
Coast next year.

1. Шкода, що ви не любите вірші. 2. Шкода, що я не дотримався
вашої поради. 3. Яка шкода, що ви не знайомі з його працями. 4.
Шкода, що зараз не весна. 5. Яка шкода, що ви ніколи не були в
Англії. 6. Ми пожалкували, що не зустріли її в театрі. 7. Я б хотів,
щоб ви приїхали до нас на дачу. 8. Яка шкода, що погода зіпсувалася.
9. Нам би хотілося, щоб ви ніколи не запізнювалися. 10. Хотів би я
знати, куди вони пішли. 11. Як би нам хотілося, щоб ви жили з нами
248
по сусідству. 12. Вона пожалкувала, що прийшла дуже рано. 13.
Дівчині було шкода, що вона не вміє танцювати. 14. Він пожалкував,
що ніколи не був у нашому театрі. 15. Мені дуже шкода, що ви
пропустили таку цікаву лекцію. 16. Місіс Сміт шкодувала, що її син
не лікар. 17. Шкода, що ви вчора не прийшли, у нас було дуже цікаво.
18. Фільм був дуже цікавий, мені шкода, що ви його не бачили. 19.
Шкода, що ви не пішли оглянути цю виставку; я переконаний, вона б
вам сподобалася.
and the meaning of the verb forms.
1. I feared lest I should be detained. 2. He feared lest I should have
stayed too long in the sun. 3. She was afraid lest their meeting should be
the last. 4. He fears lest she should have a romantic idea of the place. 5.
She felt a little uneasy lest they should arrive late. 6. We were afraid lest
she’d disturb them. 7. He was afraid lest people should know the truth
about his affairs. 8. He felt a little uneasy that his friend might easily read
his mind. 9. Mother was afraid that the girl might have told too many lies.
10. I was afraid that you might have fallen ill. 11. The man fears that he
may miss the train. 12. The girl felt a bit uneasy that the hostess might
disapprove of her words. 13. The woman was afraid that she might lose her
job under the circumstances.
Ex. 263. Supply the necessary forms for the verbs in brackets using the
Subjunctive Mood or modal phrases.
1. We feared lest the weather (to change). 2. I felt a bit uneasy lest I
(to make) mistakes in the dictation. 3. He feared that she (to learn) much
more than she had told them. 4. The girl looked upset and feared lest his
parents (to be) rude to her. 5. The woman was afraid that her niece (to see)
certain old newspapers and (to know) about her parents. 6. The painter
feared lest the public (to disapprove) of his brushwork. 7. The boy was
afraid that he (to be late) for the performance. 8. I dreaded lest any stranger
(to notice) me and (to speak) to me. 9. He trembled lest his secret (to
discover). 10. Fearing that it (to rain), he took an umbrella. 11. I was afraid
lest the boy (to read) the article already.

1. Боюсь, що я загубила ключ; ніде не можу його знайти. 2.
Сестра хвилювалась, якби я не забула слова. 3. Він боявся, що ще
249
довго не засне через шум у сусідній кімнаті. 4. Ми хвилювались, що
давно блукаємо по місту. 5. Ви легко вдягнені. Боюсь, щоб ви не
захворіли. 6. Вона боялась, як би її промова не розгнівала слухачів. 7.
Діти хвилювались, як би тато не забув про свою обіцянку купити їм
цукерки. 8. Боячись, як би не розбудити сина, вона швидко вийшла з
кімнати. 9. Він боявся, що хлопець, старший за нього, хоче
пожартувати з ним. 10. Вона хвилювалась, щоб вони не залишилися
до чаю. 11. Боюсь, чи не трапилося з ними чого-небудь; їх досі немає.
12. Боюсь, що він відмовиться поїхати з нами за місто. 13. Мати
боялася, що син застудився і йому доведеться посидіти вдома декілька
днів. 14. Він боявся, що не встигне підготуватися до екзамену. 15.
Діти боялися, що їх не візьмуть до лялькового театру.
7.3.2.5. Adverbial clauses of purpose
and the meaning of the verb form in the subordinate clauses of purpose.
1. He put on his warm coat lest he should catch cold. 2. The girl was
pale. She stopped lest she should faint. 3. I wrote down their address lest
she should forget it. 4. He quickly stood up lest his mother should see he
was unwell. 5. Put the letter into your bag lest you should lose it. 6. The
children hurried home lest their mother should worry about them. 7. Be
quick lest you should be late. 8. It is necessary to help Ann with English
lest she should fall behind the group. 9. The students have already begun to
read up for their exams lest they should fail at them. 10. You’ll have to
work hard so that you may catch up with the group. 11. My sister entered a
teacher’s training college so that she might become a teacher because she
is fond of children. 12. I’m going to the library in order that I may prepare
a good report on Byron’s poetry. 13. The boys worked regularly in order
that they might make good progress.
Ex. 266. Change the structure of the following sentences so as to use the
Subjunctive Mood or modal phrases in subordinate clauses of purpose.
Model: He opened the door for her to go out.
He opened the door so that she should (might) go out.
1. She turned away to avoid her daughter’s eyes. 2. The soldier
stood up for me to sit down. 3. I kept a diary in the order to enter the
wonderful secrets of my life. 4. They spoke in a whisper so as not to wake
anybody in the ward. 5. We’ll start earlier for them not to find us here. 6.
250
You’ll close the door or the window otherwise there will be a draught. 7.
He’ll have a car sent down to your place tonight to take you to the station.
8. They kept the gate closed for the cows not to get into the garden. 9. The
boy stood aside for her to go by. 10. Father repeated it for us not to
misunderstand him. 11. He watched Easter carefully not to let her commit
some mistakes.
Ex. 267. Supply the necessary forms for the verbs in brackets using the
Subjunctive Mood or modal phrases.
1. They came nearer to the stage in order that they (to see) the actor
well. 2. You must do the exercise in a written form lest you (to make)
spelling mistakes in the dictation. 3. Please, speak up so that everybody (to
hear) you. 4. I shall leave a message for him lest he (to forget) about our
conference. 5. Shut the door or the window lest you (to have) a stiff neck.
6. I prefer to keep in the shade lest I (to have) heart troubles. 7. Mother
switched on the light in order that we (to read). 8. They began to disguise
the guns lest the enemy (to discover) them. 9. Don’t treat me to any ice-
cream so as I (to have) a sore throat. 10. Let us hurry a porter lest we (to
carry) such a heavy trunk ourselves. 11. Put the book into your bag in
order you (to forget) it. 12. They started earlier so that they (to get) to the
place before darkness fell. 13. She spoke in a low voice lest the other
people in the room (to hear) her. 14. We hurried up in order we (to catch)
an early train. 15. Write down my telephone number lest you (to forget) it.
Ex. 268 Translate the sentences into English.

А. 1. Сестра принесла мені журнал, щоб я прочитала статтю
про англійських художників. 2. Вона дала йому підручник з
граматики, щоб він підготувався до контрольної роботи. 3. Пройдіть в
іншу кімнату, щоб ніхто не заважав вам навчатися. 4. Я надішлю їй
телеграму, щоб вона приїхала на конференцію вчасно. 5. Увімкніть
світло, щоб у залі стало світліше. 6. Поясніть йому його помилки, щоб
він не зробив їх знову. 7. Він йшов повільно, щоб ми могли його
наздогнати. 8. Запакуйте картину, щоб вона не пом’ялася дорогою. 9.
Доповідач говорив гучно, щоб усі чули його. 10. Вона дала мені
гроші, щоб я купила вам сувеніри.
B. 1. Дівчинка сховалася за дерево, щоб брат не помітив її. 2.
Сходіть до лікаря, щоб він встановив вам діагноз. 3. У мене була
висока температура, і сестра викликала лікаря, щоб він виписав мені
251
лікарняний. 4. Лікар попросив, щоб чоловік роздягся до пояса, щоб
його оглянули. 5. Вам треба бувати на повітрі, щоб у вас не боліла
голова. 6. Вам слід видалити мигдалини, щоб вони вас більше не
турбували. 7. Переживаючи, як би хворому не стало гірше вдома,
лікар викликав швидку допомогу, щоб відправити його до лікарні.
7.3.3. The use of the Subjunctive Mood in simple sentences
Ex. 269. Read the following sentences and analyse the Subjunctive Mood.
Translate the sentences into your native language.
A. 1. I have a brother who is a surgeon. He would never want to be
anything else, he says. He loves it. 2. It would be absurd for him to marry
so much beneath him. 3. With her social position, she would have had little
difficulty in imposing her point of view in preference to yours. 4. I would
have thought it better taste on his part to tackle me outright – instead of
indulging in covert jokes at my expense. 5. He spoke of the small flat
where he lived and where he was happy but would have loved a garden for
Homer. 6. An observer would have found it difficult to say whether he was
nearer to forty or fifty.
B. 1. If only father were alive! 2. If only it were true! 3. If only I
could believe that! 4. If only he had told you the whole story! 5. If only she
were with us. 6. If only I hadn’t mentioned his name! How foolish of me!
7. If only you had done as I told you! 8. If only the weather were fine next
Sunday!
C. 1. Be it so! 2. Come what will! 3. Long live our Motherland! 4.
May all our labour be devoted to man’s happiness! 5. May success attend
you! 6. Let peace and friendship among nations flourish on earth! 7. My
sentence is that the prisoner be hanged! 8. Whoever he be, he must be
punished.
Ex. 270. Supply the necessary forms for the verbs in brackets.
1. Come along, Jassie! It (to do) more harm to stay by yourself. 2.
I’m thinking of good results we’ve achieved together. We (not to manage)
them alone. It’s a pity to find us divided now. 3. She even didn’t want to
look in my direction: or else I (to come up) and (to apologize). 4. He was
in a great hurry and had no time to think it over. Otherwise he (to find) a
better way out. 5. But Mrs. Jago’s imitation of Lady Muriel was not exact.
252
Lady Muriel never (to call) men by their college titles. 6. I myself (not to
agree) to that. 7. They all (to be) only glad to see you. 8. I (to send) her
away long ago, only I thought you wanted her to talk her thoughts openly.
9. You must thank him, not us. Without him we (not to achieve) any
success. 10. I (to give) a good deal for that assurance! 11. Are you glad to
see me? – You are funny, Dick! As if you (not to know)! 12. If only I (to
think) as you do! 13. I can’t for the life of me understand why you didn’t
wait before they decided. I (to expect) you to discuss it with me. 14. I may
travel out with Uncle, but it (to be) such fun to go with you! 15. If only I
(to be) sure that the train will arrive in time! 16. The question is if we (to
be) able to carry out this gigantic amount of work in such a short time.

1. Було б цікаво взнати, хто з нас прав: ти чи я? 2. Було б дуже
приємно скупатися у таку спеку. 3. Було б гарно випити чашечку кави.
4. Було б важливо взнати його думку на це питання. 5. Вона б вчилася
добре, але вона часто хворіє і не ходить на заняття. 6. Ми б з
задоволенням допомогли вам, але ми дуже зайняті сьогодні. 7. Я б
поїхав відпочивати на море, але мій лікар мені забороняє. 8. Було вже
пізно, і було б природно, щоб хлопчик заснув, але він не спав і
дивився у стелю. 9. Коли б я знав про цю новину раніше! 10. Ви маєте
симптоми запалення легенів. Я б рекомендував вам звернутися до
лікаря. 11. Хай тобі щастить! 12. Коли б він тільки не був такий
ледачий! 13. Якби я була впевнена, що це так! 14. Було б корисним
спати з відчиненим вікном протягом усього року. 15. Роджер
подивився на мене і сказав: “Хай буде що буде, але я все одно візьму
участь у змаганні”. 16. Як би ви відповіли на це запитання? 17. Якби
тільки йому зробили цю операцію вчасно!
7.3.4. Review Exercises on Mood Forms of the Verb
Ex. 272. Supply the correct form of the infinitives in brackets.

1. If you (to be) interested in life, it never (to let) you down. 2. The
slip showed an overdraft of fifty dollars… “Oh, the bank’s not worrying,
Mr. Wormold”. Wormold thought, if the overdraft (to be) fifty thousand
dollars, he (to call) me Jim. 3. If something (to happen) to me, I (not to
want) you to learn from these files what a fraud I had been. 4. I’m not the
crazy type. I (not to be) a seller of vacuum cleaners if I (to be) the crazy
type. 5. Robert: “Why didn’t you come forward at the inquest?” Freda: “If
253
it could (to help) Martin, I (to go)”. 6. Stanton: “It must have been agony
for her to go away and not hear any more”. Gordon: “She (not to go) if she
(to think) she’d have heard any more”. 7. I (to be going to) have an awful
headache if I (to stay) any longer. 8. I wasn’t one of his pets like you and
Martin. If the old man (to think) for a minute that I’d done it, there (to be)
none of this hush-hush business, he (to feel) like calling in the police. 9.
The whole thing was over and done with. What (to happen) if I (to
confess)? 10. Robert: ”Is that true?” Stanton: “I (not to say) it if I (not to
know) it was true”. 11. I’m not in love with him. I (not to marry) him if I
(can). 12. I want to finish this picture today. You (to think) it awfully rude
of me if I (to ask) you to go away? 13. I feel sure that if I (to live) in the
country for six months, I (to become) so unsophisticated that no one (to
take) the slightest notice of me. 14. If we (to be going to) be invaded by
relations, there (to be) only one thing to do.15. “I could teach him to sail”.
“But, dear, that really (not to be) much use to him later on, unless he (to be
going) into the Merchant Navy or something”.
Ex. 273. Supply the correct forms for the verbs in brackets using the
Subjunctive Mood or modal verbs.
1. If her aunt (to be) here now, she only (to laugh) at the girl’s
imagination. 2. And they trembled lest the father (to hear) of it. 3. She gave
parties so that the young actors (to get) to know managers. 4. Nevertheless
she was little concerned that Nicole (to find) the handsome Duke too
attractive. 5. “He (not to hold) the job he does if he (not to be)
knowledgeable”, replied Joss. 6. And Julia was convinced that if it (to be)
possible to get the operation done secretly, he (to have) his face lifted. 7. If
he (to express) disappointment, if he (to ask) her to cut the date she was
supposed to have, she (may have) strength to break with him. 8. Her
mother looked as if she (to see) better days. 9. He wished that this (to
happen) in London where he could have called upon his colleagues to
share the burden.10. Mrs. Andrews insisted that their phone (to put) in the
kitchen so that she (to hear) it. 11. It was a rapid twirl as if she (to want) to
draw your attention to something behind her back. 12. She loved Michael
and gladly (to marry) him there and then but for his good sense. 13. To
Major, Kelly arranged that I (to come out) with her and (to look after) her
and her baby. 14. It seems funny that I never (to hear) of you before. 15. It
is natural that the doctor (to avoid) calling at the house since the invalid is
no longer there. 16. They left the dressing room so that Avice Crichton (to
change) for the third act. 17. He wishes only to get me out of the way so he
254
(to fill) my place with you. 18. It was raining and Smiley wished he (to
bring) a hat. 19. He felt an extreme lightness as if he (to become) a spirit.
Ex. 2747. Translate these sentences into English; use the modal verbs in
brackets.
1. Вона почала говорити про Ноеля, хоча почувала, що він не
хотів би обговорювати те, що трапилося (would rather). 2. Він не бачив
Маджарі тривалий час, а вони колись були добрими друзями (used to).
3. Мені слід було знати краще, перед тим, як погоджуватись на твій
план (should). 4. Я так легко не здаюсь. Вважаю, нам було б краще
поводитися так, наче ми закохані (had better). 5. Він не може знати.
Він має підозру, що не все так чисто (can, might). 6. Я така знедолена.
Що мені зараз робити, коли ти не бажаєш говорити зі мною (be to)? 7.
Хібара! Та ні, ти не будеш жити в цьому страхітливому місці (shall). 8.
Це твій дім, і ти залишишся зі мною (shall). 9. Ти коли-небудь
пробачиш мені (will)? 10. Якщо ти скажеш це, батько, я вб’ю себе
(will). 11. Ти не насмілишся покинути мене (dare)! 12. Побоюючись,
щоб його не впізнали, містер Потт робив вигляд, що читає газету
(should). 13. Мій брат може бути дуже приязною людиною (can). 14.
Навіщо ти поліз на дерево? Ти міг би розбитися (might). 15. Що мені
брати з собою в дорогу (shall)?
Ex. 275. Translate these sentences into English using modal verbs or their
equivalents.
А. 1. Дійсно, ви могли бути більш уважним. 2. Нам не слід
погано думати про неї. Вона, певно, чимось засмучена. 3. Мені
відповідати негайно? - Ні, можете спочатку подумати. 4. Я повинен
був прийти до неї о третій, але залишив вдома її адресу і мені
довелося повернутися. 5. Вам потрібно (слід) прочитати цю книгу в
оригіналі. 6. Відвідувачі зоопарків не повинні годувати тварин. 7.
Дівчинка не приготувала домашнє завдання, і їй не дозволили
дивитися телевізор. 8. Вважаю, Том повинен отримати цю роботу. У
нього є всі дані для неї. 9. Джону не треба голитися, він має бороду.
10. Я не знаю, чому вони поїхали рано. Їм не треба було так рано
виїжджати. 11. Вам не потрібно завтра йти до офісу. Він буде
зачинений. 12. Мені не треба було готувати так багато їжі для вечірки.
Голодним ніхто не був. 13. Вона сумлінно навчається, тому вона
повинна скласти іспит.
255
B. 1. Ми не повинні витрачати ні хвилини, якщо хочемо
схопити злочинця. 2. Ми повинні поспішати додому, бо може бути
пізно. 3. У будинку нікого не було, напевно, постріли попередили
злочинця. 4. “Є тільки одне місце, де мій чоловік може сховатися”, -
відповіла місіс Стейплтон. 5. Він знає дорогу туди, але в такому
тумані навіть він може збитися зі шляху. 6. Було зрозуміло, що до
ранку нічого не можна буде зробити. 7. Він оселився на півночі
Англії, але невдовзі був змушений бігти звідти та змінити ім’я. 8.
Шановний мій Ватсоне, ви не повинні сердитися на мене. Я
змушений був збрехати вам. 9. Це небезпечна справа, і я не зміг
залишити вас одного. 10. Це, мабуть, Шерлок Холмс, і я сподіваюсь,
що ви відкриєте нам очі на цю справу. 11. Мабуть, Стейплтон
прийняла збіглого каторжника за сера Баскервіля.
Ex. 276. Translate the following sentences into English paying special
attention to the use of the Subjunctive Mood and modal verbs.
A. 1. Як би мені хотілося знати якомога більше іноземних мов.
2. Зараз просто необхідно, щоб людина володіла хоча б однією
іноземною мовою. 3. Шкода, що я не вивчав французьку в інституті.
Якби я знав французьку, я б читав французьких авторів тільки в
оригіналі. 4. Поверни мені, будь ласка, підручник, я змогла б
підготуватися до занять. 5. Дуже важливо, щоб ви звертали більше
уваги на свою вимову. 6. Якби ви постійно не пропускали заняття, ви
б робили менше помилок. 7. Якби не допомога товаришів, він би не
зміг провести експеримент вчасно. 8. Староста хвилювалася, щоб ми
не запізнилися на лекцію з літератури. 9. Він розмовляв англійською,
як рідною мовою.
В. 1. Його батько наполягав, щоб Майкл отримав освіту,
необхідну для джентльмена. 2. Джулія майже пожалкувала, що
вистава не провалилася, як всі попередні. 3. Перший рік їхнього
шлюбу був би дуже бурхливим, якби не рівний характер Майкла. 4.
“Не тримайте дівчину так, ніби мішок з картоплею”, - кричав Ленгтон
Майклу. 5. Джулія вирішила про себе, що вона буде поводити себе
так, ніби між нею і Томом нічого не трапилося. 6. Том поводився з
Джулією так, ніби вона була для нього не більше, ніж мати його
друга. 7. Майкл побоювався, щоб Роджеру не було нудно з ними в їх
будинку за містом. 8. Він запросив Тома провести свою відпустку з
ними, щоб Роджер міг мати друга для прогулянки та гри в теніс. 9.
“Якби в Майкла було трохи здорового глузду, він би заплющив очі на
256
деякі речі”, - гадала Джулія. 10. “Трохи дивно, що на такі кошти він у
змозі платити за квартиру, одягатися так, як він одягається”, -
підмітила її приятелька. 11. Я хочу сказати, що якби Джулія заводила
один скандальний роман за іншим, ніхто б тоді не звернув увагу на її
поведінку. 12. Джулія відмовилась від подорожі до Відня. Вона
боялася, що буде тягарем для сина. Цілком природно, що йому
цікавіше з друзями однолітками, яких він завів у Відні. 13. Джулія не
рухалася. Здавалося, що вона не розуміє, що він поряд. 14. Джулія не
була впевнена, що якби їй трапилася нагода повернутися назад у
юність, вона б нею скористалася. 15. Евіс шкодувала, що вони не
змогли провести більше репетицій. 16. Джоан сказала Джулії, що якби
вона замовила за неї слово в театрі, це б їй дуже допомогло. 17. Доллі
подарувала їй безліч подарунків. Майклу ж вона подарувала пару
запонок, щоб він не ображався. 18. Якби я змогла отримати роль
дублерки, це надало б мені можливості відвідувати репетиції. 19.
Критики говорили про Джулію так, ніби це вони її відкрили.
7.4. THE NON-FINITE FORMS OF THE VERB (THE VERBALS)
7.4.1. The Infinitive
infinitives.
1. Lady Franklin was horrified at herself. To have asked his name, to
have been told his name, and to have forgotten it! 2. She seemed to be
paying no attention to what was going on around her. 3. He suddenly
awoke from his queer trance; there was a decision to be made. 4. Good-
bye, Mr. Jackson. Glad to have been of service to you. 5. I say, don’t you
think you ought to be going? 6. He was very tired, and to have been caught
napping had irritated him and hurt his pride.7. There are a great many
things to be taken into consideration. 8. She told them to take off their
shoes so that their footsteps could not be heard in the flat below. 9. “We
are very sorry to have disturbed you”, began Peter. 10. There was nothing
to be done, but to wait for the next express, which was due at four.
Ex. 278. Supply the forms of the infinitive according to the following
models.
Model A: The Active Perfect form: to write – to have written.
257
To sing, to sleep, to stop, to get, to stay, to have, to prefer, to be, to
continue, to grow, to find.
Model B: The Active Perfect Continuous and the Active non-Perfect
Continuous forms: to stay – to be staying – to have been staying.
To go, to run, to arrive, to study, to cut, to live, to come, to copy, to
dye, to tie, to swim, to listen, to lie.
Model C: The Passive Perfect and the Passive non-Perfect forms: to
translate – to be translated – to have been translated.
To write, to give, to prove, to buy, to look for, to bring, to attack, to
take care of, to burn, to forget.
Model D: Give all the possible forms of the given infinitives.
To work, to lay, to carry, to choose, to stand, to show, to laugh, to
smoke, to like, to break, to strike.
Model E: Supply all the missing forms of the given infinitives.
To be done, to have been talking, to have made, to have been tried,
to be leaving, to be spoken of.
Ex. 279. Build the form of the infinitive according to the description; take
any verb that can have the form.
1. The Passive non-Perfect form. 2. The Active Perfect Continuous
form. 3. The Active non-Perfect non-Continuous form. 4. The Passive
Perfect form. 5. The Active non-Perfect Continuous form. 6. The Active
Perfect non-Continuous form.
Ex. 280. State the form of the given infinitives.

To be doing, to have been done, to be done, to do, to have written, to
have been written, to have been writing, to be writing, to be written, to be
mentioned, to have known, to have been dealt, to be shouting, to smile, to
be dancing, to have been told, to have been travelling, to be asked, to shut,
to have said.
Ex. 281. Use the Active or Passive non-Perfect infinitives.

1. I hate (to bother) you, but the man is still waiting (to give) a
definite answer. 2. He hated (to bother) with trifling matters when he had
more important questions (to decide). 3. She would never miss a chance
(to show) her efficiency, she was so anxious (to like) and (to praise). 4.
The idea was too complicated (to express) in just one paragraph. It seemed
it would take not less than a page (to put) it into words. 5. Is there anything
else (to tell) him? I believe he deserves (to know) how the matter stands
258
and (to tell) all about it. 6. The book is likely (to publish) and (to appear)
on sale pretty soon. It is sure (to sell) well and (to sell) out in no time. 7.
What he took to writing for was not (to earn) a living but a name. All he
wanted was (to read) and not (to forget).
Ex. 282. Use the infinitive in the required form in the Active Voice.
1. How fortunate he is (to travel) all over the world and (to see) so
much of it. 2. The man appears (to know) practically all European
languages; he is said (to learn) them while travelling. 3. The river was
reported (to overflow) the banks and (to advance) towards the suburbs of
the city. 4. The girl pretended (to read) a book and not (to notice) me. 5.
You seem (to look) for trouble. 6. It seems (to rain) ever since we came
here. 7. It is so thoughtful of you (to book) the tickets well in advance. 8.
That woman is still sitting. She seems (to wait) for over an hour. 9. They
happened, at the moment, (to stand) near a small conservatory at the end of
the garden. 10. An intimate friend is said (to dine) with them that day. 11.
For about ten days we seemed (to live) on nothing but cold meat, cake, and
bread, and jam. 12. Well, funny things seem (to happen) now.
Ex. 283. Use the appropriate form of the infinitives in brackets.

1. The man seemed (to study) me, and I felt uneasy in his presence.
2. Perhaps it would bother him (to speak) about the quarrel. 3. He is
supposed (to work) at the translation of the book for two years. 4. The only
sound (to hear) was the ticking of the grandfather’s clock downstairs. 5.
The book was believed (to lose) until the librarian happened (to find) it
during the inventory. It turned out (to misplace). 6. The strength of the
metal proved (to overestimate) by the designer. The engineer claimed (to
warn) against its use for the purpose all along as he had been always sure it
was likely (to deform) under great load. 7. We seem (to fly) over the sea
for quite a time and there is yet no land (to see). 8. Not (to answer) would
have been a wrong step. 9. We don’t seem (to acquaint), at least I can’t
remember ever (to meet) him. 10. The third key remained (to test).
Ex. 284. Use the correct form of the infinitive as a part of a compound
verbal predicate.
A. 1. He seemed (to lose) all the friendliness he had shown at our
previous meeting. 2. “I happen (to be) her lawyer and she telephoned to
me”, I said to the man. 3. It became clear that Charles was still idle. He
seemed (to read) scarcely any law. 4. The cat seems (to miss) for about
259
three weeks. 5. He appeared (to forget) that they had had the first serious
difference of opinion in the whole of their married life. 6. “Dr. Salt, what
do you think you’re doing?” “People seem (to ask) me that for days”, said
Dr. Salt mildly. 7. Not going home, in fact, seemed lately (to become) the
pattern of his life. 8. My mother thought that his hobbies would get him
nowhere. In this she turned out (to be) wrong. 9. It seemed (to snow) in the
room. The floor, the chairs, the desk were covered in drifts of white. It was
torn paper. 10. She leant far over the banister and strained her ears. All the
family seemed (to talk) at once. 11. The general seemed (to age) a great
deal. 12. Charles met me the first day I came to London, and our
friendship seemed (to establish) for a long time. 13. He did not even seem
(to understand) what the fuss was about. 14. In front of one window there
was a small table and Harry was sitting at it peering at a pile of papers
which he seemed (to copy) or (to translate). 15. When I arrived there, I
didn’t see the dog. Not much else seemed (to change). 16. Then I caught
sight of her on the far side of the square. She seemed (to say) good-bye to
someone.
B. 1. George must (to be) pleased that he has passed his
examination. 2. I found this baby bird at the foot of a tree. It must (to fall)
from a nest. 3. You needn’t (to send) a telegram; a letter would have done.
4. I should (to send) him a birthday card but I forgot to. 5. He didn’t mean
to be rude; you shouldn’t (to be) so angry with him yesterday. 6. It’s three
o’clock and I’m feeling very hungry; I should (to eat) more for lunch. 7. It
may (to rain), take a coat. 8. If you are in love, it ought (to make) you
happy. 9. The doctor said it was appendicitis and she ought (to operate) on.
10. I can’t think why they didn’t try to help him. They may not (to realize)
that he was drowning. 11. He might (to thank) us. (We are offended that he
didn’t). 12. He may (to be) on the next train. Let’s wait. 13. I wonder how
the fire started. – Oh, someone might (to drop) a lighted cigarette or it
might (to be) an electrical fault. 14. I wonder why they didn’t go. The
weather may (to be) too bad.
Ex. 285. Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one
sentence using the infinitive as an adverbial modifier of purpose; look at
the model.
Model: They sent me to Spain. They wanted me to learn Spanish.
They sent me to Spain to learn Spanish.
1. I am buying paint. I want to paint my hall door. 2. He opened the
lion’s cage. He intended to feed the lion. 3. He rushed into the burning
260
house. He wanted to save the child. 4. He rang the bell. He wanted to tell
us that the dinner was ready. 5. The farmer put a scarecrow up in the field.
He wanted to frighten the birds. 6. He sent his children to his sister’s
house. He wanted them to watch the television programme. 7. I am saving
up. I want to buy a car. 8. I keep my hens in a field surrounded by wire
netting. I want to protect them against the foxes. 9. You should take your
holidays in June. In this way you would avoid the rush. 10. They
evacuated everybody from the danger zone. They wanted to reduce the
risk.
Ex. 286. Replace the subordinate clauses by attributive infinitives.

1. There weren’t many children in the neighbourhood who we could
play with. 2. He fell asleep with full determination that he would go and
see for himself. 3. He is a man one can trust. 4. We didn’t know the way to
the station, and there wasn’t anyone who we could ask. 5. He was the first
person who came to the bar and the last who left it. 6. It isn’t a thing you
can joke about. It’s a serious matter. 7. He will always find something that
makes him laugh at. 8. They decided that it was a nice little town where
they could live quietly for a while. 9. He’s not a man who you can easily
frighten. 10. There’s nothing that we might discuss now. Everything is
settled. 11. He was the first man who guessed what George was driving at.
12. No doubt it was the best time when he could find them all at home. 13.
A good housewife will always find something that must be done about the
house. 14. The old general wanted nothing but a grandson who he could
dandle on his knee.
Ex. 287. Translate these sentences into English using attributive

infinitives.
1. Це саме гарна нагода помиритися з ним. 2. Мені нема в кого
запитати поради. 3. Ось свіжа троянда, яку ти можеш причепити до
волосся. 4. Це був незручний час для перерви. 5. Я не впевнений, чи є
тут хто–небудь, з ким можна порозмовляти. 6. Мені дали текст, який я
повинен був перекласти без словника. 7. Немає про що сперечатися.
Ми практично говоримо про одне і те ж. 8. Він саме та людина, щоб
зайняти вакансію. 9. Ось ключ, яким відмикається шухляда.10.
Питання, яке буде обговорюватися на наших зборах, дуже важливе, на
мій погляд. 11. Я не бачу ганчірки, якою витирають дошку. 12. Це
саме та книга, щоб читати перед сном. 13. Ми від’їжджаємо завтра
261
вранці, а в нас ще купа справ.14. Він відповідав першим. 15. Він із
гіркотою зрозумів, що нічого неможливо було зробити.
Ex. 288. Paraphrase the following sentences so as to use the infinitive as

an adverbial modifier of result. Look at the model.
Model: The storm was so strong that I couldn’t go out. – The storm
was too strong (for me) to go out.
The text is so short that it can be translated in an hour. – The
text is short enough to be translated in an hour.
1. It was so dark that he could see nothing before him. 2. You are so
experienced, you ought to know better. 3. She was so excited that she
couldn’t utter a word. 4. He was so angry, he wouldn’t speak to me. 5. His
English vocabulary is very poor; he can’t make himself understood. 6. She
knows English so well that she can read Somerset Maugham in the
original. 7. Mr. Burton was so cruel that he could send a man to death. 8.
The story ‘A Friend in Need’ is so tragic, it can’t be merely ironical. 9. The
man was so down and out that he could not get a decent job. 10. The man
was not very strong and so he was unable to swim the distance. 11. It was
very late, nobody could save him.
Ex. 289. Translate the sentences into English using infinitives of result.
1. Він досить розумний, щоб зрозуміти це. 2. Течія була така
сильна, що він не міг підпливти до берега. 3. Оповідання було занадто
хвилюючим, щоб не дочитати його до кінця. 4. Її вимова була занадто
досконалою, щоб бути природною. 5. Він був такий розлючений, що
вистачало єдиного слова, щоб звести його з розуму. 6. Я переглянув
дві частини, але в результаті знайшов лише п’ять прикладів. 7.
Наступного ранку вона прокинулася і виявила, що вона одна в
будинку. 8. Після тривалої подорожі він повернувся додому і зрозумів,
що гостювати добре, але вдома краще. 9. Він пройшов через усі
кімнати і побачив лише кішку на кухні. Квартира була порожня. 10.
Вона відчинила двері і побачила, що батько ходить по кімнаті дуже
розлючений.11. Час від часу він прокидався і знову засинав. 12. Після
тривалої відсутності вона повернулася додому і зрозуміла, що нічого
не змінилося: вони не пробачили її. 13. У котрий раз обміркувавши
ситуацію, він зрозумів, що виходу немає. 14. Вона відчинила двері і
побачила, що всі вже зібралися і чекали на неї.
262
Ex. 290. Translate the sentences into English and state the functions of the
infinitives.
A. 1. З нею приємно розмовляти. 2. Питання було надто
складне, щоб його обміркувати за годину. 3. Ти б краще не набридав
йому зі своїми питаннями. 4. Це питання було занадто складне, щоб
вона могла його вирішити. 5. Він не та людина, від якої можна чекати
на допомогу. 6. Було б краще переконати його працювати, аніж
змушувати. 7. Діти, мабуть, вже забули про цю прикру подію. 8. Вам
слід було попередити мене заздалегідь. 9. Його телефонний номер
легко запам’ятати. 10. Ви пам’ятаєте, хто першим увійшов до
кімнати? 11. Навряд чи він та людина, яка дасть вам інформацію, що
вас цікавить. 12. Ми зробили вигляд, що не помітили його помилки.
В. 1. Перше, що треба було зробити, – це порадитись з лікарем.
2. Я прикинувся, нібито не помітив його і продовжував говорити. 3.
На цей факт треба звернути особливу увагу. 4. Чи є в домі хтось, хто
може піклуватися про хвору людину, поки не прийде сестра? 5. Вони
вирішили більше ніколи про це не згадувати. 6. Тепер нам
залишається лише надіслати оголошення до газети. 7. Він був такий
вражений, що не міг вимовити жодного слова. 8. Дитина вибігла
назустріч матері. 9. Я бачу, що ви шукаєте причину, щоб відмовитись
від своєї обіцянки. 10. Ви приїхали, щоб взяти участь у конференції?
11. Питання було занадто складне, щоб його вирішувати поспіхом. 12.
Він віддав свій рукопис до редакції на редагування, 13. Ця п’єса
залишає бажати кращого, я очікував від неї більшого. 14. Єдине, що
він хотів, - це знайти місце, де можна було б переночувати. 15. Знати
мову добре – означає оволодіти нею повністю в усіх аспектах.
Ex. 291. Point out the Complex Object with the infinitive. Translate the
sentences into your native language.
1. The pills my doctor has given to me make me feel rather odd. 2. I
want you to say to yourself that he died a gallant death in the service of his
country and we must be proud of him. 3. I had seen my father leave the
house that morning. 4. Just as he was falling into unconsciousness he heard
the door open and quickly shut. 5. George was sure that fresh air and
exercise would make us sleep well. 6. He appears to be asleep. 7. Lady
Franklin seemed to expect an answer. 8. Professor Lee was expected to
join the expedition in North Africa, but he had fallen ill. 9. He was heard to
say that it would rain and ordered the door to the balcony to be shut.
263
Ex. 292. Paraphrase the following sentences using the Complex Object as
in the model.
Model: We knew that they would soon come.
We knew them to come soon.
1. I noticed how he nodded to her. 2. The old lady liked when
people greeted her politely. 3. I like to hear that my mother goes upstairs.
4. We expect that he will deliver a speech at the conference. 5. I felt that
somebody touched my shoulder. 6. They expected that I should say
everything myself. 7. On entering the room we saw that they were
completely embarrassed. 8. I felt that she understood the language I spoke.
9. I heard that he loved his little daughter very much. 10. My little
daughter wants that I’ll take her to Cuba. 11. His boss warned him that he
shouldn’t dress casually. 12. I expect that my favourite newspaper will
publish a series of science-fiction stories. 13. She thought that we had
influenced their decision. 14. We know that this ancient building was
destroyed and rebuilt several times. 15. They expect that these rivers
would be soon connected by means of canals.
Ex. 293 Translate the sentences into English using the Complex Object.
1. Я чув, як хтось зайшов до кімнати. 2. Я бачив, як вони
вийшли з дому разом. 3. Ми не очікували, що він повернеться так
швидко. 4. Ніхто не чув, як дитина відчинила двері. 5. Це примусить
тебе обміркувати, як виправити помилку. 6. Ми хотіли, щоб вони
розповіли нам що-небудь про Лондон. 7. Я часто чув, як вона
запитувала одне й те ж. 8. Цікаво, що змусило його відмовитись? 9.
Ми бачили, як діти побігли до садочка. 10. Я хочу, щоб усі переклали
цю статтю.
Ex. 294. Paraphrase the following sentences using the Complex Subject as
in the model.
Model: It was said that his sister had come on Sunday.
His sister was said to have come on Sunday.
1. It is believed that the expedition will return next Sunday. 2. It is
supposed that the students have already submitted their term papers. 3. It
was said that the performance had been a success. 4. It is supposed that the
coming conference is of great importance for our work. 5. It is likely that
the meeting will take place tomorrow. 6. It seems that he possesses a
valuable collection of pictures. 7. It seems that he is seriously ill. 8. It is
known that the coastline of the British Isles is irregular. 9. It is reported
264
that great construction work is going on in their city. 10. It is likely that my
watch is five minutes fast. 11. It is certain that he has done his best to find
her address. 12. It was reported that our team had been invited to take part
in the sports events.
Ex. 295. Translate the sentences into English using the Complex Subject.
1. Здається, ви розчаровані новим фільмом. Що вам не
сподобалось? 2. Очікується, що зима цього року буде лютою. 3. Вони
скоріш за все одружаться. 4. Навряд чи він одужає до понеділка. 5.
Виявилося, що ми вже знайомі. 6. Вважається, що чоловік та жінка,
які живуть багато років разом, схожі. 7. Повідомляють, що експедиція
досягла північного полюсу. 8. Кажуть, що чутки про його шалений
успіх перебільшені. 9. Він був відомий як гарний лікар. 10. Скоріш за
все, вони прийдуть вчасно. 11. Виявилося, що його батьки про це
знали.
Ex. 296. Translate into English using the Complex Object or the Complex
Subject.
1. Його змусили звернутися до лікаря. 2. Здається, що ви
чимось збентежені. 3. Виявляється, що він нічого про це не чув. 4. Я
ніколи не бачила, як танцює Джейн Бак. 5. Я спала і не чула, як вони
пішли. 6. Батьки завжди хочуть, щоб їх діти виросли чесними
людьми. 7. Я вважаю, що це було несправедливо з вашого боку. 8. Хто
дозволив вам розпоряджатися моїми речами? 9. Він відчув, що сили
повертаються до нього. 10. Ніщо не могло примусити його змінити
своє рішення. 11. Я випадково почула останні слова, які ви сказали.
12. Я хочу, щоб усі зустрілися ще. 13. Вона відчула, як хтось торкнув
її за плечі. 14. Вона уважно спостерігала за тим, як стрибають інші
гімнастки.
Ex. 297. Paraphrase the following sentences using for-phrases with

infinitives.
Model: He stepped aside so that I might pass.
He stepped aside for me to pass.
There is nobody here with whom he can play.
There is nobody here for him to play with.
265
1. She held out the telegram so that I might see it. 2. It’s quite
natural that you should think so. 3. The first thing he must do is to ring
them up. 4. Let us wait till they settle this matter! 5. This is the problem
you should solve all by yourself. 6. I shall bring you the article that you
may read. 7. I gave an umbrella to the children lest they should get wet
through. 8. I’ve put on weight. I can’t wear this dress any longer. 9. It is
unbelievable that a man should go so far beyond his limit. 10. He spoke
loudly so that everyone might hear him. 11. There is nothing that I may
add. 12. It is very unusual that he should have said such a thing. 13. It’s
high time you knew Grammar well. 14. This is a boy you can play with.
7.4.2. The Gerund
Ex. 298. Find gerunds in the following sentences and state their noun and
verb characteristics. Translate the sentences into your native language.
1. Traveling abroad can be exciting enough, but just now it is more
exciting being here. 2. She stopped answering my letters and I wondered
what the matter might be. 3. Can you recall having mentioned the fact to
anyone? 4. Thorpe was terrified, terrified of having to touch something,
and even more, of being touched (S.H.). 5. Young Jolyon, on the point of
leaving the club, had put on his hat, and was in the act of crossing the hall,
as the porter met him (Glsw.). 6. After having been rejected by a dozen of
magazines, they (the stories) had come to rest in the Globe office (J.L.). 7.
I wonder at Jolyon’s allowing the engagement (Glsw.). 8. I understand
perfectly your waiting to leave (F.F.). 9. People will talk, there is no
preventing it (Ph.Sh.). 10. The host broke the awkward silence by inviting
the guests to proceed to the dining room. 11. This is laying the blame at the
wrong door. 12. On being told the news she gave a gasp of surprise. 13.
The idea is worth considering.
Ex. 299. Open the brackets using the correct form of the gerund.
1. After the accident, the injured man recovered consciousness in
hospital. He remembered (to cross) the road, but he didn’t remember (to
knock down). 2. This carpet always looks dirty in spite of (to sweep) every
day. 3. He didn’t return the book he had borrowed after (to promise) to do
so. 4. I am still thirsty in spite of (to drink) four cups of tea. 5. He got into
the house by (to climb) through the window without (to see) by anyone. 6.
I think he was foolish to buy a car before (to learn) how to drive it. 7. Peter
is a much better chess-player than I am, and he was very surprised when I
266
beat him yesterday for the first time. He isn’t used to (to beat). 8. He went
to bed at 9 p.m. in spite of (to sleep) all the afternoon. 9. He complained of
(to give) a very small room at the back of the hotel. 10. The little girl isn’t
afraid of dogs in spite of (to bite) twice. 11. The little girl didn’t go near
the dog; she was afraid of (to bite). 12. The baby went to sleep a few
minutes after (to feed). 13. The little girl never gets tired of (to ask) her
mother questions, but her mother often gets tired of (to ask) so many
questions. 14. They lived in a small town for ten years and then moved
without (to make) friends with any of their neighbours. 15. The little boy
was punished for (to tell) a lie by (to send) to bed without his supper. 16.
Mary was chosen a year ago to act in the school play. She was very
pleased at (to choose). 17. Jack doesn’t like boxing. I don’t know if he is
afraid of (to hurt) his opponent or (to hurt) himself. 18. He was taken to
hospital unconscious after the accident. He died in hospital without (to
recover) consciousness. 19. I always treat people politely and insist on (to
treat) politely. 20. She didn’t get out of bed until ten o’clock in spite of (to
wake up) at seven.
Ex. 300. Choose between the infinitive and the gerund to use it as a direct
object.
A. 1. Her sister-in-law certainly needed (to look) after. 2. We can’t
afford (to waste) time. 3. I can’t help (to like) Sophie. 4. Arthur had
managed (to do) it his way. 5. I couldn’t resist (to buy) such a lovely hat.
6. She says she can’t imagine not (to hear) his key in the lock. 7. I couldn’t
understand why, the previous summer, he had given up (to attempt) (to
see) Roger. 8. He denied (to know) anything about the missing document.
9. You certainly mustn’t miss (to see) this wonderful film. 10. I wondered
if you felt like (to come) out for a dance. 11. She put off (to break) the
news to her father. 12. He got out of bed and prepared (to shave).
B. 1. Dick was very anxious (to go), and I was rather hurt (to find)
Clare apparently equally keen (to do) so. 2. Words have weight, sound and
appearance; it is only by considering these that you can write a sentence
that is good (to look) at and good (to listen) to. 3. His brother’s emotion
was not easy (to discern). 4. His proposition was worth (to consider). 5.
Everyone in this room is competent (to express) an opinion. 6. The picture
is definitely worth (to buy). 7. You see, a lot of us are prone (to forget) it.
8. The girl was very wise (to take) her advice. 9. He was busy (to work) at
the new play. 10. I was fascinated (to watch) the two of them together. 11.
Charles was slow (to see) what Mr. March was feeling. 12. The little girl
267
was busy (to tear) out pages from the telephone directory. 13. It must be
admitted that this writer is not hard (to imitate).
Ex. 301. Translate the following sentences into English using infinitives or
gerunds as direct objects.
1. Роботу все ще важко було знайти (hard). 2. Її руки тремтіли,
ніби вона ось-ось заплаче (ready). 3. Її посмішка швидко зникла. “Твій
прихід – чистісіньке божевілля” (crazy). 4. Він потиснув мені руку: “Я
жалкую, що змушений іти” (sorry). 5. Ця пісня варта того, щоб її
записати на магнітофон (worth). 6. Він швидко зрозумів, що трапилось
(quick). 7. Важко було спостерігати за їх суперечкою (hard). 8. Раніше
чи пізніше, але ви обов’язково про це почуєте (certain). 9. В такий
день щось неодмінно мало трапитись (sure). 10. Він був дуже
задоволений, що застав брата вдома (delighted). 11. Скоріше за все, я
не зроблю цього (likely). 12. Такі результати отримати неможливо
(impossible). 13. Він глибоко пишався знайомством з нею (proud).
object after verbs that admit of both forms.
1. She tried (to take) an interest in my work. 2.When I learned to
write I tried (to alter) words or the order in which they were set. 3. Why
didn’t you try (to find) yourself a job? 4. She tried (to knit), but her fingers
were numb. 5. Margaret and I were upset and the others went on (to try)
(to cheer) us up. 6. The article went on (to say) that Miss MacLean was
born in Dublin and still had relations living there. 7. He proposed (to go) to
the theatre that night, but Elisa said she was tired. 8. I propose (to buy) a
boat with the money. 9. I must remember (to tell) the others not to mention
it to Willy. 10. Yes, I remember (to see) the letter on the mantle piece. 11.
The general never forgot (to take) his boys out for a drive one Sunday day
in June. 12. Don’t forget (to lock) the door when you decide to go to bed.
13. I liked (to play) with the dog. 14. I liked (to have) lodgings of my own
where I could be by myself.
Ex. 303. Supply the necessary prepositions for the gerunds used as
prepositional objects in the following sentences.
A. 1. Jones insisted … shaking hands. 2. I take all the blame … not
seeing further than my nose. 3. She glanced up … marking a pile of
papers, and said: “Hello, Hugh”. 4. Unfortunately, I haven’t succeeded …
making such an impression on you. 5. He made a point … never sounding
268
disappointed. 6. His mission had very little to do … winning the war. 7. He
had never had much difficulty … getting jobs. The trouble had always
been … keeping them. 8. She thanked him … taking her out. 9. He did not
object … seeing Mark. 10. If he persists … marrying the girl, it will mean
absolute ruin for him. 11. She took … wearing jeans. 12. When asked what
his father did in life, the boy answered, ‘My father works … keeping the
world … having another war’. 13. I shall look forward … seeing your
book. 14. I thought … taking a trip up the Scandinavian coast.
B. 1. The man of letters is accustomed … writing. 2. I became
aware of the specific benefit I was capable … getting from the travel. 3.
Mrs. Attlee was very skilful … directing the table talk away from her
daughter. 4. Some people were nice … turning me down. 5. I’m sick …
doing things for you. 6. You seem upset … losing Jones. 7. I don’t say I’m
proud … cheating him out of 300 dollars. 8. Your colleagues are good …
keeping a secret, aren’t they? 9. He is usually fairly careful … making his
statements. 10. He is quite excited … being among us again. 11. It was five
minutes later than my usual bedtime and I felt guilty … being still up. 12.
She was very quick … finding out things. 13. Dolly seemed relieved …
not having to make a scene. 14. I tried to be as nice as possible …
refusing. 15. You seem very fond … saying things behind my back. 16.
But he was slow … replying. 17. He selected a dingy little place where he
felt sure … not meeting any acquaintances.
Ex. 304. Use the required form of the gerund in its function of a
prepositional object in the following sentences.
1. Since the age of four, I have been used to (to live) with ideas. 2. I
was not used to (to entertain) by a sensitive and nervous host. 3. How
proud I was of (to invent) the code. 4. I was tired of always (to wear)
charity clothes. 5. In the morning she was ashamed of herself for (to be) so
rude the night before. 6. He’s merely used to (to tell) what he wants to
know. 7. He was grateful to Finch for (to persuade) him to come. 8. But
they are used to (to deal) with real men. 9. She wasn’t fond of (to
interview). 10. At the time I was very keen on (to get) an independent
income.
Ex. 305. Translate the sentences into English using gerunds as

prepositional objects.
1. Ти справді вмієш тримати язика за зубами (good). 2. Я
пишався тим, що був корисним для нього (proud). 3. Я знав, що він не
269
здатний приймати рішення (capable). 4. Лікар звик слухати різних
людей (used). 5. Шкода, що потурбував вас (sorry). 6. Я більше ніж ти
зацікавлений у тому, щоб її знайти (interested). 7. Я впевнений, що ти
здатний контролювати цю ситуацію (capable). 8. Мені набридло
робити те, що мені дуже важко робити (tired). 9. Я був здивований з
того, що він взагалі одружився (surprised). 10. Я був трохи
розчарований тим, що не зустрів Чарльза (disappointed). 11. Вона була
вдячна йому за те, що він зрозумів, що вона не хоче говорити про себе
(grateful). 12. Він був роздратований на неї за те, що вона втягнула
його в цю сварку. 13. Йому подобалося гуляти під дощем (fond). 14.
Він не здатний брехати (incapable).
Ex. 306. Open the brackets using gerunds as objects; add prepositions
where necessary.
1. She was afraid (to miss) Miller in the crowd. 2. He was fond (to
say) “The superstition of today is the science of yesterday”. 3. Thank you
(to call). 4. On the way home Sally insisted (to stop) in front of our
college. 5. I remember (to hear) her complain to Joe. 6. The box was
stoutly made and resisted (to open). 7. I am sick and tired (to drink) tea
without milk. 8. Surely that prevents the day (to be) ordinary. 9. I intend
(to do) it tomorrow. 10. Would you mind (to sit) over there? 11. Now I
resolved, if possible, to avoid (to be) alone with any of these men, these
strangers. 12. I can prove I am quite capable (to deal) with the matter.
Ex. 307. Translate into English using gerunds as objects.

1. Я дуже втомилася сидіти вдома. 2. Він здібний до вивчення
мов. 3. Я отримую велике задоволення, коли читаю ваші вірші. 4.
Коли Джон зателефонував, ми були зайняті підготовкою до
полювання. 5. Я хочу що-небудь почитати. 6. Коли діти повернулися зі
школи, я була зайнята приготуванням обіду. 7. Я пам’ятаю, що мені
розповідали про цей випадок. 8. Туди варто піти негайно. 9. Я
ненавиджу приїздити в порожню оселю. 10. Вона не любила, коли їй
несправедливо чимось докоряли. 11. Він слухав наказ, ні про що не
питаючи. 12. Йому не подобалася моя ідея одній їхати на Кавказ.
Ex. 308. Fill in the blanks with the necessary prepositions using gerunds
as adverbial modifiers.
1. Cindy glanced up, then away, … answering. 2. Lize was able to
make her own living … working at the factory. 3. Poirot looked up at the
270
staircase … passing, and shook his head in a dissatisfied manner. 4. Tom
considered … answering. 5. He found an endless excitement … looking at
their faces and hearing them speak. 6. Can’t we even laugh properly …
having trouble? 7. Was he trying to escape … disguising himself? 8.
Mayor Pennymann went on … noticing her interruption. 9. You might ruin
all my life … breaking your promise. 10. … leaving the room Tom ran into
his best friend Joe. 11. … shaking hands with a stranger he wanted to show
his friendliness. 12. We might be fined … going too fast.
Ex. 309. Translate the sentences using gerunds as adverbial modifiers.

1. Він все обміркував перед тим, як відповісти. 2. Я стала багато
писати, щоб поліпшити орфографію. 3. Почувши, що Олена приїхала,
я вирішила побачитись з нею. 4. Коли він отримав листа від брата, він
поїхав першим поїздом. 5. Він знайшов багато цікавих виразів, коли
читав цю книгу. 6. Поснідавши, він повернувся до своєї кімнати. 7.
Коли я вийшов з хати, я побачив свого шкільного товариша. 8. Я
втомилася від того, що багато читала, і вирішила посидіти трохи в
садочку. 9. Після двох годин читання він поклав валізу на коліна і
почав щось писати. 10. Коли вона переписувала слова, то деякі
пропустила. 11. Я закінчила, сказавши, що швидко повернуся.
Ex. 310. Point out Gerundial complexes and comment on their functions in
the following sentences.
1. Do you agree to our taking her up to town and putting her under
the best control? 2. Her being sent to London was quite unexpected to us.
3. I like your being attentive in class. 4. I didn’t know of your having been
so deeply impressed by my words. 5. Excuse my interrupting you. 6.
Excuse my having interrupted you. 7. We know nothing of his having
published the article. 8. We were sure of the bridge having been destroyed
during the stormy night. 9. We thought of their improving methods of
production. 10. We have never heard of his having belonged to this
scientific society. 11. Your being so indifferent irritates me a great deal. 12.
His having failed at the entrance examination was a great disappointment
to his mother.
Ex. 311. Translate the sentences into English using Gerundial complexes.
1. Уяви собі, їй хотілося знати, що його турбує. 2. Він
наполягає, щоб я тримала вікна відчиненими незалежно від погоди. 3.
Ви не заперечуєте, якщо я попрацюю сьогодні у вашому кабінеті? 4. Я
271
здивована, що ви залишили маленького хлопчика одного вдома. 5. Ви
пам’ятаєте, вона говорила вам, що її чоловік інженер? 6. Я не можу
уявити, щоб ви так довго сиділи в читальному залі. 7. Здавалося, що
мені не було потреби залишатися в Москві. 8. Цікаво, як вона
потрапила в дім так, що ми її не бачили. 9. Те, що він був іноземець,
який не знав жодного слова англійською, було вже погано. 10. Її
думки були, нарешті, перервані тим, що двері тихенько відчинилися.
11.Те, що вона заперечувала очевидним фактам, працювало на
користь її суперникам. 12. Ви не будете заперечувати, якщо я запишу
вашу адресу. 13. Він наполягав на тому, щоб мене супроводили
додому. 14. Дякую, що ви подзвонили моїй матусі. 15. Я втомилася
слухати його вказівки. 16. Дякую, що ви прийшли вчасно.
7.4.3. The Participle
Ex. 312. Translate the sentences into your native language. Explain the
use of Participle I. Replace the construction with Participle I by a clause.
Pay attention to the tense relation between the predicate and the
participle.
A. 1. Which of the four men smoking by the fireplace is Ben? 2.
They passed groups of farm-workers trimming vines and picking ripe
apricots. 3. From time to time you will get letters notifying you of my
movements. 4. There is a covered passage connecting the kitchen with the
garage. 5. A gloomy darkness covered the little hill overlooking the two
valleys. 6. When you enter the hall you will see a staircase leading to the
basement. 7. A new road will soon be built joining the plant with the
railway station. 8. What we really want (wanted, shall want) is (was) a
good critical article revealing our drawbacks. 9. He speaks (spoke) like a
man having his opinion of everything. 10. The horse leading the race was
the winner of a similar event two months ago.
B. 1. She smiled remembering the joke. 2. Every now and then the
man raises his head from the book looking at the clock on the opposite
wall. 3. I hope you will write soon explaining your intention. 4. Closing
the door gently he stole upstairs. 5. Receiving no reply by the end of the
month we shall consider the order cancelled. 6. Taking a book from the
shelf he sits down under the floor lamp to read it. 7. We shall go by train as
far as Odessa, and then take a boat to Batumi finally returning by plane. 8.
In the evening they caught some fish eating part of it and saving the rest
272
for breakfast. 9. You can take the jet TU 104 from Khabarovsk reaching
Moscow in about eight hours. 10. Being very unambitious he is satisfied
with what he was.
C. 1. Having got what he wanted he took his hat and went away. 2.
Having seen so little of the country I’m afraid I cannot give exhaustive
answers to all your questions. 3. We shall not discuss our future plans
before I come back having settled the business. 4. And saying so he left the
room. 5. And having said this he threw himself back in his armchair and
looked around triumphantly. 6. Having arrived two days before the
opening of the conference they had enough time to do the city. 7. Arriving
at the airport he went to have his luggage weighed and registered. 8.
Knowing how fond he is of good music I brought him a few records. 9.
Having known him from school I have never heard anyone speak of him
without respect.
D. 1. Special mention must be made of the extensive research now
being conducted in chemistry. 2. A party of specialists was sent to inspect
the installations then being made at the new metallurgical plant. 3. That
method of support was quite different from those being employed at the
time in other mines. 4. They were told that unlike twenty years ago, the
machine tools being used at the factory were exclusively homemade. 5.
Being asked what he thought of the innovation the engineer said he
approved of it. 6. The yacht lay well out in the middle of the river being
carried down by the current. 7. Having been examined by the customs the
goods were let through.
Ex. 313. Translate what is given in brackets using:

A. Participle I, non-Perfect Active, as an attribute where possible.
1. We came up to the man (який стояв на дорозі) and asked him
the way. 2. Go to the corner and ask the policeman (який стоїть там) to
show you the way. 3. The man (який стоїть у розкладу) was our teacher
last year. 4. Did you see in what direction the man (який стояв тут) went?
5. He wants to write a book (яка підбила б підсумки) his impressions of
the trip. 6. A new power plant (яка буде постачати електрику) this district
is to be built here in two years’ time. 7. The people (які чекають на
лікаря) have been sitting here for a long time. 8. The people (які чекали
на вас) have just gone.
B. Participle I, non-Perfect or Perfect Active, as an adverbial
modifier.
273
1. (Розповівши про все, що він знав) the witness left the box. 2.
(Постукавши двічі і не отримавши відповіді) he decided that there was
nobody in. 3. (Коли він штовхнув двері) he felt that it was not locked,
and (відчинивши) he looked inside. 4. (Тихо зачинивши за собою двері)
he tiptoed into the room. 5. Each time (розповідаючи про цей випадок)
he could not help a smile. 6. (Приїхавши до готелю) she found a telegram
awaiting her. 7. (Приїхавши сюди) only a few days before he knew those
parts as if he had always lived there. 8. We took a trip in a motor-launch
down the river and spent the whole day on the water (приїхавши додому)
when it was dark. 9. I felt very tired (пропрацювавши цілий день) in the
sun. 10. (Опустивши монету і піднявши трубку) he began to dial the
number. 11. (Загубивши монету) he did not care to look for it in the
darkness and took another one.
C. Participle I, non-Perfect or Perfect Passive, as an attribute or an
adverbial modifier where possible.
1. The conference (яка відбувається зараз) at the University is
devoted to the problem of nuclear physics. 2. Unable to attend the
conference (яка відбувалася тоді) at the University, we asked to be sent
the typewritten reports. 3. They are now at the conference (яка
відбувається) at the University. 4. They stood (біля машини, що
заправлялася) and watched the meter. 5. The sight of (столу, що
накривали) made my mouth water. 6. Suddenly I heard a sound of a key
(який повертали) in the lock. 7. (Коли їх занурили у воду) the flowers
opened their petals. 8. (Оскільки їх тримали без води) the flowers faded.
Ex. 314. Substitute Participle I for a finite verb, where possible.

1. When he arrived at the gallery, he paid his entrance fee, picked up
a catalogue and entered. 2. As they were promised assistance, they left
more assured. 3. We shall drop you a line as soon as we have settled at the
new place. 4. After he was shown in, he was asked to wait a little. 5. The
parks and gardens that are being laid out in the city will very soon form a
green belt all around it. 6. They started the construction of the dam early in
spring and completed it before cold weather set in. 7. He lit a cigarette,
leaned a porch rail and looked at the trees and the rain that was pouring
down steadily and monotonously. 8. It has been planned to dig out a new
canal here that will supply the whole area with water for irrigation. 9.
When she was going down the steps, she suddenly stopped as she
remembered that she had left the gas burning. 10. He stood at the counter
and hesitated, he did not know what to choose. 11. After they had finalized
274
the programme, they proceeded to the discussion of the items that dealt
with financial matters. 12. As he had long been a resident of the city and
knew the family very well, he at once recognized the young man whom he
remembered as a boy. 13. He knows the language better than a foreigner
usually does for he has been living in France for a long time. 14. If it is
handled properly, the machine may serve longer. 15. Though he had lived
there for a long time, he knew very few people in the neighbourhood.
Ex. 315. Replace the infinitives in brackets by the correct forms of

Participle I.
1. (To reject) by the editorial board the story was returned to the
author for revision. 2. (To reject) by publishers several times the story was
accepted by a weekly magazine. 3. (To wait) for some time in the reception
room he was asked into the office. 4. (To wait) in the reception room he
thought over what he would say when he was asked into the office. 5.
They reached the peak at dusk (to leave) their camp with the first light. 6.
They put up for the night at a temporary camp (to leave) it at dawn. 7. The
friends went out into the city (to leave) their cases at the left luggage
department. 8. (To write) and (to leave) a note with the porter he said he
would be back in half an hour. 9. (To write) in an archaic language the
book was difficult to read. 10. (To write) his first book he could not go far
beyond his own experience. 11. (To be) away so long he was happy to be
coming back. 12. (To be) so far away he still felt himself part of his
community. 13. The children looked wonderingly at the elephant never (to
see) such a huge animal before. 14. Not (to want) to go deeper into the
matter he abruptly changed the conversation.
Ex. 316. Translate the sentences into English using attributive participle
phrases where possible.
1. Літній чоловік, що працював у садку, не відразу помітив
мене. 2. Висока людина, як з’ясувалося, була інженером, який
працював на цьому підприємстві кілька років тому. 3. Хлопця, який
продавав газети, вже не було видно. 4. Дівчина, яка продавала
проліски неподалік, здавалося, нагадувала чимось Елізу Дулітл.
Очевидно, я був налаштований побачити в Англії те, про що колись
читав. 5. Мешканці села, яких бачили того ранку, говорили, що вона
йшла у віддалений кінець села, де була річка. 6. Всі, хто читав
гумористичні оповідання цього письменника, не можуть не бути в
захваті від нього. 7. Студенти, які читали це оповідання, говорять, що
275
воно дуже складне для перекладу. 8. Мій товариш, який побував у
Британському музеї, розповідає багато цікавого про цю подорож. 9.
Туристи, які відвідали Музей образотворчого мистецтва одночасно зі
мною, розповідали про своє захоплення. 10. Через деякий час
молодик, що читав ілюстрований журнал, підняв голову і подивився
на мене. 11. Людина, яка розпитувала про дорогу до Букінгемського
палацу, раптово кудись зникла. 12. Молодик, який розпитував мене
звідки я приїхав, здавався мені знайомим. 13. Він помітив, що літній
джентльмен, який прискіпливо роздивлявся його, робив йому таємні
знаки. 14. Людина, що принесла листа від Артура, хотіла поговорити
з нею наодинці. 15. Вони іноді згадували своїх друзів, що працювали
в штаті Вірджинія.
Ex. 317. Translate the sentences using Participle I as an adverbial

modifier of time.
1. Залишивши речі на залізничному вокзалі, ми пішли на
екскурсію. 2. Залишаючи місто, не забудьте приїхати сюди знову. 3.
Залишившись наодинці, він почав розпаковувати речі. 4. Коли ми
склали останній іспит, ми вирішили відсвяткувати це в кафе. 5. Коли
ви плаваєте у басейні, не треба забувати про обережність. 6. Маючи
справу з найскладнішими завданнями, він завжди успішно їх
вирішував. 7. Зробивши все від нього залежне, щоб врятувати життя
людини, лікар присів на стілець і замислився. 8. Попрацювавши цілий
день над курсовим проектом, стомлені студенти зайшли до своїх
друзів випити кави. 9. Подякувавши друзям за гостинність, ми
швидко зійшли сходами. 10. Роблячи все від нього залежне, лікар сам
раптово відчув гострий біль у серці. 11. Стрибаючи через калюжі та
наспівуючи веселі пісні, діти підійшли до кінотеатру. 12. Забувши про
все, вони дивилися свій улюблений фільм і реготали.
Ex. 318 Replace the attributive clauses by phrases with Participle I1

where possible.
1. The animals that were caught in the snare struggled furiously. 2.
There was a peculiar silence in the room that was broken only by the
crackle of paper. 3. The melancholy tune, which is being played by the
band, brings back all the sweet memories of my youth. 4. The CDs that are
produced by the local factory are of exceptionally good quality. 5. He
specialized in treating occupational lung diseases, which are mainly caused
by dust. 6. And the answer that had so long been expected came at last. 7.
276
The newspapers carried reports of a storm that had devastated several
villages. 8. The machinery, which has been ordered from abroad, will be
delivered by ship. 9. The opinions that were (are) expressed by the critics
greatly differ.
Ex. 319. Translate the phrases given in brackets using Participle I1 where
possible.
1. The number of apartment houses (які будуються) for the
population of Kiev is rapidly growing. 2. What is the number of apartment
houses (які були збудовані) in the past few years? 3. The houses (які
будувалися) many years ago are not as convenient as the modern ones. 4.
The workers (які будували) this house used new construction
methods.5.At the conference they discussed new methods (які
використовуються) in building. 6. The new methods (які були
використані) in the building of houses proved to be effective. 7. They
decided to abandon some of the methods (які використовувалися)
formerly in building. 8. The bricklayer (який використав) a new method
in building made a report at the conference. 9. Here are some samples of
the products of this plant (які надсилаються) to different parts of the
country. 10. These are the samples of products of the plants (які
надсилали) us machinery. 11. These are the samples of products (які були
надіслані) before the restoration of the plant.
Ex. 320. Translate the following word-groups into English. Pay attention
to the place of Participle II.
Ілюстрований журнал; журнал, ілюстрований відомим
художником; розбите скло; скло, розбите хлопцями; зламаний
олівець; дерево, зламане вітром; зворушені голоси; діти, зворушені
тим, що трапилось; загублений ключ; ключ, загублений вчора; газети,
отримані з Лондона; лист, написаний незнайомцем; зачинені двері;
двері, зачинені ззовні; дівчина, запрошена на вечірку; дерево, що
впало; книга, що впала зі столу; вкрадені документи; документи, що
були вкрадені в секретарки; закінчений твір; твір, що був закінчений
поспіхом; хлопець, наляканий собакою; високорозвинена
індустріальна держава.
277
Ex. 321. Translate the sentences using Participle II as an adverbial
modifier of time.
1. Коли її залишили наодинці, вона почала писати нову новелу.
2. Коли Джейн почали розпитувати про її брата, вона дала зрозуміти,
що не збирається розмовляти на цю тему. 3. Коли йому зробили
операцію, він одужав і почував себе дуже гарно. 4. Коли їм сказали,
що треба робити, вони негайно почали роботу. 5. Коли тигра
випустили з клітки, він почав кидатись на приборкувача. 6. Коли
картина експонувалася в галереї, вона привертала увагу багатьох
глядачів. 7. Коли їжа готується досвідченим кухарем, вона стає
особливою. 8. Коли Джону поставили декілька запитань про його
тещу, він не знав що відповісти. 9. Коли вам кажуть, що робити,
відчуття ніяковості не залишає вас. 10. Коли злодія виправдали, він
пообіцяв, що більше ніколи не скоїть злочин. 11. Коли папугу
відпустила хазяйка, він замахав крилами. 12. Коли речення
перекладено правильно, воно звучить природно й іншою мовою.
Ex. 322. Specify the syntactical function of the participles using the
conjunctions when, while, if, as if, as though, though, unless, until, once,
as.
1. She was about to take a step, which … mistaken, might lead to
further complications. 2. … so occupied, he vaguely gathered the
impression of somebody darting silently across the road. 3. The man stood
still for fully a minute … debating with himself. 4. I think we now may
regard the matter … settled. 5. A promise accounts to little … kept. 6. …
resolved to do something, lie wouldn’t swerve. 7. … proofread several
times the text contained a number of misprints. 8. It can’t go to press …
signed by the editor. 9. She screamed … badly hurt. 10. … waiting for you
I have looked through all the newspapers and magazines. 11. Your assistant
called you leaving a message where he could be found … needed. 12. The
article described him … having attempted nearly every kind of writing and
… adorning them all. 13. He did not hurry … pressed for time.
Ex. 323. Point out the Nominative Absolute participial construction and
translate the sentences into your native language.
A. 1. It being dark, we switched on the light. 2. My father being
very ill, I had to call a doctor. 3. The project finished, I submitted it to the
commission. 4. The conditions of work improved, we could continue our
experiment. 5. The weather permitting, we shall start tomorrow. 6. All
278
preparations made, we started the experiment. 7. My friends living far, I
seldom see them. 8. There being nothing to do, we went for a walk. 9. We
had a good time during the holidays, the weather being fine all the time.
10. The signal given, the train started.
B. 1. She had sunk into a chair and was sitting there, her small
fingers curling and uncurling themselves nervously. 2. The door being
opened and Bunter having produced an electric torch, the party stepped
into a wide stone passage. 3. ‘You don’t respect me’, said Dora, her voice
trembling. 4. Together they ran back down the road, Mor still gripping her
arm in a tight grip. 5. Men, their caps pulled down, their collars turned up,
passed by. 6. Another time when we were going through Ferre Bay on our
way back from a long excursion, it being a hot day and all of us thirsty, she
suggested that we should go into the Dolphin and have a glass of beer. 7.
The patient’s leg having been amputated, there was no doubt of his
recovering soon. 8. The voices had receded and James was left alone; his
ears standing up like a hare’s; and fear creeping about his inwards. 9. The
door and window of the vacant room being open, we looked in. 10. The
lamp having been lit, Mrs. Macallan produced her son’s letter. 11. This
duty completed, he had three months’ leave. 12. Time permitting, we shall
start tomorrow.
Ex. 324. Replace one of the given sentences by the Nominative Absolute
participial construction as in the model.
Model: The book was interesting. We read it with pleasure.
The book being interesting, we read it with pleasure.
1. Our friend helped us. We could fulfill our work in time. 2. There
were no trams at that late hour. We had to walk home. 3. The magazines
have been brought. The students could start doing translations. 4. The
experiment has been over. Everybody left the laboratory. 5. The speaker
has finished the report. We began to discuss it. 6. The art exhibition has
been visited by a lot of people. We were sure of its success. 7. The key has
been found. We could enter the room. 8. There were a lot of people in the
hall. We could not enter. 9. The text was not very difficult. Many words
had been learned before. 10. The weather is fine. We shall start on a skiing
trip.
Ex. 325. Translate into English using the Nominative Absolute participial
construction with Participle I and Participle II.
279
A. 1. Коли мій брат написав листа, я пішов відіслати його. 2.
Оскільки було темно, ми ввімкнули світло. 3. Коли дощ скінчився, ми
могли продовжувати нашу подорож. 4. Після того як питання було
обговорене, всі учні залишили клас. 5. Я повинна виконати цю роботу,
тому що Петро захворів. 6. Надворі було холодно, тому вирішили
залишитися вдома. 7. Було дуже темно, тому що на небі не було
жодної зірки. 8. Стаття була написана важкою мовою, і вчитель
допомагав учням перекласти її.
В. 1. Я побачив, що він сидить біля вікна і його рука лежить на
столі. 2. Вона глибоко дихала, її губи були напіввідкриті, щоки
рожевіли. 3. Вона плакала, не ховаючись і не відводячи від нього
очей. 4. З Мері як вчителькою він швидко навчився розмовляти
англійською мовою. 5. Я не можу спати, коли радіо ввімкнене. 6. На
третьому поверсі засвітилося вікно: хтось пізно працював. 7. Я пішов
від них пізно, відчуваючи полегшення від виконаної роботи. 8. Він
лежав на спині із заплющеними очима. 9. Джулія, не маючи що
робити, відвідувала лекції. 10. Вона побачила Пет, яка сиділа на
підлозі серед фотокарток, що були розкидані навколо неї.
Ex. 326. Use the infinitive or Participle I of the verbs in brackets to form
the Complex Object.
1. A moment later they heard her bedroom door (to shut) with a
bang. 2. I’ve never heard your canary (to sing). Is there anything the matter
with the bird? 3. Would you like me (to make) you lunch, or have you had
some? 4. I want you (to explain) the disappointment we had this morning.
5. She watched him (to pass) the gate and (to walk) down the street. 6.
Through the chink in the shutters she watched Emma (to pick) cherries in
the orchard. 7. The captain said something, which made them (to laugh),
he did not hear what it was. 8. They had their own pattern of life and
expected me (to fit) in. 9. You can see him (to work) in his little garden
every day. 10. She had never heard philosophy (to pass) those lips before.
11. I saw him (to put) his suitcase right here. 12. During that moment Miss
Pembroke told a lie and made Rickie ((to believe) it was the truth. 13.
Together they watched the old oak (to drop) its leaves. 14. He found them
(to sit) together and (to talk) peacefully. They did not notice him (to
approach). 15. He felt the water (to reach) his knees. 16. She felt her voice
(to tremble) and tried to control herself. 17. We saw him (to open) the
envelope and (to read) something hastily. 18. I saw him (to unfold) the
telegram slowly and hesitatingly as though he expected it (to contain)
280
some bad news. 19. He heard the young people (to sing) and (to shout)
from the opposite bank. 20. She watched him (to work) for a long time.
Ex. 327. Translate the sentences using Participle I as a part of the

Complex Object.
1. Я думаю, що чув, як хтось піднімався сходами. 2. Ввійшовши
до кімнати, ми побачили, як вони щось жваво обговорювали. 3. Я
відчував, що вона тремтіла з ніг до голови. 4. Я чув, як вона співала у
ванній кімнаті. 5. Моїй маленькій доньці подобається, коли я читаю їй
казки. 6. Я бачив, як вони ретельно прибирали кімнату. 7. Вони
відчували, як незнайомець відчайдушно шукав потрібні слова. 8. Я
бачив, як вона танцювала на сцені, і це було незабутнє видовище. 9.
Футбольні вболівальники відчували, що їх команда грала все краще і
краще, і підбадьорювали її як могли. 10. Професор чув, як Мері
розповідала своїй сусідці про вчорашню вечірку, і зробив зауваження.
11. Я бачив, як моя дружина чепурилася, але мені навіть на думку не
спало, що це для рок-зірки, а не для мене.
Ex. 328. Point out the Complex Object with Participle II. Translate the
sentences into your native language.
1. He had his luggage sent to the station. 2. How often do you have
your carpets cleaned? 3. Have you got your watch repaired? 4. I want it
done as soon as possible. 5. We decided to have our photos taken after the
final exam. 6. Get the room dusted and aired by the time they arrive. 7. I
haven’t had my nails polished yet. 8. I’m having a new dress made. 9. He
thought it necessary to have the ceiling of the room whitewashed. 10. They
found the door locked. 11. Mrs. Mooney watched the table cleared and the
broken bread collected. 12. He heard his name called from behind.
Ex. 329. Practice the following according to the model; use the correct
form of have in the Complex Object with Participle I1.
Model: Do you clean the windows yourself? No, I have the windows
Cleaned. (No, I have them cleaned).
1. Did you paint the house yourself? 2. Do you cut the grass
yourself? 3. Does he wash his car himself? 4. Has she polished the floor
herself? 5. Are you going to shorten the trousers yourself? 6. Do you type
the reports yourself? 7. Did you tow the car yourself? 8. Are you going to
cut down the tree yourself? 9. Did you repair the clock yourself? 10. Will
he tune his piano himself? 11. Has she swept the stairs herself? 12. Is he
281
teaching his children to ride himself? 13. Did he plant the trees himself?
14. Will he build the new garage himself?
Ex. 330. Translate the sentences into English using Participle I or

Participle II.
1. Побачивши, що таксі під’їхало до будинку, він узяв речі і
швидко пішов до виходу. 2. Як часто ви підстригаєтесь? 3. Ми
відремонтували квартиру до того, як поїхали на південь. 4. Лист, який
ми отримали, був для нас розчаруванням. 5. Вікна їх квартири були
освітлені. 6. “Мені ще треба зробити манікюр та зачіску”, - сказала
вона ніби між іншим. 7. Мені треба запломбувати зуб. 8. Мені
пофарбували ці двері тільки минулого тижня. Тобі подобається колір?
9. Я зустріла їх, коли вони йшли фотографуватися. 10. Їх діти завжди
охайно вдягнені.
7.4.4. Revision exercises on the Verbals
Ex. 331. State whether the ing-form is a participle, a gerund or a verbal

noun.
1. To my mind, the setting of the scene was beautiful. 2. If possible,
give up smoking, at least for a while. 3. Having finished the work he
seemed more pleased with himself than usual. 4. Pausing in his story
Burton turned to me. 5. I admired the grounds and trees surrounding the
house. 6. Colleges give a specialized training. 7. I want you to give my
hair a good brushing. 8. While reading this book he came across many
interesting expressions. 9. After reading this book the students organized a
discussion. 10. We know of his beginning this work. 11. I am much
pleased with my surroundings. 12. The boys could not go without asking
permission. 13. When coming into the hall, I saw a group of people
standing in the middle.
object to the predicate verb in the following sentence.
1. I wished (to be) quite far. 2. I expected (to find) him in the
drawing room but he wasn’t there. 3. I enjoyed (to listen) to her talk of
Vietnamese society in the days of her youth. 4. Reggie promised (to look)
in. 5. I wanted (to cheer) him up. 6. Jerry was enjoying himself and didn’t
want (to go). I suggested (to leave) him and (to let) him meet use at the
station. 7. Everything you’ve planned (to do) is sensible. 8. Riley offered
282
(to drive) into town and (to get) some coffee. 9. He longs (to settle) down
and (to live) a quiet country life. 10. Kate avoided (to see) John alone. 11.
You keep (to say) things in Latin and you know I can’t understand. 12. He
proceeded (to illustrate) this by his own story. 13. Her eyes were full and
bright. She did not pretend (to hide) her nervousness. 14. Jack asked the
stewardess for some stationery and, when it came, set about (to compose) a
letter to his son. 15. Renny was often dead right, more often than I cared
(to remember). 16. He sat there sullenly and refused (to answer). 17. I
didn’t mind (to think) about them a bit.18. He has just finished (to strap)
up his suitcase. 19. He did not hesitate (to employ) such methods. 20. He
stopped (to whistle) and went into the bathroom to turn the water on for
the bath.
Ex. 333. Choose between the infinitive and the ing-form to use it as a part
of the Complex Object in the following sentences.
1. My will weakened. I wanted someone (to lean) on. 2. We stood
for a while watching a man (to train) Alsatian puppy. 3. I can imagine
people not (to like) him. 4. Although he was very tired, he made himself
(to stand) up and (to move) into the bedroom. 5. He ordered a bottle of
beer and some cheese (to send) up to his room. 6. There was a lot of noise
all around now, and amongst it you could hear a plane (to fly) unusually
low. 7. I heard Arthur (to make) a slight noise that may have been a sigh or
a chuckle. 8. “Why do you always have him (to hang) around?” “He likes
it”. 9. I don’t like girls (to smoke). It takes away the fragrance of youth.
10. After supper Willy switched on the wireless and John left him (to
dance) round the drawing room to the sound of Mozart’s concerto. 11. We
left him (to spend) the afternoon with his family. 12. I can’t imagine you
(to be) anything but what you are. 13. I saw Mother (to look) at me. 14. I
saw Mother (to look) at me and (to turn) away. 15. He guessed her age (to
be) about eighteen. 16. We left the others (to chat) outside the house.
Ex. 334. Translate the following sentences into English using an infinitive
or an ing-form as a part of the Complex Object.
1. Він стежив, як люди поспішали до поїзда (to watch). 2. Він
запалив цигарку і намагався розслабитись, коли почув, що вхідні
двері відчиняються (to hear). 3. Мені відомо, що він приїздив до них
кілька разів у цьому році (to know). 4. Я вважаю цю новину дуже
важливою (to regard). 5. Я вдячний твоєму батькові за те, що він
позичив мені гроші (to appreciate). 6. Я залишив їх, щоб вони все
283
обговорили (to leave). 7. Коли я залишав їх, вони розмовляли про
політику (to leave). 8. Джон не міг примусити себе повернутися до
Лондона (to bring oneself). 9. Легко уявити Кет, яка сиділа мовчки (to
imagine). 10. Я відчував, що вже час кликати лікаря. 11. Я наказав
Дену зателефонувати від мого імені (to get). 12. Він примусив мене
пообіцяти відвідати його (to make).
Ex. 335. Choose between the infinitive and the ing-form to use it as a part
of the Complex Subject in the following sentences.
1. When the car was heard (to approach), people fled anywhere to
avoid the police. 2. He was understood (to be) a teacher in his youth. 3. I
was made (to stand) at the gate. 4. She may have found the note because
she was seen (to look) through the book. 5. I think you’d like to know, sir,
that the train has been heard (to whistle). 6. He was instructed (to apply)
for a special grant. 7. From the hill a man could be seen (to run) half a mile
away. 8. He was forced (to get) out of his present job. 9. His clothes were
left (to lie) where they happened to fall. 10. Two constables were left (to
await) his arrival. 11. People can feel satisfaction if they are made (to feel)
they are doing a useful service. 12. In your story he is shown (to do) a lot
for other people.
Ex. 336. Choose the appropriate verbal to use it as an attribute in these

sentences.
1. She looked at a (to frame) photograph of Jimmy. 2. John busied
himself with the complex problem of a (to grow) city. 3. There were
infrequent visitors and her books (to keep) her occupied. 4. In the room
there were four men (to chat) over their coffee. 5. In the theatre there was
always a seat (to reserve) for him. 6. Late at night he received a telegram
from his father (to ask) him to come home at once. 7. In the drawer he kept
the envelopes (to contain) his children’s letters. 8. He decided not to plant
the fields because of the labour shortage (to create) by the war. 9. He
outlined his plan (to obtain) the votes of the two men. 10. They were
reluctant to fill out the small forms (to describe) the expenses they had
made. 11. I helped him in handling problems (to create) by other
deparments. 12. I made one (to joke) remark after another in an effort (to
be) friendly.
Ex. 337. Translate the following sentences using ing-complexes.
284
1. Він бідкався, що в його кімнаті дуже холодно. 2. Він часто
говорив про те, що йому необхідно знайти роботу, за яку гарно
платять. 3. Вона покликала на допомогу. Але в неї не було ніякої надії,
що допомога прийде. 4. Їй не подобалася ідея, що її син буде жити в
одній кімнаті з якимсь брутальним хлопцем. 5. Він розповів, що в
їхнього сина є можливість отримати кращу роботу. 6. Її непокоїла
думка, що її дитиною опікуються якісь незнайомі люди. 7. Коли вона
повідомила про день свого від’їзду, він не міг стримати сліз. 8. Джулія
заховала цигарку так, що він цього не помітив. 9. Твій батько
наполягає на тому, щоб ти отримав освіту в Оксфорді. 10. Він
пообіцяв написати їй листа, і вона нетерпляче чекала на нього.
Ex. 338. Use the appropriate verbals in the following sentences.

A.1. They stared at each other, Dan still (to stand) with his teacup
and Willy (to stretch) out in the chair. 2. While (to wait) for a flight, and
without ever (to leave) the terminal, a visitor could have his hair (to cut),
and suit (to press) and shoes (to shine). 3. The snow never stopped (to fall)
that afternoon. It was dreadful (to be) outdoors. 4. Then we strolled round
the place (to watch) preparations (to make) (to set) up the tent. 5. The door
did not open. She left off (to ring), and, (to sit) down at the top of the
stairs, buried her face in her hands. 6. The thought came (to flash) in his
mind. 7. (To find) them in so short a time would have been next to
impossible. 8. She took up the egg-cup and held it to the light (to see) if it
might be tarnished a little. 9. I spent some time with Tom (to study) maps
of the country. 10. He was accustomed to (to sleep) through the morning
noises of the neighbour. 11. (To describe) the confusion that followed
would be impossible. 12. She could not help (to bring) into her
conversation the names of people she knew.
B.1. I walked down the street, not (to know) where (to turn) or what
(to do). 2. She woke at half past ten in the morning (to find) her husband
(to go). 3. He went out through the window so as not (to leave) the front
door (to unfasten). 4. The only thing (to do) was (to call) the police. 5. She
opened the door just in time (to see) Tom (to disappear) round the corner.6.
He took the first opportunity (to apologize) for his rudeness. 7. The girl
was only four but it delighted us (to talk) with her. 8. I had seen too many
examples of the process (not to recognize) it now. 9. There were several
ships (to anchor) in the harbour. 10. She tried (to insist) on (to come) with
me but I finally managed (to talk) her out of it. 11. (To waste) gradually his
small fortune, he preferred (to live) on the generosity of others rather than
285
(to work). 12. I couldn’t resist (to show) my money or (to spend) it (to
treat) my friends. 13. He was sitting with his hands (to clasp) round his
knee, (to stare) at the water. 14. They said that Roger had been known (to
visit) her between five and seven in the evening, on the dates (to set)
down. 15. When Hugh came in, he found the painter (to put) the (to finish)
touches to a picture of a beggar-man.
Ex. 339. Translate the sentences into English using proper verbals.
1. Цікаво, чому вона не хотіла, щоб я познайомився з вами. 2.
Вважалося, що вони прожили дуже щасливе життя. 3. Він наказав
водієві взяти машину і їхати зустрічати делегацію. 4. Я бачив, як
Діана розмовляла з сусідкою. 5. Вона примусила мене перевдягнутися
до вечері. 6. Він не хотів, щоб я погоджувався. 7. Я чув, як говорили,
що Ліз могла стати чудовою піаністкою. 8. Ми залишили дітей, коли
вони гралися на підлозі. 9. Хлопців піймали, коли вони крали вишні.
10. Мені не подобається, коли дівчата палять. 11. Вона посміхнулася,
коли почула, що про неї говорять як про жінку середнього віку. 12.
Мені наказали приготувати каву. 13. Його розповідь продовжувала
веселити людей. 14. Вона застала всю родину разом. 15. Я дозволила
йому супроводжувати мене до театру.
7.5. SYNTAX
7.5.1. The simple sentence
Ex. 340. Point out two-member sentences (say whether they are complete
or elliptical) and one-member sentences.
1. He stared amazed at the calmness of her answer. 2. We must go to
meet the bus. Wouldn’t do to miss it. 3. Lucretius knew very little about
what was going on in the world. Lived on his own fat like a bear in winter.
4. He wants to write a play for me. One man. One act. Decides to commit
suicide. 5. A beautiful day. Quite warm. 6. “What do you want?”
“Bandages, stuff for wounded”. 6. “How did he look?” “Grey but
otherwise much the same”. “And the daughter?” “Pretty”. 7. And then the
silence and the beauty of this camp at night. The stars. The mystic shadow
water. 8. “I’ll see nobody for half an hour, Macey” , said the boss.
“Understand? Nobody at all”. 9. Garden at the Manor House. A flight of
grey stone steps leads up to the house. The garden, an old-fashioned one,
full of roses.
286
Ex. 341. Point out the subject and say by what it is expressed.
1. At that moment, the postman, looking like a German army officer,
came in with the mail. 2. The clock struck seven. There was no sign of any
of the other guests. 3. Something impersonal and humble in that action
seemed to reassure the Consul. 4. Still, the good of mankind was worth
working for. 5. Forgetting some things is a difficult matter. 6. To cross
from one end to the other was difficult because of the water. 7. Let’s get
out quick. It is no good wasting time. 8. She did not know. The “No” was
stronger than her craving to be in Frisco’s arms. 9. Who were these
people? What are they? 10. His was the harsh world of reality. No one
could walk around his drawing. 11. For a woman to look at her best is a
point of discipline. 12. Your coming home has made me as foolish as a
young girl of nineteen. 13. These three deemed themselves as queens of
the school. 14. To love on good terms with people one must share their
work and interests. 15. The firing increased in volume.
Ex. 342. Point out the predicate and say to what type it belongs: simple or
compound (nominal or verbal).
1. Two young girls in red came by. 2. He tried to be both firm and
friendly. I’ve felt dependent on him. 3. There was a silence but not an
uncomfortable one. 4. The day of our wedding came. He was to call on me
to choose the furniture. 5. That made all the difference. The room came
alive at once. 6. My lady keeps a list of the names in a little red book. 7.
Charlie kept quiet. 8. Thompson stood a good three inches above me. 9.
For a moment I stood aghast wondering what the shadowy figure was
standing under the tree. 10. He seemed glad to see me. 11. At that moment
everything in her life seemed to be a source of desperate anxiety. 12. She
grew to know the two elderly men better than any other member of the
family. 13. Soames grew impatient. 14. She turned once more to Mr.
Godfrey. 15. Gwendolen turned pink and pale during this speech. 16.
Harry was enjoying his dinner. 17. But I’ve got to have a word with him.
We got to do something about it. 18. Her marriage was more or less fixed
for twenty-five years.
Ex. 343. Point out the kind of object and say by what it is expressed.
1. She pretended not to hear. 2. I know all about it, my son. 3. I have
to show Dr. French his room. 4. I never heard you express that opinion
before. 5. Halting, he waited for the Roman to speak first. 6. They don’t
287
want anything from us – not even our respect. 7. Gallio didn’t know how
to talk with Marcellus about it. 8. Laura helped her mother with the good-
byes. 9. Why did you not want him to come back and see me to-day? 10.
He found it impossible to utter the next word. 11. Papa will never consent
to my being absolutely dependent on you. 12. His part in the conversation
consisted chiefly of yeses and noes. 13. Thus these two waited with
impatience for the three years to be over. 14. He hated her to work in the
boarding house. 15. Mother objected to Annie being taken away from her
game with the boys. 16. They had never heard him speak with such
urgency, his eyes glowing like coals in the fading light.
Ex. 344. Point out the attribute and the apposition and say by what they
are expressed.
1. What do you say to a stroll through a garden, Mr. Cockane? 2. It
was such a cruel thing to have happened to that gentle, helpless creature. 3.
Maria, the mother, had not taken off her shawl. 4. But the doctor – a family
physician well past middle age – was not impressed. 5. Sally hated the idea
of borrowing and living on credit. 6. It was an easy go-as-you-please
existence. 7. But now he saw that world, possible and real, with a flower of
a woman. 8. I am not in the habit of reading other people’s letters. 9. He
thrust his hands deep into his overcoat pockets. 10. There are plenty of
dogs in the town of Oxford. 11. It was not a matter to be discussed even
with a guide, philosopher and friend so near and trusted as the Professor.
12. Ethel, the youngest, married a good-for-nothing little waiter. 13. It was
just one little sheet of glass between her and the great wet world outside.
14. They, the professors, were right in their literary judgment.
Ex. 345. Point out the kind of adverbial modifier and state by what it is
expressed.
1. At the top of the stairs she paused to wave to him. 2. Having
knocked on his door, she firmly entered Grandpa’s room. 3. After waiting
for a few minutes, he marched up the steps, closely followed by
Demetrius. 4. Why do you always look at things with such dreadfully
practical eyes? 5. David appeared in the open door, one hand clutching
bills, under his other arm an account book. 6. On being informed of the old
man’s flight, his fury was unbounded. 7. To be a complete artist it is not
enough to a painter, sculptor or architect. 8. Marcellus strode heavily to
and fro before the entrance, his impatience mounting. 9. She pressed his
hand mutely, her eyes dim. 10. There was room enough for me to sit
288
between them, no more. 11. She had to talk because of her desire to laugh.
12. George shook his head slowly, without looking up.
Ex. 346. Complete the following sentences putting in the necessary

prepositions, conjunctions or time words for the adverbial modifiers of
time.
A. At, on, in.
A footballer’s life starts … the weekend. Most people go out …
Friday night, but I have to be in bed … 10 o’clock. … Saturday I get up …
8 o’clock … in the morning and drive to the stadium … noon. …
lunchtime our manager talks about the team we are playing. We play most
of our games … the winter and sometimes it can be hard to play … a cold
Saturday afternoon, especially … January. It isn’t much fun … Christmas,
either. We play a lot of games … the Christmas holiday. Although we don’t
play … Christmas Day, we do play … December 26 th so I can’t eat or
drink too much! It would be nice to spend more time with my family …
that day but I can’t.
B. For, during, while.
1. I waited for you … half an hour and then decided that you were
not coming. 2. He hasn’t lived in Britain all his life. He lived in India …
four years. 3. Production at the factory was seriously affected … the strike.
4. I felt really ill last week. I couldn’t eat anything … three days. 5. I met
Tom … I was waiting for the bus. 6. I had been away for many years, …
that time many things had changed. 7. Jack started a new job a few weeks
ago. Before that he was out of work … six months. 8. What did she say
about me … I was out of the room? 9. There were many interruptions …
the Prime Minister’s speech. 10. Jack read a lot of magazines … he was ill.
C. By, by the time, till, until.
1. I have to be at the airport … 10.30. 2. I’ve been offered a job. I
haven’t decided yet whether to accept it or not. I think I’ll wait …
Thursday before making a decision. 3. … we got to the party, most of the
guests had left. 4. Let me know … Saturday whether you can come to the
party. 5. When I went out last Saturday, I told my father I’d be back … 1
o’clock at the latest. However, I was having such a good time that I didn’t
even look at my watch … 2.30! … I found a taxi to take me home, it had
gone 3 o’clock and I finally arrived home … 3.30. My father was furious
289
and told me I’d have to be home … 7 o’clock every night of the week …
the end of the month!.
D. On time, in time.
1. The bus was late this morning, which is unusual. It’s usually … .
2. I washed your shirt this morning but it should be dry … for you to wear
it this evening. 3. Our car is being repaired. I hope it is ready … for our
holidays. 4. Please don’t be late for the meeting. We want to begin … . 5. I
like to get up … to have a big breakfast before going to work. 6. Mr.
Savage was driving very fast last night because he wanted to be home …
for the late film. He knew it probably wouldn’t start … but didn’t want to
take any chances. Suddenly a boy on a bicycle appeared in front of his car
and Mr. Savage just managed to stop … to avoid hitting him. He was so
frightened by this that he drove the rest of the way home very slowly.
Unfortunately, the film had started … and he missed the first half hour of
it.
E. At the beginning, in the beginning, at the end, in the end.
1.It took John a long time to find a job after he left school. … he
found a job as a waiter. 2. “When do you get paid?” “ … of the month”. 3.
I couldn’t decide what to get Ann for her birthday, … I didn’t get her
anything at all. 4. … of the course the students usually have a party. 5. His
illness got worse and worse, … he head to go into hospital for an
operation. 6. I started a new job as a telephone operator … of this year. I
found a job rather complicated …, but I got used to it. … I am quite good
at it now, and I am getting a pay-rise … of this month. I’ve got a month’s
holiday soon, starting … of July and … of September. I couldn’t decide
where to go at first, but I decided on Malta … .
F. Within, after, afterwards, from … to / until / till.
1. I’m in trouble with my history teacher. He gave us a project to
finish … a week, and I haven’t even started it yet. I was going to do it …
dinner on Tuesday, but my friend phoned and invited me out to the cinema.
He didn’t tell me we were going to a party … ! We stayed at the party …
11 o’ clock … 3.00 in the morning. Now it is Friday and the History class
starts at 2 p.m. If I don’t finish the project … the next two hours, my
teacher will probably make me stay behind … school.
Ex. 347. Complete the following sentences with in, at, on for the adverbial
modifiers of place (position).
A. 1. Turn left ... the traffic lights. 2. It can be dangerous when
children play football … the street. 3. I’ll meet you … the corner of the
290
street at 10.00. 4. We got stuck … a traffic jam … the way to the airport. 5.
There was an accident … the crossroads this morning. 6. I can’t find Tom
… this photograph. Is he … it? 7. Mr. Boyle’s office is … the first floor. 8.
Do you take sugar … your coffee? 9. The man the police are looking for
has a scar … his right cheek. 10. We normally use the front entrance to the
building but there’s another entrance … the back. 11. You’ll find the sports
results … the back page of the newspaper. 12. In most countries people
drive … the right.
B. I didn’t see you … the party on Saturday. Where were you? 2. It
was a very slow train. It stopped ... every little station. 3. Many people are
… prison for crimes that they did nor commit. 4. Tom’s ill. He was not …
work today. He was … home … bed. 5. I haven’t seen Ken for some time.
I last saw him … Dave’s wedding. 6. Linda was injured … a road accident
a few days ago. She is still … hospital. 7. It was a very long voyage. We
were … sea for ten weeks. 8. Paul is a student … London University. 9. I
like the countryside and the fresh air. I think I’d like to work … a farm.
110. We went to a concert … the Royal Festival Hall.
C. 1. After many years away, he arrived back … England a month
ago. 2. The train from London arrives … platform four. 3. What time do
you expect to arrive … London? 4. What time do you expect to arrive …
the hotel? 5. What time do you usually arrive … home in the evening? 6.
What time do you usually arrive … work in the morning? 7. We arrived …
the town with nowhere to stay. 8. When we arrived … the cinema, there
was a long queue outside. 9. It’s a strange feeling when you first arrive …
a foreign country. 10. I arrived … home feeling very tired. 11. The
delegation of teachers from England is to arrive … school in a week.
Ex. 348. Fill in the gaps with the correct preposition.

A. 1. Last year my family went … holiday to Thailand. We went …
air; it was a very long journey but we were very well looked after … the
plane by all the stewardesses. When we arrived … the airport, we went
directly to our hotel … taxi. There was a lot of traffic … the streets of the
city and there were many people walking … the pavements. We stayed …
a large hotel … the outskirts of Bangkok. We were given a wonderful suite
… the top floor of the hotel. The most enjoyable day I had was when we
went … a trip … a boat, down the river to the crocodile farm. We had a
wonderful holiday.
B. Last year I went … a trip, which was an absolute disaster. I was
going … Berlin … business, when, … accident, I got … the wrong train.
291
We were … the way to Brussels before I realized my mistake. When I got
to Brussels, I had more problems because all my money was … German
Marks and I didn’t have my credit card with me. … chance, I found a
helpful policeman, who was soon … the phone to my company. Thanks …
his help, I was able to arrange for some money to be sent to a nearby bank.
I spent that night … a hotel and paid my bill … cash before leaving. … the
end, I got to Berlin twenty-four hours later than I had expected. Everyone
thought my trip was a big joke, especially when I told them I had seen
Brussels … the way.
Ex. 349. Point out homogeneous parts, define them and say by what they
are expressed.
1. He had lived with this block for several months now, studied it in
every light, from every angle, in every degree of heat and cold. 2. He felt
discouraged, strangely empty. 3. He came in slowly, hesitated, took up a
toothpick from a dish on the top of the piano, and went out again. 4. They
went side by side, hand in hand, silently toward the hedge. 5. The Captain
was mostly concerned about himself, his own comfort, his own safety. 6.
She extended a slender hand and smiled pleasantly and naturally. 7.
Thousands of sheets must be printed, dried, cut. 8. And suddenly she burst
into tears of disappointment, shame and overstrain. 9. Her mother was
speaking in her low, pleasing, slightly metallic voice. 10. From the sea
came a ripple and whisper.
Ex. 350. Make up sentences joining homogeneous parts with both … and,
neither … nor, either … or. Look at the model.
Model: Tom was late. So was Ann. – Both Tom and Ann were late.
He didn’t write. He didn’t telephone. – He neither wrote nor
telephoned.
1. The hotel wasn’t clean. And it wasn’t comfortable. 2. It was a very
boring film. It was very long too. 3. Is that man’s name Richard? Or is it
Robert? It’s none of the two. 4. I haven’t got the time to go on holiday.
And I haven’t got the money. 5. We can leave today or we can leave
tomorrow. – whichever you prefer. 6. He gave up his job because he
needed a change. Also because the pay was low. 7. George doesn’t smoke.
And he doesn’t drink. 8. The front of the house needs painting. The back
needs painting too. 9. I’m not sure where he is from. He is Spanish or he is
Italian. 10. Jane didn’t come to the party. Mary didn’t come to the party
either.
292
Ex. 351. Supply the missing connectors (not only… but also, both … and,
as well as) of the homogeneous parts in the following sentences.
1. Julia speaks … Spanish but also Italian. 2. She bought the yellow
sweater … the beige skirt. 3. They have houses … in the country and in the
city. 4. He is not only industrious … ingenious. 5. Her children have
American cousins … Spanish ones. 6. Their European tour includes …
Germany and Austria but also Switzerland. 7. He bandaged the arm both
tightly … quickly. 8. Clark not only practices law … teaches it. 9. Tom
Tryon is a playwright … an actor. 10. The bride’s bouquet included roses
… orchids. 11. Beth plays … the guitar and the violin. 12. Robert is
talented … handsome.
7.5.2. The compound and the complex sentence
Ex. 352. Point out the coordinate clauses (mark the elliptical ones) and
comment on the way they are joined.
1. It was high summer, and the hay harvest was almost over. 2. His
eyes were bloodshot and heavy, his face a deadly white, and his body bent
as if with age. 3. You’ll either sail this boat correctly or you’ll never go out
with me again. 4. She often enjoyed Annette’s company, yet the child made
her nervous.5. It was early afternoon, but very dark outside, and the lamps
had already been turned on. 6. All the rooms were brightly lighted, but
there seemed to be complete silence in the house. 7. He only smiled,
however, and there was comfort in his hearty rejoinder, for there seemed to
be a whole sensible world behind it.
Ex. 353. Define the kinds of subordinate clauses: subject, object and
predicative clauses. Translate the sentences into your native language.
1. What you saw tonight was an ending. 2. The trouble with you,
Martin, is that you are always looking for a master. 3. Suddenly realizing
what had happened, she sprang to her feet. 4. Who and what he was,
Martin never learned. 5. What he would do next he did not know. 6. What I
want is to be paid for what I do. 7. I cannot help thing there is something
wrong about that closet. 8. And what is puzzling me is why they want me
now. 9. I only write down what seems to me to be the truth.10. Her fear
was lest they should stay for tea.
Ex. 354. Define the kinds of clauses introduced by that.
293
1. His smile was so easy, so friendly, that Laura recovered. 2. It was
just luck that he didn’t catch the boat. 3. The impression he gathered was
that he would be able to make his own terms. 4. In fact Mrs. Spear’s
callers made the remark that you never would have known that there was a
child in the house. 5. The box that the fur came out of was on the bed. 6. “I
sit alone that I may eat more”, said the Baron, peering into the dusk. 7. I
believe that all we claim is that we try to say what appears to be the truth.
8. At first she used to read to me but it was such a dismal performance that
I could not bear to hear her.
Ex. 355. Join the subordinate clauses of time using the correct time
conjunctions: until, while, before, as, when, as soon as, by the time, as
long as.
1. … King Henry VIII of England was 18 years old, he was already
the ruler of his country. He is probably remembered by so many people
because he married six times … he was King. His first wife, Katherine of
Aragon, gave him a daughter but no sons to take the throne after him. It
seemed that … she was his wife, he would not have a son. Henry wanted
to marry Anne Boleyn, but … he could marry her he had to divorce
Catherine. Anne gave Henry another daughter but no sons and for this
reason he had her beheaded. … she was dead, he found another wife. She
did have a son but she died just … the baby was born. Henry remained
King … he died in 1547. … he died, his only son, Edward, came to the
throne, but … he was 16, he died too.
Ex. 356. Choose the correct connective to join the adverbial clause of
purpose.
It was midnight on Sunday 9th March and I was on duty. I had my
walkie-talkie with me (for / so that) I could contact my partner if I needed
him. I noticed that the door of number 14 Lime Avenue was open. I
approached the house quietly (in order to / for fear) investigate. I entered
cautiously (not to / so as not to) alert the intruder. He had a large sack (for /
to) carry the stolen goods. I caught him by surprise and arrested him. I
took him to the station (to / for) questioning. He admitted everything, but
we recorded his statement (for fear that / so that) he might change his story
later.
294
Ex. 357. Join the subordinate clauses of concession using the correct
connectives: although / though / even though, despite, while / whereas,
but, however / no matter how, whatever / no matter what, as.
Mary is 16 and at school. … being good at most subjects, there are
some that she still has problems with. … hard she studies, she does not
seem to get good marks in Maths, … her father sits with her every week to
try and help her understand it better. She loves art, … she always gets good
grades, … she does not like sports at all … she is quite athletic. Mary
knows that … she’s still at school she has to keep working hard in all the
subjects she’s studying … grades she gets. … , she’s optimistic that she’ll
improve overall.
Ex. 358. Join the relative clauses filling in the correct relative pronoun or
adverb: who, which, that, whose, when, where, why.
Jean Crowder, … is 65, has a fascinating job. She works at a leisure
centre, … she teaches aerobics at classes … attract women of all ages.
Jean, … slim figure and fashionable hairstyle make her look younger, first
attended a keep-fit class 45 years ago … she was a student. Then she heard
about a class … needed an instructor. That’s … she started this particular
career. Jean’s classes, … last one hour, include dance and step exercises.
Jean has some tips for those … wish to stay young. “Eat plenty of fruit, …
is good for you. Try to spend time in places … there is fresh air. Talk to
young people, … ideas can open your eyes”. Jean will only stop teaching
aerobics … she is too old to walk. But, as she says, “I want to delay that
day. That’s the reason … I look after my health”.
Ex. 359. Fill in the relative pronoun and put commas where necessary.
Distinguish between defining and non-defining relative clauses. Decide
whether the relative pronoun can be omitted or not.
1. The food … I like best of all is spaghetti. 2. Fred … mother lives
in Edinburgh has gone to Scotland. 3. The building … was next to the
school fell down. 4. The restaurant … we celebrated my birthday has
closed. 5. Mrs. Jones if the woman … is in charge of this company. 6. The
book … I’m reading is about China. 7. The children … I baby-sit for are
twins. 8. The supermarket … is near our house is open on Sundays. 9. The
actor … I most admire is Robert de Niro. 10. The dog … Roger bought has
just had six puppies. 11. The dog … lives next door has had six puppies.
295
ANSWER KEY
UNIT 1 LANGUAGE LEARNING AND MY FUTURE PROFESSION
1.1. READING
Ex. 1
1B 2E 3D/E 4D/E 5B 6E/D 7E/D 8C 9E 10C 11A/E 12A/E 13A 14D 15B
Ex. 2
1B 2A 3C 4C 5D
1.2. USE OF ENGLISH

Ex. 1 1g 2k 3e 4n 5i 6p 7a 8m 9h 10c 11o 12f 13b 14l 15j 16d
Ex. 2
1 of 2 at 3 for 4 in 5 up with 6 in 7 up 8 into 9 back into 10 by
11 in 12 to 13 out of 14 with 15 on 16 down to 17 at 18 in 19 of
20 with
Ex. 3
1D 2G 3I 4C 5E 6A 7H 8F
Ex. 5
1.finish/have finished 9. going 17. to communicate 25. Hoping
2. taking 10. have/has given 18. could not find 26. to improve
3. will finish 11. to encounter 19. used 27. understand
4. have ever had 12. interact 20. to communicate 28.appearing
5. have learned 13. would like 21. knowing 29. were saying/said
6. had anticipated 14. arrived 22. was 30. bored
7. coming 15. knew 23. to make 31 were experiencing
8. Living 16. needed 24. became 32. was doing
1.5 LISTENING
Ex. 1
1. England/Italy 6. 46/forty-six days
2. (some) history 7. expenses
3. travel agency/agent 8. (customer)(s’) feedback forms
4. application forms 9. seasonal
5. confident
296
Ex. 1
Task one: 1D 2C 3F 4A 5B
Task two: 6G 7C 8E 9A 10H
Ex. 2
1i 2d 3n 4e 5c 6o 7b 8k 9g 10p 11m 12h 13l 14a 15j 16f
Ex. 3 1 at 2 along with 3 for 4 off 5 in 6 without 7 across 8 in 9 at 10 of

11 for 12 at 13 out 14 with 15 down to 16 at 17 over 18 through 19 through
20 upon 21 in
Ex. 4 1B 2E 3 H 4 I 5 A 6 K 7 J 8 C 9 G 10 F
Ex. 5
1 began 11 were 21 never asked 31 had not come
2 had 12 spoke 22 spoke 32 would not have been
3 Not knowing 13 would not understand 23 were 33 had
4 to expect 14 was saying 24 never asked 34 knew
5 excited 15 was surprised 25 interrupted 35 had
6 finding 16 responded 26 had never been 36 to make
7 chose 17 took 27 sharing 37 would be
8 introduced 18 building 28 learning 38 would be
9 sitting 19 progressed 29 was
10 talking 20 found 30 am
UNIT 2 TELEVION AND CINEMA
2.1. READING
Ex.1
1B 2A 3C 4D 5B 6A 7A 8D 9B 10D 11C 12A
Ex.2
1A 2D 3B 4C 5A 6B 7C
2.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1
1h 2a 3k 4p 5l 6f 7b 8c 9d 10g 11e 12j 13i 14o 15n 16m
Ex. 2.
1 up 2 in 3 in 4 away 5 out 6 as 7 at 8 on, upon 9 in 10 to 11 to 12 with
13 off 14 away 15 for 16 on 17 on 18 on 19 at 20 on 21 in
297
Ex. 3
1J 2I 3E 4G 5A 6B 7H
Ex. 4
1 reference 5 acquisition 9 percentage 13 irresistibly
2 population 6 minority 10 unpopular 14 attractions
3 statistical 7 dramatically 11 substantial
4 remarkably 8 digital 12 offspring
Ex. 5
1 – He might be having a party.
2 – He can’t have retired yet.
3 – He can’t be very well off.
4 – He might have spent all his money when he was younger.
5 – He must do a lot of gardening.
6 – He must have read a lot of books about gardening.
7 – He must be working in his garden.
8 – He might be talking to Miss Appleby.
9 – No, it can’t be Miss Appleby.
10 – They might be having an argument.
11 – Harry might owe the other man some money.
12 – They must have gone inside.
13 – Harry must have killed him.
14 – It can’t have been Harry who was shot.
15 – This must be the police arriving.
16 – They must have been making a film.
2.5. LISTENING
Ex.1 1A 2B 3B 4D 5C
Ex. 1.
1D 2B 3C 4C 5A 6C 7B 8D
Ex. 2.
1p 2s 3b 4n 5m 6k 7e 8j 9a 10f 11i 12h 13t 14c 15d 16l 17o 18g
Ex. 3
1 to 2 - 3 under 4 from 5 on 6 on 7 out 8 at 9 back to 10 off 11 with 12 on
13 into 14 for 15 at 16 in 17 onto 18 down 19 for 20 out to 21 on 22 for 23
of
Ex. 4
298
1A 2M 3E 4F 5B 6H 7I 8 D 9 G 10 L 11 J 12 K 13 C 14
N
Ex. 5
1 dramatic 6 numerous 11 indispensable
2 ridiculous 7 facial 12 symbolism
3 portrayal 8 expressive 13 incomprehensible
4 narration 9 accompanied 14 unfamiliar
5 mimetic 10 unknown 15 ennobled
Ex. 6
1 – had better shut (should / ought to / have to / must shut)
2 – could /would you hand (can / will you hand)
3 – don’t /won’t have to go
4 – can already say (is already able to say)
5 – must / have to attend
6 – had to wait
7 – could / might go
8 – would rather go
9 – must not have seen
10 – had better clean (should / ought to/ must / have to clean)
11 – can’t / couldn’t be (must not be)
12 – may /might / could belong (must belong)
13 – cannot go (must not / may not go)
14 – had better answer (should / ought to / have to answer)
15 – might / could / may be
16 – should not have laughed
17 – May / Can / Could I speak
18 – can’t come
19 – May / Can I take
20 – should / ought to take (could take)
21 – can get
22 – had to study
23 – should have come
24 – should have been / was supposed to be
25 – could / might / may be
26 – must have been daydreaming
UNIT 3 ADVERTISING
299
3.1. READING
Ex. 1
1D 2B 3C 4E 5A 6G
Ex. 2
1F 2B 3D 4A 5G 6C
3.2 USE OF ENGLISH

Ex. 1
1i 2j 3l 4h 5k 6p 7n 8o 9m 10d 11a 12b 13c 14f 15e 16g
Ex. 2
1 on 2 at 3 among 4 for 5 up with 6 in with 7 at 8 for 9 for
10 on 11 in 12 as 13 out 14 of 15 even with 16 on 17 up with
18 of 19 downhill
Ex. 3
1 A fortune 5 B campaign 9 A target 13 show
2 C answer 6 D logo 10 C power 14 A guarantee
3 B typical 7 A made 11 A identify 15 B otherwise
4 D actually 8 C question 12 D image 16 A say
Ex. 4
1 invention 5 complaint 9 dramatically
2 customer 6 thinner 10 unaware
3 thickness 7 amazement 11 confusion
4 returned 8 popularity
Ex. 5
1 being allowed 10 meeting/having met 19 being accepted
2 observing 11 to be introduced 20 concentrating
3 climb/climbing 12 to have (been) considered 21 feel
4 realize (that) 13 to sleep 22 to get
5 (to) being surprised 14 thinking 23 feeling
6 planning 15 to force 24 sneezing
7 to have been performed 16 to use 25 to ask
8 to be identified 17 to feel 26 go
9 to pick 18 share
3.5 LISTENING
Ex.1 1D 2B 3D 4C 5A
300
Ex.1
1 (the) (flight) crew 6 chef
2 account manager 7 46/forty-six
3 attention to detail 8 computers/(a)computer (terminal)/computer terminals
4 sport(s) teams 9 capital(s)capital cities
5 legroom
Ex. 2
1g 2c 3j 4p 5a 6i 7k 8n 9l 10o 11b 12e 13f 14d 15m 16h
Ex. 3
1 on 2 in 3 for 4 up with 5 out on 6 up in 7 onto 8 in 9 in 10 at 11 for 12
into 13 of 14 in 15 as 16 among 17 to 18 by 19 against
Ex. 4
1 A source 5 D eventually 9 B Going 13 D demonstrating
2 C stresses 6 B point 10 A response 14 C view
3 A faulty 7 C state 11 C stand 15 A make
4 D suffer 8 A easily 12 B outcome 16 D carry
Ex. 5
. 1. primarily 5. unexpectedly 9. diversification
2. cultural 6. ownership 10. acquisition
3. originated 7. agreement 11. prosperous
4. ailments 8. characterizes
Ex. 6
1 to persuade 10 to give 19 being treated
2 to give 11 to live 20 threatening
3 to cut 12 to be 21 to stop
4 working 13 doing 22 working
5 to retire 14 doing 23 to listen
6 take 15 to get 24 being
7 being dedicated 16 running 25 being
8 to commune 17 having 26 to be understood
9 moving 18 sprayed
UNIT 4 ART
301
4.1. READING
Ex. 1
1C 2D 3C 4/5A 4/5B 16A 7/8B 7/8E 9E 10B 11C 12/13D 12/13F
14C 15D 16/17/18A 16/17/18E 16/17/18F
Ex. 2
1B 2C 3A 4B 5C 6A 7C 8B 9C 10C
4. 2 USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1
1h 2l 3e 4j 5n 6g 7d 8b 9m 10c 11o 12a 13i 14k 15f
Ex. 2
1 into 2 up 3 with 4 in 5 in 6 with 7 to 8 in 9 by 10 out 11 - 12 ahead of
13 between 14 of 15 on 16 from 17 on 18 in 19to 20 of 21 in
Ex. 3
1 original 2 elongation 3 popularity 4 relationship 5 remarkable
6 conventional 7 unquestionable 8 extensive 9 personalities 10 unidentified
Ex. 4
1 for 4 but 7 about/as to/at 10 as 13 about
2 at 5 of 8 to 11 of 14 for
3 for 6 for 9 about 12 about/of
Ex. 5
1 which 4 who 7 which 10 where 13 which/that
2 where 5 whose 8 which/that 11 which 14 who
3 which/that 6 where 9 why 12 why 15 where
4.5 LISTENING
Ex.1
1 (the) Wildlife Art gallery 5 midday/twelve o’clock/12.00
2 television/television programme 6 (the) Farming Museum
3 Tigers in India 7 metal(s)
4 (a)photograph(s)/(a)camera(s) 8 (large/big) wheel
Ex. 1
1 life and movement 6 painter
2 traditional 7 distracted
3 source of inspiration 8 softer
302
4 atmosphere 9 paper
5 stressful
Ex. 2
1d 2i 3n 4c 5o 6l 7j 8f 9m 10h 11a 12b 13p 14k 15g 16e
Ex. 3
1 by 2 from 3 in 4 at 5 in 6 of 7 from 8 to 9 without 10 apart 11 for
12 on 13 in 14 at 15 of 16 near/to 17as 18 on 19 from 20 of 21 in
Ex. 4
1 cultural 2 originated 3 renewed 4 navigation 5 superiority
6 humanism 7 interminable 8 imperfect 9 reference 10 limitless
Ex. 5
1of 5 in 9 has 13 who
2 its 6 about/over 10 about 14 kind/sort
3 than 7 on 11 more 15 that
4 at/by 8 in 12 was 16 to
Ex. 6
1 who 6 whose 10 that 14 who 18 that
2 which 7 who 11 which 15 whom 19 that
3 which 8 where 12 that 16 who 20 which
4 that 9 who 13 where 17 which 21 how
5 that
UNIT 5 PEOPLE AND PERSONELITIES
5.1. READING
Ex. 1
1I 2D 3F 4C 5B 6A 7E 8G
Ex. 2
1E 2G 3A 4F 5B 6D 7H
5.2 USE OF ENGLISH

Ex. 1
1g 2m 3e 4p 5b 6l 7k 8h 9d 10n 11f 12j 13i 14a 15o 16c
Ex. 2
1 in 2 away with 3 through 4 without 5 on 6 for 7 beyond 8 - 9 into 10 with
11 of 12 up with 13 for 14 to 15 with 16 for 17 into 18 in 19 out of
Ex. 3
303
1 invulnerability 5 exploratory
2 undervalue 6 unpleasant
3 avoidance 7 grievances
4 tendency 8 sympathetically
Ex.4
1. He is prone to headaches, depression and hyperactivity.

2. She can’t depend/rely/count on her.
3. Jeremy’s been a member of the cricket club for a year.
4. The suspect could not account for the sand in his boots.
5. I t goes without saying that Mark will get the job.
6. I always take transport costs into consideration when job hunting.
7. Becky didn’t tell you because she took it for granted (that) you already knew.
8. We were taken aback by the news.
9. They did their best to finish by midnight.
10. It was kind of you to send her flowers in hospital.
Ex.5
1 would not have 6 goes 11are
2 have 7 invented/ would be 12 do
3 pay 8 would you do 13wanted
4 will give / keep 9 were / would not listen 14 were stopped/would say
5 begged 10 had not eaten 15 had told/would have put
Ex. 6
1. If he asked for a steak, he must eat meat.
2. If she were reliable, She would never have let you down.
3. If they had banned hunting. The tiger wouldn’t be endangered.
4. If you were sure, why did you agree to it?
5. If my father didn’t love Shirley Bassey, he wouldn’t have bought all her
records.
6. If he weren’t a pessimist, he wouldn’t always look on the black side.
7. If he had a free weekend, he would have visited us.
8. If he hadn’t made a lot of friends, he would be lonely now.
9. If you had brought an umbrella (with you), you wouldn’t be soaked.
10. If he were in trouble, he would have called by now.
11. If he has lost his security pass, he won’t be allowed to enter the building.
12. If they had caught the ferry, they’d be here by now.
5.5 LISTENING
Ex. 1 1T 2 F 3T 4F 5T 6F 7F 8T 9T 10T
304
Ex. 1
1T 2T 3F 4F 5T 6F 7T 8F 9T
Ex. 2
1e 2m 3n 4h 5k 6b 7f 8l 9d 10o 11j 12a 13p 14i 15g 16c
Ex. 3
1 in 2 back 3 into 4 up 5 of 6 in 7 with 8 in 9 in 10 in 11 at 12 by
13 on 14 at 15 with 16 over 17 to 18 in 19 on 20 on
Ex. 4
1. personality 4. nervous 7. activities
2. natural 5. unfriendly 8. truthful
3. completely 6. generally 9. supportive
Ex. 5
1. We are not used to eating so early.
2. It makes no difference to me whether you come in the morning or the afternoon.
3 The majority of the committee voted in favour of the proposal.
4. Don’t take any notice of her complaints
5. ‘That meal was fit for a king!‘ he exclaimed.
6. The war has resulted in increased/an increase in emigration.
7. The board met behind closed doors to discuss changes in company policy.
8. I was on the point of ringing him when he called.
9. Sheila is prone to getting really bad headaches.
10. He suggested that Tom (should) be invited to the party.
11. The new presenter certainly does not lack confidence.
Ex. 6
1. Mathilda wishes she had been auditioned for the National Ballet.
2. I wish I had put the ice cream in the fridge.
3. I wish I had done mathematics in high school.
4. They wish Theresa’s dog wouldn’t bark all night.
5. I wish I hadn’t lost my reference from one of my previous jobs.
6. I wish I had some leave left.
7. I wish I had had my clothes dry-cleaned.
8. Louise wishes she had not left her lecture notes at home.
9. Tim wishes he had had enough time to go to the bank during his lunch hour.

305
6.1 READING
Ex. 1
1I 2D 3C 4B 5G 6H 7A F is the extra sentence
Ex. 2
1B 2E 3A 4B/D 5B/D 6D 7A 8C/E 9C/E 10E 11D 12A 13E 14B 15C
6.2 USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1
1e 2c 3i 4o 5l 6d 7m 8p 9g 10k 11n 12a 13b 14h 15j 16f
Ex. 2
1 from 2 for 3 in 4 under 5 into 6 up 7 to 8 in 9 for 10 with 11 up
12 by 13 for 14 along with 15 for 16 in 17 by 18 in 19 on 20 as of
Ex. 3
1 J 2 I 3 E 4 D 5F 6 C 7 H
Ex. 4
1. No sooner had he been promoted than he started the pursuit of material
affluence.
2. So much has the number of cars increased that it is a key factor of global
warming.
3. Had we been told the truth earlier, I would have fined the polluters.
4. Not only had all strict safety regulations been taken but a flexible policy had
been adopted.
5. On no account will the government alter its policy on human disposal.
6. Seldom have I lived at the basic subsistence level.
7. No sooner had she dropped in to tea than the telephone rang.
8. Never before have I heard about harmful wavelengths of ultraviolet radiation.
9. Little did the police know that the man was a criminal.
10. Under no circumstances should they destroy marine habitats.
Ex. 5
1a 4 the 7 an 10 the 13 - 16 the
2- 5 The 8 a 11 - 14 the 17 the
3 the 6 a 9 the 12 the 15 The
6.5 LISTENING
1T 2 F 3T 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F
306
Ex. 1
1 deeply moved 6 biologist
2 endangered 7 tracking collars
3 20.000/twenty thousand 8 grey rocks
4 park warden 9 telescope
5 paler
Ex. 2
1f 2a 3j 4m 5p 6b 7h 8k 9g 10e 11i 12o 13c 14n 15l 16d
Ex. 3
1 with 2 under 3 with 4 like 5 out 6 to 7 away to 8 by 9 on 10 on
11 with 12 in 13 on 14 about 15 with 16 as 17 in 18 since 19 off 20 up to
Ex. 4.
1 C 2 G 3 F 4 A 5 J 6E 7 I 8 B 9 D
Ex. 5
1- 3- 5 the 7 the 9a 11 the
2 the 4a 6 the 8 an 10 the
Ex. 6
1 only 5 of 9 more 13 before
2 least 6 matter 10 one 14 those
3 else 7 of 11 For 15 until
4 time 8 but/though 12 over 16 comes
307
TAPESCRIPTS
UNIT 1
PART 1
You are going to hear a woman who works as a tour guide talking about
her work. For questions 1-9, complete the sentences. You will hear the
recording twice.
Hello. My name’s Natalie and I’m going to tell you a few things about my
job. I’m an Australian tour guide and I spend most of my time taking
groups of Australian tourists around Europe; England and Italy mostly, but
sometimes France and Germany too.
It surprises people when I tell them how little experience I had when I first
started in this job. Well, you know, obviously, languages are useful, but
while knowing some history does help, it’s not crucial. And that’s because
you are trained out on the road for seven weeks before you begin. Well, I’d
done a two-week European trip as a tourist the year before starting, so that
was a great help.
Yes, there’s a lot of competition for these jobs in Australia. I’d worked in a
travel agency there, and also done a summer in the Maldives working for a
holiday company, but I still had to go through quite a complicated
recruitment procedure before getting this job. The application form alone
was quite demanding, they asked all sorts of questions, and I wasn’t at all
sure that I’d put down the right things. Anyway, I did get through to the
interview stage. You have a formal interview and then you have to stand
up in front of a group of people and give a talk; they want to see how you
are likely to perform in the actual situation, because it’s no good being shy
or too timid. Anyway, both these bits went well, because I’m quite
confident really, on the whole.
And the company’s right to be choosy, because to be a good travel guide,

you’ve got to have genuine interest not only in the travel, but also in the
people. The tours range from ten to forty-six days in length and you are
with that coach load of fifty people all the time. You are never really off
duty because you’re responsible for making sure all the arrangements go
smoothly; keeping everyone happy.
308
And it’s the love of traveling rather than the pay that attracts people to the
job. While you’re away, obviously all your expenses are paid and, in my
company, you get a weekly payment of up to $150, depending on your
experience. Some other companies have contracts which offer bonuses of
$50 per trip, if the feedback forms the customers fill in are positive, but
that’s not always fair, because you do get difficult customers and you can’t
always please everybody.
But there’s a lot of job satisfaction if things go well and this more than
makes up for the demanding schedule. Because the work is seasonal, you
don’t have much of a break between trips. And often the hardest thing is
finishing a trip, saying goodbye to people you’ve just getting to know, and
then having to turn round and welcome another group. Now, if you’re
anything you’d like to ask…
PART 2
You will hear five short extracts in which various people are talking about
holidays where they studied as a group. You will hear the recording twice.
While you listen, you must complete both tasks.
Task one: for questions 10-14, match the extracts as you hear them with
what was studied on each course, listed A-H.
Task two: for questions 15-19, match the extracts as you hear them with
the comment each person makes about their course, listed A-H.
Speaker One
I have an old-fashioned belief in life-long self improvement. I also have

that need for tutorial guidance which is so typical of musicians. So, the
idea of a holiday where you lock yourself up in the country with a group of
like-minded people to learn a new skill it really appealed to me. There
were about a dozen of us, all ages and backgrounds seemed to be
represented, which was brilliant, and we sat learning our lines all day.
Then after dinner, what we’d prepared would be performed and discussed.
It was hilarious and afterwards we all kept in touch and swapped photos,
so I’ve got lots of memories to look back on.
309
Speaker Two
It’s amazing how quickly people tune into a situation and organise
themselves. Although we’d all opted for a self-catering package, the group
soon set up a rotation for providing the evening meal, which left us free
most days to concentrate on the task in hand. I’m not sure that what we
learned couldn’t have been gleaned from one of those paperbacks entitled
‘How to pen a best-seller‘, but we had a lot more fun doing it. The group
psychology was fascinating to watch as it unfolded. As characters began to
emerge, it became clear that the least prepossessing members of the group
were going to turn out to be the most gifted.
Speaker Three
One unexpected aspect of the course was that we all became experts on the
physical characteristics of top-eared goats, so often did they feature in our
representations of the various landscapes. There were also many outings,
including a lovely meal in a local farmhouse, it was all very well
organized. But it was the clear air and the sparkling perspectives that really
encouraged me to try something new at home. Some people were rather
shy, but that suited me, and everyone tended to get on with their own work.
The tutor would give a demonstration in the morning, then wander round
from easel to easel, giving advice about brushwork., etc. She was
scrupulously fair with her time.
Speaker Four
As a single person, I’d had one or two lovely holidays abroad on my own,
so I loved the friendly meals with everyone eating together. Most evenings
ended in a sing-song, it was lovely. You can do all sorts of other activities,
like throwing pots or trying your hand at wildlife photography. But as I
hadn’t so much as looked at a book since my schooldays, I was keen to get
back some of my old fluency. The tutors are great, they realize you’re on
holiday and so no-one’s going to rap your knuckles if you don’t turn up for
a class. Anyway, I could make just as much progress chatting to the locals,
and they certainly had plenty of time for me.
310
Speaker Five
I was quite nervous at first, though there was no need to be. The group
included a lot of people who, like me, were just looking for inspiration.
One couple had won the holiday in a competition, some had been before,
but they didn’t seem to be much the wiser for it. My only criticism is that it
could have been more hands-on. We spent a lot of time watching
demonstrations when we could have been chopping or peeling ourselves.
Because we had the afternoons free, we didn’t get on top of one another,
and as our efforts literally provided a topic of conversation at mealtimes, it
was all very relaxed, and it was difficult not to get on with each other.
UNIT 2
PART 1
You will hear an interview with Harry Newland, a young film actor. For
questions 1-5, choose the answer (A, B, C or D) which fits best according
to what you hear.
Presenter: My next guest was the darling of Hollywood by the age of ten,
playing child parts in many top films. By the time he was fifteen, he’d
been nominated for an Oscar. Now nineteen, and at college, Harry
Newman is taking time out from his career to study. I asked him when he’d
first felt the urge to perform.
Harry: Although technically it wasn’t acting, I remember when I was a
kid of two or three, having a collection of plastic masks and I’d run around
the backyard pretending to be different characters, you know, everything
from Donald Duck to my own superheroes. And, of course, my father, he’s
an actor, and I was raised in Hollywood after all. But I think it was more
than that with me. There’s no getting round the fact that I was born with
the bug, had the right instincts from the start, and that’s what my Dad
spotted and developed. One of the most important things he taught me was
that acting is believing. That’s at the heart of every performance I give.
Presenter: So when did it come, that first performance?
Harry: I guess I was about five. Like a lot of young actors, it began with
television advertising, but I quickly moved up to playing, sort of, cute-as-
a-button grandsons in various run-of-the-mill TV dramas, you know the
sort of thing? It’s easy to run them down, but I try to avoid that because,
you know, that’s how you cut your teeth in the business, learn the ropes.
311
You can’t just go in as a child movie star and hope to steal the show; that
just doesn’t happen without the right background. In the end, I got a role in
a film that made it quite big at the box office, not thanks to me I should
add, but I had a bit part and that’s what got me noticed.
Presenter: Since when you’ve worked with some pretty big names. How
did they take to you? Didn’t they worry about being upstaged by a cute
kid?
Harry: Well, if that worried them, they wouldn’t be accepting these roles
in the first place. No, I never had any trouble being accepted. Basically, if
they respect your work and providing you are mature enough to cope with
the situation, then actors treat one another like equals and that’s mostly
what I’ve experienced. I never felt patronized in any way and I wouldn’t
have accepted colleagues coming on as sort of authority figures, and I
guess they recognized that. It was like having friends on the set most of
time.
Presenter: But you worked on some pretty big projects.
Harry: It never strikes me to be intimidated by making big movies. I try to
do my best with every performance. I concentrate on the job and not the
size of the production. It’s up to the director to worry about the big picture,
and mostly they’re great. It must be tough keeping so many things in your
head at once, knowing every single detail. I rely on them to indicate what
the character should be feeling, to suggest different ways I could play it.
Not all actors like that, but I listened and did my best to follow and tried
not to worry about what other people on the set were up to.
Presenter: And the result of all this was a nomination for Best Supporting
Actor. I mean, how did you cope with all that? It must have gone to your
head a bit.
Harry: That was a really big surprise. I never thought it would happen to
me, let alone so early. But, getting back to your question, I was lucky in
that my parents really had their heads screwed on. All the attention you get
in that situation is certainly flattering, but if you don’t keep your feet
firmly on the ground, you can lose yourself to it really easily. Seeing that,
my parents hit a pretty subtle balance, actually. I had their support,
practical and emotional, but I wasn’t pushed beyond what I was capable
of, and they managed to keep me pretty much on track as far as friends,
schoolwork and all that was concerned.
Presenter: As for the future”
312
Harry: I’m keeping an open mind until I’ve finished college, but I haven’t
given up acting together. Although I guess your movies should get better
as you get older, shouldn’t they? So I might find that a bit of a challenge!
PART 2
You will hear an interview with a woman who works as a casting director
in the film industry. For questions 6-13, choose the best answers, A, B, C
or D.
Interviewer: My guest today is Barbara Darby. Her name has appeared on

the credits of many well-known films. Although her role in making those
films successful was crucial, you’ve probably never heard of her because
she works as a casting director. Barbara, welcome.
Barbara: Hello
Interviewer: So it’s quite a big responsibility, is it, Barbara, finding the
actors for a film?
Barbara: The job of a casting director is a highly-skilled actually, because
without the right cast, there’s no movie. Although experience counts of
course, intuition is the essential quality for the job, and that’s not
something you can learn. You signal things to the audience through the
kind of actors you cast and those signals have got to reflect the central
message of the script and the director’s vision.
Interviewer: So how do you go about it?
Barbara: It’s an odd process, because it’s not just about casting a certain
numbers of actors in roles. The dynamic is incredibly important: if you
have a comedian, you have to cast a particular type of person against them.
And it’s also about energy: if one person has quite a low-energy style, then
you need someone opposite them to gee them up a bit. When I meet an
actor, I’m trying to find a quality in that person that reflects into the part in
an interesting way, although actors don’t really like people saying that, as
they believe they can act every part. But that’s how I do it.
Interviewer: And do you do the whole range of films, do you get to
choose?
Barbara: I do say no to quite a lot of scripts. I only do films that I feel
have something important to say, or that see life in an interesting way, or
are being made by people that I know I like. After I’ve read the script, I
start to have ideas and to talk to people.
Interviewer: And the director leaves it all to you?
313
Barbara: Well, I do all the preparatory work. The first stage is that agents
send in photos, video tapes and resumes of actors that I’ve requested or
that they think are good. I watch loads of tapes. If I like an actor, I’ll meet
them, or go to see them in a play. Then they go to meet the director who
makes the final selection from my short list. On average they see about
eight or nine actors per part, but I see many more. When I take on a film,
I’ll cast the whole thing, even if a person doesn’t speak in a role.
Interviewer: So how did you get into this in the first place?
Barbara: I didn’t so much choose my career as fall into it actually. I was
hanging around London, working as a stagehand at the National Theatre
and I met someone there who thought I’d be good at it. He was an agent
and he got me a job as an assistant. I’ve always been drawn to the bright
lights, and this was a step up from what I’d been doing.
Interviewer: And you were ambitious?
Barbara: Yes. I don’t believe anyone who does well, isn’t. I was initially
attracted by the glamour of it all, but I’m definitely not driven by money,
because I still don’t have any. What absolutely drives me now in all parts
of my life is that I don’t want to be old and have regrets. We are all able to
do something successful, and I think it’s a shame if you don’t achieve that.
Interviewer: But you took a break from your career at one time, didn’t
you?
Barbara: That’s right. I was working on a film which was set in the rain
forest of South America. I lived the place, but I had such a horrible time on
the film that as soon as I came back, I put my whole office into nine bin
bags and threw them out of the window. I said: ‘If that’s what the film
industry is about, I’m giving up.‘ I stayed away for nine months.
Interviewer: But what went wrong, why did you give up?
Barbara: The worst aspect of the job is that the casting stage is a stressful
time in the making of a film. It takes a lot longer than people think – a big
film can take six months. An awful lot of other people’s frustrations can
land on you, and I’ve never really learnt how not to take it personally. I
guess it goes with commitment.
Interviewer: But in the end they tempted you back, didn’t they?
Barbara: The only reason I came back was because one of my favourite
directors handed me a lovely script. It wasn’t even that I wanted it, I’d got
plenty of theatre work which I was enjoying. But I just couldn’t bear the
idea of anyone else doing that script because it was so brilliant. It’s the
best thing about my job, working with really fantastic people. I’m lucky, I
work with interesting individuals and the scripts are good. But after my
314
work is done, I move on – I don’t get involved in the rest of the making of
the film. At the end, at the after-shoot party, everyone looks at me as if to
say, ‘Who are you?‘ But I don’t mind because the people who matter know
what part I’ve played and anyway, by that time I’m already getting my
teeth into the next one … and I love that feeling.
Interviewer: Barbara, thanks for talking to us today.
Barbara: Thank you.
UNIT 3
PART 1
You will hear an interview with a woman called Tansy Burton, who runs a
company which makes beauty products. For questions 1-5, choose the
answer (A, B, C or D) which fits best according to what you hear.
Presenter: My guest today, Tansy Burton, has an enviable nose. She and
her husband have built up a multi-million pound fragrance and skin care
business that now threatens to overtake some of the big names in the
industry. Tansy, welcome. So is it a nose for fragrances or a nose for
business that has got you where you are?
Tansy: Hi. Well, I love creating things, sure, but I also love the idea of
making someone want to buy them. I guess I’m a merchant at heart,
although that was hardly my background. I mean, my mother was a
beautician, and I was just followed in her footsteps. I used to watch her as
a child, and she used to make her own face masks and things out of
sandalwood and rosewater, you know, the standard stuff, and I was
fascinated.
Presenter: So is that how it all began?
Tansy: Well, I started out as a beautician working from home, and when
people came round for a facial or whatever, I’d give them a bottle of my
home-made bath oil. One day, a customer asked for one hundred bottles to
put by each place-setting at a dinner party as gifts. When eighty-six of
those people came back for more, I thought, ‘Um … There could be a
future in this‘. And the production company followed on from that.
Presenter: So you knew how to set up a business like that?
Tansy: Well, I’m blessed with the gift of the gap, you know, I can talk
people into things and that was my approach. I’ve never written a business
plan in my life, and I’ve no intention of starting, but I’m good at coming
up with the ideas and convincing people of the potential in them. Once I’d
315
found the right backers, I would tend to move on to the promotional side
and leave the bookkeeping to my husband, Colin. He trained as a builder,
but he’s really found his niche on the business side, so I’m happy to leave
him to it.
Presenter: So what makes your products so appealing? Are you able to
analyze it?
Tansy: Well, it’s partly seeing the way the market’s going and responding
to that. If your idea of a fragrance is so wondrous liquid that smells divine,
comes in a beautiful crystal glass bottle and costs a bomb, then you’re
seriously out of date. Of course, there are still some perfumes whose sole
function is just to smell nice – and some of these sell on their reassuring
retro imagery – but on the whole, they are being pushed to the back of the
shelves by much more active fragrances.
Presenter: Active?
Tansy: Yes, fragrances these days are usually required to do a whole lot
more than just smell nice; they need, so to speak, to sing and dance for
their supper. They have to energize and tranquillize, deal with depression
and jealousy; they need to uplift and to inspire. Fragrance is permeating
more aspects of our lives than ever before and the full capacity of
fragrance to enhance and improve our lives has yet to be fully exploited.
Presenter: So that’s the way the business is going?
Tansy: If you like. It’s all about pushing boundaries. People are already
talking about air conditioning units that will fragrance rooms. People these
days want versatile fragrances, which in practice means that instead of
sticking to one grand perfume which they just use on their person, many
people now have a wardrobe of perfumes for different purposes.
Presenter: So, the market’s up for grabs, is it?
Tansy: Well, the more of a relationship you can build between customer
and product, the more multi-sensorial you can make it, the more it converts
the customer. Meanwhile, every fashion house that relies on fragrances to
bolster its profits is putting more and more energy into providing ways to
add extra layers of fragrance to our lives.
Presenter: So you won’t be resting on your laurels?
Tansy: Indeed not.
Presenter: Well, Tansy, thank you for joining us today.
Tansy: Thank you.
316
PART 2
You will hear part of announcement about an airline company. For
questions
(6-14), complete the sentences.
When faced with the need to make travel arrangement for large groups of
people, or particularly important clients, many companies find it
convenient to avoid the hustle and bustle of scheduled services by
chartering their own plane. When you charter an aircraft, you get the use of
not only the plane, but the flight crew and all the in-flight services that go
with it. Plivilair is a company that specializes in providing this kind of
service, with the choice of first class or business class service, on board.
There’s no doubt, an executive aircraft can make all the difference in
getting an event off to a flying start.
Long before your guests board, the account manager from Privilair will
have discussed and agreed with you your choice of plane, destination,
menu, including any special dietary needs, as well as your selection of
magazines, newspapers and much more. The company regards attention to
detail as its principal selling point and Privilair cabin crews take pride in
the standards of service they offer. They are attentive but discreet and will
always ensure that guests enjoy every moment of their travel experience.
Amongst satisfied clients, Privilair can boast government ministers,
celebrities and sports teams from all over the world.
And when you enter a Privilair aircraft, you see and feel luxury and
comfort all around you. Every first-class seat has an adjustable back
recline, extending leg supports and foot rests and there is generous
legroom in both first and business class seats. The overall effect of space,
comfort and quality is enhanced by pleasing colour schemes and subtle
lighting. The in-flight catering service will satisfy even the most
demanding traveller; the airline can provide anything from a simple
afternoon tea to gourmet four-course meals. On one occasion, a world
famous chef was invited to come and cook in the aircraft galley.
The company has identified the need for flexibility within its fleet of 27
aircraft and the largest planes can be configured to hold up to 130 people.
The latest additions to the fleet include a 46-seat first-class aircraft and a
70-seat business class aircraft. Each of these has two tables at the front
317
replacing the second row, with row 1 facing down the cabin. This forward
area has computer terminals installed at the tables, and can be curtained off
to create a separate cabin where full individual first-class table service can
be provided for extra special guests.
Flexibility is the key attitude that Privilair offers. The company has
operated into all major European capitals and regularly goes further afield.
They are willing to consider all ideas, and the professionalism and
enthusiasm of the staff assures clients of a job well done. If you would like
to find out more about Privilair, you can contact their commercial
department on …
UNIT 4
PART 1
You will hear a radio announcement about two events happening later
today. For questions 1-8, complete the notes.
Now, some information about two events happening today in the historic
town of Langham, a lovely place, famous for antique shops and excellent
restaurants. With its castle and beautiful 200 year-old theatre, it’s well
worth a visit if you’ve never been.
Firstly, there’s a new exhibition opening today at the Wildlife Gallery,

which is quite close to the theatre in Castle Street. Now, if you like
paintings that depict animals and birds, then this gallery is the place for
you. The exhibition opening today is of work by the painter Wendy
Wilson. You may know her work because a few weeks ago there was a
fascinating programme about her on television. On the programme, you
saw how Wendy goes all over the world, for example, to remote parts of
Africa and Central Asia, painting pictures of animals and birds.
In fact, today’s exhibition is tied in with the book that the gallery’s
launching entitled ‘Tigers in India‘ and some of Wendy’s big cat pictures,
painted when she visited the Indian sub-continent last year, are pictured in
the book. And the fascinating thing about Wendy is that, unlike many
artists, she doesn’t paint from photographs of animals. Rather than
carrying a camera, she literally stands a couple of metres away from bears
and lions, etc. and paints the most stunning pieces of work from life.
318
Now, Wendy’s going to be there in Langham today to talk to you, if you’ve
got any questions about her work. There’ll be plenty of her pictures for
sale too. The exhibition is open from midday till five, and Wendy’s going
to be there from two o’clock onwards.
The other thing going on today, if you decide to go to Langham, opens at

11 a.m., so get there early and you might be able to combine the two. This
is in the Farming Museum which is located in Market Street. Today, in the
museum, as well as all the exhibits related to the history of agriculture,
you’ll be able to see the artist Edward Colne at work. Edward, who makes
objects out of metal, has been invited to create a piece of sculpture for the
museum, and visitors will be able to watch him at work. For this project,
his raw material is all kinds of old metal agricultural tools which people
have brought in. Yesterday, he was working on the main structure of the
piece, which is made out of a large wheel, and today he’s doing the
decorative work.
As well as the big wheel which will be static, the sculpture will feature all
kinds of smaller moving parts and they’re going to have it on permanent
show in the building when it’s finished.
Now, …
PART 2
You will hear an interview with a young artist who is talking about her life
and work. For questions 9-17, complete the sentences.
Interviewer: Now many of you will have seen and admired Lynda
Buckland’s striking drawings of the River Thames in London which were
featured in a recent edition of a leading monthly magazine. Lynda joins me
today to talk about her work. Lynda, hello.
Lynda: Hi.
Interviewer: Why the river, where did it all start?
Lynda: I feel energized by drawing a living, beautiful thing. When I’m
drawing down by the river, I much prefer it when there’s something going
on, a ship’s docking or the cranes are moving. It’s easier to feel involved,
part of the action. My paintings are all about life and movement, as far as
themes are concerned, I’m not interested in landscapes as such.
319
Interviewer: And they have a wide appeal, don’t they, because we can all
place them, we know where we are with them.
Lynda: Well, maybe that’s because I’m actually quite resistant to the idea
of moving into abstract art, because that’s what everyone, kind of, expects
you to do. The resistance stems, I think, from where I did my training. I
was at a college where there was a very strong emphasis on figure drawing
and traditional drawing skills generally. It’d be hard to shake that off, even
if I wanted to.
Interviewer: So do you actually do the drawings down by the waterfront?
Lynda: Not much of the work is done in situation, actually, just the
preliminary sketches. Those then act as my source of inspiration. I then
take them and play about with them until I get an idea of how a finished
drawing may look. The drawings often take the form of composite images
actually.
Interviewer: So your workspace is pretty important to you?
Lynda: It’s funny you should mention that because when I did those
particular drawings, I was working in a rented studio in South London. It
was a great space, with a nice atmosphere. It was big enough to have six or
seven pieces of work on the go at the same time. But it was beginning to
get me down because although it wasn’t that far away in terms of miles, it
was a stressful journey to get over there. I often found that ideas that were
fresh in my mind as I left the house in the morning were draining away by
the time I’d fought my way through the traffic.
Interviewer: So where do you work now?
Lynda: Well, as I say, I’d had it in mind for some time to find a workplace
closer to home., and then one day earlier this year, I noticed an easel in an
upstairs window in one of the houses on the other side of the road where I
live. I knew the girl across the road was an artist, but for some reason I
thought she was a designer working in a potter’s studio or something. I’d
never met her to talk to. So it was a pleasant surprise to realize not only
did I have a painter living nearby, but she also did her work there, too.
Interviewer: A real coincidence.
Lynda: Amazing. Seeing the easel standing there was one of those eureka
moments, you know, I phoned her later on and said that I had a show
coming up, and could I rent a room on a short-term basis. As it turned out,
she was happy for me to take over a room as a temporary studio.
Interviewer: So it’s really worked out well for you.
Lynda: I’ve only been in this studio for a couple of months, but it’s
already proved to be a revelation. There’s the obvious benefit of just
320
having to cross the road to get here, and at first I was concerned about
whether I’d be able to completely detach myself mentally from the normal
day-to-day routine, which is vital. I know I would be terribly distracted if I
actually tried to work at home.
Interviewer: So tell us about the exhibition.
Lynda: The work I’ll be showing at the exhibition in September is all new
work, a lot of it produced in my present studio. Working there has had a
real impact on my work. I think it’s got a lot to do with the fact that I can
come in and work in short bursts – one of the effects of that has been that
the work has been developing more quickly and I think the images are
sharper as a result. But it’s not only that, the colours have changed,
become softer, though I couldn’t tell you why. Overall I think the effect is
a much stronger image.
Interviewer: And what does the future hold?
Lynda: Although I have started to experiment with different surfaces and
mediums – I tried doing some designs on ceramics recently which was fun
– I’m actually more comfortable working on paper. I feel I know exactly
what I can do with it, what it can take. Canvas frankly freaks me out. I
know that a gallery can charge more for an oil painting on canvas just
because it is an oil painting on canvas, but I can’t really understand why.
As far as subject matter goes, I’m also thinking about moving away from
the Thames; going back to doing people, which is where I started really.
Interviewer: Lynda, good luck with the exhibition, and thank you for
joining us.
UNIT 5
PART 1
Listen to Part A of the call and decide if these statements are True or
False.
THE RADIO PHONE-IN

Part A
Presenter: Our next caller is Rachel who is from South London. Go ahead
Rachel.
Rachel: Hello, Doctor Howard.
Dr. Howard: Hello, Rachel. How can I help you?
Rachel: Well, you see it’s about my son, Mark. He’s almost 18 and he
hasn’t been able to find a job since he left school.
321
Dr. Howard: When did he leave?
Rachel: It’ll be a year in July.
Dr. Howard: And what seems to be the problem?
Rachel: It’s like this. Mark used to be such a nice, outgoing sort of boy but
over the last few months he’s changed quite a bit.
Dr. Howard: So, can you describe what has happened?
Rachel: Well, after he was turned down for several jobs he got depressed
and withdrawn which was bad enough, but now it’s got much worse – he’s
become really moody and aggressive.
Dr. Howard: Moody and aggressive?
Rachel: Yes, and he’s started mixing with some boys I don’t like very
much. But to tell you the truth, I think he’s starting taking drugs.
Dr. Howard: What makes you think that?
Rachel: Well, as I said, there are his change of moods. One minute he’s
depressed and the next minute he becomes very excited – you know, he
can’t sit still. Another thing is stuff has disappeared from the house. Some
of my jewellery has gone and some money and so has Mark’s cassette
player.
Dr. Howard: Does he know you know about the cassette player?
Rachel: Yes, he does. He told me he’d let a friend borrow it. I was really
surprised because he’s always been so keen on music. When I asked him
about it a couple of days later, he just told me to mind my own business.
Another thing is that he just doesn’t look after himself any more or care
what he looks like. And I’ve noticed strange noise smells in the house too.
Dr. Howard: May I ask you, Rachel, are you still married?
Rachel: Yes I am but my husband spends a lot of time away. He’s in the
merchant navy, you see.
Dr. Howard: From what you’ve said the change in your son has been
quite dramatic. What I suggest….
PART 2
Listen to the text and write if the following statements are True or False
according to the text.
(P= Presenter, N= Nostradamus)
P One of the names most commonly associated in the collective

consciousness with augury and foreknowledge is that of Nostradamus,
although the facts about this man and his prophecies are less widely
known. Born in Provence in 1503, the Frenchman Michel Nostradamus
322
studied medicine at Montpellier University and began a lifetime of
seemingly dedicated caring for the sick. He particularly cared for the
victims of the Black Death, a virulent plague that had reached epidemic
proportions. After the death of his first wife and her two children,
ironically victims of the disease, he wandered widely, at one period having
to evade the infamous Inquisition because of some injudicious remarks he
had made concerning a statue. Eventually he remarried, this time to a rich
widow, and settled down in Salon.
It was there that he began to write almanacs and his book of prophecies.
Each prophecy is written in the form of a four line verse or ‘quatrain‘ and
they are given in groups of 100 called ‘centuries, although they are not in
chronological order. He intended to write 100 quatrains, but the seventh
century is not complete, so there are 942 in all.
The first two quatrains are not prophecies but describe the divining
technique. Nostradamus used a method recorded by Imblichus, a fourth
century Neoplatonist, details of which had been republished in a book in
1547. A bowl of water was placed on a brass tripod, and the seer stared
into the water until images of the future appeared. The prophecies became
very popular all over Europe and Nostradamus was given a royal audience
with Catherine Medici on three occasions. After his death in 1556, his
fame continued to spread. There are a number of his quatrains which
appear to refer to historical episodes with an uncanny accuracy. The
following quatrain is believed to be about the rise of Hitler and the Second
World War, and the prophecy even predicts the name almost exactly:
N Beasts ferocious with hunger will swim across rivers. The greater part
of the region will be against Hitler. The great one will cause it to be
dragged in an iron cage when the German child will observe nothing.
P In another quatrain he is believed to have predicted the rise of the

emperor Napoleon, who was born in Corsica:
N An Emperor will be born near Italy. One who will cost his Empire at
high price. They will say that from the sort of people who surround him.
He is to be found less prince than butcher.
323
P Nostradamus is also credited with foreseeing the fighter aircraft and the
atomic bomb; one of the quatrains has also been interpreted as predicting a
nuclear war, with its origins in the Middle East, at around the end of the
millennium.
Sceptics would argue that the quatrains are vague and are open to many
different interpretations. They would suggest, too, that almost any
historical event could be made to fit one of the 940 randomly ordered
prophecies, and also that there were bound to be some apparently
spectacular predictions with such a large base. But whatever the
millennium brings, Nostradamus and his apocalyptic visions are certain to
remain a subject of fascinating and controversy for the foreseeable future.
UNIT 6
PART 1
You are now going to hear an interview between Peter Whitehead, the
presenter of a current affairs programme, and Frances Kelly, the leader of
the Campaign for Clean Air. While you listen, decide if the following
statements are True or False (1-8).
Peter Whitehead: The Campaign for Clean Air has just issued a report on
air pollution and we have in the studio Frances Kelly of the CCA who’s
going to tell us something about the dangers we face from air pollutants.
Frances Kelly: Hello.
Peter Whitehead: Let’s start with sulphur dioxide which causes acid rain.
I thought the government was doing something about that.
Frances Kelly: Well, they are but slowly. Sulphur dioxide emissions from
power stations are still going on and the resulting acid rain is still killing
fishes and plant life in lakes and destroying the forests. And we in Britain
are among the worst culprits when it comes to this kind of pollution.
Peter Whitehead: What are the other pollutants?
Frances Kelly: Carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide. Carbon monoxide,
which is mostly produced by motor vehicles can, even in small doses,
cause sickness and a slowing of the reflexes and there is strong evidence to
show that it has an effect on the growth of children.
Peter Whitehead: And carbon dioxide?
Frances Kelly: Well, in a way this is the least dangerous of the pollutants
we’ve mentioned but in the longer term it may be the most damaging.
324
Peter Whitehead: Why?
Frances Kelly: There is clear evidence that the build-up of carbon dioxide
in the atmosphere is the main cause of the Greenhouse Effect. This will
have dreadful results like the melting of the polar ice caps and the
subsequent flooding of low-lying areas.
Peter Whitehead: So what you’re saying is that the increased amounts of
carbon dioxide in the atmosphere is making it warmer.
Frances Kelly: Yes, that’s right and the results will be catastrophic.
Peter Whitehead: And what should we be doing about this?
Frances Kelly: Frankly, the government has got to impose far stricter
controls on these emissions and bring in tough legislation to deal with the
problem.
Peter Whitehead: Frances Kelly, thank you very much.
Frances Kelly: Thank you.
Peter Whitehead: After the news we hope to be talking to the Minister for
Environment, Patrick Hilliard…
PART 2
You will hear a radio report about a wildlife holiday in the Yellowstone
National Park in the USA. For questions 9-17, complete the sentences with
a word or short phrase.
Announcer: And our next report is from Michela Jenson, who’s been wolf
watching in the Yellowstone National Park in the USA.
Michela: It all started some years ago on a trip to Canada. In a place called
Dawson City, I met a man who had just had his first sighting of a wild
wolf. His eyes positively lit up every time he spoke of it and I could see
that he had been deeply moved by the experience. Ever since then, I had
been looking forward to the day when I might share the feeling.
Wolves once roamed freely across North America, but after 200 years of
being regarded as a pest and persecuted mercilessly, few remain, and they
now feature on the official list of endangered species. I was told that the
best chance of seeing one was to head for the Yellowstone National Park in
the US state of Wyoming. The US National Parks Service reintroduced
wolves into the Yellowstone some years ago in an attempt to recreate the
balanced ecosystem lost to hunting over the centuries. Yellowstone has
more than three million visitors a year, 140 000 of whom visit, as I did, in
the winter, the best time for wolf spotting. And an estimated 20 000 of
325
those are thought to have been lucky enough to get a sighting since the
wolf reintroduction programme began.
There are no direct flights from London to Yellowstone, so I flew to Salt

Lake City via Phoenix, Arizona, and then on into Wyoming by road. It was
a seven-day organizes wolf-watching trip offered by the company known
as Wildlife Windows, and so my visit began with an evening lecture given
by a park warden. He explained that the wolves are now one of the park’s
biggest winter attractions, for the animals are easier to see in the snow. For
people traveling alone through the park there was, he explained, little
chance of seeing a wolf although many people mistake the much
commoner coyote for one. The coyote is smaller, with longer ears and a
paler coat. Wolves, whitch vary in colour from grey to jet black, have
longer legs.
Fortunately, my own personal guide was already booked as part of the

package tour I had bought, and for the next six days he led me around the
park. His name was Ken and he’d studied to be a biologist before
retraining as a professional guide.
There is only one road open through the park in the winter, and it was
fairly packed with wolf watches, environmentalists and photographers, and
so Ken’s advice was invaluable. He explained that about 50 per cent of the
wolves have been fitted with devices known as tracking collars, which
send out a signal, so it was possible to know whereabouts to start our
search. Nonetheless, the animals tended to keep away from the road unless
they wanted to cross it, and large numbers of cars parked along one stretch
of road was an indication that there’s been a sighting, but the wolves
wouldn’t be hanging around.
Ken told me that wolf pack tend to operate over fairly large territories, but
he was fairly sure he knew where we’d spot some. He told me not to
bother scouring the forested verges and nearby hillsides, but to keep by
binoculars trained on the distant slopes, where I should keep my eyes
peeled for grey rocks sticking up out of the snow. When I saw one move,
we’d stop and take a closer look.
When it came, my one wolf sighting was over very quickly. My heart leapt
into my mouth when I spotted one, just a few hundred meters away on the
side of a hill. A young male, he had a flecked grey coat and surprisingly
326
piercing yellow eyes, clearly visible through the excellent telescope Kent
trust into my hand. I might have been in the relative safety of the car, but I
could still feel myself struggling to breathe with the excitement. My friend
in Canada had been right; it was a unique experience, well worth waiting
for.
Announcer: Michela Jenson there, reporting to the USA.
327
ANSWER SHEET
UNIT 1 LANGUAGE LEARNING AND FUTURE PROFESSION
1.1. READING
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4C 5D
1.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ex. 3
1 2 3I 4 5 6 7 8
Ex. 5
1 9 17 25
2 10 18 26
3 11 19 27
4 12 20 28
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31
8 16 24 32
1.5. LISTENING
Ex.1
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5
328
Ex. 1
Task one: 1 2 3 4 5
Task two: 6 7 8 9 10
Ex. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ex. 4 1B 2E 3 H 4 I 5 A 6 K 7 J 8 C 9 G 10 F
Ex. 5
1 11 21 31
2 12 22 32
3 13 23 33
4 14 24 34
5 15 25 35
6 16 26 36
7 17 27 37
8 18 28 38
9 19 29
10 20 30
UNIT 2 TELEVISION AND CINEMA
2.1. READING
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2.2. USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21
329
Ex. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ex. 4
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11
4 8 12
Ex. 5
1–
2–
3–
4–
5–
6–
7–
8–
9–
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
14 –
15 –
16 –
2.5. LISTENING
Ex.1 1 2 3 4 5
Ex. 1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ex. 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Ex. 3
1 2- 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23
Ex. 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
330
Ex. 5
1 6 11
2 7 12
3 8 13
4 9 14
5 10 15
Ex. 6
1 ……………………………………………………..
2 ……………………………………………………..
3 ……………………………………………………..
4 …………………………………………………….
5 ……………………………………………………..
6 ……………………………………………………..
7 …………………………………………………….
8 …………………………………………………….
9 …………………………………………………….
10 …………………………………………………...
11 …………………………………………………...
12 …………………………………………………...
13 ……………………………………………………
14 ………………………………………………….
15 ……………………………………………………
16 ……………………………………………………
17 ……………………………………………………
18 ……………………………………………………
19 ……………………………………………………
20 ……………………………………………………
21 ……………………………………………………
22 ……………………………………………………
23 ……………………………………………………
24 ……………………………………………………
25 ……………………………………………………
26…………………………………………………….
UNIT 3 ADVERTISING
3.1 READING
Ex.1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Ex. 2
331
1 2 3 4 5 6
3.2 USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ex. 3
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
4 8 12 16
Ex. 4
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8
Ex. 5
1 10 19
2 11 20
3 12 21
4 13 22
5 14 23
6 15 24
7 16 25
8 17 26
9 18
3.5 LISTENING
Ex. 6
1 2 3 4 5
Ex. 1
1 6
2 7
3 8
332
4 9
5
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Ex. 4
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
4 8 12 16
Ex. 5
. 1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8
Ex. 6
1 10 19
2 11 20
3 12 21
4 13 22
5 14 23
6 15 24
7 16 25
8 17 26
9 18
UNIT 4 ART
4.1. READING
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4/5 4/5 16 7/8 7/8 9 10 11 12/13 12/13 14 15
16/17/18 16/17/18 16/17/18
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4.2 USE OF ENGLISH

333
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Ex. 3
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
Ex. 4
1 4 7 10 13
2 5 8 11 14
3 6 9 12
Ex. 5
1 4 7 10 13
2 5 8 11 14
3 6 9 12 15
4.5 LISTENING
Ex. 1
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
Ex. 1
1 6
2 5
3 7
4 8
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
334
Ex. 4
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
Ex. 5
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 14
3 7 11 15
4 8 12 16
Ex. 6
1 6 10 14 18
2 7 11 15 19
3 8 12 16 20
4 9 13 17 21
5
UNIT 5 PEOPLE AND PERSONALITIES
5.1 READING
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5.2 USE OF ENGLISH
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
Ex. 3
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
Ex. 4
1
335
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Ex. 5
1 6 11
2 7 12
3 8 13
4 9 14
5 10 15
Ex. 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5.5 LISTENING
Ex. 1
1T 2 F 3T 4F 5T 6F 7F 8T 9T 10T
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 3
336
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ex. 4
1 4 7
2 5 8
3 6 9
Ex. 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Ex. 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6.1 READING
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6.2 USE OF ENGLISH
337
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ex. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ex. 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
10
Ex. 5
1 4 7 10 13 16
2 5 8 11 14 17
3 6 9 12 15
6.5 LISTENING
Ex. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ex. 1
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5
Ex. 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ex. 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
338
Ex. 4.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Ex. 5
1 3 5 7 9 11
2 4 6 8 10
Ex. 6
1 5 9 13
2 6 10 12
3 7 11 15
4 8 12 16
339
REFERENCE MATERIALS
1. A Guide to Fluent English. – K.: Вид. Центр КНЛУ, 2004.

2. Gude K., Duckworth M. Proficiency Masterclass. – Oxford
University Press, 1994.
3. Newbrook J., Wilson J. New FC Gold. – Longman, 2004.
4. Bell J., Gower R. FC Expert. – Longman, 2003.
5. Kenny N., Sunderland P. CAE Practice Tests. – Longman, 2001.
6. Jakeman V., Kenny N. CPE Practice Tests. Longman, 2002.
7. Maurer J. Focus on Grammar. – Longman, 2006.
8. Naunton J. Think First Certificate. – Longman, 1996.
9. Evans V., Dooley J. Upstream Proficiency C2. – Express Publishing,
2002.
10. Evans V. CPE Use of English. –Express Publishing, 2002.
340

MAKE THE GRADE Kafedra

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAKE THE GRADE Kafedra

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

V.G.NIKONOVA, L.S.

MAKE THE GRADE

Self-study Assignments for Developing the Skills

МІНІСТЕРСТВО ОСВІТИ І НАУКИ УКРАЇНИ

Завдання для самостійної роботи

Ніконова В.Г. , Кузьмінська Л.С.

Make the Grade: (self-study assignments

Досягни успіху (завдання для самостійної роботи

Рецензенти: Буніятова І.Р. – доктор філол. наук, професор

UNIT 1. LANGUAGE LEARNING AND MY FUTURE PROFESSION

UNIT 2. TELEVISION AND CINEMA

UNIT 5. PEOPLE AND PERSONALITIES

UNIT 7. GRAMMAR REVISION

7.2. INDICATIVE MOOD: TENSE AND VOICE FORMS OF THE VERB

7.3. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD: SYNTHETIC AND ANALYTICAL FORMS

7.4. THE NON-FINITE FORMS OF THE VERB (THE VERBALS)

UNIT 1. LANGUAGE LEARNING AND FUTURE PROFESSION………………...……...…………329

Навчальний посібник містить завдання для самостійної роботи студентів з

Which young person:

is carrying on a family tradition? 0-C

found one part of the work hard at the beginning? 1-

says that he/she prefers to be his/her own boss? 2-

is careful with money? 3- 4-

got financial help from an organization? 5-

says he/she does the work mostly for the money? 6- 7-

feels that further education would be a waste of time? 8-

ignored advice that he/she was given? 9-

says he/she finds the work itself the main motivation? 10 -

has turned an initial disappointment to his/her advantage? 11 - 12

says he/she enjoys the creative side of the business most? 13 -

has received a prize in recognition of what he/she has achieved? 15 -

HOW TO GET RICH YOUNG

A Justin Etzin (24)

B Lee Allen (20)

C Charlotte Crossley (18)

D Thomas Jones (16)

E Louise Bagshawe (25)

True to form, he had developed a strategy before most of us had even

Handling e-mail is an art. Firstly, you junk anything with an exclamation

1. According to the writer, why did the company he mentions decide to

A So that employees contact academics more easily

2. The ‘strategy’ referred to in line 12 is a way of

A Ensuring that important matters are dealt with

4. In the sixth paragraph, which of the following pieces of advice is given?

A Forget about e-mails which do not intend to acknowledge.

5. According to the writer, what advantage does e-mail correspondence

A It is more convenient to send.

1.2. USE OF ENGLISH

Ex. 1. Match the following words with appropriate definitions.

1. lingua franca a. hard boring work

ONE WORLD, ONE LANGUAGE

A to the growth of a world language

Next week, when I (finish) (1)------- (take) (2) --------- my final

Ex. 1. Render the following text into English.

АНГЛІЙСЬКІ КАНІКУЛИ НА МАЛЬТІ

Мальта – невеликий острів у Середземному морі, знаходиться

Ex. 2. Render the following text into English.

Зацікавленість наших громадян в отриманні різних мовних

Крім того, існує і ”Міжнародна шкала рівнів”, яка в

2. Write an opinion essay based on the following statement in about 200-

1.5. LISTENING AND SPEAKING

Ex. 2. Choose one of the suggested topics and comment on it or discuss it

A a foreign language ------------- 1